MAI COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL FIELD INFORMATION BULLETIN SERVICE GROUP(S): MINI MFG: BASIC FOUR NACS TYPE(S): N015 MFG. MODEL(S): MAI OFFICE CATEGORY: SOFTWARE DESC: PACKAGE *** TABLE OF CONTENTS AS OF 10/07/93 *** FIB 00001.Release 3.1A - various problems.............................04/22/87 FIB 00002.How to suppress blank address lines in the letter generator.04/22/87 FIB 00003.MAI OFFICE Release 3.1A initial information.................05/04/87 FIB 00004.Function key load fix for release 3.1A......................07/07/87 FIB 00005.MAI OFFICE Release 3.2A Software Announcement [ WPSS 154 ]..03/28/88 FIB 00006.Notes and Cautions on MAI Office 3.2A [ WPS 457R ].........08/31/89 FIB 00007.Print Problems with Letter Quality Printers on 3.1A [ WPSF 06/23/88 FIB 00008.MPx Printer Notes & Cautions for OFFICE 3.2A [ WPSF 457-A3,10/11/90 FIB 00009.SPx Printer Notes & Cautions for OFFICE 3.2A [ WPSF 457-4 ]08/31/89 FIB 00010.BUSINESS MATH - Errs 27, 46; Enable > 10 Users [ WPSF 457-508/31/89 FIB 00011.OFFICE 3.2B Software Announcement [ WPSS 163 ].............09/05/89 FIB 00012.Notes & Cautions on OFFICE 3.2B [ WPSF 563/-1/-2/-4 ]......03/22/90 FIB 00013.P. S. Forms Management 3.3A Software Announcement [ WPSS 1610/27/89 FIB 00014.Installation of OFFICE on an Alternate Disk on SPx Sys [ WP01/17/90 FIB 00015.OFFICE 3.2A for 1800 System - Software Announcement [ WPSS 102/05/90 FIB 00016.OFFICE 3.2B for GPx Systems - Software Announcement [ WPSS 02/05/90 FIB 00017.Problems with Presentation Services 3.3A [ WPSF 594 ]......02/22/90 FIB 00018.MAI OFFICE GPx Helpful Hints & Workarounds [ WPSF 593 ]....03/05/90 FIB 00019.Conversions to OFFICE 3.2B [ WPSF 621 & A1 & A2R ].........11/30/90 FIB 00020.OFFICE 3.2B*37 Software Announcement for MPx & ASx Sys [ WPS08/27/90 FIB 00021.OFFICE 3.2B*37 for GPx Systems Software Announcement [ WPSS08/28/90 FIB 00022.Presentation Services 3.3B Software Announcement [ WPSS 17709/28/90 FIB 00023.Notes and Cautions for OFFICE 3.2B on SPx & MPx [ WPSF 641 10/11/90 FIB 00024.MAI OFFICE 3.2B*37 for SPx Software Announcement [ WPSS 183 11/02/90 FIB 00025.3.2B Error in VIEW Program on GPx40/70 [ WPSF 642 ]........11/28/90 FIB 00026.OFFICE 3.2A/B Document Recovery Tools [ WPSF 632 ].........11/30/90 FIB 00027.Rows & Columns to MATH Conversion Tips [ WPSF 663 ].........11/30/90 FIB 00028.GPx40 Tape Error & Document De-Archive Fails to Work........11/30/90 FIB 00029.Error 42 in Program ROAD72 in MATH 3.1A [ WPSF 662 ]........11/30/90 FIB 00030.Corrections to Software Announcement 174 [ WPSF 639 ]......12/04/90 FIB 00031.Corrections to Software Announcement 171 [ WPSF 640 ]......12/04/90 FIB 00032.Program to Change Date in WORD to System's Date [ WPSF 661 ]12/06/90 FIB 00033.Line-edit Modifications for DT-4315 Terminals...............08/09/93 FIB 00034.Accessing Business DATA under OpenBASIC.....................02/24/92 FIB 00035.Installation Instructions BUSINESS DATA on OpenBASIC [WPSF 710/14/92 FIB 00036.Err 26 creating spreadsheets in OpenBASIC version of Bus Mat09/28/93 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------Table Of Contents Pg01 of 01 FIB 00001 04/22/87 *** Release 3.1A - various problems *** This Bulletin documents some additional problems regarding MAI OFFICE 3.1A for the MAI 2000 and MPx systems. MAI Business MATH - MAI 2000 1) When installing Business MATH, the install procedure does not prompt you for the public key. Therefore, the public key will have to be installed after MATH has been installed. The following describes how to enter the public key for MATH: ADMIN>install key /etc/level/MOC The current public key will display and a new public key will be prompted for. Enter the public key that accompanies the software tapes. If the public key is not entered or is entered incorrectly, when attempting to use Business MATH, a security violation message will appear. 2) When using Business MATH, if the user enters command mode and then re-enters MAI OFFICE and attempts to use MATH, a message stating that the product is not installed will be displayed. This is because MATH has its own directory and BASIC's knowledge of this directory is lost when console mode is entered. To fix this, the command file 'startmo' or emstartmo' if Business MAIL is also installed, should be modified as follows: 'startmo': /bin/basic -nr 'PREFIX '/oms /rc3la"; RUN"MS"' 'emstartmo': cd /oms ad /rc3la basic lib=/lib/bftf.lib -q pgm=MS -nr The underlined information is the information that should be added. Use the editor VED to modify these procedures. These procedures should be used when entering MAI OFFICE from command mode or through terminal log on. MAI Business WORD - MPx: 1) The menu MS.MAIN has security of "C" assigned to it. The security must be changed to no security. This is done by changing the security field to all blanks through MENU MAINTENANCE in the menu system. 2) There exists a menu called WP.DEMO. This menu can be accessed but none of the options exist. This menu needs to be removed from the system through MENU MAINTENANCE in the menu system, so that no execution errors occur. 3) There exists a menu called MS.DEMO. This menu can be accessed but none of the options exist. This menu needs to be removed from the SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB001 Pg001 system through MENU MAINTENANCE in the menu system, so that no execution errors occur. MAI Business MAIL - MPx 1) The MAIL ID has the default menu of EM.MAIN. This menu no longer exists. The MAIL ID should be changed to use the MP.MAIN menu. The option is changed through OPERATOR ID CREATE/MAINTAIN. ORIGINATOR: R. CASE SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB001 Pg002 FIB 00002 04/22/87 *** How to suppress blank address lines in the letter generator *** QUESTION : How do you push blank address lines to the bottom of an address in OMS and MAI OFFICE~ Letter Generator ? For Example: _____________________ ______________________ I want to | | | | change | JOHN CUSTOMER | To this | JOHN CUSTOMER | ----------> | 123 MAIN ST. | ---------> | 123 MAIN ST. | | | | TUSTIN, CA 92627 | | TUSTIN, CA 92627 | | | | | | | ANSWER : Follow these steps: 1. Create an Executive Query Report through MAI ORIGIN~ Decision Support with additional expressions to suppress blank address lines. 2. Create a letter through Document Create and Maintain using the blank address line expressions. 3. Create the LG interface through Letter Generation Maintenance. 4. Print your documents through Letter Generation. The following pages show you how to create blank line expressions in an Executive Query Report and how to use these expressions in a document. For instructions on steps 3 & 4 (how to use Letter Generator) please refer to the MAI Business DATA~ User Guide M7557. * PLEASE PLACE A COPY OF THIS FIELD BULLETIN INTO THE ORIGIN HELPFUL HINTS MANUAL. 1. Executive Query Report Here is an example an Executive Query with the additional expressions you will need: Please refer to the MAI ORIGIN~ Decision Support Manual M7511 for instructions on how to create an Executive Query. CURRENT REPORT ITEMS : Item No. Name Type Length SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB002 Pg001 1 L 25 2 L 25 3
L 30 4
L 30 5 L 20 6 L 2 7 L 9 Note - Expressions used with Letter Generator must have a fixed length. If an expression has a variable length, it must be padded with trailing spaces to make it a fixed length. ADD THESE EXPRESSIONS: __________________________________________________________________ | | | 8 EXP 35 | | | | Expression Example: | | | | (1,POS(" "=+" "))+", "++" "+ | | | | Purpose: This combines City, State and Zip into 1 address | | item and suppresses the extra spaces between City | | and State. | |__________________________________________________________________| | | | 9 EXP 35 | | | | Expression Example: | | | | +O0$(1,35-LEN()) | | | | Purpose: This pads with spaces so that | | it is always a constant length. | |__________________________________________________________________| __________________________________________________________________ | | | 10 EXP 35 | | | | Expression Example : | | | |
+O0$(1,5) | | | | Purpose: This pads
with spaces so that it | | has the same maximum length as . | |__________________________________________________________________| | | | 11 EXP 70 | | | | Expression Example: | | | | +$01$++$01$ | | | SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB002 Pg002 | Purpose: This is a workspace used for blank supression. | |__________________________________________________________________| | | | 12 EXP 35 | | | | Expression Example: | | | | (POS(" "<),POS($01$= | | (POS(" "<)))-1) | | | | Purpose: This creates the print line for address 2. If | | address 2 is blank, will equal | | . | |__________________________________________________________________| | | | 13 EXP 35 | | | | * You MUST condition this expression. | | | | | | Expression Example: | | | | | | | | CONDITION: | | | | IF POS(" "<
)>0 | | | | Purpose: This will print as a blank line if
| | is blank. | |__________________________________________________________________| 2. Document Create and Maintain Create a document using the blank line expressions. Example: [!FIRST NAME] [!LAST NAME] [!ADDRESS 1] [!PRINT ADDR2] [!PRINT CSZ] Dear [!FIRST NAME]: This is an example of suppressing blank address lines in a Letter Generator document. If
is blank, [!PRINT ADDR2] will print the City, State and Zip and [!PRINT CSZ] line will print a blank line. If you have additional questions on suppressing blank address lines, please contact Field Product Support at (714)730-3131. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB002 Pg003 ORIGINATOR: T. TIANGCO SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB002 Pg004 FIB 00003 05/04/87 *** MAI OFFICE Release 3.1A initial information *** 1.0 INTRODUCTION MAI Basic Four, Inc. is pleased to announce the availability of MAI OFFICE 3.1A. MAI OFFICE is a complete integrated Office Automation package for the 2000 and MPx series computers. MAI OFFICE is composed of the following modules: o MAI Business WORD~ - Word Processor o MAI Business MATH~ - Spreadsheet o MAI Business GRAPH~ - Graphics o MAI Business EXEC~ - Desktop Functions o MAI Business DATA~ - Letter Generation o MAI Business MAIL~ - Remote Electronic Mail o Menu System/Printer System This announcement documents each module and how to install and use it. NOTE 1: Letter Generation capabilities have been included with Business WORD. If the user already has ORIGIN DSS 2.0 or above, then no other modules are required for letter generation. If the user doesn't have ORIGIN DSS 2.0 or above, then the MAI Business DATA module must be ordered. NOTE 2: ORIGIN 2.0 or above is required for Letter Generation capability. ORIGIN 2.0 or above CANNOT be used with any level of OMS. ****************************************************************** * * * Please read the installation instructions (section 10) * * before attempting to install MAI OFFICE or any of its modules. * * * * MAI OFFICE will only work on operating system 8.5C and above * * for the MPx series and 7.2A and above on the 2000 series. * * * ****************************************************************** ORIGINATOR: MBF SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB003 Pg001 FIB 00004 07/07/87 *** Function key load fix for release 3.1A *** The DT-4314 does not load the function keys correctly in OMS and MAI OFFICE. The OMS levels affected are 8.3.1 and 7.3.0. The MAI OFFICE level affected is 3.1A. This fix will NOT correct the problem on any OMS level prior to and including 8.2.3 which means that the DT-4314 will not be supported on those release levels. We recommend that these users be upgraded to 3.1 or 3.2 when available. Program MSUT50 MPx 0520 ...SIZ=4... 0530 IF Z0$="4313" OR Z0$="4314" THEN LET CHANL$(1,4)=Z0$; GOTO 5000 0540 IF Z0$>"" THEN IF Z0$(1,1)="F" THEN LET CHANL$(1,1)="F"; GOTO 5000 0545 IF Z0$>"" THEN IF Z0$(1,1)="4" THEN LET CHANL$(1,1)="4"; GOTO 5000 5020 IF CHANL$(1,4)="4313" OR CHANL$(1,4)="4314" THEN GOTO 5110 ELSE IF Z0$="4" OR CHANL$(1,1)="4" THEN GOTO 5080 5110 IF CHANL$(1,4)="4313" OR CHANL$(1,4)="4314" THEN GOTO 5130 ELSE Z0$=... 5120 N=45; WAIT .5; GOSUB 7800; GOTO 5140 5130 LET Z0$="011670/02166C/031674/04167A/051663/0617/071673/081678/091667/ 101661/111665/121677/131671/141A/201666/211672/221631/231662/281664/291679/ 30174F/411E/421F/431D/441C/490B/500A/51161D/52161C/ "; LET N=29; WAIT .5; GOSUB 7800 2000/3000 0420 ...SIZ=4... 0430 IF LEN(Z0$)>=4 THEN IF Z0$(1,4)="4313" OR Z0$(1,4)="4314" THEN LET Z0$= Z0$(1,4); GOTO 5000 ELSE LET Z0$=Z0$(1,1) ELSE IF Z0$>"" THEN LET Z0$= Z0$(1,1) 5020 IF Z0$="4313" OR Z0$="4314" THEN GOTO 5110 ELSE IF Z0$(1,1)="4" THEN GOTO 5080 5110 IF Z0$="4313" OR Z0$=4314" THEN GOTO 5130 ELSE LET Z0$=... 5120 LET N=45; GOSUB 7800; GOTO 5140 5130 LET Z0$="011670/02166C/031674/04167A/051663/0617/071673/081678/091667/ 101661/111665/121677/131671/141A/201666/211672/221631/231662/281664/291679/ 30174F/411E/421F/431D/441C/490B/500A/51161D/52161C/ "; LET N=29; WAIT 1; GOSUB 7800 ORIGINATOR: E. Titus SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB004 Pg001 FIB 00005 03/28/88 *** MAI OFFICE Release 3.2A Software Announcement [ WPSS 154 ] *** 1. INTRODUCTION MAI Basic Four, Inc. is pleased to announce the availability of MAI OFFICE 3.2A. MAI OFFICE is a complete integrated Office Automation package for the 2000/3000 and MPx series computers. MAI OFFICE is composed of the following modules: o MAI Business WORD - Word Processor o MAI Business MATH - Spreadsheet o MAI Business GRAPH - Graphics o MAI Business EXEC - Desktop Functions o MAI Business MAIL - Electronic Mail o MAI Business DATA - Data Management o Presentation Services/Printer System This release contains many enhancements and problem fixes. Please see each individual section for the list of enhancements. NOTE: ORIGIN 2.0 or above is required for Letter Generation capability on MAI OFFICE 3.2A. ORIGIN 2.0 or above CANNOT be used with any level of OMS. *********************************************************** * Please read the installation instructions (section 10) * * before attempting to install MAI OFFICE or any of its * * modules. * * * * MAI OFFICE will only work on operating systems 8.6A * * and above for the MPx series and 7.4A or above on the * * 2000/3000 series. * *********************************************************** *********************************************************** * MAI OFFICE 3.2A requires certain peripheral hardware * * revision levels. * * Please see section 9. * *********************************************************** Copyright 1988 by MAI Basic Four, Inc. All rights reserved. C O N T E N T S 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cover 2 NEW MENU SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 MAI BUSINESS WORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.1 IMPROVED ATTRIBUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.1.1 Underlining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.1.2 Bold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3.1.3 Superscript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3.1.4 Subscript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg001 3.1.5 Attribute query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.1.6 Clear attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.2 PAGINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.2.1 Maintenance of the number of lines per page . . . . 6 3.2.1.1 Operator ID Create/Maintain . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.2.1.2 Document Create and Maintain . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3.2.2 Repagination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.3 SINGLE KEY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3.4 FULL-ATTRIBUTE LQP PRINTERS AS SLAVES. . . . . . . . . 13 3.5 CUT AND PASTE BETWEEN DOCUMENTS (VIEW) . . . . . . . . 14 3.5.1 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.5.1.1 From the primary document: . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 3.5.1.2 From the secondary document: . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3.5.2 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3.6 INTERFACE WITH PERSONAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.6.1 Mail List Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.6.1.1 Defining a data file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 3.6.1.2 Maintaining a Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.6.2 MAIL MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.6.2.1 Creating a Standard Letter . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.6.2.2 Merging Data into a Standard Letter . . . . . . . 23 3.7 IMPROVED IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 3.8 IMPROVED REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.8.1 Text File Rebuild Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4 MAI BUSINESS MATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 4.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MATH . 34 5 MAI BUSINESS GRAPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 5.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS GRAPH . 35 5.1.1 MPx Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 5.1.2 Device Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 5.1.2.1 EDT with graphics interface board: . . . . . . . . 37 5.1.2.2 HP 7475A Pen Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 5.1.2.3 Dual Mode Printer (DMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 5.1.2.4 150/300 LPM Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 5.1.3 2000/3000 Installation/Configuration . . . . . . . . 37 5.2 MPX/2000/3000 DIFFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 5.3 CURSOR CONTROL IN GRAPHMAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 5.4 HELPFUL HINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 6 MAI BUSINESS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 6.1 QUEUED LETTER GENERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 6.2 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA. . 42 C O N T E N T S 7 MAI BUSINESS MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 7.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MAIL . 43 7.1.1 MPx Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 7.1.2 Configuring the 2000/3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 7.1.3 Starting MAI OFFICE and Configuring for MAIL. . . . 43 8 RELATED DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 9 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . 48 10 INSTALLATION FOR BOSS/VS AND BOSS/IX SYSTEMS . . . . . 49 10.1 BOSS/VS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 10.1.1 New installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 10.1.2 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 10.2 BOSS/IX INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 10.2.1 New Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 10.2.2 Upgrade installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 10.3 CONVERSION TO MAI OFFICE 3.2A . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 10.3.1 Conversion from previous levels of OFFICE/OMS . . . 59 10.3.2 Conversion of DataWord To Business WORD . . . . . . 61 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg002 10.4 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . 66 10.4.1 SET ONE OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 10.4.2 SET TWO OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 A DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 F I G U R E S Figure 3-1 Operator ID Create/Maintain . . . . . . . . . 6 Figure 3-2 Setting the default number of lines per page . 7 Figure 3-3 Security option from Document Create/Maintain 8 Figure 3-4 Pagination display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Figure 3-5 Mail List Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . 17 Figure 3-6 Record Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Figure 3-7 Mail Example Letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Figure 3-8 QUICK File Merge Display . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Figure 5-1 Supported Devices With Their Types . . . . . . 36 Figure 5-2 Sample '.GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS' file . . . . . . . 36 Figure 5-3 Sample '/etc/plotters'file . . . . . . . . . . 39 Figure 10-1 Tape Options-New Installation . . . . . . . . 50 Figure 10-2 Tape Options - Step #1 Upgrade. . . . . . . . 52 Figure 10-3 Tape Options - Step #2 Upgrade. . . . . . . . 53 Figure 10-4 Tape Options - Step #3 Upgrade. . . . . . . . 53 Figure 10-5 MAI Office Module names . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Figure 10-6 MAI Office Module names . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Figure 10-7 Conversion Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 2. NEW MENU SYSTEM MAI OFFICE 3.2A uses a new menu system with the aid of another system, called Presentation Services. Presentation Services provides menu functions. Also the function keys can be programmed through Presentation Services and are used in MAI OFFICE to directly access certain functions of MAI OFFICE from any menu in the system. For information regarding menu maintenance, see the Presentation Services Users Guide M7561. The main menu for MAI OFFICE is: |-----------MAIN MENU------------| | | | Business WORD | | | | Business MATH | | | | Business GRAPH | | | | Business EXEC | | | | Business MAIL | | | | Business DATA | | | | Menu and System Services | | | | | There are two basic ways to select an option from a menu. You can use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option or you can type in the designated selection characters. You can substitute the following key sequences in place of the arrow keys: CTRL+K for up arrow, CTRL+J or space bar for down arrow, CTRL+L for SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg003 right arrow, and CTRL+N or BACKSPACE key for the left arrow. By using the up and down arrow keys, you can move the cursor to the option you want to select. The current option appears highlighted on your screen. Press RETURN to complete your selection. The selections wrap from top to bottom and vice-versa. You can also use selection characters to select options from the menu. As you look at the menu on your screen, notice that one or two characters from each option is highlighted. These are the selection characters and indicate what you need to type in order to move the cursor directly to the desired option. Then press RETURN to make your selection. There will always be at least one selection character. A second selection character is used only when the set of first selection characters is not unique. 2. (Cont.) The function keys provide quick access to frequently used options. If you want to use one of the function keys, press the key that matches the label at the bottom of the screen. Below is the function key usage within MAI OFFICE. The notation of F1 through F10 indicates function keys 1 through 10 with the description of that function key's use within MAI OFFICE. The function keys described below will be available from all menus described on the following pages and will appear on the bottom two lines of the display: F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP STATUS IN-TRAY MSGSLIP CALC CALENDR PHONE#S LOGOFF DATE CONSOLE F1 (HELP) will give a brief description of the menu system. F2 (STATUS) will show the user a list of users currently logged on to MAI OFFICE. This is the same function as entering "S" on the previous OMS menu system. F3 (IN-TRAY) will take the user directly to the In-Tray option without having to move through several menu levels. F4 (MSGSLIP) will take the user directly to the Out-Tray option to send a message. F5 (CALC) will take the user directly to the Calculator Function. F6 (CALENDR) will take the user directly to a personal calendar. F7 (PHONE#S) will take the user to a personal telephone directory. F8 (LOGOFF) will log the user off the MAI OFFICE system. This is the same as "L" in the previous OMS menu system. F9 (DATE) will allow the user to change the system date and time if allowed this privilege. This is the same as "D" in the previous OMS menu system. However, if the date is changed from the WP.MAIN MENU, it is only changed for wordprocessing and not on the rest of the system. F10 (CONSOLE) will take the user out of the MAI OFFICE system into console mode. This is the same as "C" in the previous OMS menu system. The user will be allowed CONSOLE only if they are configured or authorized for this privilege. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg004 3. MAI BUSINESS WORD MAI BUSINESS WORD is a full-featured word processing system. With this release comes the following enhancements: o Easy to use attributing such as underline, bold, subscript, and superscript. o Automatic page formation o Cut and paste between documents (VIEW) o New personal data database o Queued Letter Generation (BOSS/VS version only) o Improved repair facilities o Faster import facilities 3.1 IMPROVED ATTRIBUTING Attributes to be supported in this release of MAI OFFICE are: underlining, bold, superscript, and subscript. Each attribute may be applied to the character after the character has been entered. Attributes are set on a character by character basis and are toggled on or off by the editing key for that attribute. If an attribute is already set then it is toggled off otherwise the attribute is set for that character. Characters may have multiple attributes with the following exception; superscript and subscript cannot both be applied to the same character. Because the editor normally is in overtype mode, any character that is overtyped with a new character will retain the attribute(s) that existed for the character at that cursor position, if there were any. If these attributes are no longer valid then they will have to be toggled off by moving to the character and entering the editing sequence for that attribute as described below. 3.1.1 Underlining Move to the character that you wish to underline. Press the CONTROL-u keys. The character will appear on the screen as an underlined character. That is, the character will appear on the screen with the underline character beneath it. The underscore will have the same display attributes as the character indicating that there may be other attributes set for that character as described below. 3.1.2 Bold Move to the character that you wish to set to the bold attribute and enter CONTROL-b. If the character is non blank then the character will appear in reverse video. If the current cursor position is a space then no attribute will be applied. If any other attributes are currently set then the screen display will reflect those attributes as well. For example: if a character is already underlined and we now set the character to SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg005 bold, it will be represented on the screen in reverse video with an underscore character beneath it. You may toggle bold off by moving to the character with the bold attribute and entering CONTROL-b. 3.1.3 Superscript Move to the character that you want superscripted. Enter CONTROL-a. If the character is a space then no attribute will be applied, otherwise the character will be shown on the screen in background mode (half intensity). The character may also have other attributes in which case the display may show the character in reverse video or underlined as well as in background. The attribute may be toggled off by entering the same keystrokes again. If the character already has the subscript attribute set and you attempt to set superscript you will be so informed with the following error message: "SUBSCRIPTED--TOGGLE OFF FIRST (CR)". Enter a 'CR' (RETURN) and then toggle subscript off. You may then set the superscript attribute. Because superscript and subscript are visually represented the same on the screen you may determine which attribute is set by using the attribute query sequence described in section 3.1.5. 3.1.4 Subscript Place the cursor at the character you wish to subscript. Enter CONTROL-d. If the character is a space then no attribute will be set. If the attribute has been set it will be displayed in background mode (half intensity). If the character already has the superscript attribute set you will be informed on the status line with the following error message: "SUPERSCRIPTED--TOGGLE OFF FIRST (CR)" 3.1.4 (Cont.) Enter a 'CR' (RETURN) and then toggle superscript off. You may then set the subscript attribute. Because superscript and subscript are visually represented the same on the screen you may determine which attribute is set by using the attribute query sequence described in the next section. 3.1.5 Attribute query If the terminal used does not support on screen underlining or reverse video, then the attributes will be visually represented on the screen in background mode (half intensity). Note also that superscript and subscript are both shown in background on all terminals. The attribute query keystroke is provided so that the user may determine the attributes for a character. Move the cursor to the character you wish to query and enter CONTROL-l. A message will be dis- played in the status area listing those attributes SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg006 currently set for the character. For example: underline, bold and superscript are set. The following prompt will be displayed: "Attr: Underline Bold Superscript (CR)" A 'CR' (RETURN) will take you back to edit mode and place you at the character you were on before. 3.1.6 Clear attributes If the user wishes to remove all of the entered attributes on a line they may simply enter CONTROL-c. This will clear all attributes on all characters on the line of text on which the cursor is positioned. 3.2 PAGINATION New pagination features have been added. Pagination is defined as the maximum number of user defined lines per document page. When creating a document, a new page will automatically appear as soon as the maximum number of lines have been used thus eliminating the need for the user to create a new page. The page length is determined by the user. The range can be from 1 to 9999 lines. At print time the user will always have the option to repaginate the document to a new page length via the form option. However, subsequent pages will still reflect the default parameter, that is, the maximum number of lines per page. Only by changing this option can the user change the number of lines per page. The implementation of this will be through an option parameter in the "Security parameters" of a document. The user may maintain this option from two areas. The first being from the Operator ID Create/Maintain selection and the second from the Document Create and Maintain selection. See figure 3-1. 3.2 (Cont.) __________________________________________________________________________ | | | Figure 3-1 Operator ID Create/Maintain | | | | OPERATOR FUNCTIONS | | OPERATOR ID CREATE/MAINTAIN | | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | | ID: INITIALS: | | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | | DEFAULT OWNER: | | ACCESS SECURITY: DEFAULT RESTRICTION: | | MODIFY SECURITY: DEFAULT RESTRICTION: | | INFORMATION STORAGE/RETRIEVAL? # OF LINES PER PAGE: | | | | -------------------------------------------------------------------- | |__________________________________________________________________________| NOTE: The Document Create/Maintain screen resembles this format Existing customers who migrate from previous levels of OMS to Business WORD will have to go thru a conversion that will define a page length (see section 10.3.1). So as to place no set rules on page length and to emulate their existing OMS the user will be supplied a default value of 9999 lines per page so that all current documents can be read. If the default value is lowered a SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg007 repagination will automatically take place on the document. This is necessary because text that falls outside the defined page length will not be accessible. 3.2.1 Maintenance of the number of lines per page The user of Business WORD will be required to enter and, if needed, modify the number of lines a page will contain. In order to do this the user can enter the option from two places: 1) Operator ID Create/Maintain and 2) Document Create and Maintain. 3.2.1.1 Operator ID Create/Maintain The following are step by step instructions a user must follow to maintain the "# of lines per page" prompt. 1. From the System Services menu select OPERATOR ID CREATE/MAINTAIN. 2. Enter ID. Refer to MAIBF manual M0063 for creating a new ID. 3. Select the Word Processing ID Parameters option. 4. Next select Document Security Parameters (see figure 3-2 for screen layout) 3.2.1.1 (Cont.) 5. Carriage return to "# of lines per page" prompt. 6. Enter the number of lines per page. The range is 1-9999. The default value will be 9999. 7. Next depress (CR) if the data is okay or N if not and begin again. _________________________________________________________________________ | | | Figure 3-2 Setting the default number of lines per page | | | | OPERATOR FUNCTIONS | | OPERATOR ID CREATE/MAINTAIN | | ------------------------------------------------------------------ | | ID: INITIALS: | | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | | DEFAULT OWNER: | | ACCESS SECURITY: DEFAULT RESTRICTION: | | MODIFY SECURITY: DEFAULT RESTRICTION: | | INFORMATION STORAGE/RETRIEVAL? # OF LINES PER PAGE: | | | | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | |_________________________________________________________________________| The values defined here are the default values for new documents. When creating a new document these values (including the new # OF LINES PER PAGE) will be used unless the user specifies otherwise. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg008 3.2.1.2 Document Create and Maintain The following are step by step instructions a user must follow to maintain the "# of lines per page" prompt. 1. From the Business WORD menu select Document Create and Maintain. 2. Enter document name. Refer to MAIBF manual M0043 for creating a new document. 3. Select the Parameters option. 4. Next select Security Parameters (see figure 3-3 for screen layout). 5. Carriage return to "# of lines per page" prompt. 3.2.1.2 (Cont.) 6. Enter the number of lines per page. The range is 1-9999. The default value will be the existing entry. 7. Next depress (CR) if the data is okay or N if not and begin again. _______________________________________________________________________ | | | Figure 3-3 Security option from Document Create/Maintain | | | | | | DOCUMENT MAINTENANCE | | DATE: XX/XX/XX | | --------------------------------------------------------------- | | DOCUMENT NAME: PAGES: | | --------------------------------------------------------------- | | OWNER: | | ACCESS SECURITY: ACCESS RESTRICTION: | | MODIFY SECURITY: MODIFY RESTRICTION: | | # OF LINES PER PAGE: | | | | --------------------------------------------------------------- | |_______________________________________________________________________| 3.2.2 Repagination Repagination will occur automatically if the user modifies the number of lines per page prompt to be less then what was originally defined. This automatic repagination will only take place if the user modifies the number of lines per page prompt in the Document Maintenance security parameters. See figure 3-4 for screen layout. When using special functions such as Text Select, Block Select, etc. to form a document and the page length is exceeded, Business WORD will add/insert a new page for the remaining text. However, no maintenance of widow/orphan lines will take place if text is inserted or deleted - this will occur only at the time of repagination. The user can SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg009 repaginate a document via the repagination option from the Document Maintenance menu. However, the repagination page length must be lower then what was defined in the Document Maintenance security parameters. If the need arises that the page length needs to be increased then the user needs to modify the "# of lines per page" in the Document Maintenance security parameters to reflect the new value and then repaginate the document via the repagination option. The value defined here will stay with the document even if the default parameters are changed. 3.2.2 (Cont.) ______________________________________________________________________ | | | Figure 3-4 Pagination display | | | | DOCUMENT MAINTENANCE | | DATE: XX/XX/XX | | --------------------------------------------------------------- | | DOCUMENT NAME: PAGES: | | --------------------------------------------------------------- | | OWNER: | | ACCESS SECURITY: ACCESS RESTRICTION: | | MODIFY SECURITY: MODIFY RESTRICTION: | | # OF LINES PER PAGE: | | | | REPAGINATING DOCUMENT. PLEASE WAIT ... | | --------------------------------------------------------------- | |______________________________________________________________________| 3.3 SINGLE KEY FUNCTIONS Single key movement permits cursor movement by paragraph, sentence or word in a forward or reverse direction. When editing text a user will be able to jump from word to word, sentence to sentence or paragraph to paragraph with a single function key. The shifted values will move the cursor in the opposite direction. Note that the paragraph forward key when used on the last paragraph of a page will position the cursor on the first character of the next page. Also, when the paragraph backward key is used on the first paragraph of a page the cursor will be placed on the first character of the last paragraph of the previous page except when there is no previous page. In this case the cursor will be placed on the first character of the current page. The function key layout for the first fourteen function keys are consistent for functions across MAI Basic Four serial terminals. Listed below are function keys for the various types of terminals: 3.3 (Cont.) 4312 Terminal NORMAL MODE SHIFTED MODE F F1 PAGE CENTER U N F2 LINE VIEW SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg010 C T F3 RULER RECOVER I O F4 SPELL VERIFY WORD LOOKUP N F5 PARAGRAPH CALL GLOSSARY CALL K F6 TEXT SELECT BLOCK SELECT E Y F7 CUT MERGE S F8 WORD (forward --> ) WORD (reverse <-- ) F9 SENTENCE (forward --> ) SENTENCE (reverse <-- ) F10 PARAGRAPH (forward -> ) PARAGRAPH (reverse <-- ) F11 DEL WORD DEL SENT F12 INSERT CHAR INSERT LINE F13 DEL CHAR DEL LINE F14 MENU HELP 3.3 (Cont.) 4310 AND S10 PHASE II TERMINAL NORMAL MODE SHIFTED MODE F F1 PAGE CENTER U N F2 LINE VIEW C T F3 RULER RECOVER I O F4 SPELL VERIFY WORD LOOKUP N F5 PARAGRAPH CALL GLOSSARY CALL K E F6 TEXT SELECT BLOCK SELECT Y S F7 CUT MERGE F8 WORD (forward --> ) WORD (reverse <-- ) F9 SENTENCE (forward --> ) SENTENCE (reverse <-- ) F10 PARAGRAPH (forward -> ) PARAGRAPH (reverse <-- ) F11 DEL WORD DEL SENT F12 INSERT CHAR INSERT LINE F13 DEL CHAR DEL LINE F14 MENU HELP F15 FILL CALC F16 FORMULA DEFINE SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg011 HELP HELP OPERATOR OPTIONS MENU MENU AUX1 SEARCH SEARCH DEFINE AUX2 FIND FIND DEFINE A P U A AUX3 GLOSSARY DEFINE X D AUX4 PARAGRAPH DEFINE 3.3 (Cont.) 4313 AND 4314 TERMINALS In addition to the base line function keys, this terminal type emulates the 4310 by using the numeric pad as additional function keys. Upon entering Business WORD the numeric pad will be shifted into pad mode to take advantage of the additional functionality. NORMAL MODE SHIFTED MODE F F1 PAGE CENTER U N F2 LINE VIEW C T F3 RULER RECOVER I O F4 SPELL VERIFY WORD LOOKUP N F5 PARAGRAPH CALL GLOSSARY CALL K E F6 TEXT SELECT BLOCK SELECT Y S F7 CUT MERGE F8 WORD (forward --> ) WORD (reverse <-- ) F9 SENTENCE (forward --> ) SENTENCE (reverse <-- ) F10 PARAGRAPH (forward -> ) PARAGRAPH (reverse <-- ) F11 DEL WORD DEL SENT F12 INSERT CHAR INSERT LINE F13 DEL CHAR DEL LINE F14 MENU HELP 3.3 (Cont.) NORMAL MODE SHIFTED MODE N "7" SEARCH SEARCH DEFINE U M "8" CURSOR UP ( ^ ) EXPRESS UP SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg012 E R "9" FIND FIND DEFINE I C "-" OPERATOR OPTIONS P "4" CURSOR LEFT (<-) EXPRESS LEFT A D "5" NOT USED "6" CURSOR RIGHT EXPRESS RIGHT "," FORMULA FORMULA DEFINE "1" GLOSSARY DEFINE "2" CURSOR DOWN ( v ) EXPRESS DOWN "3" PARAGRAPH DEFINE "0" INSERT FILL "." BACK TAB CALCULATOR 7270 and HVDT Terminals These terminal types are exempt from the single key movement and will use a control sequence to jump from paragraph to paragraph, sentence to sentence or word to word. The control sequence is as follows: CTL R + C PARAGRAPH DOWN "v" CTL R + f WORD RIGHT "-->" CTL R + E PARAGRAPH UP "^" CTL R + s WORD LEFT "<--" CTL R + F SENTENCE RIGHT "-->" CTL R + S SENTENCE LEFT "<--" 3.4 FULL-ATTRIBUTE PRINTERS AS SLAVES With Business WORD 3.2A, Basic Four interface printers (model 4206) support full attributes when configured as a slave printer. Full attributes are defined as underlining, bolding, shadowing, superscript, subscript, and other letter quality attributes. 3.4 (Cont.) The printers must be setup in PRINTER MAINTENANCE from the WORD menu. These printers are set to operate only from the terminal that initiates the printing. The slave LQP CANNOT be used from any other terminal other than the one it is connected to. To setup in PRINTER MAINTENANCE, enter the device name as "T*". The type is SLVD (normal) or SLVS (with sheetfeeder). A list will be displayed for a choice of: D=4206 I=4211 F=4215 J=4216 The recommended configuration for slave printers is one entry per TYPE of printer connected to Business WORD. 3.5 CUT AND PASTE BETWEEN DOCUMENTS (VIEW) The foreign file cut and paste (VIEW) will allow movement from the primary document (that document that the operator is currently editing) to a secondary document to select text to SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg013 be inserted in the primary document. The keystrokes for the VIEW are similar to the simple cut and paste. 3.5.1 Usage 3.5.1.1 From the primary document To initiate the VIEW feature, position the cursor where the text is to be pasted in the primary file and press: VIEW The user is then asked to enter the name of the secondary document by the prompt: DOCUMENT NAME: If no document name is entered a CR will cancel the VIEW and return to edit mode in the primary document. Once a valid document name is entered, security is checked. If the user does not have security to access the document, the user is informed and asked to enter another document name. 3.5.1.1 (Cont.) The line width of the secondary document must be the same or less than that of the primary document, if it is not the user will be informed and prompted for another document name. The busy flag on the secondary document is checked. If the document is currently being modified, an error message will be issued, and the document name prompt will appear. If the busy flag is blank (not in use) or "C" (another user is performing a cut and paste operation on the same document) then access to the file is granted. More than one user can access a file in VIEW mode because no updates to the file are allowed. 3.5.1.2 From the secondary document VIEW This key is used to exit the secondary document when the user has completed the cut. This will exit the VIEW and return to the primary document. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg014 or Use one of these keys to select the text segment(s) that will be 'pasted' (inserted) into the primary file. 3.5.2 Process Once the secondary file is entered, no changes can be made to the text. Cursor positioning functions allow the user to locate the portion of the document to be cut. A list of the valid functions follows: K express right next character J express left previous character CR right arrow go to a page CTL-II left arrow find a line/column CTL-II tab find string up down New single key functions and each of their reverse movements can also be used to position the cursor: word forward sentence forward paragraph forward 3.5.2 (Cont.) There are two types of cutting allowed, text select and block select. They work in the same manner as a simple cut and paste in the primary document. Once the user has selected the portion of text they are interested in via text or block select they may press the VIEW key to exit back to the primary document. The text that has been selected is automatically inserted into this document beginning at the position where the user last placed their cursor. Use the ESC key to exit the VIEW mode without cutting and pasting the text. 3.6 INTERFACE WITH PERSONAL DATA A new feature of Business WORD 3.2A is to allow an operator to maintain a small database of information and to merge this database with a simple letter created through Business WORD. 3.6.1 Mail List Maintenance Mail List Maintenance lets you enter data into a data file which could be used for the purpose of Document Merge. It will allow the user to select a data record by a record number assigned to it. It will also allow the user to add, modify, delete or inspect a record in the data file. A record in a data file created by Mail List Maintenance will have twelve distinct items (fields) which will be numbered one through twelve. The first item of each record is the record number which uniquely defines that particular record in the data file. 3.6.1.1 Defining a data file SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg015 The user will define a data file for the purpose of Mail List Maintenance and Document Merge by choosing the Mail List Maintenance option on the Business DATA Menu. The following steps should be used by the operator to maintain records within the data file: 1. At the Business DATA Menu, select Mail List Maintenance and press CR. The blank Mail List Maintenance screen displays as in figure 3-5. The cursor appears next to the Data File Name field. Press CTL-IV to return to the Business DATA. Menu. 3.6.1.1 (Cont.) ______________________________________________________________________ | | | Figure 3-5 Mail List Maintenance Screen | | | | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | | DATA FILE NAME : ------ | | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | |______________________________________________________________________| 2. To create a new data file, enter the name of data file here and the system will automatically create the data file. If a file does not exist with the name just entered, the system will go to STEP 3. If a file already exists with the name just entered that is a valid data file (one acceptable to Document Merge) then the system displays the following prompt : FILE ALREADY EXISTS. CONTINUE? (Y/N) Enter "N" to define a new data file. The system will prompt for the data file name again. Enter "Y" to update an old data file. If a file already exists with the name entered in response to the prompt "DATA FILE NAME: ", and it is not in the format which is acceptable to Document Merge then the system displays the following message and prompts for data file name again: FILE CAN'T BE CREATED. 3. The system will prompt the following: FILE DOESN'T EXIST DO YOU WANT TO CREATE IT? (Y/N) Type "Y" and CR to create this file. Go to STEP 4. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg016 Type "N" if you do not want to create this file. The system will prompt for the file name again. Go to STEP 1. 4. The system will prompt for the number of records you want in the new data file: 3.6.1.1 (Cont.) ENTER NUMBER OF RECORDS (MAX 10000) : Type the number of records for the new data file here. 3.6.1.2 Maintaining a Data File o Add a record. o Delete a record. o Modify a record. o Inquire about a record. The following steps should be used to maintain data in a user's personal data file: 1. At the Business DATA Menu, select Mail List Maintenance and press CR. The blank Mail List Maintenance screen displays. Here a new data file can be created as described in the DEFINING A DATA FILE section. The cursor is placed next to the DATA FILE NAME prompt. Enter the file name to which you want to make modifications. 2. If the file doesn't already exist, the system will let you create one. The system will then go to STEP 4. 3. If the file already exists, the system will display the following: FILE ALREADY EXISTS. CONTINUE? (Y/N) Type "Y" AND CR to maintain the file. The system will go to STEP 4. Type "N" if this is not the file you want to maintain. The system will go to STEP 1. 4. The system displays the screen as in figure 3-6. NOTE: The number following the input dashes in parentheses is the maximum number of characters accepted for that field. This number will not appear on the terminal screen. The cursor remains at item 1 just next to RECORD #. When finished with this file, type CTL-IV to go back to STEP 1. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg017 Type the record number which you want to add, modify, delete or query. 3.6.1.2 (Cont.) ____________________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 3-6 Record Display | | |. | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |. | DATA FILE NAME : RECORDS USED : #### TOTAL RECORDS : #### | | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |. | 1. RECORD # : ----- (5) | | 2. NAME : ---------------------------------------- (40) | | 3. ADDRESS 1 : ----------------------------------- (35) | | 4. ADDRESS 2 : ----------------------------------- (35) | | 5. ADDRESS 3 : ----------------------------------- (35) | | 6. CITY & STATE : ----------------------------------- (35) | | 7. ZIP CODE : ---------- (10) | | 8. SALUTATION : -------------------- (20) | | 9. MISC. : --------------------------------------------(50)-- | | 10. MISC. : ---------------------------------------- (40) | | 11. MISC. : ------------------------------- (30) | | 12. CATEGORY : -- (2) | | ENTER THE RECORD # TO BE SELECTED | | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |. |____________________________________________________________________________|. 5. Once the record number has been accepted, the system will display the prompt: (ADD/MODIFY/INQUIRE/DELETE/HELP) ? (A/M/I/D/?) Type A and CR to add the record. Go to STEP 6.. Type M and CR to modify the record. Go to STEP 7. Type I and CR to inquire about the record. Go to STEP 8. Type D and CR to delete the record. Go to STEP 9. Type ? and CR to display the help to move around the screen. This will put the CTL keys at the bottom of the screen to show the user what action will be taken when they are depressed. Go to STEP 10. 6. Adding A Record If the record number entered already exists in the file the system will display the following prompt: RECORD ALREADY ON FILE (CR) Type CR. Go to STEP 4. If the record doesn't already exist the cursor will be placed just next to item 2 (NAME). You can keep entering all the items for the record just by typing the item description and CR. 3.6.1.2 (Cont.) TO GO BACK TO PREVIOUS ITEM PRESS CTL-II. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg018 TO UPDATE RECORD AT ANY TIME AT ANY ITEM PRESS CTL-III Once all the items have been entered or CTL-III pressed the system displays the following prompt: UPDATE RECORD(Y/CR) Type "Y" and CR to update the record. The system displays: RECORD IS BEING ADDED Type only CR if you do not want to add the record. Go to STEP 4. 7. Modifying A Record If the record number entered doesn't already exist the system displays the following message: RECORD NOT ON FILE (CR) Type CR to continue. Go to STEP 4. If the record exists, the system will fill all the items of the record on the screen and display the prompt: ITEM NUMBER TO BE MODIFIED: Enter the item reference number here. The cursor will be positioned next to the item number typed in. Move up and down the items by pressing CTL-II and CTL-I respectively. Press CTL-III to update a record. The system displays the following prompt: UPDATE RECORD? (Y/CR) Type Y and CR to update the record. The system displays the following message and goes to STEP 4: RECORD IS BEING MODIFIED Type only CR if you do not want to update the record. Go to STEP 4. 3.6.1.2 (Cont.) 8. Inquire About the Record If the record number entered doesn't already exist the system displays the following message: RECORD NOT ON FILE (CR) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg019 Type CR to continue. Go to STEP 4. If the record exists, the system will fill all the items of the record on the screen. The system now displays the following prompt: HARD COPY? (Y/CR) Type "Y" and CR for a hard copy of the record items. Go to STEP 4. Type CR if you do not want a hard copy. 9. Deleting A Record If the record number entered doesn't exist, the system will display the following message: RECORD NOT ON FILE (CR) Type CR to continue. Go to STEP 4. If the record exists, the system will fill all the items of the record on the screen and display the following prompt: DELETE RECORD (Y/CR) Type "Y" and CR to delete record. The system displays the following message and returns to STEP 4: RECORD IS BEING DELETED Type only CR if you do not want to delete the record. 3.6.1.2 (Cont.) 10. Help to Move on Screen Once you enter '?' and CR as response to any of the prompts for the record information or for (A/M/I/D/?) prompt the system displays the help at the bottom of the screen: CR,CTL-I=DOWN CTL-II=UP CTL-III=UPDATE CTL-IV=EXIT After displaying help the cursor returns to the prompt where you typed in '?' . 3.6.2 MAIL MERGE Mail Merge lets you merge a data file, created with the Mail List Maintenance option of the Business DATA Menu, into a standard letter created by Document Create and Maintain option of the Business WORD Menu. Mail Merge will first validate the standard letter for the item reference codes used in the letter. Item SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg020 reference codes are the numbers embedded within '<' and '>' (or [] depending on what insert code characters were selected when entering the international parameters) in the standard letter. These item reference codes along with '<' and '>' are replaced with the data in the data file record's corresponding item reference number. 3.6.2.1 Creating a Standard Letter A standard letter is the letter which contains the text and embedded codes which will be replaced by the data from one of the fields of a data file record. These codes are called item reference numbers or codes and will uniquely refer to one of the fields of a data file record. The range of these item reference numbers is from TWO through TWELVE. The item reference numbers in the standard letter should be enclosed within '<' and '>' (or []). NOTE: No other printer insert codes can be used. Only the bracketed item reference numbers. 1. Choose the Document Create and Maintain option on the Business WORD Menu. 2. Create a Standard letter. An example of which is shown in figure 3-7 3.6.2.1 (Cont.) _____________________________________________________________________ | | | Figure 3-7 Mail Example Letter | | | | ----------------------------------------------------------- | | Oct 1,1986 | | <2> | | <3> | | <4> | | | | Dear <8>, | | | | We are pleased to offer you a post of <9> in the | | <10> division of our company. Please make it convenient to | | join us latest by <11>. | | | | Your remunerations would be <12> per annum. | | | | Sincerely, | | | | J.P. Hires | | Personnel Officer. | | ------------------------------------------------------------ | |_____________________________________________________________________| 3.6.2.2 Merging Data into a Standard Letter Data file record information is merged into the standard letter and a new document is created. The document output will have SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg021 individual letters on separate pages of the document. The document thus created could be printed out by choosing the Print option of the Document Create and Maintain menu. The following steps should be used to perform the merging of data into the standard letter created above: 1. Choose Mail Merge option on the Business DATA Menu. 2. A blank screen is displayed and a prompt for Document Name appears on the screen: DOCUMENT NAME : ______ Hit CTL-IV to go back to the Business DATA Menu. Enter the standard letter (Document) name here. If the document doesn't exist, the system will display the following message on the screen and will prompt the user for the document name again: 3.6.2.2 (Cont.) DOCUMENT NOT FOUND If the system finds the document, the following prompt will appear on the screen: IS THIS THE CORRECT DOCUMENT (Y/N)? Enter "Y" AND CR if the document is the correct standard letter. Go to STEP 3. Enter "N" AND CR if for another standard letter. Go to STEP 2. 3. If the standard letter is busy, the system displays the following message: DOCUMENT IS BUSY. PLEASE TRY LATER. The cursor will then go to STEP 2 otherwise the user will be taken to STEP 4. 4. The system now displays the following message: CREATING WORK FILE 5. If the Work File is busy, the system displays the following message: THE DOCUMENT MERGE FILE IS BUSY. PLEASE RUN LATER. 6. The system now displays the following message: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg022 VALIDATING AND COPYING DOCUMENT... The system validates the standard letter for proper item reference codes here. If it finds an improper item reference code, the following prompt is displayed: ITEM # REFERENCE NOT DEFINED. ENTER VALID FIELD IN THE RANGE OF 1 TO 12: Enter the proper item reference number here. The standard letter is also updated for any illegal item references. 3.6.2.2 (Cont.) 7. DATA FILE NAME: PRESS CTL-II to go to STEP 2. Enter data file name here. If a data file name is entered for a file which exists but it does not have a proper format for Mail Merge, the system displays the following message: FILE IS NOT A PROPER DATA FILE If the file does not exist the following message is displayed: FILE NOT FOUND 8. ENTER THE STARTING KEY: PRESS CTL-II TO GO BACK TO STEP 7 Enter the record number in the data file where the merge should start. The user may: 1. Enter ALL to select all records. Go to STEP 10 2. Enter CR to begin with first record. Go to STEP 9 3. Enter record number for the first record to be merged. Go to STEP 9. 9. ENTER THE ENDING KEY: PRESS CTL-II TO GO BACK TO STEP 8. The user may : 1. Enter CR to select records till the end of file. 2. Enter last record number to be merged. 10. OUTPUT DOCUMENT NAME : SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg023 CTL-II will return to STEP 8 if 'ALL' was entered in STEP 8 otherwise it will go to STEP 9. Enter the name of the document where the merged letters are to be stored. 3.6.2.2 (Cont.) If a document with that name already exists the system will display the following message and prompt: THIS DOCUMENT ALREADY EXISTS. (CR) 11. DO YOU WANT TO CONTINUE (Y/N)? 1. Enter Y and CR to continue. Go to STEP 12. 2. Enter N and CR to stop. Go to STEP 2. 12. The system now attempts to get one Ghost task. If it finds a ghost task, the following message and prompt are displayed: GHOST TASK IS AVAILABLE. DO YOU WANT TO USE IT (Y/N)? Enter Y and CR to use this ghost. The system displays the following message for a while and then goes back to the Business DATA menu. The terminal can now be used for other jobs while Mail Merge is in process. MERGING IN GHOST TASK Enter N and CR if you do not want to use the ghost task. Go to STEP 13. 13. The system now displays: MAIL MERGE IN PROGRESS... NOW ON <#####> 14. Once all the data records have been merged the system displays: MAIL MERGE COMPLETED (CR) Enter CR to go to the Business DATA Menu. 3.7 IMPROVED IMPORT This new option will move data quickly from a serial data file into a Business WORD document. This transfer will be record by record instead of character by character like it is presently done in OMS Word Processing. The user simply selects the QUICK File To Document Merge SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg024 option from the Business WORD Menu. The program will then ask the user to fill out the information on the following screen: 3.7 (Cont.) ___________________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 3-8 QUICK File Merge Display | | |. | REV 3.2A MAI OFFICE USER | | TIME: 12:00 A.M. QUICK File To Document Merge DATE: 12/25/86 | | |. | LIBRARY NAME: | | DOCUMENT TO CREATE: | | DESCRIPTION: | | SOURCE SERIAL FILE: | | LINES PER PAGE: | | ENTRIES CORRECT? (Y/N): | |___________________________________________________________________________| LIBRARY NAME is the six character name the user has assigned to their Business WORD library. After entry of this name, the system will display the library code (the single character that associates the LIBRARY NAME with the file WPTF0n, where 'n' is the library code) just to the right of the LIBRARY NAME just entered. To exit this program the user may press CTL-IV or enter "END" at this prompt. The user must next enter the DOCUMENT TO CREATE. This must be a new document. If the document entered already exists the system will display: DOCUMENT ALREADY EXISTS. CR TO CONTINUE. The DESCRIPTION is the same description that the user enters when they create a new document through Document Create/Maintain. The SOURCE SERIAL FILE is the name of the serial data file the user wishes to IMPORT. If only the file name is entered without a node (or directory on the 2000/3000) specifier then the system will default to the primary node (directory) in the users prefix. Next the user must enter the LINES PER PAGE. This will allow the user to specify the maximum lines of data on a page after which a new page will automatically be created. After all entries are verified to be correct, the system will display the document name at the bottom of the screen along with a progress indicator that will show the user the page and line number that is currently being imported. Create document: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Page: m Line: n Once all data has been copied from the serial data file into the document the system will return to the LIBRARY NAME prompt for the user to IMPORT the next serial file. 3.8 IMPROVED REPAIR The Text File Rebuild utility can be used to expand or SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg025 contract selected text file(s) or to rebuild a text file that has pointer problems. When the screen displays that a text file is being rebuilt in MAI OFFICE, all the documents in that text file cannot be accessed by any other functions, including a rebuild running on other terminals. However, documents in text files other than the one which is being rebuilt can be accessed as usual. Once a text file has been completely rebuilt, all the documents within it are accessible to all other MAI OFFICE functions. NOTE: No escape traps are provided in Text File Rebuild. If the user presses the ESCAPE key when a Text File Rebuild is being done they may damage the text file. 3.8.1 Text File Rebuild Instructions To execute a Text File Rebuild: 1. At the Business WORD Menu select Supervisory Utilities The Text File Rebuild utility menu displays. 2. Select Text File Rebuild to contract, expand, or to rebuild the text file(s). Go to STEP 6. 3. Select Print Rebuild Error Report to print an already existing error file which was created during a previous Text File Rebuild. 4. ENTER FILE NAME OR CR TO END: Options (choose one) a. To print the error report, type the name of the error file which the user wants to print or the error file which Rebuild created and asked the user to note. Go to STEP 5. b. CR returns to the Text File Rebuild Utility Menu. 5. After printing the error report, the following prompt will appear: SAVE THIS FILE (Y/N): Options (choose one) a. Type 'Y' if you want to delete the error file. b. Type 'N' if you want to retain the error file. 3.8.1 (Cont.) After completion the Rebuild utility will return to the Text File Rebuild Menu. NOTE: If the default printer is busy when the system prints the error report, the following message appears: LINE PRINTER IS BUSY. KEEP TRYING? (Y/N) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg026 Options (choose one) a. Type 'Y'. The system keeps trying to access the printer. When the printer is available, the report will print. b. Type 'N' to exit the procedure. You return to the last menu you accessed before running the Text File Rebuild option. 6. BEGIN REBUILD NOW OR START LATER?(N/L/CR): Options (choose one) a. Type 'N' and CR to begin rebuild immediately after all the parameters have been entered and validated. Go to STEP 7. b. Type 'L' and CR to start rebuild at a later date and time. Go to STEP 8. c. Type CR to return to Text File Rebuild Menu. 7. DO YOU WANT TO BUILD AN ERROR REPORT? (Y/N) Options (choose one) a. Type 'Y' and CR to build an error report. Write down the name of the error file the system displays here. Go to STEP 9. b. Type 'N' and CR if you don't want an error report. Go to STEP 9. 8. Enter the answers to the following prompts to have rebuild started at a later date and time: ENTER TIME TO REBUILD (HH:MM AM/PM) OR CR: ENTER DATE TO BEGIN REBUILD (MMDDYY) OR CR: The current date and time are displayed next to these prompts. To change date and time, overtype on the date and time displayed by the system. Once date and time have been validated, the screen displays the name of the error file which is created for logging the errors: 3.8.1 (Cont.) PLEASE NOTE - ERROR FILE NAME IS RBxxxx (CR) RB stands for rebuild and the characters following RB are the terminal ID. Write down the name of this file displayed for use when printing the error file report. After you CR the system creates the error file. 9. DOCUMENT OR PARAGRAPH FILE(S) (D/P/CR): Options (choose one) a. Type 'D' and CR to rebuild a document text SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg027 file(s). Go to STEP 10 b. Type 'P' and CR to rebuild a paragraph text file. Go to STEP 11 10. LIBRARY FILE CHARACTER Enter the library file character for the text file to rebuild and CR. When file characters for all the text file(s) to be rebuilt have been entered, CR to end the selection of text files. 11. The screen now displays (one at a time for document text file rebuild) the number of lines already used in the text file and the space available. If you wish to re-size the text file, enter the new number of lines for the text file: THERE ARE <#> LINES USED IN LEAVING <#> AVAILABLE ENTER NEW NUMBER OF LINES OR CR: Options (choose one) a. Enter the new number of lines you wish the new text file to have and CR. Go to STEP 12. b. Type CR to retain the same size for text file. Go to STEP 12. 12. The following message appears on the screen: NOW DEFINING TEMPORARY FILES The system looks at the records in the temporary files to see if there is enough room to copy the text files. 3.8.1 (Cont.) NOTE: Do not leave your terminal until the temporary files have been defined. On the successful completion of allocation of temporary files the above message will disappear. If there is not enough space to define the temporary files the procedure stops. The user must delete any unused files on the disk at this point to make room for the completion of the program. The system now scans the text file(s) and documents within it. As it scans, the following messages appear on the screen: TEXT FILE NOW REBUILDING: The system first makes sure that the text file it is about to rebuild is not being used. If it finds that a library or document in the text file which it is about to rebuild is being used then it will not rebuild that text file and will display the following message: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg028 DOCUMENT BUSY. TEXT FILE CANNOT BE REBUILT. If the system encounters any kind of corruption in the chains, it reports such a corruption and attempts to recover the maximum text which is affected by that corruption. Corruptions usually occur in a text file and in the document header record which is linked to documents. The system responds to such corruptions as described below: a. Document Header Record Corruption: If the document header record doesn't point to a proper first and last page of the document, or if these pointers have values outside the range of the text file into which they point, the system displays the following message: POINTERS IN DOCUMENT RECORD FOR CORRUPTED. WILL FIX. The system attempts to correct these pointers. If it is not able to salvage even one page of the document then it proceeds to delete the document and displays the following message: DELETING 3.8.1 (Cont.) b. Page Record Corruption: If any of the page records of a document/ paragraph do not point to a proper first line of that page then the following message appears on the screen: PAGE RECORD NOT PROPER FOR PAGE <#> The system attempts to restore the proper value of the pointer. If it is unable to restore the pointers then it deletes all the lines for that page. The following message appears: ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> DELETED. If it gets all the lines then the following message appears: RESTORED ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> If it gets only the partial page then the following message is displayed: RESTORED <#> LINES FOR PAGE <#> c. Page Link Corruption: If the system encounters a corruption in page record chains then it displays the following SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg029 message: PAGE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING PAGE POINTERS... If it is able to restore the complete chain then the following message is displayed: PAGE LINE REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete chain then it displays the following message: PAGE REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST AFTER PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text preceding the lost page: **PAGE POINTER ERRORS. NEXT <#> PAGES LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION. 3.8.1 (Cont.) d. Line Link Corruption: If the system encounters any corruption in the line link chain, it displays the following message: LINE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING POINTERS... If it is able to restore the complete line link chain, it issues the following message: LINE LINK REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete line link chain then the following message appears: LINE LINK REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST ON PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text where the failure occurred: **LINE POINTER ERRORS. SOME TEXT ON THIS PAGE LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION 13. On the completion of rebuild for each text file, the system renames the temporary text file. 14. Go to STEP 4 if you keyed in 'Y' for STEP 7 in response to the prompt: DO YOU WANT TO BUILD AN ERROR REPORT (Y/N)? If you answered 'N', the system displays the Text File Rebuild Menu. NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT A TEXT FILE REBUILD BE RUN ONCE A WEEK TO ENSURE POINTER INTEGRITY. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg030 4. MAI BUSINESS MATH MAI Business MATH transforms your video display into a grid resembling an accountant's columnar pad. o An easy-to-use, yet flexible electronic spreadsheet. o For developing projections, budgets, pro formas, cash flows, or other tabular reports requiring mathematical calculations. o Will improve accuracy while saving significant time. 4.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MATH None. 5. MAI BUSINESS GRAPH MAI Business GRAPH is a product that allows you to produce quality graphics on a graphics-equipped terminal and/or graphics-supported printers. The module consists of two programs: GRAPHMAKER and GRAPH. GRAPHMAKER is an interactive window-driven graphics editor. It allows the user to create, maintain and display your own graphs. GRAPH allows you the convenience of displaying your graphs once they have been designed and gives you advanced graphics capability using an editor. The following devices are the only supported plotting devices on the 2000/3000 and MPx series: o DT-4310 EDT with Graphics Interface Board. o HP 7475A 6-Pen Color Plotter o PT-4214 Dual Mode Printer o PT-4201 150/300 LPM printer (MPx only) o DT-4314 (SPx only - will be supported on 3.2B for MPx) 5.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS GRAPH 5.1.1 MPx Installation The graphics module consists of the following files: .GRAF.GRAPH .GRAF.GRAPHMAKER .GRAF.PGM.& .GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS.T .GRAF.ETC.GKS.FONT& .GRAF.ETC.GKS.DEVICES .GRAF.ETC.GRF.PROMPTS .GRAPHICS.& .ETC.LEVEL.GRF.T STEP 1: If this is a new installation, you must rename the ".GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS.T" file to ".GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS" and the ".ETC.LEVEL.GRF.T" file to ".ETC.LEVEL.GRF". SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg031 STEP 2: Copy the files ".GRAF.GRAPH" and ".GRAF.GRAPHMAKER" to the system prefix .Rxxxx.SYS. where xxxx is the current release level. STEP 3: Add your graphic output devices to the plotters file using the EDIT command. !EDIT .GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS The following is the format for this file: User specified name:device:type:parameter: 5.1.1 (Cont.) Figure 5-1 shows the supported devices and their types. ____________________________________________________________________________ . | |. | Figure 5-1 Supported Devices With Their Types | | |. | Device Type Parameters |. | DT-4310 EDT :4310:: | | HP 7475A Pen Plotter :spe.hpplot:: | | DT-4214 Dual Mode Printer :dmp:SUBMIT PRINTER=xx,CLASS=x,DELETE=TRUE | | DT-4201 150/300 LPM Printer :dmp:SUBMIT PRINTER=xx,CLASS=x,DELETE=TRUE | |____________________________________________________________________________|. Figure 5-2 displays how a sample '.GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS' file might appear. __________________________________________________________________________ | | | Figure 5-2 Sample '.GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS' file | | | | DEFAULT:T21:edt:: | | PRINT:LP:dmp:SUBMIT PRINTER=LP, CLASS=G, DELETE=TRUE : | | LP:LP:dmp:SUBMIT PRINTER=LP, CLASS=G, DELETE=TRUE : | | T5:T5:edt:: | | T6:T6:4310:: >These are equivalent | |__________________________________________________________________________| NOTE: You must have a space before the last colon, ":", if you are passing a parameter. STEP 4: Create CLASS "G" with the following attributes if you wish to output to the DMP or the 150/300 LPM Printer. PRINTING CLASS :G CHARACTERS PER LINE :132 LINES PER PAGE :66 NUMBER OF SEPARATOR PAGES :0 AUTOMATIC PAGING :NO INCLUDE PAGE NUMBERS :NO PLOT MODE ONLY :NO EIGHT LINES PER INCH :NO PRINTER BAND TYPE :0 FORM MOUNTING MESSAGE :MOUNT GRAPHIC FORMS 5.1.2 Device Configurations SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg032 5.1.2.1 EDT with graphics interface board No special requirements. 5.1.2.2 HP 7475A 6-Pen Color Plotter The HP Plotter must be configured on the ISDC as a TERMINAL, SPE/VDT, 7 BIT, ODD PARITY, 1 STOP BIT, 9600 BAUD, LINE LENGTH 80, X-ON/X-OFF and BANNER NO. The plotter uses a standard VDT cable (907116). The dip switches on the plotter should be set as follows: S2 - ON, S1 - ON, Y - OFF, US - ON, A3 - OFF, B4 - ON, B3 - OFF, B2 - ON, B1- OFF 5.1.2.3 Dual Mode Printer (DMP) The DMP is configured as it normally would be for standard data processing. The graphs will fit onto 8 1/2 x 11 inch paper. 5.1.2.4 150/300 LPM Printer The 150/300 LPM Printer is configured as it normally would be for standard data processing. Its graph output requires 132 column paper. 5.1.3 2000/3000 Installation/Configuration The graph module on the 2000/3000 consists of the following files: /bin/graph /bin/graphmaker /etc/level/GRF /etc/gks/font21 to font26, font99 /etc/grf/help /etc/grf/prompts /etc/plotters /graphics/demo00.data to demo19.data /graphics/bdemo /graphics/demo /graphics/CHART /graphics/clock /graphics/loop 5.1.3 (Cont.) STEP 1: If you are updating from a graphics package prior to MAI Business GRAPH 3.1A, delete your existing '/etc/plotters' file using the following command: ADMIN>delete /etc/plotters STEP 2: Configure your plotter devices using the configure utility: ADMIN>configure. The plotters file will automatically be created through this utility. Configure your plotter devices using the following options. Leave all remaining options at their defaults. One of your Plotter devices names MUST be called SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg033 'default'. NOTE: If you are modifying a printer device to add or remove spooling, you must remove the device and then add the device with the appropriate answer for spooling. The option 'Plotter parameters': in the configure menu is used only as a comment field in the plotters file. However, if an entry is made to this field, it must have 4 colons followed by the comments. (No spaces are accepted in this field when entering a comment from the configure utility.) e.g. Plotter parameters: ::::this,is,a,comment o DT-4310 EDT with a Graphics Interface Board Device Type : graphics terminal Terminal Type : 4310 Graphics Terminal Name : default (user selected name) o DT-4314 Device Type : graphics terminal Terminal Type : 4314 Graphics Terminal Name : default (user selected name) o HP 7475A 6-Pen Color Plotter Device Type : printer Printer Type : hpplot Read/Status Timeout : 100 Write Timeout : 100 Graphics Terminal Name : plot The plotter uses a standard VDT cable (907116). The dip switches on the plotter should be set as follows: S2 - ON, S1 - ON, Y - OFF, US - ON, A3 - OFF, B4 - ON, B3 - OFF, B2 - ON, B1 - OFF. 5.1.3 (Cont.) o DT-4214 Dual Mode Printer Device Type : printer Printer Type : dmp The graph output size is 8 1/2 x 11 inches. The plotters file uses the following format: user specified name:device:type:parameter :::: comments Figure 5-3 shows a sample '/etc/plotters' file for the 2000/3000. _____________________________________________________________________ SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg034 | | | Figure 5-3 Sample '/etc/plotters'file | | | | default:/dev/tty0:4310:::: | | tty2:/dev/tty2:4310:::: | | plot:/dev/tty1:.hpplot:::: | | print:/dev/lp0:dmp:/bin/ list=lp -raw -delete :::: | | term:/dev/tty3:4314:::: | | | | NOTE: The parameter field MUST have 1 blank | | space before the colon ":". | |_____________________________________________________________________| 0:0: 1:1: 2:2: 3:3: 4:4: 4310:0:dt4310 terminal (eagle terminal) edt:0:eagle terminal hpplot:1:hp plotter PT-4214:2:printronix mvp PT-4215:3:fujitsu d12400 printer 4314:4:dt4314 terminal Sample /etc/gks/devices default:/dev/tty0:4310:::::edt graphics terminal edt:/dev/tty2:4310:::::edt graphics terminal tty:/dev/tty3:4310:::::edt graphics terminal plot::hpplot:lpr list=p5 -raw -delete :::::hp plotter print::dmp:lpr -raw -delete :::::printronix printer term:/dev/tty4:4314:::::dt4314 terminal T5:/dev/tty5:4310:::::dt4310 terminal T6:/dev/tty6:4314:::::dt4314 terminal Sample /etc/plotters 5.2 MPx/2000/3000 DIFFERENCES o Location of files: File Type 2000/3000 MPx plotters file /etc/plotters .GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS font files /etc/gks/font* .GRAF.ETC.GKS.FONT& device file /etc/gks/devices .GRAF.ETC.GKS.DEVICES help file /etc/grf/help .GRAF.ETC.GRF.HELP prompt file /etc/grf/prompts .GRAF.EDT.GRF.PROMPTS demo files /graphics/* .GRAPHICS.& executable files /bin/graph .Rxxx.SYS.GRAPH /bin/graphmaker .Rxxx.SYS.GRAPHMAKER security file /etc/level/GRF .ETC.LEVEL.GRF o Configure Support: The MPx configure utility will not maintain the plotters file as done in the 3.1A version on 7.2A on the 2000/3000. The user must use the editor (EDIT) to add, modify, or delete entries. o Data File Names SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg035 The MPx GRAPHMAKER will convert filenames to upper case. The 2000/3000 GRAPHMAKER will accept both lower and upper case. o PT-4201 150/300 LPM printer of the 2000/3000. The PT-4201 150/300 LPM printer is not supported on the 2000/3000 version of Business GRAPH because this version assumes that you have a DMP attached. Therefore, it sends out the escape sequences to change a DMP to mode 1 thus, causing the 150/300 LPM printer to print unintelligible information. 5.3 CURSOR CONTROL IN GRAPHMAKER The cursor control keys can be viewed by pressing the HELP key on your EDT or by pressing CTL - Z. The following are the cursor control keys for GRAPHMAKER: CTL - L Next cell to the right. CTL - H Backspace and next cell to the left. CTL - K Kick UP one cell. CTL - J Jump down one cell. CTL - W Return to the Menu Window. CTL - D Delete character. CTL - F Forward 1 character. CTL - Z Help screen. Backspace Non-destructive Backspace. 5.4 HELPFUL HINTS o The titles across the top of your data screen in GRAPHMAKER should be looked upon as sets of like data. The titles going down the left column of the data screen should be view upon as parts of a set. o Data for individual pie graphs should be entered in one column. o Data for individual line graphs should be entered in one row. o The following will clear a 4310-EDT graphics screen from BASIC: PRINT 'BO',$1B5A471B0C1B5A67$,'EO' o Pressing the ESC key and then DEL key on the EDT will clear a graphics screen. o To clear a 4314 graphics screen from the Keyboard use Function + CLEAR (located under the number 4 key). o To clear a 4314 graphics screen from BASIC use: PRINT 'ES","Zr", 6. MAI BUSINESS DATA MAI Business DATA has instant access to all the data in your system and gives it to you in any form you desire. You now have instant access to any information in your application files! SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg036 MAI Business DATA provides a common facility to extract information from files on your system and pass it to MAI Business WORD, MAI Business MATH and MAI Business GRAPH. The Decision Support System of MAI Business DATA, which includes Executive Query Manager and Report Writer, lets you take data from your files and sort them in any fashion prior to printing the information in a letter or graphing a picture. The Integrated Data Dictionary of MAI Business DATA allows your systems personnel to describe the data to be used by MAI OFFICE once, in one place, thus reducing data redundancy in simplifying maintenance requirements. You can also Mail-merge information using MAI Business DATA and Letter Generator feature of MAI Business WORD. 6.1 QUEUED LETTER GENERATION In order to provide the user with a way of generating mass mailings using the Letter Generation feature without tying up the terminal on which the mass mailing is being done, a new option has been added to Letter Generation. A ghost task can now process the mailing in background which will allow the terminal to be used for other purposes. This background processing is done as follows: If the Business WORD queue is started, immediately after the initial query has been done and all records have been selected for this mailing, the system will display the following prompt: ENTER 'CTL-I' TO QUEUE THE PRINTING OF THESE DOCUMENTS, OR 'CR' A CR will process the letter merge function on the screen and will tie up the terminal as in the past. Entry of 'CTL-I' will prompt the user: ENTER THE QUEUE PRIORITY (1-9): 6.1 (Cont.) This is the priority of the documents that are to be printed by the MAI OFFICE printing system. These documents will be prioritized along with all other Business WORD documents that have been queued. The default priority will be five (5). 6.2 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA The Business DATA module is restored on the 2000 using the name DSS for the module name. On the MPx system, the files will reside after the Business WORD files and will be restored with rest of the tape. Please see Business DATA User Guide (MBF #7557). ******************************************************** * * * BUSINESS DATA 3.2A REQUIRES DSS LEVEL 2.0 OR ABOVE * * * ******************************************************** SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg037 7. MAI BUSINESS MAIL Business MAIL is the part of MAI OFFICE that allows electronic mail to be sent between two or more local or remote systems. Business MAIL, through the use of X.25 and public networks, or LAN's allows MAI 2000's/3000's and MPx's to exchange messages using the mail feature of MAI Business EXEC. Sending mail to remote locations requires connection to a public or LAN network and the purchase of the proper communications software and hardware. 7.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MAIL 7.1.1 MPx Series To configure Business MAIL on the MPx systems, with an OS level of 8/9.6, then see the BOSS/VS MAGNET User Reference Guide (M6363). 7.1.2 Configuring the 2000/3000 Business MAIL is supported on the 2000/3000 through X.25 and/or LAN. Please read the File Transfer Facility (FTF) User Reference Manual (MBF #6352) and the BOSS/IX 7.2A Software Announcement for installing X.25 and/or LAN. 7.1.3 Starting MAI OFFICE and Configuring for MAIL The 2000/3000 requires a special procedure for starting MAI OFFICE when using Business MAIL. If you are not using a 2000/3000 system then refer to step 1 on page 45 to configure MAI OFFICE for MAIL on the MPx. The special procedure is a file called '/oms/emstartmo'. If this file doesn't exist, the following information will tell you how to create it. You will need to create the following command file for use at the command interpreter on the 2000/3000 to invoke MAI OFFICE. Please note that if you bring up basic and run "MS" you will not be able to use the MAIL portion of MAI OFFICE. For that reason you should always enter the MAI OFFICE system using the command file. The command file is created using the editor VED. The following information should be contained in the file: 7.1.3 (Cont.) cd /oms basic lib=/lib/bftf.lib -q pgm=MS -nr or a macro called 'mo': #b mo cd /oms;basic lib=/lib/bftf.lib -q pgm=MS -nr You also have to set up 2000/3000 user ID's so that you can log onto the 2000/3000. There are several ways that you can do this. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg038 A. You can set up an ID for each person who will be using the system. B. Or you can set up one ID which everyone will use to get onto the 2000/3000. If you use this method it is recommended that you not give this ID access to the command interpreter, instead you should use the second procedure given below to get them into the MAI OFFICE system. After selecting one of the methods given above, it is necessary to define the parameters for the ID or ID's which you are going to create. One of the parameters that must be defined is what initial program will be run when the user logs on. Below are several suggestions as to how this might be done. A. The ID (2000/3000 user ID) can be set up to take you directly to the 2000/3000 command interpreter. At the command prompt the user can invoke MAI OFFICE by typing: 'emstartmo' which is the command file defined in above. B. The ID can be set to take the user directly to MAI OFFICE. You do this by entering the following as the initial program: /bin/command,/oms/emstartmo. For further information see the documentation for setting up 2000/3000 user accounts. Using this method, the user logs onto the 2000/3000 and goes directly into MAI OFFICE and will then be required to log onto MAI OFFICE. When logging off of MAI OFFICE the user will be returned to the 2000/3000 log on screen (not to the command prompt). C. A menu item can be set to take them into MAI OFFICE when that option is selected. You can do that with the following procedure: 1. Add the option given below to the selected menu (this will probably be the 2000/3000 main menu which is 'top'). OFFICE -- MAI OFFICE 7.1.3 (Cont.) 2. The action step for this menu item is: /bin/command,/oms/emstartmo You should refer to the 2000/3000 user documenta- tion for defining menus if you do not know how to do this. There are 3 steps in configuring MAI OFFICE for remote mail. STEP 1: The following ID must be set up within MAI OFFICE. The information below assumes that you are familiar with MAI Business EXEC and menu system. If you are not, please refer to SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg039 the procedures given in the Business EXEC Users Guide (MBF #M0044) and MAI OFFICE MENU System Services Reference (MBF #M0063). Create an ID called MAIL with these parameters: On the General ID Information screen: NOTE: This ID is supplied by MAI OFFICE 3.2A. _______________________________________________________________________ | | | DESCRIPTION: ELECTRONIC MAIL SYSTEM ID INITIALS: MAIL | | PASSWORD: (defined by security manager) DEFAULT MENU SET: EP | | LOG: N MENU NAME: MAIN | | CONSOLE MODE? N PROGRAM: | |_______________________________________________________________________| Use the default parameters for the other fields on this screen. On the EXEC--Office Directory Parameters screen: PHONE NUMBER: EXTENSION: LOCATION: INTERACTIVE: I DEPARTMENT: ELECT. MAIL USAGE: Y ELECT. MAIL PRIORITY: N The fields which are left blank do not need to be defined but may be if you wish. They are not needed for the functioning of Business MAIL. The MAIL ID is a "bin" in which any in-tray messages are placed for which there is not a local ID. 7.1.3 (Cont.) STEP 2: You will have to set up MAI OFFICE ID's for all users who are going to be using MAI OFFICE. Follow the instructions found in the manuals for Business EXEC and Business MAIL. If you are upgrading your MAI OFFICE and already have ID's you will need to go into ID Create/Maintain for EXEC and give each user remote mail security (the last two fields shown above). Please note that you cannot do this if the public key has not been properly installed for MAIL. STEP 3: After you have installed all of MAI OFFICE, Business MAIL and the communications software you will need to request the directories for all remote sites in the network. You do this by selecting Remote Request--Office Dir. from the MP.MAIN menu in MAI OFFICE. Enter the name of each location and a request for their directory will be sent to that site. When the directory is received you will be informed by an acknowledgement in your in-tray. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg040 8. RELATED DOCUMENTATION The following is a list of documentation for MAI OFFICE: Manual_Number Title M0043 MAI Business WORD User and Reference Manuals M7552A MAI Business MATH User Manual M0078 MAI Business GRAPH User and Reference Manuals M0044 MAI Business EXEC User and Reference Manuals M0063 Menu and System Services Reference Manual and Presentation Services User Guide M0042 MAI Business DATA User Guide and MAI ORIGIN DSS User Reference Manual M7566 MAI OFFICE Quick Reference Guide M7567 Translation Utilities Reference Guide 9. PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS For MAI OFFICE 3.2A, certain hardware revision levels are required: Terminals DT-4309 Rev. E DT-4310 Rev. D DT-4312 Rev. K DT-4313 Rev. E DT-4314 Rev. C *08 Diablo_Printer Must have revision levels -009, -011, or -042 10. INSTALLATION FOR BOSS/VS AND BOSS/IX SYSTEMS Please read the installation instructions carefully before attempting installation. MAI OFFICE tapes will be distributed containing all modules of MAI OFFICE. All MAI OFFICE modules require a public key (except the printer system and Presentation Services). The public key is a number in hexadecimal notation which uniquely applies to that particular module of MAI OFFICE and that particular system. WITHOUT THE PROPER KEYS, MAI OFFICE WILL NOT RUN. The tape containing MAI OFFICE will be accompanied by a release memo listing a 'Public Key' for each MAI OFFICE module purchased by the user: MOC, MOD, MOW, MOE, MOM, MOP, MOS and MOG (MOG and GRF are equivalent). The modules MOP and MOS do not require a SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg041 public key. After installation of files and keys, please see instructions for each module elsewhere in this announcement for module specific installation instructions. The installation instructions are broken into two divisions: 1) Installation for BOSS/VS A) New Installation B) Upgrade 2) Installation for BOSS/IX A) New Installation B) Upgrade Please see the appropriate section for installation instructions. 10.1 BOSS/VS INSTALLATION 10.1.1 New installation The MAI OFFICE Tape contains all the data and program files necessary to begin using MAI OFFICE as soon as they are restored to disk via the SAVERESTORE utility. Most files will reside in the .OMS. node. Once all files are restored to disk, set the prefix to: (family).OMS. (If DSS has also been installed, then add: ',(family).ORIGIN.RXXX.PGM.,.ORIGIN.RXXX.DATA.' to the prefix. The public keys for the modules ordered must be installed before MAI OFFICE can be used. The .PS. node does not need to be included in the prefix. 10.1.1 (Cont.) STEP_1: The initial installation consists of restoring all files to the disk using SAVERESTORE. Mount the tape and enter the utility by entering SAVERESTORE, at the "!" prompt. Choose the proper tape drive and when the menu appears, choose option 2-"RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE". The options screen will appear. Use the options in figure 10-1 to answer the prompts. ______________________________________________________________________ | | | Figure 10-1 Tape Options-New Installation | | | | FILE TYPE (D/P/CR=ALL) : | | COMPARE (CR=Y/N) : | | DATE (MM/DD/YY) : | | TIME (HH:MM) : | | OUTPUT DEVICE (CR=VDT) : | | DELETE EXISTING FILES (CR=Y) : | | VERIFY (Y/CR=N) : | SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg042 | | | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N) : | | | |_____________________________________________________________________| Next the prompt displayed will be for the file specifier. Enter '.,(familyname).' where 'familyname' is the name of the family on which MAI OFFICE will reside. The files will begin restoring. Once the files have been restored, proceed to step 2. STEP_2: To install the keys, the procedure 'INSTALLMO' must be executed. At the command language prompt '!', enter 'INSTALLMO' as follows: !INSTALLMO. This procedure will copy all the security files to the system disk. It will not delete existing security files if they already exist on the system disk. Now the keys can be installed using the INSTALLKEY86A procedure (this procedure is similar to the /bin/install_key on the 2000). This procedure. and the security files will be under .ETC.LEVEL. node on the system disk. To install a key, type: INSTALLKEY86A xxx The module name is typed in place of the xxx. Enter the key and you will be asked to verify the key. A key must be installed for every module ordered. 10.1.1 (Cont.) NOTE: The security file for GRAPH is named GRF, not MOG. STEP_3: The Presentation Services module must be installed. To install execute the program .PS.INSTALL (i.e. !BASIC .PS.INSTALL). This program copies files from the user disk to the system family and system node. NOTE: During Operating System upgrades, this step will need to be repeated. If the user has O.S. levels 8.6A or 8.6B, they must copy the correct version of OMSREAD, OMSREAD86, to the system disk and replace the existing one. For example: (SYSDISK).R6B54.SYS.OMSREAD STEP_4: Installation is complete. To use MAI OFFICE, the user prefix must be set to "(familyname).OMS.". To access the Menu Builder, the prefix must also include "(system default family).PS.TOOLS.". The first time the user runs "MS" they will SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg043 automatically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. Refer to Section 10.4 for further instructions. There are a few steps that must be taken to set up the Word Processing Libraries and the operator ID's. For full details, please refer to Business WORD User Guide, manual number (MBF #M0043). Also refer to MENU System Services Reference Guide (MBF #M0063) for logon and security information. 10.1.2 Upgrade ***************************************************************** * * * PLEASE MAKE BACKUPS OF ALL CURRENT OMS OR OFFICE DATA FILES ! * * IF THE CONVERSION IS INTERRUPTED, BACKUPS WILL BE NEEDED TO * * RECOVER THE SYSTEM !!!!! * * * ***************************************************************** ***************************************************************** * * * MAKE SURE ALL DOCUMENTS IN WORD PROCESSING ARE FREE OF * * PROBLEMS. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TEXT FILE REBUILD BE USED * * TO REBUILD ALL TEXT FILES BEFORE CONVERSION !!!! * * * ***************************************************************** 10.1.2 (Cont.) Verify what level of OMS or OFFICE the user is currently on before starting the conversion. Please use the following steps to upgrade a current installation: STEP_1: Make a current backup of the entire MAI OFFICE (or OMS) on tape or disk, including (familyname).ETC.LEVEL. files. STEP_2: First the new programs files must be restored. Mount the tape and enter the utility by entering SAVERESTORE, at the "!" prompt. Choose the proper tape drive and when the menu appears, choose option 2-"RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE". The options screen will appear. Use the options in figure 10-2 to answer the prompts. __________________________________________________________________________. | |. | Figure 10-2 Tape Options | | |. | FILE TYPE (D/P/CR=ALL) :

<== PLEASE NOTE "P" | | COMPARE (CR=Y/N) : | | DATE (MM/DD/YY) : | | TIME (HH:MM) : | | OUTPUT DEVICE (CR=VDT) : | | DELETE EXISTING FILES (CR=Y) : | | VERIFY (Y/CR=N) : | | |. | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N) : | |__________________________________________________________________________|. Next the prompt displayed will be for the file SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg044 specifier. Enter ".,(familyname)." where "familyname" is the name of the family on which MAI OFFICE will reside. The files will begin restoring. Once the files have been restored, proceed to step 3. STEP_3: All the new data files must be restored. Rewind the tape using option 7-"REWIND TAPE". When the menu appears, choose option 2-"RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE". The options screen will appear. Use the options in figure 10-3 to answer the prompts. If the user has O.S. levels 8.6A or 8.6B, they must copy. the correct version of OMSREAD, OMSREAD86, to the system disk and replace the existing one. For example: (SYSDISK).R6B54.SYS.OMSREAD 10.1.2 (Cont.) __________________________________________________________________________. | |. | Figure 10-3 Tape Options | | |. | FILE TYPE (D/P/CR=ALL) : <== PLEASE NOTE "D" | | COMPARE (CR=Y/N) : | | DATE (MM/DD/YY) : | | TIME (HH:MM) : | | OUTPUT DEVICE (CR=VDT) : (or system printer) | | DELETE EXISTING FILES (CR=Y) : <== PLEASE NOTE "N" | | VERIFY (Y/CR=N) : | | |. | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N) : | | |. |__________________________________________________________________________|. The next prompt to be displayed will be for the file specifier. Enter ".,(familyname)." where "familyname" is the family on which MAI OFFICE will reside. The files will begin restoring. Once the files have been restored, proceed to step 4. STEP_4: Next, certain data files must be restored from the tape that also existed from the previous release. These are data files that have changed from the last release. Rewind the tape using option 7-"REWIND TAPE". When the menu appears, choose option 2-"RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE". The options screen will appear. Use the options in figure 10-4 to answer the prompts. ___________________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 10-4 Tape Options | | |. | FILE TYPE (D/P/CR=ALL) : <== PLEASE NOTE "D" | | COMPARE (CR=Y/N) : | | DATE (MM/DD/YY) : | | TIME (HH:MM) : | | OUTPUT DEVICE (CR=VDT) : | | DELETE EXISTING FILES (CR=Y) : <== PLEASE NOTE "Y" | | VERIFY (Y/CR=N) : | SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg045 | |. | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N) : | | |. |__________________________________________________________________________|. 10.1.2 (Cont.) Next the prompt displayed will be for the file specifier. Enter the following: >.OMS.MSFI0&,(familyname).OMS.MSFI0& >.OMS.WPHF&,(familyname).OMS.WPHF& >.OMS.WPDM02,(familyname).OMS.WPDM02 The data files will be restored. STEP_5: To install the keys, the procedure 'INSTALLMO' must be executed. Set the prefix as follows at the command prompt '!': !PREFIX (familyname).OMS. NOTE: If .ETC.LEVEL. files exist on the system from a previous OMS/OFFICE release (not 3.2A), backup and delete before executing the 'INSTALLMO' procedure. At the command language prompt '!', enter 'INSTALLMO' as follows: !INSTALLMO. This procedure will copy all the security files to the system disk. It will not delete existing security files if they already exist on the system disk. The 'INSTALLMO' procedure also copies the .OMS.PS. files to .PS. Now the keys can be installed using the 'INSTALLKEY86A' procedure which is similar to the /bin/install_key procedure on the 2000/3000. The 'INSTALLKEY86A' program and the security files will be under .ETC.LEVEL. node on the system disk. To install the key, type: !INSTALLKEY86A xxx The module name replaces the xxx. Enter the key and you will be asked to verify the key. A key must be installed for every module ordered. NOTE: The security file for GRAPH is named GRF, not MOG. STEP_6: The Presentation Services module must be installed. Execute the program .PS.INSTALL (i.e. !BASIC .PS.INSTALL). This program copies files from the user disk to the system default family system node. 10.1.2 (Cont.) NOTE: During Operating System upgrades this step will need to be repeated. STEP_7: If MAI Business WORD has been installed and the SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg046 customer has a previous version of either OMS WP or MAI Business WORD, a conversion must be done. Please see section 10.3 for the conversion instructions. STEP_8: Installation is complete. To use MAI OFFICE, the user prefix must be set to "(familyname).OMS.". To access the Menu Builder, the prefix must also include "(system default family).PS.TOOLS.". The first time the user runs "MS" they will auto- matically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. For further instructions refer to Section 10.4. There are a few steps that must be taken to set up the Word Processing Libraries and the operator ID's. For full details, please refer to Business WORD User Guide, manual number (MBF #7550A). Also refer to MENU System Services Reference Guide (MBF #7554A) for logon and security information. 10.2 BOSS/IX INSTALLATION 10.2.1 New Installation Before MAI OFFICE can be used, it must be installed on the fixed disk. The installation procedure should be run in single user mode--it is assumed that the system has been booted and is rooted on the root partition. The MAI OFFICE programs and data files will reside on a single MCS cartridge or 1/2 inch tape. Figure 10-5 shows the list of MAI OFFICE module names. __________________________________________________________________________. | |. | Figure 10-5 MAI OFFICE Module Names | | |. | MOW - Business WORD | | MOC - Business MATH | | MOD - Business DATA | | MOE - Business EXEC | | MOM - Business MAIL | | MOG - Business GRAPH | | *MOP - Printer System | | *MOS - Menu System | | *EPS - Presentation Services | | DSS - Decision Support Software (Delivered with the O.S.) | | |. | * = Must Be Installed | |__________________________________________________________________________|. 10.2.1 (Cont.) The public key should be entered during the installation procedure after the corresponding program files have been installed (i.e., the public key for EXEC should be entered after the MOE program files have been installed). WITHOUT THE PROPER KEYS, MAI OFFICE WILL NOT RUN. NOTE: The security file for GRAPH is named GRF, not SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg047 MOG. STEP_1: Insert the cartridge containing MAI OFFICE into the MCS drive and turn the lock lever or insert 1/2 inch tape into the streamer. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: install dd MOP MOW xxx xxx ... press the RETURN key. Where dd stands for 'ts' if you are in- stalling from 1/2 inch MTS, or 'cs' if you are installing from 1/4 inch MCS. The xxx is the three character name of each module that has been ordered (see figure 10-5). The program searches for each module on the MCS cartridge, or 1/2 inch tape; displays its label, and begins copying files. The program displays the name of each file as it is copied. Enter the public key for that particular module. When all modules have been installed, the program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> STEP_2: Only program files have been installed. The data files must be restored to disk. WARNING: DO NOT ENTER MULTI-USER MODE BEFORE PROCEEDING, OR THE '/tmp/modata' FILE WILL BE ERASED. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: /tmp/modata Then press the RETURN key. 10.2.1 (Cont.) The '/tmp/modata' is an executable file containing a list of data files needed for first time installations of MAI OFFICE. You will be asked whether each data file should be restored unless you select on the first file, the "off" option -- which means install all files in the filelist. Data files are copied. The program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg048 STEP 3: If you want to use MAI Business DATA, you must. ved the file '/oms/startmo' to look like this: cd /oms /bin/basic -q s=64 pgm=MS -nr 'prefix "/oms /usr/origin /origin/r21a /PS /PS/tools"' To start MAI OFFICE, a procedure called 'startmo' located in the '/oms' directory can be used. Simply type '/oms/startmo' at the ADMIN prompt. When the prompt, "PLEASE HAVE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR SET DATE FORMAT (CR)" appears, the user should go into the OS utilities and set the Date and Time, then RUN "MS". The first time the user RUNs "MS" they will automatically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. Refer to Section 10.4 for further instructions. 10.2.2 Upgrade installation **************************************************************** * * * PLEASE MAKE BACKUPS OF ALL CURRENT OMS OR OFFICE DATA FILES !* * IF THE CONVERSION IS INTERRUPTED, BACKUPS WILL BE NEEDED TO * * RECOVER THE SYSTEM !!!!! * * * **************************************************************** **************************************************************** * * * MAKE SURE ALL DOCUMENTS IN WORD PROCESSING ARE FREE OF * * PROBLEMS. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TEXT FILE REBUILD BE USED * * TO REBUILD ALL TEXT FILES BEFORE CONVERSION !!!! * * * **************************************************************** 10.2.2 (Cont.) The installation procedure should be run in single user mode--it is assumed that the system has been booted and is rooted on the root partition. Figure 10-6 shows the list of MAI OFFICE module names. __________________________________________________________________________. | |. | Figure 10-6 MAI OFFICE Module Names | | |. | MOW - Business WORD | | MOC - Business MATH | | MOD - Business DATA | | MOE - Business EXEC | | MOM - Business MAIL | | MOG - Business GRAPH | | *MOP - Printer System | | *MOS - Menu System | | *EPS - Presentation Services | | DSS - Decision Support Software (Delivered with the O.S.) | SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg049 | |. | * = Must Be Installed | |__________________________________________________________________________|. STEP_1: Insert the cartridge containing MAI OFFICE into the MCS drive and turn the lock lever, or if 1/2 inch tape insert into the streamer. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: install dd MOP MOW xxx xxx ... Then press the RETURN key. Where dd stands for 'ts' if you are in- stalling from 1/2 inch tape and 'cs' if you are installing from 1/4 inch tape. The xxx is the three-character name of each module that has been ordered (see figure 10-5). The program searches for each module on the MCS cartridge, or 1/2 inch tape; displays its label, and begins copying files. The program displays the name of each file as it is copied. Enter the public key for that particular module. When all modules have been installed, the program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> 10.2.2 (Cont.) ****************************************************** * * * WARNING: DO NOT EXECUTE THE /tmp/modata FILE. THIS * * PROCEDURE WILL DESTROY DATA FILES !!!!!!! * * * ****************************************************** STEP_2: The NEW data files must be restored. This should be done using trestore: ADMIN>trestore name=setname dups=skip -v Replace 'setname' in the above example with each setname being installed. For example: MOWSET, MOESET, MODSET, etc. STEP_3: Some data files which already exist must also be restored from the tape because of changes made to the file stuctures. Use trestore to restore these from the tape. ADMIN>trestore name=MOSSET /oms/MSFI00 -v ADMIN>trestore name=MOWSET /oms/WPHF* -v ADMIN>trestore name=MOWSET /oms/WPDM02 -v SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg050 STEP_4: If MAI Business WORD has been installed and the customer has a previous version of word processing (either OMS 7.3.0 WP or MAI Business WORD 3.1A), then a conversion must be done. Please see section 10.3 for the conversion instructions. STEP 5: If you want to use MAI Business DATA, you must ved the file '/oms/startmo' to look like this: cd /oms /bin/basic -q s=64 pgm=MS -nr 'prefix "/oms /usr/origin /origin/r21a /PS /PS/tools"' To start MAI OFFICE, a procedure called 'startmo' located in the '/oms' directory can be used. Simply type '/oms/startmo' at the ADMIN prompt. When the prompt, "PLEASE HAVE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR SET DATE FORMAT (CR)" appears, the user hsould go into the OS utilities and set the Date and Time, then RUN "MS". The first time the user RUNs "MS" they will automatically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. Refer to Section 10.4 for further instructions. 10.3 CONVERSION TO MAI OFFICE 3.2A There are two conversions possible. The first conversion is from Dataword and the second conversion is from MAI OFFICE 3.1A or OMS levels 8.3.1/7.3.0 and level 8.2.3. The following sections describe the conversion procedures. The first section describes the MAI OFFICE/OMS conversion (section 10.3.1). The second section describes the conversion from Dataword to MAI Business WORD 3.2A (section 10.3.2.). 10.3.1 Conversion from previous levels of OFFICE/OMS In order to use MAI Business WORD, previous data files need to be converted to MAI OFFICE 3.2A Business WORD. NOTE: No need to run conversion for Word Processing from OMS 8.2.3 to OMS 8.3.1 or 3.1A OFFICE conversion OMS2BW now does the conversion. You still need to run the conversion form 8.2.3 OMS Executive Functions to 8.3.1 OMS Executive Functions pgm EFSY20 creates new format for: EFOD00 EFSO00 EFTS00 EFTD00 NOTE: The conversion will be performed on all text files that follow the office scheme i.e. WPTF0x SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg051 where x= apha numeric code 1,A-Z,a-z therefore be sure that the directory path will not include any new files that may have been created with OFFICE 3.2A. ***************************************************************** * * * PLEASE MAKE BACKUPS OF ALL CURRENT OMS OR OFFICE DATA FILES ! * * IF THE CONVERSION IS INTERRUPTED, BACKUPS WILL BE NEEDED TO * * RECOVER THE SYSTEM !!!!! * * * ***************************************************************** Enter BASIC by typing BASIC at the '!' prompt on BOSS/VS or typing 'basic s=128' on BOSS/IX. At the '>' prompt, enter 'RUN "OMS2BW"'. The title line will be displayed and the following prompt will appear: CONVERT OPERATOR ID PARAMETERS MASTER FILE (MSOP00)? (Y/N/END) 10.3.1 (Cont.) Enter a 'Y' to convert, 'N' to not convert or 'END' to stop all conversion. NOTE: All files should be converted before use. If not, MAI Business WORD will fail to operate properly. Enter a 'Y' and conversion will begin. Next, the following prompt will be displayed: CONVERT DOCUMENT HEADER FILE (WPDM00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' and conversion will begin. The next prompt displayed will be: CONVERT WP ID PARAMETER FILE (WPID00) ? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' and the conversion will begin. Next, the prompt: CONVERT TEXT FILES (WPPS01 & WPTF0x)? (Y/N/END) will be displayed. The next prompt will be: SPECIFY CURRENT OMS VERSION (1 -- 8.2.3, 2 -- 8.3.1 or 3.1A, END) If the current release is OMS 8.2.3 (BOSS/VS) then enter a '1'. If the current release is OMS 8.3.1 (BOSS/VS) or 7.3.0 (BOSS/IX) or MAI OFFICE 3.1A, (for BOSS/VS and BOSS/IX) then enter a '2'. The conversion of text files will begin. The name of each text file will be displayed as it is converted. After conversion, it is highly recommended that you SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg052 execute Text File Rebuild in MAI Business WORD to verify and insure integrity of the converted documents. Conversion to MAI Business WORD is now complete. Please see the appropriate section to continue your installation. 10.3.2 Conversion of DataWord to Business WORD This conversion is to transfer text stored in DataWord II format to the new MAI OFFICE 3.2A Business WORD product. 10.3.2 (Cont.) *********************************************************** * * * ALL DATAWORD DOCUMENTS MUST BE FREE OF ANY PROBLEMS FOR * * CONVERSION. IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT DOCUMENT * * REPAIR BE USED ON ALL LIBRARIES PRIOR TO CONVERSION !! * * * *********************************************************** To run this conversion the user must have DataWord level 3.0/3.1. If the DataWord software is on any level before 3.0 then a conversion to 3.0/3.1 must be done prior to running this conversion from DataWord to Business WORD. To initiate the conversion program the user types the command RUN "DW2BW" from BASIC mode. The screen in figure 10-7 will be displayed to the user who will then supply the necessary information. _______________________________________________________________________________ ___ | | Figure 10-7 Conversion Screen | | | MAI BASIC FOUR, INC. | | (TIME) CONVERT DATAWORD FILES TO BUSINESS WORD (DATE) | | | | SOURCE NODE: | | | Business WORD LIBRARY NODE: | | | DOCUMENT FILE NAMES (S=SELECTIVE): | | | TEXT FILE CODE: | | | PRINT LOG NOW OR LATER (N/L): | | SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg053 | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N)?: | | | CTL-I=CR=Default/CTL-II=back up one prompt/CTL-III=All defaults/CTL-IV=Exit | |_______________________________________________________________________________ ___| The SOURCE NODE is the node name under which the DataWord document files reside. The default is ().DWDOC. The Business WORD LIBRARY NODE is the name of the node under which the user wants to convert Business WORD files. The default is ().OMS. 10.3.2 (Cont.) For the prompt: DW DOCUMENT FILE NAMES (S=SELECTIVE) the user can enter either one of the control keys or "S" for selective. Entry of "S", will cause a separate query to be displayed after the user has responded to all of the prompts on this screen. This query will ask for all of the DataWord document file names that the user wishes to convert. The default is all DataWord document files under the SOURCE NODE. TEXT FILE CODE is the Business WORD library char- acter (e.g. by entering 'n' all the documents converted will be kept in the library WPTF0n). The possible replies are characters A to Z. There is no default for this query. If a library already exists for the given TEXT FILE CODE (i.e. WPTF0n), an error message will be shown and the user will be asked to enter another code. The user has an option to print the log file during the conversion or after the conversion is complete. By replying 'N' to PRINT LOG NOW OR LATER the program will print the status of the converted document on the printer as that document is converted. A reply of 'L' to this prompt will cause the program to create a serial file with the name 'CONVTn' (where 'n' is the TEXT FILE CODE) and the status of each converted document will be written into this file so the user can get the printout later. The default to this prompt is N (NOW). After the user answers the replies to the queries and if the user wants to convert only selected DataWord files (i.e. 'S' was entered for DW DOCUMENT FILE NAMES), the screen will be cleared and the user will be asked to enter the names of the DataWord files to convert with the following prompt: ENTER DataWord FILE NAMES. RETURN FOR END The user will key in the DataWord file names. If an entered DataWord file does not exist, the user will be informed with a message and that entry will not be accepted. If the user enters a file name that SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg054 had already been entered a message will also be displayed and the duplicate entry will not be accepted. Once the user has entered all document files to be converted and has pressed RETURN they will be given an option to add or delete file names from the list just entered. After the user confirms that the list is correct the following question will appear: DO YOU WANT TO DELETE DATAWORD DOCUMENT FILE(S) AFTER THEY ARE SUCCESSFULLY CONVERTED? (Y/N) 10.3.2 (Cont.) With a response of "Y" to this question the con- version will erase each DataWord document file from the disk once it has been successfully converted to Business WORD. If a "N" was entered for this question then all DataWord document files will remain on the disk through the conversion until the user removes them on their own. After responding to this question the conversion begins. DataWord documents are allowed to have a name as long as twenty characters. Business WORD will only allow a six character document name so the converted documents will be named FLxxxx, where xxxx is a sequential number. The DataWord document name will now be converted to the document description field within Business WORD so that the user has a mapping of DataWord document name to the FLxxxx document name within Business WORD. The description field within DataWord will not be converted. Conversion of DataWord documents to MAI OFFICE Business WORD documents will keep the document format intact so the overall appearance of the Business WORD document converted from DataWord will be the same as the user saw it with the DataWord product. In addition, all attributes (bold, underline, superscript and subscript) will be converted from DataWord to Business WORD. These attributes will have a different visual appearance in Business WORD. During the conversion the header and footer text in the DataWord documents will be converted as text that will become part of the body of the document in Business WORD. This text will appear within brackets ("[]") to distinguish it from other text. Headers will be placed before the text of the paragraph that it was associated with in DataWord and footers will be placed after the text of a paragraph that it was associated with. This header/footer will appear only on the one page where the header/footer began and not on every page thereafter as it would have been printed by DataWord. After the conversion has completed the user will need to manipulate this header/footer text within Business WORD by either deleting it or placing it within a header or footer with the Business WORD functions. This may be done by SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg055 SELECTing the appropriate header/footer text and using the option to create either a header or a footer. Footnotes will also be converted as part of the normal text of the body of the document and will be placed at the end of the footer. 10.3.2 (Cont.) The Summary and Table of Contents information entered in a DataWord document will not be converted since Business WORD does not support these functions. The default tab settings in the document format (those that a user will see if they use COMMAND + FORMAT in the DataWord editor) of the DataWord document will be converted as the tab settings in the Business WORD document. The other tab settings associated with individual paragraphs within the DataWord document will not be converted. If the right margin of a DataWord paragraph is more than 132 the text will be re-formatted with a right margin of 132. No text will be lost but tabular information may have to be rearranged once converted to Business WORD. During the conversion of DataWord II document files the conversion program will calculate the space required to move the DataWord text from the entire document file to the Business WORD library file. If the entire document file contents cannot be converted to this Business WORD library due to lack of available space the program will log this fact in the log file, abort the conversion of this document file and continue the conversion process with the next document file. (Note: The Text File Library will be defined with 200000 records, 10000 initial records and 1000 growth. It is estimated that this is enough to convert approximately 170 normal documents that are five pages in length and sixty lines per page. If the user has more than 170 documents to convert in all of their DataWord document files, they should plan to convert these document files in groups that do not exceed the 170 document limit. The following is an explanation of the various status messages that may appear on the conversion log report: SUCCESSFUL The document has been converted successfully. DOC OPN ERR There was an error in opening a document while testing for availability of file space for this particular DataWord document file. The conversion of this DataWord document file is not undertaken and conversion of the next document file SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg056 begins. 10.3.2 (Cont.) NO SPACE There is not enough file space for this DataWord document file to be converted. Conversion of this document file is not done. In this case, the 'DWDOC' column on the log report will contain the DataWord document file name rather than a document name. Both cases of DOC OPN ERR and NO SPACE must be handled by the operator performing the conversion. In the case of NO SPACE another MAI OFFICE library must be used to convert the remaining DataWord document files. 10.4 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE The international ID parameter maintenance program (MSMM40) will automatically be run the first time a user runs "MS" after an international or domestic installation. After the user runs "MS", the prompt: "INTERNATIONAL PARAMETERS ARE NOT SET UP (CR)" will appear. This program allows the MAI OFFICE product to be modified in certain areas to conform to a customer's special needs. There are two distinct sets of parameters that a customer may change: SET ONE: Amount Format Insert Code Characters Overprint Character Hyphenation Character Telephone Format Sign Symbol Spaces ending a sentence SET TWO: Date Format Date Separator Time Format Time Separator Currency Code Position of Currency Code SET ONE contains options which are global for the MAI OFFICE product. For example, if the telephone format is set to international, then all MAI OFFICE users will have their telephone users unformatted (see below for more detail). CAUTION: Once this set of parameters has been modified the system will not allow them to be changed. SET TWO contains options which are user independent. As an example, two different users on the same MAI OFFICE system may use different date and/or time formats. A complete description of each option and use is given below. 10.4.1 SET ONE OPTIONS Amount Format options - 1. #,###,##0.00 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg057 2. #.###.##0,00 3. #B###B##0,00 B=blank These format masks will allow a user to present numeric data in the form that is acceptable for his or her country. Option '1' is most commonly used in the United States while options '2' and '3' are used in Europe. Insert Code Characters options: "<>", "[]", " " The braces ("[]") currently used in MAI OFFICE to indicate insert codes are not available in all ISO character sets. Therefore, the user will now have the ability to select characters that are in the character set that they would like to use. Overprint Character options: any character Like the insert code, the backslash ("\") used as an overprint character in the present MAI OFFICE is not available in all character sets. This option lets the user specify a different character to be used as the overprint character. NOTE: Overprint character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Hyphenation Character options: any character Same as the Overprint Character. NOTE: This is the character used to separate the word by syllables for hyphenation in the document, IT IS NOT the character used during the printing process to hyphenate a word (usually a '-'). Also the hyphenation character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Telephone Format options: D=Domestic, I=International 10.4.1 (Cont.) The domestic option will format all entered telephone numbers in the form, (AAA)PPP-NNNN where: AAA= area code (option field), PPP= prefix, and NNNN=number. European telephone numbers are not formatted the same way and may require entry of more than ten digits so if the "I" option is chosen, no special formatting or input validation will be done. This field will allow up to 15 characters in any form when using the "I" option. Sign Symbol options: 1. "CR/DR" 2. "+/-" 3. "()" SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg058 In the United States the CR or DR is used to denote positive or negative amounts. In Europe it is more common to use a "+" or "-" instead. With this option, the user may select the notation desired. Spaces ending a sentence options: 1 or 2 In the United States a punctuation symbol and two spaces are used to denote the end of a sentence. In. most other countries the punctuation is followed by only one space at the end of the sentence. This option allows the user to select their preference. 10.4.2 SET TWO OPTIONS Date Format options: 1. MMDDYY 2. DDMMYY 3. YYMMDD In addition to the (MMDDYY) format, two new formats have been added for the user to choose from. Date Separator options: any character The user may choose to see the date displayed in a format other than MM/DD/YY. With this option the user may now have dates presented like MM.DD.YY or MM-DD-YY. Time Format options: D=Domestic, I=International 10.4.1 (Cont.) The user may now select to have the time displayed using a twelve-hour clock (U.S.) or a twenty-four hour clock (International). Time Separator options: ".", ":", "N"=Null With this option the user may see the hours and minutes separated with different options. Currency Code options: any four alpha characters Previously, certain amounts assumed dollar values and displayed the dollar symbol ($) in front of them. The user may now select the characters that will be used as the currency symbol. Position of Currency Code options: L=LEFT, R=RIGHT United States dollars are displayed with the currency symbol to the left of the actual amount (i.e. $1.98). This is not always true in other countries where the currency symbol may appear on the left or the right SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg059 of the actual amount. With this option the user may select their preference. A. DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS Listed below are the minimal disk requirements for MAI OFFICE: Module Size_(in_MB) Business WORD 13.7 Business GRAPH 0.6 Business MATH 1.1 Business EXEC 3.7 Business DATA 8.5 Business MAIL 0.5 Presentation Services/Menu System _ 2.2 _ 30.3 ORIGINATOR: Elaine Titus SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB005 Pg060 FIB 00006 08/31/89 *** Notes and Cautions on MAI Office 3.2A [ WPS 457R ] *** MAI OFFICE 3.2A has been released for the BOSS/VS (MPx systems) and the BOSS/IX (2000/2500/3000/4000 systems). This release contains many enhancements and problem fixes. MAI OFFICE 3.2A requires MAI ORIGIN 2.0 or above for Letter Generation. For details of this release and for installation and upgrade instructions, refer to the MAI OFFICE 3.2A Software Announcement #154. NOTES & CAUTIONS FOR BOSS/VS (MPx SYSTEMS) Some items to be aware of both prior to and following installation of MAI OFFICE 3.2A on the BOSS/VS systems. 1) All documents archived on prior releases of OMS/OFFICE must be de-archived before upgrading to MAI OFFICE 3.2A. 2) After installation has been completed when the user first does the >RUN "MS", a message will occur: "INVALID DEFAULT OR MENU SET IN MSOP00" A. FIX: If user cannot CR beyond message without being released: Use !DIR to verify (familyname).OMS.PS.MSMFxx.ENG files are on the disk. If they are not, use !SAVERESTORE to restore from the MAI OFFICE tape. After the above files are on the disk: Copy (familyname).OMS.PS.& to (systemdisk).PS.& Again do the !BASIC .PS.INSTALL procedure as described in the Installation Instructions of Software Announcement #154. B. FIX: If user can CR beyond message to access MAI OFFICE: Go to SS.MAIN, Reports Option. From the sub-menu choose the Operator ID Report. After selecting a printer, a report will print listing all ID's general information. Check the Default and Menu items for incorrect names and blank spaces. Change all incorrect menu sets and menu names in the Operator ID Create/Maintain option under item 1. General ID Information Maintenance. 3) The MAI OFFICE sign on screen loops to 'CR TO LOGON', then to the ID screen, then back. Problem: MSFI00 file is released on the tape with too few records. Fix: Increase size to 512 records. Run this program: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB006 Pg001 10 OPEN (1)"MSFI00" 20 DIM X$(400,$20$) 30 LET I=258 40 WRITE RECORD (1,IND=I)X$ 50 LET I=I+1 60 IF I>260 CLOSE (1) ELSE GOTO 40 4) For MPx systems, the OMS2BW program should be revision level *12C in statement 30. NOTES & CAUTIONS FOR BOSS/VS (MPx SYSTEMS) o OFFICE: Arrow keys conflict between GRAPH and WORD. o EXEC: Appointments are not displayed correctly in 'FOURTEEN DAYS AT A GLANCE'. o EXEC: Appointment Slips require 132 columns but print in 80 columns. o EXEC: Calendar Slips start printing in column 8 from Batch Print with PT-4215 configured as T41. o EXEC: Error 43 in EFCA47 at line 1220 when using 1299 as MMDD format in 'Display Month'. o EXEC: Error 47 in EFMF11 at line 2035 if 'D' or 'd' is input instead of 'D#' or 'd#' for synonym delete. o EXEC: Entering 'ESC' during printing of a message file report returns an error 36. o MAIL: Wrong default date for 'TO DATE' prompt for REMINDERS causes a 'DATE RANGE INVALID' error. workaround: Inputting the current system date at the 'TO DATE' prompt. For 'Batch Printing', 'ALL': Reminders will not print due to this error. o WORD: Library Move report is not printed when prompted for the report. o WORD: Text Select in a 132 column document using the express right arrow key will send cursor to home position. o WORD: Entering 'Y' at 'Abort Prompt' does not abort if trying to print to a non-existent slave printer. workaround: Ensure that the slave printer cable is attached. o WORD: Merging a data file does not cut pages to defined number of lines. workaround: Repagination of document will cut the pages correctly. o WORD: If the user has a document with one sentence, preceeded and followed by a blank line, and the user attempts to use the back sentence movement key, the second time it is used, it causes blank lines to be placed in a document up to the page size from Security Parameters. If the user has a page size of 9999 lines, this could cause a pause long enough to be interpreted as a terminal hang. o. WORD: If a user archives an 80 column document and de-archives the 80 column document into a 132 column library and then prints that same document, it will print double-spaced because a $8A$ character is left in the document. workaround: Copy the document into an 80 column library, or do a text file rebuild on the library. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB006 Pg002 o WORD: If the user goes to create a header, footer or paragraph, and the message 'NO MORE ROOM IN PARAGRAPH FILE' or 'NO MORE ROOM IN MASTERFILE' is returned, both the paragraph file (WPPF01) and the masterfile (WPPS00) must be expanded. workaround: To expand the paragraph file, use Text File Rebuild, following the steps for text file rebuild, except enter a 'P' for the paragraph file instead of 'D' for the document file. You may then expand the file. To expand the masterfile, use the system utilities. 2000/2500/3000/4000 INSTALLATION NOTES In preparing for your installation, please note the following items reported from the field. ********************************************************************* * ***************************************************************** * * * * * * * MAI OFFICE 3.2A MUST BE INSTALLED IN SINGLE USER MODE! * * * * * * * ***************************************************************** * ********************************************************************* 1) Verify that you have the correct tape with the released version of MAI OFFICE 3.2A. Do this by restoring the program, OMS2BW, from the tape. Load the program and list statement 30. The release level should be 3.2A *25. If it is any other level, do not go any further. Call Product Support or Customer Relations. 2) If the user has archived any documents while on previous levels of OMS/OFFICE, de-archive the documents before following the update instructions. 3) If you are doing an update rather than a new installation, add one more file to STEP 3 of the Software Announcement #154. That file is the output. device file, WPPU00, which can be found in MOWSET. After installation is complete, you will need to go into Word Processing Printer Maintenance and set up the users printers again. 4) Do not ved the /oms/startmo file to include Origin until the product is installed. If you do, error 17's will occur. The prefix list order must have /oms before the /origin. The /PS and /PS/tools should follow /origin. PLEASE SEE PAGE 58 OR 60 OF SOFTWARE ANNOUNCEMENT #154. 5) If error 12's occur when trying to go into MAI OFFICE, verify that . /oms/*.ENG files were moved to /PS. If these files are still in /oms/*.ENG, they must be moved to /PS: ADMIN>move /oms/*.ENG /PS -v 6) Before going into MAI OFFICE either using /oms/startmo or running MS, load MSIT10, increase the start size to 256 in statement 1035. 7) Load MSDISPLAY, change the following statements as below: 3429 IF DBPORT > 0 THEN CLOSE(DBPORT) 3430 IF STATPORT > 0 THEN CLOSE(STATPORT) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB006 Pg003 8) After installation, if you run the program OMS2BW, answer 'N' to converting the MSFI00 file. This is unnecessary since the file was restored from the tape. The program will loop if you answer 'Y' to this question. 9) If your conversion is aborted for any reason, reinstall the customer's OMS/OFFICE files from their backup tape: WPDM00 WPDL00 WPPS00 WPPS01 WPTF0x (x stands for the text file character or number) Delete all WPTF0& files which were converted or partially converted to MAI OFFICE 3.2A. Run OMS2BW again, answer 'Y' to convert WPDM00, and 'Y' to convert WPPS01 and WPTF0x. Answer 'N' to all other questions except the last one regarding what level is being converted. o OFFICE: No more than 32 terminals can be used with MAI OFFICE. workaround: Increase the number of bytes per record in MSTI00 to 1000. o OFFICE: On 2000 systems between 1.25MB and 1.5MB memory is required with 7.4A and MAI OFFICE 3.2A. o EXEC: No headings are displayed when using 'Personal Telephone Directory Maintenance'. o EXEC: All non-slaved printers begin printing Acknowledgements in the wrong column. o EXEC: Batch Print: Output to a PT-4211 or PT-4215 is printed incorrectly at 15 characters per inch. o EXEC: The PT-4206 will print one 'L' after printing an Acknowledgement from the In-Tray Batch Print. o EXEC: In-Tray (F3 - Presentation Services 'soft' function key) incorrectly. displays the terminal number where the OFFICE ID is busy. o EXEC: Terminal Assignment: TF is the top limit; T10 or above cannot be entered. o MAIL: Check In-Tray message is not immediately displayed on messages sent from an MPx system to a 2000/2500/3000/4000 system. o WORD: Form Maintenance: Hard copy starts with page 2. o WORD: Form Maintenance: Cannot create a form over 999 lines in length. o WORD: An error 27 will follow an error 65 (bad file integrity) in document library functions. workaround: Run 'frepair'utility to fix the file with bad integrity. o WORD: LSRS printer driver will insert an extra line at vertical spacing commands [PV12], [PV16] OR [PV24]. o WORD: Document Directory: The second '---' line on the listing prints incorrectly. o WORD: When two users create documents with the same name at the same time, the first user to exit their document will get the document; the other user will lose his data. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB006 Pg004 o WORD: CTL K, top-of-page, redisplays the first screen of SELECTed text incorrectly in NORMAL mode. o WORD: Block Select: Using the express key after the first SELECT in 132 column documents does not work o WORD: Line Restore: Only restores text up to the last word deleted. o WORD: Document System Reconstruct: An error 31 occurs with very large documents. o DATA: Letter Generation: Garbage is left on the screen after changing the user sequence. o GRAPH: The security check message is displayed too fast so it cannot be read. o GRAPH: Drawing graphs with an incorrect default in the /etc/plotters file will cause the DT-4310 and DT-4314 to hang. workaround: Check the /etc/plotters file for a correct default device. TERMINAL NOTES o Revision levels for the terminals used with MAI OFFICE 3.2A should be: DT-4309 - REV. E DT-4310 - REV. D DT-4312 - REV. K - Has the protocol setting for the printer port. DT-4313 - REV. E*06 - For superscript/subscript display and slaving a PT-4222 to get draft quality printing. DT-4314 - REV. C*08 - Has various fixes for use with WORD and is required for graphics. o The 4105 (S/10) no longer loads the function keys for menu or WORD. It now behaves like a 7270 so use the alternate sequences for all function keys. o MPx Systems The DT-4308, ODT PHASE II, displays attributes within WORD incorrectly, in background mode. This is a display problem only. The document will print correctly. The ODT PHASE II menu function keys do not work. Use the alternate sequence, CTRL + F, #key. Example: F8 is CTRL + F, 8. o BOSS/IX Systems On the 2000/2500/3000/4000 Systems the DT-4308, ODT Phase II, is configured on the system as a 7270 which causes the function keys not to load. The alternate key sequences should be used for both word processing and menu function keys. ORIGINATOR: E. Titus SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB006 Pg005 FIB 00007 06/23/88 *** Print Problems with Letter Quality Printers on 3.1A [ WPSF 471 ] *** 1) EXTRA FORM FEED'S USING LETTER QUALITY PRINTERS When printing documents on a letter quality printer through MAI Business WORD on the 2000/3000, extra form feeds were being generated intermittently. FIX: program name: WPDP90 Change statement 2020: WAS: 2020 ...(7,ERR=09100)'CI',$1B1E09$,$1B1F0D$,$1B35$ SHOULD BE: 2020 ...(7,ERR=09100)'CI','ES',"5",'6L','10', 2) MULTIPLE PAGE DOCUMENTS LOSING TOP-OF-FORM When printing a multi-page document on a letter quality printer on the 2000/3000, the top-of-form would be lost or drop down several lines. FIX: program name: WPDP20 Add statement: 6652 PRINT (7,ERR=9100)'BO',$1B1E09$,'EO', ORIGINATOR: E. Titus SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB007 Pg001 FIB 00008 10/11/90 *** MPx Printer Notes & Cautions for OFFICE 3.2A [ WPSF 457-A3,8 ] *** o On the PT-4223, laser printer, with VMI compression enabled, lines of text will not be printed in exactly the number of lines per inch as in the print parameters. The user must have VMI compression enabled to print 66 lines per page because an 'unprintable region' exists of approximately 4mm at the top and bottom of the page. Without the compression, lines at the bottom of the page will be printed on a separate sheet. o To print a legal size form to a 'P' device such as the PT-4223 laser printer on the MPx, the spooler should have a form equal to the page size. This form needs to be included in the spooler default class. If the system default class is not a legal-size form, it will need to be changed in order to spool a legal size job, thus affecting all other printers on the system not using legal-size forms. An RSC (SPR # 516064) has been written on this. If the printer is configured as an SPE/VDT, only the FORM needs to be set to the number of lines per page needed. o On MPx systems the PT-4222 works as a serial printer or as a slave printer connected to the DT-4313 (REV E*06) for draft quality printing. On the DT-4313, the printer throttle must be set to BFIS/XON, which is only resident in the REV E*06 and later firmware. o When using the PT-4215 and PT-4216 printers as printer ('P') devices on the MPx system, the LSR or LSRS drivers must be used. If using a sheetfeeder, the bin feed order is reversed - bin 2 feeds page 1 with all remaining pages feeding from bin 1. o If the user wants to use the PT-4216 printer with a sheetfeeder attached, configured as an SPE/VDT on the system, in both EXEC and WORD, they will need to switch the printer between sheetfeeder mode 2 (EXEC) and sheetfeeder mode 1 (WORD). Because EXEC does not have a driver for the PT-4216 sheetfeeder, it requires mode 2 for automatic sheet feeding. The automatic mode will cause the sheetfeeder in WORD to not feed sheets correctly because the automatic mode will cut in at different times than the WORD driver, causing sheets to be fed at the wrong time, not fed to the proper line, etc. To avoid problems with the sheetfeeder in WORD, the printer must be set to sheetfeeder mode 1 for 'feed on command'. For a slaved PT-4216 printer with a sheetfeeder attached, the printer may be left in mode 2 for EXEC. Toggle the sheetfeeder modes by going to bottom set of switches on the printer, setting switch #6 to 'ON'/up for mode 2, automatic; or to 'OFF'/down for mode 1, command. o On a PT-4216 with a sheetfeeder, there are page size limitations depending on what mode is set. Mode 2 or automatic, used for EXEC printing, has a maximum page size of 72 lines per page. Depending on how a dip switch is set, you will then get an 11 or 12 inch form. The switch to set the page length is located on the left inside the printer; #3, 'ON'=12 and 'OFF'=11. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB008 Pg001 If the printer is in mode 1, on command, 84 lines (a standard 14 inch form at 6 LPI) can be printed. o The PT-4215 has a known problem with the sheetfeeder which is caused by superscript attributes on the first line of a document. This hardware problem causes single garbage characters to print on the page and a form feed to execute. o The PT-4215 is the only letter quality printer that currently supports printing while set for 8-BIT. o The PT-4211, Diablo 630 ISP, must have a jumper plug installed on the third pin from the left to print underlines on every column of a 132 column document. If the jumper plug is not installed, the underlines will all be printed in column 1 of the next line. Jumper pins are located under the front cover. o When the PT-4206, Diablo 630 Basic Four interface, is slaved there are two ways to request the reprinting of a page. The first method is to press the 'ESCAPE' key on the terminal keyboard, the second method is to press the 'STOP' and the 'START' buttons consecutively on the front of the printer. o The NEC printer is only supported in EXEC as an SPE/VDT, using the PSPD21 INITIALIZATION and the PSPD20 DRIVER, programs. The printer will work in WORD as an SPE/VDT or as a system printer, using the 'NEC' or 'NECS' drivers. o NEC printer gets a 'CHECK PRINTER' error on underlined, superscripted or bolded text. o When configuring a device as an SPE/VDT, be sure the Input Trans- parency and Output Transparency prompts are set to 'N'. o To use slaved letter quality printers with EXEC, use the PSPD71, PSPD70 and PSPD72 programs in Printer Maintenance. To use slaved draft printers with EXEC, use the PSPD81 and PSPD80 programs in printer maintenance. In both cases, a 'wildcard' entry type may be used to define a single device entry for all LQ slaves or draft slaves. For example, a 'wildcard' device name of LQ* could be used for slaved letter quality printers and L* for slaved draft printers. o LETTER QUALITY PRINTER: TERMINAL CONFIGURATION: SPE/VDT, BAUD RATE=1200, ODD 7 1. X/ON-X/OFF=YES, INPUT TRANSPARENCY=NO, OUTPUT TRANSPARENCY=NO NOTE: PT-4215 BAUD = 9600 WORD: DIA : PT-4206 BASIC FOUR DIABLO tractor or manual feed DIAS : PT-4206 BASIC FOUR DIABLO sheetfeeder attached ISP : PT-4211 Industry Standard tractor or manual feed ISPS : PT-4211 Industry Standard sheetfeeder attached 15TF : PT-4215 tractor or manual feed 15SF : PT-4215 sheetfeeder attached 16TF : PT-4216 tractor or manual feed 16SF : PT-4216 sheetfeeder attached EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD61 Driver: PSPD60 Termination Program: PSPD62 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB008 Pg002 --------------------------------------------------------------------------- o 'P' DEVICES - CONFIGURED AS A PRINTER TERMINAL CONFIGURATION: PRINTER, type=LQP, BAUD=9600, ODD,7,1. NOTE: PT-4216 BAUD = 1200 WORD: LSR : PT-4223 (Laser Printer) LSRS : PT-4223 sheetfeeder attached NOTE: IF THE PT-4215 AND/OR PT-4216 IS CONFIGURED AS A 'P' DEVICE, THE LSR OR LSRS SHOULD BE USED. EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD11 Driver: PSPD10 Termination Program: none --------------------------------------------------------------------------- o SLAVED LETTER QUALITY PRINTERS TERMINAL CONFIGURATION: Not Applicable WORD: SLVD : Tractor Feed SLVS : Sheet Feeder attached EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD71 Driver: PSPD70 Termination Program: PSPD72 --------------------------------------------------------------------------- o SLAVED DRAFT QUALITY PRINTERS TERMINAL CONFIGURATION: Not Applicable WORD: SLV : Tractor Feed EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD81 Driver: PSPD80 Termination Program: none --------------------------------------------------------------------------- PROBLEM: A PT-4216 configured as a System Printer does not work in WORD on OFFICE 3.2A with level x.6G Operating System. FIX: Update to OFFICE 3.2B. ORIGINATOR: Elaine Titus/Moniereh Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB008 Pg003 FIB 00009 08/31/89 *** SPx Printer Notes & Cautions for OFFICE 3.2A [ WPSF 457-4 ] *** o To configure a PT-4206, PT-4211, PT-4215 or PT-4216 slave printer from WORD Printer Maintenance, the "DEVICE ID" should be the same as the terminal ID which the printer is attached to. o Letter Generation Printer Notes: PT-4206, PT-4211 - 'Check Printer' error occurs between the printing of each Letter Generation record. Ensure that the printer is on-line, and hit 'CR' at the 'Check Printer' prompt to continue printing. PT-4215 - An extra form feed occurs between the printing of each Letter Generation record. PT-4216 - The error light on the printer's front panel will flash between the printing of each Letter Generation record. If a tractor feed is used, an extra form feed occurs between the printing of each Letter Generation record. o The PT-4211 will not get a 'CHECK PRINTER' error when the ribbon runs out. o If spooling is turned on for the PT-4206 and PT-4211, change the WORD type to ISP or ISPS. o If the user wants to use the PT-4216 printer with a sheetfeeder attached in both EXEC and WORD, they will need to switch the printer between sheetfeeder mode 2 (EXEC) and sheetfeeder mode 1 (WORD). Because EXEC does not have a driver for the PT-4216 sheetfeeder, it requires mode 2 for automatic sheet feeding. The automatic mode will cause the sheetfeeder in WORD to not feed sheets correctly because the automatic mode will cut in at different times than the WORD driver, causing sheets to be fed at the wrong time, not fed to the proper line, etc. To avoid problems with the sheetfeeder in WORD, the printer must be set to sheetfeeder mode 1 for 'feed on command'. For a slaved PT-4216 printer with a sheetfeeder attached, the printer may be left in mode 2 for EXEC. Toggle the sheetfeeder modes by going to bottom set of switches on the printer, setting switch #6 to 'ON'/up for mode 2, automatic; or to 'OFF'/down for mode 1, command. o PT-4206 - DIABLO 630 with Basic Four Interface SLAVE PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=PT-4208, printer baud:1200 (terminal setup) WORD: Type: SLVD - Tractor feed SLVS - Sheetfeeder attached EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD71 Driver: PSPD70 Termination Program: PSPD72 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB009 Pg001 DIRECT CONNECT PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=SPECIAL, spool off, baud=1200, ODD, 7, 1. No Protocol. No B4 Read/Status, Write Timeouts = 55 WORD: DIA : Tractor or manual feed DIAS: Sheetfeeder attached EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD61 Driver: PSPD60 Termination Program: PSPD63 NOTE: PT-4206 with a sheetfeeder attached cannot be used with EXEC. o PT-4211 - DIABLO 630 with Industry Standard Interface SLAVE PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=PT-4211, printer baud=1200 (terminal setup) WORD: Type: SLVD - Tractor feed SLVS - Sheetfeeder attached EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD71 Driver: PSPD70 Termination Program: PSPD72 DIRECT CONNECT PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=SPECIAL, spool off, baud=1200, ODD, 7, 1. No Protocol. No B4 Read/Status, Write Timeouts = 55 WORD: Type: DIA: Tractor or manual feed DIAS: Sheetfeeder attached EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD61 Driver: PSPD60 Termination Program: PSPD63 NOTE: PT-4211 with a sheetfeeder attached cannot be used with EXEC. o PT-4213 - WHISPER PRINTER with Basic Four Interface SLAVE PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=PT-4213, printer baud=2400 (terminal setup) WORD: Type: SLV - draft slave only EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD81 Driver: PSPD80 Termination Program: none DIRECT CONNECT PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=PT-4213, baud=2400, B4=on, ODD, 7, 1, spool on, Xon/xoff protocol WORD: Type: 3210, 3220 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB009 Pg002 EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD11 Driver: PSPD10 Termination Program: none o PT-4214 - DUAL MODE PRINTER SLAVE PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=PT-4214, printer baud=9600 (terminal setup) WORD: Type: SLV - draft quality slave only EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD81 Driver: PSPD80 Termination Program: none DIRECT CONNECT PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=PT-4214, baud=9600, no B4, ODD, 7, 1, spool on, Xon/xoff protocol WORD: Type: 3150, 3510 EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD11 Driver: PSPD10 Termination Program: none o PT-4215 - LETTER QUALITY DOT MATRIX SLAVE PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=PT-4215, printer baud=9600 (terminal setup) WORD: Type: SLVD - Tractor feed SLVS - Sheetfeeder attached EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD71 Driver: PSPD70 Termination Program: PSPD72 DIRECT CONNECT PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=PT-4215, baud=9600, no B4, ODD, 7, 1, spool on, Xon/xoff, Read/Status and Write Timeouts = 55 WORD: Type: 15TF - Tractor feed or manual feed 15SF - Sheetfeeder attached EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD11 Driver: PSPD10 Termination Program: none o PT-4216 - LETTER QUALITY DAISY WHEEL PRINTER SLAVED PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=PT-4216, printer baud=1200 (terminal setup) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB009 Pg003 WORD: Type: SLVD - Tractor or Manual Feed SLVS - Sheetfeeder attached EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD71 Driver: PSPD70 Termination Program: PSPD72 DIRECT CONNECT PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=PT-4216, baud=1200, no B4, ODD, 7, 1, spool on, Xon/xoff, Read/Status and Write Timeouts = 55 WORD: Type: 16TF - Tractor or manual feed 16SF - Sheetfeeder attached EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD11 Driver: PSPD10 Termination Program: none o PT-4223 - LASER PRINTER SLAVED PRINTER: not applicable DIRECT CONNECT PRINTER: System Configuration: Type=ISP, baud=9600, no B4, ODD, 7, 1, spool on, Xon/xoff, Read/Status and Write Timeout=25 WORD: Type: LSR - Feeds from Tray 2 (bottom) LSRS - Feeds from Tray 1 (top) for 1st page, and from Tray 2 (bottom) for all other pages. EXEC: Initial Program: PSPD11 Driver: PSPD10 Termination Program: none NOTE: FORM Type with LASER can be LETTER or SHEET depending on WORD type driver. LSR would use LETTER, LSRS would use SHEET. o If using the PT-4223 for EXEC printing, feature 'L' should be specified, in addition to any other feature(s) specified by the user, for the laser to do a form feed at the end of the EXEC print job. Otherwise, the user will need to manually do the form feed to get their print job. ORIGINATOR: Elaine Titus SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB009 Pg004 FIB 00010 08/31/89 *** BUSINESS MATH - Errs 27, 46; Enable > 10 Users [ WPSF 457-5 ] *** To resolve possible error 27's and 46's, and to allow the user to have over 10 users with Business MATH, please change the following: Program: ROC stmt: 0620 ...K0=8.... to ...K0=10.... Change key size from 8 to 10, in the file ROAAF0 using the file utility fchange on 2000/2500/3000/4000 systems. This problem may also cause error 46's and 27's. An SPR has been submitted for this problem which will be fixed in MAI OFFICE 3.2B. Until then, use the above workaround. ORIGINATOR: Elaine Titus SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB010 Pg001 FIB 00011 09/05/89 *** OFFICE 3.2B Software Announcement [ WPSS 163 ] *** 1. INTRODUCTION MAI Basic Four, Inc. is pleased to announce the availability of MAI OFFICE 3.2B. MAI OFFICE is a completely integrated Office Automation package for the 2000/2500/3000/4000 and MPx or Advanced Series computers. MAI OFFICE is composed of the following modules: o MAI Business WORD - Word Processor o MAI Business MATH - Spreadsheet o MAI Business GRAPH - Graphics o MAI Business EXEC - Desktop Functions o MAI Business MAIL - Electronic Mail o MAI Business DATA - Data Management o Presentation Services/Printer System This release contains many improvements which are listed by module in section 12 of this software announcement. NOTE: ORIGIN 2.0 or above is required for Letter Generation capability on MAI OFFICE 3.2B. ORIGIN 2.0 or above CANNOT be used with any level of OMS. *********************************************************** * Please read the installation instructions (section 3) * * before attempting to install MAI OFFICE or any of its * * modules. * * * * MAI OFFICE will only work on operating systems 8.6C * * and above for the MPx series and 7.4A or above on the * * 2000/2500/3000/4000 series. * *********************************************************** *********************************************************** * MAI OFFICE 3.2B requires certain peripheral hardware * * revision levels. * * Please see section 2. * *********************************************************** Copyright 1989 by MAI Basic Four, Inc. All rights reserved. C O N T E N T S 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cover 2 DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.1 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS. . . . 1 3 INSTALLATION FOR BOSS/VS AND BOSS/IX . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.1 BOSS/VS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.1.1 NEW INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.1.2 UPGRADE INSTALLATION - MAI OFFICE 3.2A TO 3.2B . . . 4 3.1.3 UPGRADE INSTALLATION - OMS AND MAI OFFICE 3.1A . . . 5 3.2 BOSS/IX INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg001 3.2.1 NEW INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.2.2 UPGRADE INSTALLATION - MAI OFFICE 3.2A TO 3.2B . . . 11 3.2.3 UPGRADE INSTALLATION - OMS AND MAI OFFICE 3.1A . . . 11 4 CONVERSION TO MAI OFFICE 3.2B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 4.1 CONVERSION FROM PREVIOUS LEVELS OF OFFICE/OMS. . . . . 14 4.2 CONVERSION OF DATAWORD TO BUSINESS WORD. . . . . . . . 16 5 WPDU70 - BIT CONVERSION PROGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 5.1 OMS 2.1 CONVERSION FROM 13XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 6 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . 22 6.1 SET ONE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 6.2 SET TWO OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 7 MAI BUSINESS DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 7.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA. . 25 7.2 MPX INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 7.2.1 MAI OFFICE 3.2B WITH MAI ORIGIN 2.0A . . . . . . . . 26 7.2.2 MAI OFFICE 3.2B WITH MAI ORIGIN 2.1A . . . . . . . . 26 7.3 2000/2500/3000/4000 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . 28 7.3.1 MAI OFFICE 3.2B WITH MAI ORIGIN 2.0A . . . . . . . . 28 7.3.2 MAI OFFICE 3.2B WITH MAI ORIGIN 2.1A . . . . . . . . 28 7.4 ORIGIN CODE CHANGE FIXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 7.4.1 GRAPH INTERFACE ERROR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 7.4.2 LETTER GENERATION - SELECTING SAVED OPTIONS. . . . . 30 8 MAI BUSINESS GRAPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 8.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS GRAPH . 31 8.2 MPX INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 8.2.1 DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 8.3 2000/2500/3000/4000 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . 33 8.3.1 DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 8.4 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN SYSTEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 8.5 CURSOR CONTROL IN GRAPHMAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 8.6 HELPFUL HINTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 9 MAI BUSINESS MAIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 9.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MAIL. . 37 9.1.1 MPX SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 9.1.2 CONFIGURING THE 2000/2500/3000/4000. . . . . . . . . 37 9.1.3 STARTING MAI BUSINESS MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 10 MAI BUSINESS MATH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 10.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MATH. . 41 11 RELATED DOCUMENTATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 12 CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 12.1 MENU SYSTEM FOR MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B. . . . . . . . . . . 42 12.2 TEXT FILE REBUILD CHANGES FOR 3.2B . . . . . . . . . . 44 12.2.1 TEXT FILE REBUILD INSTRUCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . 44 12.3 IMPROVEMENTS INCLUDED WITH MAI OFFICE 3.2B . . . . . . 49 F I G U R E S Figure 3-1 Tape Options-New Installation. . . . . . . . . 3 Figure 3-2 Tape Options - Step #1 Upgrade . . . . . . . . 5 Figure 3-3 Tape Options - Step #2 Upgrade . . . . . . . . 6 Figure 3-4 Tape Options - Step #3 Upgrade . . . . . . . . 7 Figure 3-5 MAI Office Module names. . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Figure 3-6 MAI Office Module names. . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Figure 4-1 DataWord Conversion Screen . . . . . . . . . . 17 Figure 8-1 Supported Devices With Their Types . . . . . . 32 Figure 8-2 Sample '.GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS' file . . . . . . . 32 Figure 8-3 Sample '/etc/plotters'file . . . . . . . . . . 35 Figure 8-4 Sample '/etc/gks/devices' file . . . . . . . . 35 2. DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg002 Listed below are the minimal disk requirements for MAI OFFICE: BOSS/VS BOSS/IX Module Size_(in_MB) Size_(in_MB) Business WORD 13.7 13.7 Business GRAPH 0.6 0.6 Business MATH 1.1 1.1 Business EXEC 3.7 3.7 Business DATA 8.5 8.5 Business MAIL 0.5 0.5 Presentation Services/Menu System 2.2 8.0 ---- ---- 30.3 36.1 =========== =========== 2.1 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS For MAI OFFICE 3.2B, certain minimum hardware revision levels are required: Terminals DT-4309 Rev. E DT-4310 Rev. D DT-4312 Rev. K DT-4313 Rev. E DT-4314 Rev. C Diablo Printer PT-4206 SPI BOARD: Must have revision levels -009, -011, or -042 Laser Printer PT-4223 X6 Firmware (or above) 3. INSTALLATION FOR BOSS/VS AND BOSS/IX SYSTEMS Please read the installation instructions carefully before attempting installation. MAI OFFICE tapes will be distributed containing all modules of MAI OFFICE. All MAI OFFICE modules require a public key (except the printer system and Presentation Services). The public key is a number in hexadecimal notation which uniquely applies to that particular module of MAI OFFICE and that particular system. WITHOUT THE PROPER KEYS, MAI OFFICE WILL NOT RUN. The tape containing MAI OFFICE will be accompanied by a release memo listing a 'Public Key' for each MAI OFFICE module licensed by the user: MOC, MOD, MOW, MOE, MOM, MOP, MOS and MOG (MOG and GRF are equivalent). The modules MOP and MOS do not require a public key. After installation of files and keys, please see instructions for each module elsewhere in this announcement for module specific installation instructions. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg003 The installation instructions are broken into two divisions: 1) Installation for BOSS/VS A) New Installation B) Upgrade 3.2A to 3.2B C) Upgrade MAI OFFICE 3.1A and OMS 2) Installation for BOSS/IX A) New Installation B) Upgrade 3.2A to 3.2B C) Upgrade MAI OFFICE 3.1A and OMS Please see the appropriate section for installation instructions. 3.1 BOSS/VS INSTALLATION 3.1.1 New installation The MAI OFFICE tape contains all the data and program files necessary to begin using MAI OFFICE as soon as they are restored to disk via the SAVERESTORE utility. Most files will reside in the .OMS. node. Once all files are restored to disk, set the prefix to: (family).OMS. If DSS has also been installed, see section 7. The .PS. node does not need to be included in the user's prefix. STEP_1: The initial installation consists of restoring all files to the disk using SAVERESTORE. Mount the tape and enter the utility by entering SAVERESTORE, at the "!" prompt. Choose the proper tape drive and when the menu appears, choose option 2-"RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE". The options screen will appear. Use the options in figure 3-1 to answer the prompts. ______________________________________________________________________ | | | Figure 3-1 Tape Options-New Installation | | | | FILE TYPE (D/P/CR=ALL) : | | COMPARE (CR=Y/N) : | | DATE (MM/DD/YY) : | | TIME (HH:MM) : | | OUTPUT DEVICE (CR=VDT) : | | DELETE EXISTING FILES (CR=Y) : | | VERIFY (Y/CR=N) : | | | | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N) : | | | |_____________________________________________________________________| The next prompt displayed will be for the file specifier. Enter '.,(familyname).' where 'familyname' is the name of the family on which MAI OFFICE will reside. The files will begin restoring. Once the SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg004 files have been restored, proceed to step 2. STEP_2: To install the keys, the procedure 'INSTALLMO' must be executed. At the command language prompt '!', enter 'INSTALLMO' as follows: !INSTALLMO. This procedure will copy all the security files and .PS. menu files to the default family disk. It will not delete existing security files if they already exist on the system disk. Now the keys can be installed using the INSTALLKEY86A procedure (this procedure is similar to the /bin/install_key on the 2000). This procedure and the security files will be under the .ETC.LEVEL. node on the system disk. To install a key, type: INSTALLKEY86A xxx The module name is typed in place of the xxx. Enter the key and you will be asked to verify the key. A key must be installed for every module ordered. NOTE: Refer to section 8 for GRAPH Module Installation Instructions. STEP_3: The Presentation Services module must be installed. To install, execute the program .PS.INSTALL (i.e. !BASIC .PS.INSTALL). This program copies files from the user disk to the system family and system node. NOTE: After Operating System upgrades, this step will need to be repeated. If the user has O.S. levels 8.6A, B or C, they must copy the correct version of OMSREAD, OMSREAD86, to the system disk and replace the existing one. For example: (SYSDISK).R6B54.SYS.OMSREAD This will not be necessary on 8.6E. STEP_4: Installation is complete. To use MAI OFFICE, the user prefix must be set to "(familyname).OMS.". To access the Menu Builder, the prefix must also include "(system default family).PS.,.PS.TOOLS.". The first time the user runs "MS" they will automatically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. Refer to section 6 for further instructions. There are a few steps that must be taken to set up the word processing libraries and the operator ID's. For full details, please refer to Business WORD User Guide, MBF #M7550A. Also refer to MENU System Services Reference Guide, MBF #M0063, for logon and security information. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg005 3.1.2 Upgrade Installation 3.2A to 3.2B Make a current backup of all MAI OFFICE (or OMS) files on tape or disk, including (familyname).PS. and (familyname).ETC.LEVEL. files. When upgrading MAI OFFICE 3.2A to MAI OFFICE 3.2B, only the programs should be restored from the new release tape. It is not necessary to restore .PS. programs since no changes were made to PS 3.1A. No conversion is necessary. To use the newly released dictionary with the added plurals, restore: WPWF00 and WPWF01. 3.1.3 Upgrade Installation - OMS and MAI OFFICE 3.1A ***************************************************************** * * * PLEASE MAKE BACKUPS OF ALL CURRENT OMS OR OFFICE DATA FILES ! * * IF THE CONVERSION IS INTERRUPTED, BACKUPS WILL BE NEEDED TO * * RECOVER THE SYSTEM !!!!! * * * ***************************************************************** ***************************************************************** * * * MAKE SURE ALL DOCUMENTS IN WORD PROCESSING ARE FREE OF * * PROBLEMS. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TEXT FILE REBUILD BE USED * * TO REBUILD ALL TEXT FILES BEFORE CONVERSION AND AFTER THE * * BACKUP !!!!! * ***************************************************************** WARNING: ANY DOCUMENTS ARCHIVED IN PRIOR RELEASE LEVELS OF OMS OR MAI OFFICE MUST BE DE-ARCHIVED ON THAT LEVEL BEFORE UPGRADING TO MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B. Verify what level of OMS or OFFICE the user is currently on before starting the upgrade and conversion. Please use the following steps to upgrade a current installation: STEP_1: Make a current backup of all MAI OFFICE (or OMS) files on tape or disk, including (familyname).ETC.LEVEL. files. STEP_2: First the new program files must be restored. Mount the tape and enter the utility by entering SAVERESTORE, at the "!" prompt. Choose the proper tape drive and when the menu appears, choose option 2-"RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE". The options screen will appear. Use the options in figure 3-2 to answer the prompts. __________________________________________________________________________ . | |. | Figure 3-2 Tape Options | | |. | FILE TYPE (D/P/CR=ALL) :

<== PLEASE NOTE "P" | | COMPARE (CR=Y/N) : | | DATE (MM/DD/YY) : | | TIME (HH:MM) : | | OUTPUT DEVICE (CR=VDT) : | SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg006 | DELETE EXISTING FILES (CR=Y) : | | VERIFY (Y/CR=N) : | | |. | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N) : | |__________________________________________________________________________|. The next prompt displayed will be for the file specifier. Enter ".,(familyname)." where "familyname" is the name of the family on which MAI OFFICE will reside. The files will begin restoring. Once the files have been restored, proceed to step 3. STEP_3: All the new data files must be restored. Rewind the tape using option 7-"REWIND TAPE". When the menu appears, choose option 2-"RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE". The options screen will appear. Use the options in figure 3-3 to answer the prompts. If the user has O.S. levels 8.6A, B or C, they must copy the correct version of OMSREAD86, to the system disk and replace the existing one. For example: (SYSDISK).R6B54.SYS.OMSREAD This will not be necessary on 8.6E. __________________________________________________________________________ . | |. | Figure 3-3 Tape Options | | |. | FILE TYPE (D/P/CR=ALL) : <== PLEASE NOTE "D" | | COMPARE (CR=Y/N) : | | DATE (MM/DD/YY) : | | TIME (HH:MM) : | | OUTPUT DEVICE (CR=VDT) : (or system printer) | | DELETE EXISTING FILES (CR=Y) : <== PLEASE NOTE "N" | | VERIFY (Y/CR=N) : | | |. | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N) : | | |. |__________________________________________________________________________|. The next prompt to be displayed will be for the file specifier. Enter ".,(familyname)." where "familyname" is the family on which MAI OFFICE will reside. The files will begin restoring. Once the files have been restored, proceed to step 4. STEP_4: Next, certain data files must be restored from the tape that also existed from the previous release. These are data files that have changed from the last release. Rewind the tape using option 7-"REWIND TAPE". When the menu appears, choose option 2-"RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE". The options screen will appear. Use the options in figure 3-4 to answer the prompts. ___________________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 3-4 Tape Options | | |. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg007 | FILE TYPE (D/P/CR=ALL) : <== PLEASE NOTE "D" | | COMPARE (CR=Y/N) : | | DATE (MM/DD/YY) : | | TIME (HH:MM) : | | OUTPUT DEVICE (CR=VDT) : | | DELETE EXISTING FILES (CR=Y) : <== PLEASE NOTE "Y" | | VERIFY (Y/CR=N) : | | |. | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N) : | | |. |__________________________________________________________________________|. The next prompt displayed will be for the file specifier. Enter the following: >.OMS.INSTALLMO,(familyname).OMS.INSTALLMO >.OMS.MSFI0&,(familyname).OMS.MSFI0& >.OMS.WPDM02,(familyname).OMS.WPDM02 >.OMS.WPPU00,(familyname).OMS.WPPU00 >.OMS.WPHF&,(familyname).OMS.WPHF& The data files will be restored. STEP_5: To install the keys, the procedure 'INSTALLMO' must be executed. Set the prefix as follows at the command prompt '!': !PREFIX (familyname).OMS. At the command language prompt '!', enter 'INSTALLMO' as follows: !INSTALLMO. This procedure will copy all the security files to the default family disk. It will not delete existing security files if they already exist on the system disk. The 'INSTALLMO' procedure also copies the .OMS.PS. files to .PS. and will overwrite the existing .PS. menu files. Now the keys can be installed using the 'INSTALLKEY86A' procedure which is similar to the /bin/install_key procedure on the 2000/3000. The 'INSTALLKEY86A' program and the security files will be under .ETC.LEVEL. node on the default family disk. To install the key, type: !INSTALLKEY86A xxx The module name replaces the xxx. Enter the key and you will be asked to verify the key. A key must be installed for every module ordered. NOTE: Refer to section 8 for GRAPH module installation instructions. STEP_6: The Presentation Services module must be installed. Execute the program .PS.INSTALL (i.e. !BASIC .PS.INSTALL). This program copies files from the user disk to the default family system node. NOTE: During Operating System upgrades, this step will need to be repeated. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg008 STEP_7: If MAI Business WORD has been installed and the customer was using an earlier version of either OMS WP or MAI Business WORD, a conversion must be done. Please see section 4 for the conversion instructions. STEP_8: Installation is complete. To use MAI OFFICE, the user prefix must be set to "(familyname).OMS.". To access the Menu Builder, the prefix must include "(system default family).PS.,.PS.TOOLS." . STEP_9: Before using MAI Business WORD, a Text File Rebuild must be run on all text files. The first time "MS" is run the user will automatically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. Refer to section 6 for further instructions. Please refer to Business WORD User Guide, manual number (MBF #7550A) for more detailed information on each feature. Also refer to MENU System Services Reference Guide (MBF #7554A) for logon and security information. 3.2 BOSS/IX INSTALLATION 3.2.1 New Installation Before MAI OFFICE can be used, it must be installed on the fixed disk, drive 0. The installation procedure should be run in single user mode--it is assumed that the system has been booted and is rooted on the root partition. The MAI OFFICE programs and data files will reside on a single MCS cartridge or 1/2 inch tape. Figure 3-5 shows the list of MAI OFFICE module names. __________________________________________________________________________ . | |. | Figure 3-5 MAI OFFICE Module Names | | |. | MOW - Business WORD | | MOC - Business MATH | | MOD - Business DATA | | MOE - Business EXEC | | MOM - Business MAIL | | MOG - Business GRAPH | | **MOP - Printer System | | **MOS - Menu System | | **EPS - Presentation Services | | DSS - Decision Support Software (Delivered with the O.S.) | | |. | ** = Must Be Installed | |__________________________________________________________________________|. The public key should be entered during the installation procedure after the corresponding program files have been installed (i.e., the public key for EXEC should be entered after the MOE program files have been installed). WITHOUT THE PROPER KEYS FOR EACH MODULE THAT MODULE WILL NOT RUN. NOTE: Refer to section 8 for GRAPH module installation. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg009 STEP_1: You should be in single user mode so if you are not, at the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: shutdown -- -1 -s STEP_2: Insert the cartridge containing MAI OFFICE into the MCS drive and turn the lock lever or insert the 1/2 inch tape into the streamer tape drive. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: install dd MOP MOW xxx xxx ... press the RETURN key. Where dd stands for 'ts' if you are in- stalling from 1/2 inch MTS, or 'cs' if you are installing from 1/4 inch MCS. The xxx is the three character name of each module that has been ordered (see figure 3-5). The program searches for each module on the tape, displays its label, and begins copying files. The program displays the name of each file as it is copied. Enter the public key for that particular module. When all modules have been installed, the program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> STEP_3: Only program files have been installed. The data files must be restored to disk. WARNING: DO NOT ENTER MULTI-USER MODE BEFORE PROCEEDING, OR THE '/tmp/modata' FILE WILL BE ERASED. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: /tmp/modata Then press the RETURN key. The '/tmp/modata' is an executable file containing a list of data files needed for first time installations of MAI OFFICE. You will be asked whether each data file should be restored unless you select the "off" option - meaning to install all files in the filelist - on the first file. Data files are copied. The program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg010 STEP_4: From BASIC, do a start of 256. Load /PS/MSDISPLAY, change the following statements as follows: 3429 IF DBPORT > 0 THEN CLOSE(DBPORT) 3430 IF STATPORT > 0 THEN CLOSE(STATPORT) >SAVE STEP_5: To start MAI OFFICE, run the oprinfo utility and set up an account with the home directory= /oms and the initial program as: /bin/basic,-q,s=64,pgm=MS,-nr,'prefix "/oms /PS /PS/tools"' The /PS/tools is only required when the user wants to modify menus. STEP_6: When the prompt, "PLEASE HAVE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR SET DATE FORMAT (CR)" appears, the user should go into the OS utilities and set the Date and Time, then RUN "MS". The first time the user RUNs "MS" they will automatically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. Refer to section 6 for further instructions. 3.2.2 Upgrade Installation - MAI OFFICE 3.2A to 3.2B Make a current backup of all MAI OFFICE files to tape, including /oms, /PS and /etc/level files. When upgrading MAI OFFICE 3.2A to MAI OFFICE 3.2B, only the programs should be restored from the new release tape. It is not neccessary to reinstall the /PS programs, the EPS module. No conversion is necessary. To use the newly released dictionary with the added plurals, restore: WPWF00 and WPWF01. 3.2.3 Upgrade Installation - OMS and MAI OFFICE 3.1A **************************************************************** * * * PLEASE MAKE BACKUPS OF ALL CURRENT OMS OR OFFICE DATA FILES !* * IF THE CONVERSION IS INTERRUPTED, BACKUPS WILL BE NEEDED TO * * RECOVER THE SYSTEM !!!!! * * * **************************************************************** **************************************************************** * * * MAKE SURE ALL DOCUMENTS IN WORD PROCESSING ARE FREE OF * * PROBLEMS. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TEXT FILE REBUILD BE USED * * TO REBUILD ALL TEXT FILES BEFORE CONVERSION !!!! * * * **************************************************************** SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg011 WARNING: ANY DOCUMENTS ARCHIVED IN PRIOR RELEASE LEVELS OF OMS OR MAI OFFICE MUST BE DE-ARCHIVED ON THAT LEVEL BEFORE UPGRADING TO MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B. The installation procedure should be run in single user mode--it is assumed that the system has been booted and is rooted on the root partition. Figure 3-6 shows the list of MAI OFFICE module names. __________________________________________________________________________ . | |. | Figure 3-6 MAI OFFICE Module Names | | |. | MOW - Business WORD | | MOC - Business MATH | | MOD - Business DATA | | MOE - Business EXEC | | MOM - Business MAIL | | MOG - Business GRAPH | | **MOP - Printer System | | **MOS - Menu System | | **EPS - Presentation Services | | DSS - Decision Support Software (Delivered with the O.S.) | | |. | ** = Must Be Installed | |__________________________________________________________________________|. STEP_1: You should be in single user mode so if you are not, at the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: shutdown -- -1 -s STEP_2: Insert the cartridge containing MAI OFFICE into the MCS drive and turn the lock lever, or if 1/2 inch tape, insert into the streamer tape drive. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: install dd MOP MOW xxx xxx ... Then press the RETURN key. Where dd stands for 'ts' if you are in- stalling from 1/2 inch tape and 'cs' if you are installing from 1/4 inch tape. The xxx is the three-character name of each module that has been ordered (see figure 3-6). The program searches for each module on the tape; displays its label, and begins copying files. The program displays the name of each file as it is copied. Enter the public key for that particular module. When all modules have been installed, the program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg012 ****************************************************** * * * WARNING: DO NOT EXECUTE THE /tmp/modata FILE. THIS * * PROCEDURE WILL DESTROY DATA FILES !!!!!!! * * * ****************************************************** STEP_3: The NEW data files must be restored. This should be done using trestore: ADMIN>trestore dev=dd name=setname dups=skip -v Replace 'setname' in the above example with each setname being installed. For example: MOWSET, MOESET, MODSET, etc. STEP_4: Some data files which already exist must also be restored from the tape because of changes made to the file structures. Use trestore to restore these from the tape. ADMIN>trestore dev=dd name=MOSSET /oms/MSFI00 -v ADMIN>trestore dev=dd name=MOWSET /oms/WPHF* -v ADMIN>trestore dev=dd name=MOWSET /oms/WPDM02 -v ADMIN>trestore dev=dd name=MOWSET /oms/WPPU00 -v When restoring the WPHF* files, a message will appear stating the WPHF10 was not found due to the fact this is a program. Ignore this message. STEP_5: If MAI Business WORD was installed and the customer had a previous version of word processing (either OMS 7.3.0 or MAI OFFICE 3.1A), a conversion must be done. Please see section 4 for conversion instructions. STEP_6: From BASIC. do a start 256. Load /PS/MSDISPLAY, change the following statements as follows: 3429 IF DBPORT > 0 THEN CLOSE(DBPORT) 3430 IF STATPORT > 0 THEN CLOSE(STATPORT) >SAVE STEP_7: Delete the old version of /oms/tee file before document archive is used. STEP_8: To start MAI OFFICE, run the oprinfo utility and set up an account with the home directory= /oms and the initial program as: /bin/basic,-q,s=64,pgm=MS,-nr,'prefix "/oms /PS /PS/tools"' The /PS/tools is only required when the user wants to modify menus. STEP_9: Before using MAI Business WORD, a Text File Rebuild must be run on all text files. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg013 When the prompt, "PLEASE HAVE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR SET DATE FORMAT (CR)" appears, the user should go into the OS utilities and set the Date and Time, then RUN "MS". The first time the user RUNs "MS" they will automatically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. Refer to section 6 for further instructions. 4 CONVERSION TO MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B There are two conversions possible. The first conversion is from DataWord and the second conversion is from MAI OFFICE 3.1A or OMS levels 8.3.1/7.3.0 and level 8.2.3. The following sections describe the conversion procedures. The first section describes the MAI OFFICE/OMS conversion (section 4.1). The second section describes the conversion from DataWord to MAI Business WORD 3.2A/B (section 4.2). 4.1 Conversion from previous levels of OFFICE/OMS In order to use MAI Business WORD, previous data files need to be converted to MAI OFFICE 3.2A Business WORD. NOTE: For OMS 8.2.3 ONLY, the conversion program, EFSY20, must be run because it creates a new format for EXECUTIVE Functions files: EFOD00 EFSO00 EFTS00 EFTD00 NOTE: The OMS2BW conversion will be performed on all text files that follow the OFFICE naming scheme, (i.e. WPTF0x, where x= alpha numeric code 1,A-Z,a-z.) so be careful the directory path will not include any new files that may have been created with MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B. ****************************************************************** * * * PLEASE MAKE BACKUPS OF ALL CURRENT OMS OR OFFICE DATA FILES! * * IF THE CONVERSION IS INTERRUPTED, BACKUPS WILL BE NEEDED TO * * RECOVER THE SYSTEM!!!!! * * * * IF AN ERROR OCCURS DURING THIS PROGRAM, IT CANNOT BE RESTARTED * * BUT MUST BE RUN FROM THE BEGINNING WITH THE FILES FROM THE * * ORIGINAL LEVEL. * ****************************************************************** NOTE: All files should be converted before use. If not, MAI Business WORD will fail to operate properly. Enter BASIC by typing BASIC at the '!' prompt on BOSS/VS or typing 'basic s=128' on BOSS/IX. At the '>' prompt, enter 'RUN "OMS2BW"'. The title line will be displayed and the following prompt will appear: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg014 CONVERT OPERATOR ID PARAMETERS MASTER FILE (MSOP00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' to convert, 'N' to not convert or 'END' to stop all conversion. The next prompt will be displayed: CONVERT DOCUMENT HEADER FILE (WPDM00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' to convert. The next prompt will be displayed: CONVERT WP ID PARAMETER FILE (WPID00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' to convert. The next prompt will be displayed: CONVERT MENU SYSTEM STATUS FILE (MSFI00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'N' NOTE: THIS FILE SHOULD NOT BE CONVERTED! The next prompt will be displayed: CONVERT TEXT FILES (WPPS01 & WPTF0x)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' to convert. The next prompt will be: SPECIFY CURRENT OMS VERSION (1 -- 8.2.3, 2 -- 8.3.1 or 3.1A, END) If the prior release was OMS 8.2.3 (BOSS/VS), enter a '1'. If the prior release was OMS 8.3.1 (BOSS/VS) or 7.3.0 (BOSS/IX) or MAI OFFICE 3.1A, (for BOSS/VS and BOSS/IX) then enter a '2'. The conversion of text files will begin. The name of each text file will be displayed as it is converted. After the conversion, you must execute Text File Rebuild in MAI Business WORD to verify and insure integrity of the converted documents. Conversion to MAI Business WORD is now complete. Please see the appropriate section to continue your installation. 4.2 Conversion of DataWord 3.0/3.1 to Business WORD 3.2A/B This conversion will transfer text stored in DataWord II format to the new MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B Business WORD product. *********************************************************** * * * ALL DATAWORD DOCUMENTS MUST BE FREE OF ANY PROBLEMS FOR * * CONVERSION. IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT DOCUMENT * * REPAIR BE USED ON ALL LIBRARIES PRIOR TO CONVERSION!! * * * *********************************************************** SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg015 NOTE: THE DATAWORD TO BUSINESS WORD CONVERSION MUST BE RUN ON A BOSS/VS SYSTEM. THE OFFICE FILES CAN THEN BE TRANSFERRED TO A 2000/2500/3000/4000 SYSTEM. NOTE: In addition to OFFICE programs, DataWord programs must be installed: !WPS.CL !WPS.LN !WPS.OD !WPS.RP These are on the OFFICE release tape, if you are converting a system without DataWord installed. To run this conversion the user must have DataWord level 3.0/3.1. If the DataWord software is on any level before 3.0 then a conversion to 3.0/3.1 must be done prior to running this conversion from DataWord to Business WORD. To initiate the conversion program the user types the command RUN "DW2BW" from BASIC mode. The screen in figure 4-1 will be displayed to the user who will then supply the necessary information. _____________________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 4-1 Conversion Screen | | |. | MAI BASIC FOUR, INC. | | (TIME) CONVERT DATAWORD FILES TO BUSINESS WORD (DATE) | | |. | SOURCE NODE: | | |. | Business WORD LIBRARY NODE: | | |. | DOCUMENT FILE NAMES (S=SELECTIVE): | | |. | TEXT FILE CODE: | | |. | PRINT LOG NOW OR LATER (N/L): | | |. | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N)?: | | |. | CTL-I=CR=Default/CTL-II=back up one prompt/CTL-III=All defaults/CTL-IV=Exit | |_____________________________________________________________________________| SOURCE NODE - node name under which the DataWord document files reside. The default is ().DWDOC. Business WORD LIBRARY NODE - name of the node under which the user wants to convert Business WORD files. The default is ().OMS. DW DOCUMENT FILE NAMES (S=SELECTIVE) - Enter either one of the control keys - or - S (SELECTIVE) - will cause a separate query to be SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg016 displayed after the user has responded to all of the prompts on this screen. This query asks for each individual DataWord document file names that the user wishes to convert. The default is all DataWord document files under the SOURCE NODE. TEXT FILE CODE - Business WORD library character (e.g. by entering 'n' all the documents converted will be kept in the library WPTF0n). Possible replies are characters A-Z/a-z with no default. NOTE: If a library already exists for the given TEXT FILE CODE, an error message will be shown and the user will be asked to enter another code. The user has an option to print the log file during the conversion or after the conversion is complete. PRINT LOG NOW OR LATER. 'N' means to print the status of the converted document on the printer as that document is converted. 'L' will cause the program to create a serial file with the name 'CONVTn' (where 'n' is the TEXT FILE CODE) and the status of each converted document will be written into this file so the user can get the printout later. The default to this prompt is N (NOW). After the user answers the replies to the queries and if the user wants to convert only selected DataWord files ('S' was entered for DW DOCUMENT FILE NAMES), the screen will be cleared and the user will be asked to enter the names of the DataWord files to convert with the following prompt: ENTER DATAWORD FILE NAMES. RETURN FOR END The user will key in the DataWord file names. If an entered DataWord file does not exist, the user will be informed with a message and that entry will not be accepted. If an entered DataWord file has already been entered a message will be displayed and the duplicate entry will not be accepted. Once the user has entered all document files to be converted they will be given an option to add or delete file names from the list entered. After the user confirms the list is correct the question will appear: DO YOU WANT TO DELETE DATAWORD DOCUMENT FILE(S) AFTER THEY ARE SUCCESSFULLY CONVERTED? (Y/N) 'Y' will erase each DataWord document file from the disk once it has been successfully converted to Business WORD. 'N' all DataWord document files will remain on the disk through the conversion until the user removes them SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg017 on their own. After responding to this question the conversion begins. HELPFUL HINTS: o DataWord documents are allowed twenty-character names while Business WORD allows only six-character document names so the converted documents will be named FLxxxx, where xxxx is a sequential number. The DataWord document name is converted to the document description field in Business WORD so that the user has a mapping of DataWord document name to the FLxxxx document name within Business WORD. The description field in the DataWord document will not be converted. o Conversion of DataWord documents to MAI Business WORD documents will keep the document format intact so the overall appearance of the Business WORD document converted from DataWord will be the same as the DataWord product. In addition, all attributes (bold, underline, superscript and subscript) will be converted from DataWord to Business WORD although the attributes will have a different visual appearance in Business WORD. o During the conversion, the header and footer text in the DataWord documents will be converted as text, becoming part of the body of the document in Business WORD. This text will appear within brackets ("[]") to distinguish it from other text. Headers will be placed before the text of the paragraph it was associated with in DataWord and footers will be placed after the text of a paragraph it was associated with. This header/footer will appear only on the one page where the header/footer began and not on every page as it would have been printed by DataWord. After the conversion has completed the user will need to manipulate the header/footer text in Business WORD by either deleting it or placing it in a header or footer with the Business WORD functions. This may be done by SELECTing the appropriate header/footer text and using the option to create a header or a footer. o Footnotes will be converted as part of the text of the document and will be placed at the end of the footer. o The Summary and Table of Contents information entered in a DataWord document will not be converted since Business WORD does not support these functions. o The default tab settings in the document format (those a user will see using COMMAND + FORMAT in the DataWord editor) of the DataWord document will be converted as tab settings in the Business WORD document. The other tab settings associated with individual paragraphs in the DataWord document will not be converted. o If the right margin of a DataWord paragraph is beyond 132, the text will be reformatted with a right margin SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg018 of 132. No text will be lost but tabular information may need to be rearranged once converted to Business WORD. o During the conversion of DataWord II document files, the conversion program will calculate the space required to move the DataWord text from the entire document file to the Business WORD library file. If the entire document file contents cannot be converted to the Business WORD library due to lack of available space in the file, the program will log this fact in the log file, abort the conversion of this document file and continue the conversion process with the next document file. o The text file library will be defined with 200,000 records, 10,000 initial records and 1000 growth. It is estimated that this is enough to convert around 170 average documents that are five pages in length and sixty lines per page. If the user has more than 170 documents to convert in their DataWord document files, they should plan to convert these document files in groups that do not exceed the 170 document limit. o Status messages which may appear on the conversion log report with an explanation of each: SUCCESSFUL The document has been converted DOC OPN ERR There was an error in opening a document while testing for availability of file space for this particular DataWord document file. The conversion of this DataWord document file is not undertaken and conversion of the next document file begins. NO SPACE There is not enough file space for this DataWord document file to be converted. Conversion of this document file is not done. In this case, the 'DWDOC' column on the log report will contain the DataWord document file name rather than a document name. Both cases of DOC OPN ERR and NO SPACE must be handled by the operator performing the conversion. In the case of NO SPACE another MAI OFFICE library must be used to convert the remaining DataWord document files. 5. WPDU70 - BIT CONVERSION PROGRAM WPDU70 is a 'bit coversion' program used when moving documents between MPx and 2000/2500/3000/4000 systems. The program may be run only once, it cannot be aborted (using ESCAPE) and there is no user input required. If WPDU70 is interrupted before completion, the affected files MUST BE RESTORED FROM BACKUPS before restarting. WPDU70 creates a log file (BITLOG) which lists each file that has been converted. Text files that are not on-line SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg019 will not be converted. Files are opened and converted using fully qualified file names based on the location of the file WPDM00. Files in other nodes or directories will not be converted. FILES THAT WILL BE CONVERTED: WPDM00, WPDM04, WPPS00, WPPS01, WPTF0A-WPTF0Z, WPTF01, WPTF0a-WPTF0z PROCEDURE: STEP_1. Complete all other upgrade or conversion procedures. EXAMPLE: Conversion from WP 3.1 to 3.2 if needed. Put new WP program files on the new system. STEP_2. Use Intersystem Transfer or BQR to move all WP data files to the new system. BE SURE TO SPECIFY THAT THE ABOVE FILES BE TRANSPORTED AS BINARY. ALL OTHER WP DATA FILES ARE TRANSPORTED AS TEXT. STEP_3. Backup all of the WP data files. STEP_4. Run the CONVERT option of BQR or Intersystem Transfer on the WP data files that were transported as TEXT. EXAMPLE: WPDL00 STEP_5. Run WPDU70 to convert the WP data files transported as BINARY. NOTE: WPDU70 functions on WP data files only and only those data files that contain binary information. Menu, Operator and Executive Function files are not included. 5.1 OMS 2.1 Conversion from 13xx Since the conversion of 13xx OMS 2.1 to MPx to 2000/2500/3000/4000 MAI OFFICE 3.2B will only include WPDL00, WPDM00 and the WPTF0& files, the program will bypass the files not found. A prompt will ask if this is a 13xx conversion. If it is, answer 'Y' and the program will continue. 6. INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE The international ID parameter maintenance program (MSMM40) will automatically be run the first time a user runs "MS" after an international or domestic installation. After the user runs "MS", the prompt: "INTERNATIONAL PARAMETERS ARE NOT SET UP (CR)" will appear. This program allows the MAI OFFICE product to be modified in certain areas to conform to a customer's special needs. There are two distinct sets of parameters that a customer may change: SET ONE: Amount Format Insert Code Characters SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg020 Overprint Character Hyphenation Character Telephone Format Sign Symbol Spaces ending a sentence SET TWO: Date Format Date Separator Time Format Time Separator Currency Code Position of Currency Code SET ONE contains options which are global for MAI OFFICE. For example, if the telephone format is set to international, then all MAI OFFICE users will have their telephone numbers unformatted (see below for more detail). CAUTION: Once this set of parameters has been modified the system will not allow them to be changed. SET TWO contains options which are user independent. As an example, two different users on the same MAI OFFICE system may use different date and/or time formats. A complete description of each option and use is given below. 6.1 SET ONE OPTIONS Amount Format options - 1. #,###,##0.00 2. #.###.##0,00 3. #B###B##0,00 B=blank These format masks will allow a user to present numeric data in the form that is acceptable for his or her country. Option '1' is most commonly used in the United States while options '2' and '3' are used in Europe. Insert Code Characters options: "<>", "[]", " " The braces ("[]") currently used in MAI OFFICE to indicate insert codes are not available in all ISO character sets so the user has the ability to select characters that are in the character set they would like to use. Overprint Character options: any character Like the insert code, the backslash ("\") used as an overprint character in MAI OFFICE is not available in all character sets. This option lets the user specify a different character as the overprint character. NOTE: Overprint character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Hyphenation Character options: any character Same as the Overprint Character. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg021 NOTE: This is the character used to separate the word by syllables for hyphenation in the document, IT IS NOT the character used during the printing process to hyphenate a word (usually a '-'). Also the hyphenation character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Telephone Format options: D=Domestic, I=International D=Domestic option - formats all telephone numbers in a (AAA)PPP-NNNN format where: AAA=area code (option field) + PPP=prefix + NNNN=number I=International option - no special formatting or input validation will be done. This field will allow up to 15 characters in any form. Sign Symbol options: 1. "CR/DR" 2. "+/-" 3. "()" In the United States the CR or DR is used to denote positive or negative amounts. In Europe it is more common to use a "+" or "-". This option allows the user to select either. Spaces ending a sentence options: 1 or 2 In the United States, two spaces follow the sentence punctuation. In most other countries, one space follows the sentence punctuation. This option allows the user to select either. 6.2 SET TWO OPTIONS Date Format options: 1. MMDDYY 2. DDMMYY 3. YYMMDD In addition to the (MMDDYY) format, two other formats are available to the user. Date Separator options: any character The user may have the date displayed in a format other than MM/DD/YY such as MM.DD.YY or MM-DD-YY. Time Format options: D=Domestic, I=International D=Domestic - twelve-hour clock or I=International - twenty-four hour clock. Time Separator options: ".", ":", "N"=Null With this option the user may see the hours and SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg022 minutes separated with different options. Currency Code options: any four alpha characters The user may select the characters that will be used as the currency symbol. Position of Currency Code options: L=LEFT, R=RIGHT United States dollars are displayed with the currency symbol to the left of the actual amount (i.e. $1.98). This is not always true in other countries where the currency symbol may appear on the left or the right of the actual amount. With this option the user may select either. 7. MAI BUSINESS DATA 7.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA The Business DATA module is either delivered with the operating system or, in the future, ordered separately. Business Data is restored on the 2000/2500/3000/4000 systems using the name DSS as the module name. Please see Business DATA User Guide (MBF #7557). ******************************************************** * * * BUSINESS DATA 3.2B REQUIRES DSS LEVEL 2.0 OR 2.1A * * * ******************************************************** The MAI OFFICE 3.2B system must be set up properly for the use of MAI Business DATA. Since there are two versions of MAI Business DATA now being used and both versions differ from each other, MAI OFFICE must be set up to correctly recognize and use MAI Business DATA. The following steps must be followed to run Business DATA from OFFICE. 7.2 MPx INSTALLATION The MPx OFFICE release has no standard command files for setting up the proper prefix and running OFFICE. There are two common ways in which OFFICE is accessed. The first is to create a user system logon that sets the proper prefix and runs MS. The other method is to create a command file or program that sets the prefix then runs MS. The following two sections shows what must be added to the OFFICE prefix for accessing ORIGIN 2.0A or 2.1A. 7.2.1 MAI OFFICE 3.2B with MAI ORIGIN 2.0A To access ORIGIN 2.0A from OFFICE 3.2A/B, the following must be added to the prefix: (familyname).ORIGIN.R20A.DATA.,.ORIGIN.R20A.PGM. This should be inserted after the .OMS. node and before the .PS. and .PS.TOOLS. nodes. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg023 Ex.: (familyname).OMS.,(familyname).ORIGIN.R20A.DATA., .ORIGIN.R20A.PGM.,(familyname).PS.,.PS.TOOLS. The ORIGIN family name only needs to be included if . it is not the same as the OFFICE family. 7.2.2 MAI OFFICE 3.2B with MAI ORIGIN 2.1A To access ORIGIN 2.1A from OFFICE 3.2A/B, the following must be added to the prefix: (familyname).ORIGIN.R21A. This should be inserted after the .OMS. node and before the .PS. and .PS.TOOLS. nodes. EX. (familyname).OMS.,(familyname).ORIGIN.R21A., (familyname).PS.,.PS.TOOLS. The ORIGIN family name only needs to be included if it is not the same as the OFFICE family. It is best to have all .PS. files located on the default system family. STEP 1) Change .OMS.LGQM File The .OMS.LGQM file is not needed for ORIGIN 2.1 so it needs to be deleted or moved. If the user intends to use ORIGIN 2.0A with OFFICE in the future then the .OMS.LGQM file needs to be copied to the .ORIGIN.R20A.PGM. node before being deleted. STEP 2) Change 'Executive Query Manager' Jobstep Select 'Presentation Services' from SS.MAIN menu. Create/modify set, at prompt specify 'DP'. Create/modify menu, at prompt specify 'MAIN'. Move cursor to Executive Query Manager option. Move cursor to Jobstep option. Change Jobstep from LGQM to RT.EQM . EXIT and save changes. STEP 3) Change 'ORIGIN Data Management System' Jobstep Select 'Presentation Services' from SS.MAIN menu. Create/modify set, at prompt specify 'DP'. Create/modify menu, at prompt specify 'MAIN'. Move cursor to ORIGIN Data Management System option. Move cursor to Jobsteps option. Change ORIGIN,256 to OFFICE2ORIGIN,256 EXIT and save changes. For more detailed instructions on menu modification steps, see 'MENU and System Services Reference Manual and Presentation Services User Guide', M0063A. STEP 4) Change ORIGIN User Maintenance SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg024 In the User Maintenance section of ORIGIN, user accounts need to be setup to run ORIGIN2OFFICE when logging off, so they will be returned to the OFFICE menu system. 7.3 2000/2500/3000/4000 Installation MAI OFFICE 3.2B no longer uses the command files, emstartmo and startmo. Instead, use the oprinfo utility to create user accounts for each OFFICE/ORIGIN user. The prefix may also be set from a user program. 7.3.1 MAI OFFICE 3.2B with MAI ORIGIN 2.0A From ADMIN access the oprinfo utility to create accounts for OFFICE/ORIGIN users as follows: ADMIN> enter: oprinfo return Home directory:/oms Initial Program:/bin/basic,-q,s=64,pgm=MS,-nr, 'prefix"/oms /origin/r20a/data /origin/r20a/pgm /PS /PS/tools"' As long as ORIGIN has been installed correctly, OFFICE should now work with ORIGIN 2.0A. 7.3.2 MAI OFFICE 3.2B with MAI ORIGIN 2.1A From ADMIN access the oprinfo utility to create accounts for OFFICE/ORIGIN users as follows: ADMIN> enter: oprinfo return Home directory:/oms Initial Program:/bin/basic,-q.s=64,pgm=MS,-nr, 'prefix"/oms /origin/r21a /PS /PS/tools"' STEP 1) Change /oms/LGQM File The /oms/LGQM file is not needed for ORIGIN 2.1A so it needs to be deleted or moved. If the user intends to use ORIGIN 2.0A with OFFICE in the future, then the /oms/LGQM file should be copied to the /origin/r20a/pgm directory before being deleted. STEP 2) Change 'Executive Query Manager' Jobstep Select 'Presentation Services' from SS.MAIN menu. Create/modify set, at prompt specify 'DP'. Create/modify menu, at prompt specify 'MAIN'. Move cursor to Executive Query Manager option. Move cursor to Jobstep option. Change Jobstep from LGQM to /rt/EQM . EXIT and save changes. STEP 3) Change 'ORIGIN Data Management System' Jobstep SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg025 Select 'Presentation Services' from SS.MAIN menu. Create/modify set, at prompt specify 'DP'. Create/modify menu, at prompt specify 'MAIN'. Move cursor to ORIGIN Data Management System option. Move cursor to Jobstep option. Change ORIGIN,256 to OFFICE2ORIGIN,256. EXIT and save changes. For more detailed instructions on menu modification steps, see 'MENU and System Services Reference Manual and Presentation Services User Guide', M0063A. STEP 4) Change ORIGIN User Maintenance In the User Maintenance section of ORIGIN, user accounts need to be setup to run ORIGIN2OFFICE when logging off, so they will be returned to the OFFICE menu system. 7.4 ORIGIN CODE CHANGE FIXES Two SPRs (519867 and 520288) were submitted against OFFICE for problems caused by ORIGIN files. The following are code change fixes to prevent both problems until a future release of ORIGIN is available. 7.4.1 GRAPH INTERFACE ERROR SPR # 519867 No prompt GRAPH INTERFACE first try, !ERR 38 on second try. SOLUTION SCOPE: ORIGIN generated report running under OFFICE (Executive Query Manager) must not perform a DSS package interface. This is allowed only when the program is run out of OFFICE. PROGRAM TO FIX: This problem is caused by Stmt.# 4960 in any ORIGIN generated report, but this statement was generated by the program .PGM.ORINR1., which is encrypted so a solution cannot be given until a future ORIGIN release. WORKAROUND: The user should modify the Stmt.# 4960 on every ORIGIN generated report to be used with MAI OFFICE (EQM). Change: 4960 IF CTL=4 THEN GOTO 9000 ELSE Z9$=U3$;GOTO 15 To: 4960 IF CTL=4 THEN GOTO 9000 ELSE Z9$=U0$;GOTO 15 7.4.2 LETTER GENERATION - SELECTING SAVED OPTIONS SPR # 520288 MPx/SPx !ERR 26 when selecting saved options. PROGRAM TO FIX: RT.ENGLG1 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg026 Change: 0115 A10$=A10$; IF POS(CHR(1)=A0$)=0 THEN LET A1$=""; GOTO 0130 To: 0115 A10$=A10$, A10$=A10$(1,POS($03$=A10$+$03$)-1); IF POS(CHR(1)=A0$)=0 THEN A1$=""; GOTO 0130 Change: 0260 LET R1$="STANDARD OPTIONS",H1$=R1$+O7$(1,14), P3$=A10$ To: 0260 LET R1$="STANDARD OPTIONS",H1$=R1$+O7$(1,14), P3$=N2$ Change: 4350 LET E=999 To: 4350 LET E=4350 8. MAI BUSINESS GRAPH MAI Business GRAPH is a product that allows you to produce quality graphics on a graphics-equipped terminal and/or graphics-supported printers or plotter. The module consists of two programs: GRAPHMAKER and GRAPH. GRAPHMAKER is an interactive window-driven graphics editor. It allows the user to create, maintain and display their own graphs. GRAPH allows you the convenience of displaying your graphs once they have been designed and gives you advanced graphics capability using an editor. The following devices are the only supported plotting devices on the 2000/2500/3000/4000 and MPx series: o PT-4201 150/300 LPM printer (MPx only) o PT-4214 Dual Mode Printer o PT-4215 Dot Matrix Printer o DT-4310 EDT with Graphics Interface Board o DT-4314 Dual Port Terminal o HP 7475A 6-Pen Color Plotter 8.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS GRAPH When installing GRAPH on either system, install all data and program files. With an update installation, the original user specific files will not be overwritten during the file restore since both the PLOTTERS and key file end with a .T . 8.2 MPX INSTALLATION The graphics module consists of the files: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg027 .GRAF.GRAPH .GRAF.GRAPHMAKER .GRAF.PGM.& .GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS.T .GRAF.ETC.GKS.FONT& .GRAF.ETC.GKS.DEVICES .GRAF.ETC.GRF.PROMPTS .GRAPHICS.& .ETC.LEVEL.GRF.T STEP 1) For a new installation, rename: .GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS.T file to .GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS and .ETC.LEVEL.GRF.T file to .ETC.LEVEL.GRF STEP 2) Copy files: .GRAF.GRAPH and .GRAF.GRAPHMAKER to the system prefix: .Rxxxx.SYS. Where xxxx is the current release level. STEP 3) Add your graphic output devices to the plotters file using the EDIT command: !EDIT ().GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS The following is the format for this file: User defined name:device:type:parameter::::: Figure 8-1 shows the supported devices and their types. ______________________________________________________________________________. |. | |. Figure 8-1 Supported Devices With Their Types | |. | |.Device Type Parameters | | DT-4310 EDT :4310:::::: | | DT-4314 DUAL PORT TERMINAL :4314:::::: | | HP 7475A Pen Plotter :spe.hpplot::::: | | PT-4215 Dot Matrix Printer :PT-4215:SUBMIT PRINTER=xx,CLASS=x,RAWMODE=Y, | | DELETE=TRUE::::: | | PT-4214 Dual Mode Printer :PT-4214:SUBMIT PRINTER=xx,CLASS=x,DELETE=TRUE::::| | PT-4201 150/300 LPM Printer:PT-4214:SUBMIT PRINTER=xx,CLASS=x,DELETE=TRUE::::| |______________________________________________________________________________ Figure 8-2 displays how a sample '.GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS' file might appear. ____________________________________________________________________________. | |. | Figure 8-2 Sample '.GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS' file | | |. | DEFAULT:T21:edt:: | | PRINT:LP:PT-4214:SUBMIT PRINTER=LP, CLASS=G, DELETE=TRUE :::::: | | LP:LP:PT-4214:SUBMIT PRINTER=LP, CLASS=G, DELETE=TRUE :::::: | | 4215:P1:PT-4215:SUBMIT PRINTER=P1, CLASS=G, RAWMODE=Y, DELETE=TRUE ::::: | | T5:T5:edt::::: | | T6:T6:4310::::: | | 4314:T*:4314::::: | SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg028 |__________________________________________________________________________|. NOTE: You must have a space before the last colon, ":", if you are passing a parameter. STEP 4) Create CLASS "G" using all defaults if you wish to output to the PT-4214 (DMP) or the 150/300 LPM Printer. 8.2.1 MPx Device Configurations o PT-4201 (150/300 LPM Printer) The PT-4201 is configured as it normally would be for standard data processing. Its graph output requires 132 column paper. o PT-4214 (DMP) Configure the PT-4214 as it would be for standard data processing except that address 20 and 50 must be set to '.1' (20.1 and 50.1). The graphs will fit onto 8 1/2 x 11 inch paper. o PT-4215 Configure the PT-4215 as an LQP (Diablo). o DT-4310 - EDT with graphics interface board No special requirements. o DT-4314 REV. C or above firmware o HP 7475A 6-Pen Color Plotter The HP Plotter must be configured on the ISDC as a TERMINAL, SPE/VDT, 7 BIT, ODD PARITY, 1 STOP BIT, 9600 BAUD, LINE LENGTH 80, X-ON/X-OFF and BANNER NO. The plotter uses a standard VDT cable (907116). The dip switches on the plotter should be set as follows: S2 - ON, S1 - ON, Y - OFF, US - ON, A3 - OFF, B4 - ON, B3 - OFF, B2 - ON, B1- OFF 8.3 2000/2500/3000/4000 INSTALLATION The graph module on the 2000/2500/3000/4000 consists of the following files: /bin/graph /bin/graphmaker /etc/level/GRF /etc/gks/font21 to font26, font99 /etc/grf/help /etc/grf/prompts /etc/plotters /graphics/demo00.data to demo19.data /graphics/bdemo /graphics/demo /graphics/CHART /graphics/clock /graphics/loop STEP 1) If you are updating from a graphics package prior SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg029 to MAI Business GRAPH 3.1A, delete your existing '/etc/plotters' file using the following command: ADMIN>delete /etc/plotters STEP 2) Configure your plotter devices using the configure utility: ADMIN>configure. The plotters file will automatically be created through this utility. Configure your plotter devices using the options in section 8.3.1. Leave all remaining options at their defaults. One of your plotter devices names MUST be called 'default'. If you are modifying a printer device to add or remove spooling, you must remove the device and then add the device with the appropriate answer for spooling. The option 'Plotter parameters': in the configure menu is used only as a comment field in the plotters file. If an entry is made to this field, it must have 4 colons followed by the comments. No spaces are accepted in this field when entering a comment from the configure utility: Plotter parameters: ::::this,is,a,comment 8.3.1 2000/2500/3000/4000 CONFIGURATIONS o DT-4310 EDT with a Graphics Interface Board Device Type :graphics terminal Terminal Type :4310 Graphics Terminal Name :default (user selected) o DT-4314 Device Type :graphics terminal Terminal Type :4314 Graphics Terminal Name :default (user selected) o HP 7475A 6-Pen Color Plotter Device Type : printer Printer Type : hpplot Read/Status Timeout : 1000 Write Timeout : 1000 Graphics Terminal Name : plot The plotter uses a standard VDT cable (907116). The dip switches on the plotter should be set as follows: S2 - ON, S1 - ON, Y - OFF, US - ON, A3 - OFF, B4 - ON, B3 - OFF, B2 - ON, B1 - OFF.. o PT-4214 Dual Mode Printer Device Type : printer Printer Type : PT-4214 The graph output size is 8 1/2 x 11 inches. The plotters file uses the following format: user specified name:device:type:parameter :::: comments o PT-4215 60/180 CPS High Resolution Printer SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg030 Device Type : printer Printer Type : PT-4215 The graph output size is 8 1/2 x 11 inches. The plotters file uses the following format: user specified name:device:type: parameter :::: comments Figure 8-3 shows a sample '/etc/plotters' file for the 2000/2500/3000/4000. ____________________________________________________________________. | |. | Figure 8-3 Sample '/etc/plotters'file | | |. | default:/dev/tty0:edt:::::: |. | tty1:/dev/tty1:edt:::::: | | plot:/dev/p3:hpplot:::::: | | print:/dev/lp:PT-4214:/bin/lpr list=lp -raw -delete :::::: | | print:/dev/p1:PT-4215:/bin/lpr list=p1 -raw -delete :::::: | | term:/dev/tty4:4314:::::: | | |. | |. | NOTE: The parameter field MUST have 1 blank | | space before the colon ":". | |___________________________________________________________________| ___________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 8-4 Sample '/etc/gks/devices' file | | |. | 0:0: |. | 1:1: |. | 2:2: |. | 3:3: |. | 4:4: |. | edt:0:eagle terminal | | hpplot:1:hp plotter | | PT-4214:2:printronix mvp | | PT-4215:3:fujitsu d12400 printer | | 4314:4:dt4314 terminal |. | |. |__________________________________________________________________|. 8.4 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN SYSTEMS o Location of files: File Type 2000/3000 MPx plotters file /etc/plotters .GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS font files /etc/gks/font* .GRAF.ETC.GKS.FONT& device file /etc/gks/devices .GRAF.ETC.GKS.DEVICES help file /etc/grf/help .GRAF.ETC.GRF.HELP prompt file /etc/grf/prompts .GRAF.EDT.GRF.PROMPTS. demo files /graphics/* .GRAPHICS.& executable files /bin/graph .Rxxx.SYS.GRAPH /bin/graphmaker .Rxxx.SYS.GRAPHMAKER . security file /etc/level/GRF .ETC.LEVEL.GRF o Configure Support: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg031 The MPx configure utility will not maintain the plotters file as on the 2000/2500/3000/4000. The user must use the editor (EDIT) to add, modify, or delete entries. o Data File Names The MPx GRAPHMAKER will convert filenames to upper case. The 2000/2500/3000/4000 GRAPHMAKER will accept both lower and upper case. o PT-4201 150/300 LPM printer on a 2000/2500/3000/4000 The PT-4201 150/300 LPM printer is not supported on the 2000/2500/3000/4000 version of Business GRAPH. Since this version assumes that you have a DMP attached, it sends out the escape sequences to change a DMP to mode 1 thus, causing the 150/300 LPM printer to print unintelligible information. 8.5 CURSOR CONTROL IN GRAPHMAKER The cursor control keys can be viewed by pressing the HELP key on your DT-4310 or by pressing CTL - Z. The following are the cursor control keys for GRAPHMAKER: CTL - L Next cell to the right. CTL - H Backspace and next cell to the left. CTL - K Kick up one cell. CTL - J Jump down one cell. CTL - W Return to the Menu Window. CTL - D Delete character. CTL - F Forward 1 character. CTL - Z Help screen. Backspace Non-destructive Backspace. 8.6 HELPFUL HINTS o The titles across the top of your data screen in GRAPHMAKER should be looked upon as sets of like data. The titles going down the left column of the data screen should be viewed upon as parts of a set. o Data for individual pie graphs should be entered in one column. o Data for individual line graphs should be entered in one row. o The following will clear a DT-4310 graphics screen from BASIC: PRINT 'BO',$1B5A471B0C1B5A67$,'EO' o Pressing the ESC key and then DEL key on the DT-4310 will clear a graphics screen. o To clear a DT-4314 graphics screen from the Keyboard use Function + CLEAR (located under the number 4 key). o To clear a DT-4314 graphics screen from BASIC use: PRINT 'ES","Zr", SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg032 9. MAI BUSINESS MAIL Business MAIL is the part of MAI OFFICE that allows electronic mail to be sent between two or more local or remote systems. Business MAIL, through the use of X.25 and public networks, or LAN's allows MAI 2000/2500/3000/4000's and MPx's to exchange messages using the mail feature of MAI Business EXEC. Sending mail to remote locations requires connection to a public or LAN network and the purchase of the proper communications software and hardware. 9.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MAIL 9.1.1 MPx Series To configure Business MAIL on the MPx systems, with OS level of 8/9.6, see the BOSS/VS MAGNET User Reference Guide (M6363). 9.1.2 Configuring the 2000/2500/3000/4000 Business MAIL is supported on the 2000/2500/ 3000/4000 through X.25 and/or LAN. Please read the File Transfer Facility (FTF) User Reference Manual (MBF #6352) and the BOSS/IX 7.4B Software Announcement for installing X.25 and/or LAN. 9.1.3 STARTING MAI BUSINESS MAIL The 2000/2500/3000/4000 requires a special procedure for starting MAI OFFICE when using Business MAIL. If you are not using a 2000/2500/3000/4000 system then refer to Step 1 on page 39 to configure MAI OFFICE for MAIL on the MPx. The special procedure is a file called '/oms/emstartmo'. If this file doesn't exist, the following information will tell you how to create it. You will need to create the following command file for use at the command interpreter on the 2000/2500/3000/4000 to invoke MAI OFFICE. Please note that if you bring up BASIC and run "MS" you will not be able to use the MAIL portion of MAI OFFICE. For that reason you should always enter the MAI OFFICE system using the command file. The command file is created using the editor 'ved'. The following information should be contained in the file: cd /oms basic lib=/lib/bftf.lib -q pgm=MS -nr or a macro called 'mo': #b mo cd /oms;basic lib=/lib/bftf.lib -q pgm=MS -nr You also have to set up 2000/2500/3000/4000 user SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg033 ID's so you can log on to the system. There are several ways that you can do this. A. You can set up an ID for each person who will be using the system. B. Or you can set up one ID which everyone will use to get onto the 2000/2500/3000/4000. If you use this method it is recommended that you not give this ID access to the command interpreter, instead you should use the . second procedure given below to get them into the MAI OFFICE system. After selecting one of the methods given above, it is necessary to define the parameters for the ID or ID's which you are going to create. One of the parameters that must be defined is what initial program will be run when the user logs on. Below are several suggestions as to how this might be done. A. The ID can be set up to take you directly to the command interpreter. At the command prompt the user can invoke MAI OFFICE by typing: 'emstartmo' which is the command file defined above. B. The ID can be set to take the user directly to MAI OFFICE. You do this by entering the following as the initial program: /bin/command,/oms/emstartmo For further information see the documentation for setting up 2000/2500/3000/4000 user accounts. Using this method, the user logs on and goes directly into MAI OFFICE and will then be required to log onto MAI OFFICE. When logging off of MAI OFFICE the user will be returned to the 2000/2500/3000/4000 log on screen (not to the command prompt). C. A menu item can be set to take them into MAI OFFICE when that option is selected. You can do that with the following procedure: 1. Add the option given below to the selected menu (this will probably be the 2000/2500/3000/4000 main menu which is 'top'). OFFICE -- MAI OFFICE 2. The action step for this menu item is: /bin/command,/oms/emstartmo You should refer to the 2000/2500/3000/4000 user documentation for defining menus if you do not know how to do this. There are 3 steps in configuring MAI OFFICE for SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg034 remote mail. STEP 1: The following ID must be set up within MAI OFFICE. The information below assumes that you are familiar with MAI Business EXEC and menu system. If you are not, please refer to the procedures given in the Business EXEC Users Guide (MBF #M0044A) and MAI OFFICE MENU System Services Reference (MBF #M0063A). Create an ID called MAIL with these parameters: In the Operator ID Create/Maintain option, in the General ID Information screen: _______________________________________________________________________ | |. | DESCRIPTION: ELECTRONIC MAIL SYSTEM ID INITIALS: MAIL | | PASSWORD: (defined by security manager) DEFAULT MENU SET: EP | | LOG: N MENU NAME: MAIN | | CONSOLE MODE? N PROGRAM: | |_______________________________________________________________________| NOTE: This ID is supplied by MAI OFFICE 3.2B. Use the default parameters for the other fields on this screen. On the EXEC--Office Directory Parameters screen: PHONE NUMBER: EXTENSION: LOCATION: INTERACTIVE: I DEPARTMENT: ELECT. MAIL USAGE: Y ELECT. MAIL PRIORITY: N The fields which are left blank do not need to be defined but may be if you wish. They are not needed for the functioning of Business MAIL. The MAIL. ID is a "bin" in which any in-tray messages are placed for which there is not a local ID. STEP 2: You will have to set up MAI OFFICE ID's for all users who are going to be using MAI OFFICE. Follow the instructions found in the manuals for Business EXEC and Business MAIL. If you are upgrading your MAI OFFICE and already have ID's you will need to go into ID Create/ Maintain for EXEC and give each user remote mail security (the last two fields shown above). Please note that you cannot do this if the public key has not been properly installed for MAIL (the MOM module). SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg035 STEP 3: After you have installed all of MAI OFFICE, Business MAIL and the communications software, you will need to request the directories for all remote sites in the network. You do this by selecting Remote Request--Office Dir. from the MP.MAIN menu in MAI OFFICE. Enter the name of each location and a request for their directory will be sent to that site. When the directory is received you will be informed by an acknowledgement in your in-tray. 10. MAI BUSINESS MATH MAI Business MATH transforms your video display into a grid resembling an accountant's columnar pad. o An easy-to-use, yet flexible electronic spreadsheet. o For developing projections, budgets, pro formas, cash flows, or other tabular reports requiring mathematical calculations. o Will improve accuracy while saving significant time. 10.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MATH When converting to MAI Business MATH from Rows & Columns, move all spreadsheet files to the OMS node (on MPx systems) or /oms directory (2000/2500/3000/ . 4000 systems). 11. RELATED DOCUMENTATION MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B introduces many new features which were not part of MAI OFFICE 3.1A. New manuals are included in all new orders but must be ordered separately for update orders. The following is a list of documentation for MAI OFFICE 3.2B. Manual_Number Title M0120A MAI Business WORD Reference Manuals and MAI Business DATA User Guide M7550A MAI Business WORD User Guide M7552A MAI Business MATH User Manual M0078A MAI Business GRAPH User and Reference Manuals M0044A MAI Business EXEC User and Reference Manuals and MAI Business MAIL Reference Manual M0063A Menu and System Services Reference Manual and Presentation Services User Guide SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg036 M7511 Decision Support System User Reference Guide M7566 MAI OFFICE Quick Reference Guide 12. CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS The following sections briefly describe improvements made with MAI OFFICE 3.2B. Also included with this new release are improved printer drivers. New dictionary files with additional plurals can be restored over existing WPWF00 and WPWF01 if needed. 12.1 MENU SYSTEM FOR MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B uses a new menu system with the aid of another system, called Presentation Services. Presentation Services provides menu functions. Also the function keys can be programmed through Presentation Services and are used in MAI OFFICE to directly access certain functions of MAI OFFICE from any menu in the system. For information regarding menu maintenance, see the Presentation Services Users Guide M7561. The main menu for MAI OFFICE is: |-----------MAIN MENU------------| | | | Business WORD | | | | Business MATH | | | | Business GRAPH | | | | Business EXEC | | | | Business MAIL | | | | Business DATA | | | | Menu and System Services | | | |________________________________| There are two basic ways to select an option from a menu. You can use the arrow keys to move the cursor. to the desired option or you can type in the designated selection characters. You can substitute the following key sequences in place of the arrow keys: CTRL+K for up arrow, CTRL+J or space bar for down arrow, CTRL+L for right arrow, and CTRL+N or BACKSPACE key for the left arrow. By using the up and down arrow keys, you can move the cursor to the option you want to select. The current option appears highlighted on your screen. Press RETURN to complete your selection. The selections wrap from top to bottom and vice-versa. You can also use selection characters to select SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg037 options from the menu. As you look at the menu on your screen, notice that one or two characters from each option is highlighted. These are the selection characters and indicate what you need to type in order to move the cursor directly to the desired option. Then press RETURN to make your selection. There will always be at least one selection character. A second selection character is used only when the set of first selection characters is not unique. The function keys provide quick access to frequently used options. If you want to use one of the function keys, press the key that matches the label at the bottom of the screen. Below is the function key usage within MAI OFFICE. The notation of F1 through F10 indicates function keys 1 through 10 with the description of that function key's use within MAI OFFICE. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP STATUS IN-TRAY MSGSLIP CALC CALENDR PHONE#S LOGOFF DATE CONSOLE F1 (HELP) will give a brief description of the menu system. F2 (STATUS) will show the user a list of users currently logged on to MAI OFFICE. This is the same function as entering "S" on the previous OMS menu system. F3 (IN-TRAY) will take the user directly to the In-Tray option without having to move through several menu levels. F4 (MSGSLIP) will take the user directly to the Out-Tray option to send a message. F5 (CALC) will take the user directly to the Calculator Function. F6 (CALENDR) will take the user directly to a personal calendar. F7 (PHONE#S) will take the user to a personal telephone directory. F8 (LOGOFF) will log the user off the MAI OFFICE system. This is the same as "L" in the previous OMS menu system. F9 (DATE) will allow the user to change the system date and time if allowed this privilege. This is the same as "D" in the previous OMS menu system. However, if the date is changed from the WP.MAIN MENU, it is only changed for wordprocessing and not on the rest of the system. F10 (CONSOLE) will take the user out of the MAI OFFICE system into console mode. This is the same as "C" in the previous OMS menu system. The user will be allowed CONSOLE only if they are configured or authorized for this privilege. 12.2 TEXT FILE REBUILD CHANGES FOR 3.2B The Text File Rebuild utility has been changed to use full path names when creating a temporary file name and also when it is renamed. The process was also changed so pointers were not SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg038 rewritten into the original header file during the rebuild. Prior to 3.2B, a temporary file was created to correct pointers in the text file but the header file was fixed in place. If the process was interrupted for any reason, the pointers would not match between the header and text files and when the text file rebuild was restarted, all documents were deleted. With MAI OFFICE 3.2B, this will no longer happen since a temporary file is created for both the header file and the text file. If the process is interrupted, the user can safely restart the text file rebuild at the beginning. With MAI OFFICE 3.2B, text file rebuild tries recovering from loops within existing pointers for a single page. 12.2.1 TEXT FILE REBUILD INSTRUCTIONS To execute a Text File Rebuild: STEP_1. At the Business WORD Menu select Supervisory Utilities. The Text File Rebuild utility menu displays. STEP_2. Select Text File Rebuild to contract, expand,. or to rebuild the text file(s). STEP_3. BEGIN REBUILD NOW OR START LATER?(N/L/CR): Options (choose one) a. Type 'N' and CR to begin rebuild immediately after all the parameters have . been entered and validated. Go to STEP 4. b. Type 'L' and CR to start rebuild at a later date and time. Go to STEP 5. c. Type CR to return to Text File Rebuild Menu. STEP_4. DO YOU WANT TO BUILD AN ERROR REPORT? (Y/N) Options (choose one) a. Type 'Y' and CR to build an error report. Write down the name of the error file the system displays here. Go to STEP 6. b. Type 'N' and CR if you don't want an error report. Go to STEP 6. STEP_5. Enter the answers to the following prompts to have rebuild started at a later date and time: ENTER TIME TO REBUILD (HH:MM AM/PM) OR CR: ENTER DATE TO BEGIN REBUILD (MMDDYY) OR CR: The current date and time are displayed next SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg039 to these prompts. To change date and time, . overtype on the date and time displayed by the system. Once date and time have been validated, the screen displays the name of the error file which is created for logging the errors: PLEASE NOTE - ERROR FILE NAME IS RBxxxx (CR) RB stands for rebuild and the characters following RB are the terminal ID. Write down the name of this file displayed for use when . printing the error file report. After you CR. the system creates the error file with the message being displayed: NOW CREATING FILE... STEP_6. DOCUMENT OR PARAGRAPH FILE(S) (D/P/CR): Options (choose one) a. Type 'D' and CR to rebuild a document text file(s). Go to STEP 7. b. Type 'P' and CR to rebuild a paragraph text file. Go to STEP 8. STEP_7. LIBRARY FILE CHARACTER Enter the library file character for the text file to rebuild and CR. When file characters for all the text file(s) to be rebuilt have been entered, CR to end the selection of text files. STEP_8. The screen now displays the number of lines already used in the text file and the space available for each text file specified. If you wish to re-size the text file, enter the . new number of lines for the text file: THERE ARE <#> LINES USED IN LEAVING <#> AVAILABLE ENTER NEW NUMBER OF LINES OR CR: Options (choose one) a. Enter the new number of lines you wish the new text file to have and CR. Go to STEP 9. b. Type CR to retain the same size for text file. Go to STEP 9. STEP_9. The following message appears on the screen: NOW DEFINING TEMPORARY FILES The system looks at the records in the text files to see if there is enough room to create temporary files. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg040 NOTE: Do not leave your terminal until the temporary files have been defined. On the successful completion of allocation of temporary files the above message will disappear. If there is not enough space to define the temporary files the procedure stops. The user must delete any unused files on the disk at this point to make room for the completion of the program. The system now scans the header file first and then scans the text file(s) and documents with in it. As it scans, the following messages appear on the screen: TEXT FILE NOW SCANNING: NOW REBUILDING: The system first makes sure that the text file it is about to rebuild is not being used. If it finds that a library or document in the text file which it is about to rebuild is being used then it will not rebuild that text file and will display the following message: DOCUMENT BUSY. TEXT FILE CANNOT BE REBUILT. If the system encounters any kind of corruption in the chains, it reports such a corruption and attempts to recover the maximum text which is affected by that corruption. Corruptions usually occur in a text file and in the document header record which is linked to documents. The system responds to such corruptions as described below: a. Document Header Record Corruption: If the document header record doesn't point to a proper first and last page of the document, or if these pointers have values outside the range of the text file into which they point, the system displays the following message: POINTERS IN DOCUMENT RECORD FOR CORRUPTED. WILL FIX. The system attempts to correct these pointers. If it is not able to salvage even one page of the document then it proceeds to delete the document and displays the following message: DELETING b. Page Record Corruption: If any of the page records of a document/ SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg041 paragraph do not point to a proper first line of that page then the following message appears on the screen: PAGE RECORD NOT PROPER FOR PAGE <#> The system attempts to restore the proper value of the pointer. If it is unable to restore the pointers then it deletes all the lines for that page. The following message appears: ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> DELETED. If it gets all the lines then the following message appears: RESTORED ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> If it gets only the partial page then the following message is displayed: RESTORED <#> LINES FOR PAGE <#> c. Page Link Corruption: If the system encounters a corruption in page record chains then it displays the following message: PAGE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING PAGE POINTERS... If it is able to restore the complete chain then the following message is displayed: PAGE LINE REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete chain then it displays the following message: PAGE REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST AFTER PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text preceeding the lost page: **PAGE POINTER ERRORS. NEXT <#> PAGES LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION. d. Line Link Corruption: If the system encounters any corruption in the line link chain, it displays the following message: LINE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING POINTERS If it is able to restore the complete line SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg042 link chain, it issues the following message: LINE LINK REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete line link chain then the following message appears: LINE LINK REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST ON PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text where the failure occurred: **LINE POINTER ERRORS. SOME TEXT ON THIS PAGE LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION STEP_10. On the completion of rebuild for each text file, the system renames the temporary text file. STEP_14. If you keyed in 'Y' for STEP 4 the following prompt appears: DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE ERROR REPORT (Y/N)? If you answered 'N', the system displays the Text File Rebuild Menu. NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT A TEXT FILE REBUILD BE RUN ONCE A WEEK TO ENSURE POINTER INTEGRITY. 12.3 IMPROVEMENTS INCLUDED WITH MAI OFFICE 3.2B The following is a list of fixes made to MAI OFFICE 3.2B by module. Included is a short description of the problem reported next to the SPR (Software Problem Report) number. These fixes were generally made for both BOSS/VS and BOSS/IX INSTALLATION/UPGRADE: 516092 OMS2BW: Conversion Problems. 516413 OMS2BW: Hangs with no message if disk is full. 520557 DW2BW: Uses ATTR$ which causes error 20's, 26's and 23's. 520817 New BIT CONVERSION Program Included on tape. MENU/SYSTEM SERVICES: 515151 TRANSLATION: ID Report - .OMSBASE.MSOP20, STMT. 2120. 515176 JOB LOG REPORT: Time structure in hours and minutes. 515177 LOG REPORT: Time structure in hours/minutes. 515178 CLEAR LOG FILES: Include Log Report, Job Log and Usage Report in this option. 515708 Clear function keys when logging out. 515877 TRANSLATION: $omsus message file needs to be updated. 515886 TRANSLATION: Log-report heading translated incorrectly. 515985 Hardcode reference to /oms/MSFI04 in MDMS11, STMT 0350. 516099 Out-tray menu from MAIL displays on the left. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg043 516101 OFFICE menudriver, MSMD11, not handling jobsteps properly. ERR=30 jumping to PS message from OFFICE. 516514 MSUT30 is not clearing all log files. 517369 Security does not work OFFICE menus. 517562 ERR=47, MSMD19, STMT 0180: Blocking all terminals from T7 and T9. 517627 SPX, MSMFWP.ENG: Start size incorrect, change to 300. 517628 TRANSLATION: Error log report, /omsbase/MSLR30. 518243 TRANSLATION: ID Parameter Maintenance, /oms/MSOP20. 518628 CTRL-I skips in-tray message on first time used. 519231 OFFICE editor function keys not loaded at low baud rate. 519434 Error 30 if CTRL-C out of system command. 519443 Logfile created on different families. 519468 DT-4313/14 - Turn pad off when clearing function keys. 520608 Printer Maintenance: Wrong terminal number in busy message. WORD: 513273 PT-4216: No 'CHECK PRINTER' prompt. 514851 SEARCH & REPLACE: Problems with 132 character document line. 515144 TEXT MAINTENANCE: 80 column text, word wrap set to 'N', text continues beyond right margin. 515152 ERR=14, WPPS20, STMT 2220: No error trap in paragraph rebuild. 515167 Close WPPS00 when paragraph call complete. 515266 FORMULA: Zero suppression occurs when flag set to 'N'. 515335 Printing to serial file that already exists will hang the terminal. 515472 QUICK FILE MERGE: Doc. imported from serial file loses last record, adds blank page and extra line(s). 515537 ERR=47, WPBE53, STMT 7120: Search string C4<0. 515690 PRINT TO SLAVE PRINTER: Only way to abort doc. print is to release terminal. 515694 TRANSLATION: .OMSBASE.WPOS40, Untranslated messages. 515711 FORMULA: Executing formula directly does not support different masking properly. 515815 CTRL+B used on HVDT calls files merge not bold attribute. 515825 SEARCH & REPLACE: Previously defined parameters caused loss of . data. 515892 TRANSLATION: Translation of 'R' in the dictionary to replace a word on the cursor position is incorrect. 515930 FORM MAINTENANCE: Hard copy starts with page 2. 516012 TRANSLATION: 'END' in archive list maintenance works incorrectly. 516029 OMS2BW conversion problem. 516041 INTERNATIONAL - Run "HELPCONVERT" directly caused an ERR=12, STMT 1650, CALL"CMDLANGUAGE". 516052 Printer Insert codes PAON and PJON prints the underline wrong because of the justification. 516055 SUMMATION ACROSS: Negative sign display incorrect. 516057 ERR=47, WPOS80, STMT 8420: Using attributes in helptext. 516058 DT-4313: Super and Subscript display incorrectly. 516070 TRANSLATION: System does not de-archive purged archived documents. 516089 ERR=14, WPDM20, STMT. 6030 516143 DOCUMENT SYSTEM RECONSTRUCT: CR for hardcopy freezes VDT. 516249 Editing document leaves unlinked records in the text file - pointers are not being reset. 516252 PT-4215 prints an apostrophe or 'R' at end of and below document text. 516273 WPQP11, STMT. 2090: Using system printer in DISCONNECT or SUSPENDED mode will delete an item from the queue because an ERR=2 is returned, not the ERR=14 expected. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg044 516378 WORD does not allow character to be placed on right margin as OMS did. 516379 Left print margin incorrectly calculated in WORD. 516382 VIEW: Does not check security codes for document. 516383 VIEW: ERR=41, WPCP11, STMT. 7110. Library must be repaired to resolve. 516414 Document page pointers not updated correctly if a page is inserted before page 1. 516569 PT-4223, DISCONNECT MODE: Mnemonics printed due to 'BO'. WPDP90, stmt. 2025, add 'EO' 516570 FORMULA: Allow negative sign. 517103 ERR=14, WPPS11, STMT 1050: User1 in Rebuild, User2 in paragraph build. 517443 Document maintenace allowed during archive. 517465 TEXT FILE REBUILD: Duplicate name error creating file. 517779 Translation Problem on TFR report. (SOW41) 517780 Paragraph Information prints in 8 LPI. 517786 Hardcopy print of glossary information in hex code. 518057 TRANSLATION: ERR=47, WPDU53, STMT 2010. 518244 TRANSLATION: Page print selection to 'LP' does not work. 518248 TRANSLATION: /omsbase/WPDP10, 9010, 'Y' should be translated. 518252 ESC while printing, followed by 'Y' to reprint hangs the terminal. Int'l only. (SOW43) 518254 MTS-ARCHIVE: Archive tape info lists 72 documents. Should be 85. 518255 MTS-ARCHIVE: Can archive 85 docs., de-archive only 72. 518351 LP configured as 3510 loses top-of-form. 518445 Cursor moves to next line after 'CHECK PRINTER' message. 518448 Can't escape out of Check Printer message. 518450 LSR driver: no form feed between copies. 518452 LSRS driver: Page break incorrect. 518453 LSRS driver: TOF not consistent. 518464 LSHEET form: Change to 84 lines for legal size form. 518465 SINGLE form with 15TF and 16TF doesn't form feed at end of page. 518467 FF on reprint page didn't occur until after user hit CR for next page. 518498 Extra page with 'O' printed between copies. 518500 Top-of-form changes on each page in the LSRS driver. 518580 Last page of document using queued LSR not ejected. 518685 Inconsistencies between FORMS released on MPx and SPx. Both now: SHEET, LSHEET, SINGLE, LETTER. 518686 Top-of-form incorrect after print to PT-4215/16. 518759 After 'SECURITY VIOLATION', document is locked even to owner. 518904 Problem when library full during Mail Merge. 518905 Blank page between copies. 518912 Terminal hangs if error occurs during slave print. 518931 DOCUMENT DIRECTORY PRINT: A $0C$ is always used, printer type ignored. 518958 PT-4213 slaved to DT-4310: Check Printer message. 518959 Box command on PT-4215/16/23 hangs terminal. 518964 PT-4214 slaved to DT-4312: Prints Y in place of PBOL command. 518965 ERR=41, Stmt. 860: with bold and underline. 518969 PT-4213 slaved to DT-4314: Underlines incorrectly. 518971 Underline incorrect on PT-4214. 518976 Underscore insert codes not working on PT-4213 and PT-4214. 519016 Paper/ribbon out not handled on letter quality slaves. 519018 PT-4206 not returned to local mode, formfeed disabled. 519041 PT-4223 justifies last line of paragraph. 519048 ERR=46 printing many documents without exiting. 519131 SEARCH & REPLACE: With blanks, ERR=47. 519133 SEARCH & REPLACE: Blanks retain previous attributes. 519134 TFR reports errors incorrectly. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg045 519156 TFR: Duplicate name, procedure aborted. 519220 BOX PRINT: Timing problems causing 'CHECK PRINTER' on PT-4216. 519298 ERR=46, WPDU31, STMT 2542: Document System Reconstruct. 519327 Loop condition in PT-4213/14 driver. 519364 Problem feeding sheets on PT-4206. 519375 LSR should select bottom bin at start of job. 519422 PT-4215 feeding two sheets. 519447 ERR=27, WPQP30, STMT 2020: Deleting document from queue. 519448 FORMULA: Cannot overwrite total amounts. (Changed to clear area within mask and print new number based on mask.) 519495 PT-4206 SLVD/SLVS prints extra character at end. 519502 PRINT QUEUE: Blank page between copies. 519508 PT-4206 SLVD/SLVS to DT-4310 hangs terminal. 519524 TEXT FILE REBUILD - Fails on rebuild with corrupted line pointers. 519578 Terminal hang after 'N' to "DO YOU WISH TO ABORT?" msg. 519579 PT-4206 SLVD: LETTER: Incorrect TOF after last pg of job. 519580 Last page not ejected if queued LSR. 519581 PT-4206 SLVD: TOF button disabled and prints 'I'. 519665 PT-4206/11: SINGLE: Doesn't FF last page when printing multi-copies. 519695 ERR=36 between WPDP20 & WPDP51. Missing variable in ENTER statement. 519715 PT-4215 sheetfeeder pulls page 2 from bin 1 if page 1 has exactly 66 lines. 519717 Not pulling paper from bins correctly on PT-4206, PT-4211, PT-4215 and PT-4216. . 519718 PT-4206/11 won't draw sheet from the sheetfeeder if the previous page has less than (x) lines. 519755 PT-4223: First line of print starts on line 2 of the sheet. 519840 PT-4206/11 Sheet, slaved: Not pulling sheets correctly. 519868 APPEND: Check document security first. 519869 PT-4215 sheet, slaved: Draws a blank sheet after escape to reprint is 'N'. 520133 Using both underline and superscript attributes, the superscript is not underlined. 520298 Printer Maintenance: SLV still prompts for L=4214, W=4213. There is no 4214 SLV. 520434 Overprint character used with a print command like PSHD, command is ineffective. 520697 WORD: When BOLD command is used, it is not returning to the correct print position. 520698 WORD: ERR=47 when using a backslash to underscore a line. 520721 MPx: Conversion problem on text files. 520891 PT-4206/11: Bold text repeats on line with overprint character. NO SPR TEXT FILE REBUILD: Use full path name on creation of temporary file. WPDU53: STMTS. 3012, 4150 and 4155. NO SPR 15TF or 16TF: Hit ESC while printing first page of doc - multiple copies. Repeat. First copy ok. Second copy loses top-of-form. NO SPR PT-4206/11 driver printed 'OO' after pressing ESC. NO SPR INTERNATIONAL: PT-4206/11, underlining some characters did not always work. NO SPR Printing to a slave printer, unexpected error occurs. Press return to the 'ERROR xx CALL PROGRAMMER' message. Further output sent to printer, terminal hung. NO SPR TRANSLATION TABLE MAINTENANCE: Item 6 Update Modifier Characters displayed all characters with high bit off. DATA: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg046 514733 DATA: Return from ORIGIN 2.1, to wrong menu and console lock on. 515705 MAIL LIST MAINTENANCE: ERR=27, LGML30, STMT. 8010. 515710 MAIL MERGE: Rebuild deletes all documents after message: 'DOCUMENT IS BUSY' if document name is tried a second time and document is really busy. 515957 MAIL MERGE: Allow printer insert codes. 516100 LG: No way to exit print once it begins. 516385 LG: Blank page between each document when printing to a system printer. 516500 LG: Cannot queue over 1 print job. Fixed in: LGIN11, LGIN20, LGIN40 and LGPU10. 517275 ERR=0, LGIN40, STMT 0140 519658 LG: Blank page after job completed on PT-4223. 519716 LG: PT-4216 slaved to a DT-4312 caused hang condition. 519727 LG: Slaved PT-4215/16, page between copies has output. 519832 LG: PT-4213 SLV to DT-4310; ERR=14 @ line#5010 in /oms/WPDP10. 519839 LG: PT-4215, not printing last line, loses TOF. 519925 LG: Must hit ESC once for every record to be printed in order to abort job. 520074 LG: ERR=27, WPDP10 520172 LG: Line not cleared for messages on escape to reprint or abort. 520802 LG: Laser driver on the PT-4215/16 not doing a form feed between letters. EXEC: 516044 INTERNATIONAL: Date display format wrong in calendar display/maintain. 516090 BULLETIN BOARD: Terminal display is incorrect. 516091 TRANSLATION: System deletes a confirmed appointment out of the calendar. Program /omsbase/EFAS50, STMT. 1515. 516104 ERR=46 when directing output to WORD document from many EXEC functions. 516428 ERR=2, EFDL55, STMT. 2270 519229 Problems with terminals over T9 in in-tray/out-tray functions. 519469 Translation problem. (MOM01) 519748 Auto Scheduler leaves ID busy after cr to exit screen. NO SPR IN-TRAY: Two users can access same in-tray at the same time if the second user tried twice in a row. MAIL: 516099 SPX: Only the Out-Tray option is displayed when Out-Tray is chosen from MAIL menu. MATH: 516618 ERR=46 on terminals greater than T9. 519271 MATH proprietary message not displaying. 519353 Backup spreadsheet loses Graph parameters. 519463 Memory is full. 519501 ERR=41 in ROAP20 in interface with breaks. 519768 MATH to GRAPH: Horizontal labels appear left justified. 519769 Position 'A1' appears right justified, should be left. Right justified by design, no change. ORIGINATOR: Elaine Titus SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB011 Pg047 FIB 00012 03/22/90 *** Notes & Cautions on OFFICE 3.2B [ WPSF 563/-1/-2/-4 ] *** MAI OFFICE 3.2B has been released for the BOSS/VS (MPx Systems) and the BOSS/IX (2000/2500/3000/4000 Systems). This release contains many enhancements and problem fixes. MAI OFFICE 3.2B requires ORIGIN 2.0 or above for Letter Generation. For details of this release and for installation and upgrade instructions, refer to the MAI OFFICE 3.2B Software Announcement #163. NOTES AND CAUTIONS FOR BOSS/VS (MPx SYSTEMS) o When slave printing, terminal set-up mode should not be entered. o Slave printing is not supported from a 4310 terminal with a graphics board. o Printer set-up for SHEET form do not print well below the 60th line. The 66th line does not always print on the page. This is a printer hardware limitation. o Printing from one terminal to the slave printer of another terminal is not supported from WORD. o Programs WPDP52, WPDP54, WPDP56 are no longer used by WORD. They should be removed from the system. o BOLD is not supported on the 4214 and 4222 printers. o The 4213, 4214 and 4222 printers do not support many word processing attributes. All will underline and the 4213 will bold text. None will superscript or subscript. The use of the overprint character feature is not supported on these printers. o Terminals must be up to specified revision levels in order to slave print correctly. Please see Software Announcement #163 for this information. o The 4215 printer will not print on the top line of a page when being sheet fed. This is a printer limitation. o If the ghost task for the Queue is unexpectedly killed, users will still be prompted to Queue their document prints, even though the Queue is not active. Starting and stopping the Queue will clear this problem. o MAIL: Message Slip: if the 13th line is cut, the new line (14th) always displays at the bottom regardless of subsequent cursor movement. This is a display problem only and is not written to the file in this position. o GRAPH: Scatter type graphs do not print the horizontal titles. o A "Check Printer" message may occur after a 4213 printer attached to a 4313 terminal is powered off/on before a WORD SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB012 Pg001 print job. o Error conditions (paper out, ribbon out) will cause a "Check Printer" message after the error condition has been fixed. NOTES AND CAUTIONS FOR BOSS/VS (MPx SYSTEMS) o An extra Form Feed will occur at the end of a print job using Letter Generation on 4215, 4216 and 4223 printers confugured with the LSR driver. o Loading function keys at low baud rates may cause incorrect key assignments. o If two users access the same document, via the RE-ENTER command, care should be taken NOT to RENAME the document. This can cause Error 11's and text can be lost. o Using prestige font on the 4223, the underline will be broken when used with super or subscripted characters. a o Printer throttle not reset after slaving from OFFICE from a 4312 terminal. This is a hardware limitation. o For printing on all 66 lines of a page on the 4223 printer, VMI and HMI compression should be ENABLED. o Errors can occur when a text file is expanded manually. All expansions should be executed via Text File Rebuild. o MATH: Underline function on rows: Global Set Option: Skip column A. o MATH: Option #9 'Name of Linkout Program': under Install/Change terminal parameters does not function correctly. o Expanded printing on a 4213 slave printer attached to a 4309 terminal causes TOF to be lost on subsequent pages of the same job, but does not affect any subsequent jobs. o EXEC Functions: Error 2, EFAC50, Statement 2050. Workaround is to add 'END=2051' to statement 2050. o ERROR=14, PROGRAM NAME: EFAC50, STATEMENT NUMBER: 0106 Accessing ACKNOWLEDGMENTS in in-tray after viewing messages first. FIX: Program name: EFAC50 0104 OPEN(10,ERR=0105)"EFAC00" o EXEC: Calendar slips not being put into In-tray. FIX: Program name: EFAS20 2460 GOTO 6000 6020 P9$=P8$(1,6),P8$="EFAS19" o ERR=41 in EMPM10 when sending a message to a remote system. CAUSE: FTF PROBLEM: Verify FTF is running first. Error SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB012 Pg002 message branches to wrong statement in EMPM10M. FIX: Will be fixed in a later release of EXEC since the fix is in a PSAVED program. o MSMD11 driver change to stop menu timeout. EDIT: 0260 LET TIMEOUT=NUM(C8$(16,2))*60; CALL MSINIT, 0260: LANGUAGE$... TO: 0260 TIMEOUT=0; CALL MSINIT,LANGUAGE$... o LETTER GENERATION-SINGLE FORM PAGE PROMPT - program WPDP20 EDIT: 0505 ...))+5,6; ELSE GOTO... TO: 0505 ...))+5,6; IF D5$="N" THEN GOSUB 6000;GOTO 1000 ELSE GOTO... o MAI OFFICE 3.2B LASER PRINTER DRIVER CHANGE With the new printer drivers, the laser printer will always default to the bottom bin and the user cannot override. If the user wants to use the top bin, the LSRS driver must be used. o For any error occurring in Text Maintenance. Please run "WPEE90" to reset document pointers, then run a Document System Reconstruct to repair that document. DO NOT type in "END", run "MS" because documents could be destroyed! o PT-4222 - draft support only CARRIER OS CONFIG WORD DRIVER WORD FORM MPX DMP SERIAL 3150 LETTER EXEC configuration is identical to the PT-4214 config. Draft mode support only: LETTER FORM: Continuous paper. The following is NOT supported: SHEETFEEDER (SHEET FORM), HAND FED SHEET (SINGLE FORM) or SLAVE CONFIGURATION NOTES AND CAUTIONS FOR BOSS/IX (2000/2500/3000/4000 SYSTEMS) o If the 4211 printer is printing a WORD document at the same time as a 4215 or 4223 printer, the 4211 print speed will slowdown until the 4215/4223 printer is done formatting and sending the print job to the print queue (spooler). o When slave printing, terminal set-up mode should not be entered. o Slave printing is not supported from a 4310 terminal with a graphics board. o Printers set-up for SHEET form do not print well below the 60th line. The 66th line does not always print on the page. This is a printer hardware limitation. o Printing from one terminal to the slave printer of another SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB012 Pg003 terminal is not supported from WORD. o Programs WPDP52, WPDP54, WPDP56 are no longer used by WORD. They should be removed from the system. o BOLD is not supported on the 4214 and 4222 printers. o The 4213, 4214 and 4222 printers do not support many word processing attributes. All will underline and the 4213 will bold text. None will superscript of subscript. The use of the overprint character is not supported on these printers. o Terminals must be up to specified revision levels in order to slave print correctly. Please see Software Announcement #163 for this information. o The 4215 printer will not print on the top line of a page when being sheet fed. This is a printer limitation. o If the ghost task for the Queue is unexpectedly killed, users will still be promted to Queue their documents prints, even through the Queue is not active. Starting and stopping the Queue will clear this problem. o MAIL: Message Slip: If the 13th line is cut, the new line (14th) always displays at the bottom regardless of subsequent cursor movement. o GRAPH: Scatter type graphs do not print the horizontal titles. o A "Check Printer" message may occur after a 4213 printer attached to a 4313 terminal is powered off/on before a WORD print job. o Error conditions (paper out, ribbon out) will cause a "Check Printer" message after the error condition has been fixed. NOTES AND CAUTIONS FOR BOSS/IX (2000/2500/3000/4000 SYSTEMS) o An extra Form Feed will occur at the end of a print job using Letter Generation on 4215, 4216 and 4223 printers configured with the LSR driver. o Loading function keys at low baud rates may cause incorrect key assignments. o If two users access the same document, via the RE-ENTER command, care should be taken NOT to RENAME the document. This can cause Error=11's and text can be lost. o Using prestige font on the 4223, the underline will be broken when used with super on subscripted characters. o Printer throttle not reset after slaving from OFFICE from a 4312 terminal. This is a hardware limitation. o For printing on all 66 lines of a page on the 4223 printer, VMI and HMI compression should be enabled. o Errors can occur when a text file is expanded manually. All expansions should be executed via Text File Rebuild. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB012 Pg004 o MATH: Option #9 'Name of Linkout Program' under Install/Change terminal parameters does not function correctly. o Expanded printing on a 4213 slave printer attached to a 4309 terminal causes TOF to be lost on subsequent pages of the same job, but does not affect any subsequent jobs. o EXEC functions: Error 2, EFAC50, Statement 2050. Workaround is to add 'END=2051' to Statement 2050. o WORD: Document Directory: Select and Sort all WP documents: If there are more than 5400 listed, an Error 41 may occur. o MAI OFFICE 3.2B*16 OMS2BW, ERR=41, Stmt. #: 0434 Before running this program, change as follows: >start 256 >load"/oms/OMS2BW" Change 432 ...12,3)),RO... to ...12,3)),R0... >SAVE MAI OFFICE 3.2B*17 was released to resolve this problem. o EXEC: Calendar Parameter file on release tape is already full. FIX: Expand or clear EFCA02. o ERROR=14, program name:EFAC50, statement number: 0106 Accessing ACKNOWLEDGMENTS in in-tray after viewing messages first. FIX: Program name: EFAC50 0104 OPEN(5,ERR=0105)"EFAC00" o EXEC: Calendar slips not being put into In-tray. FIX: Program name: EFAS2B 2460 GOTO 6000 6020 P9$=P8$(1,6),P8$="EFAS19" o ERROR=14, program name:EFIT39, statement number: 0120 When doing an ACKNOWLEDGMENT for a single message in in-tray. FIX: Program name: EFIT39 0114 OPEN(C0,ERR=0120)"EFAC00" o ERR=41 in EMPM10 when sending a message to a remote system. CAUSE: FTF problem: verify FTF is running first. Error message branches to wrong statement in EMPM10M. FIX: Will be in a later release of EXEC since it is in a PSAVED program. o To increase number of possible OFFICE users to greater than 32: MSTI00 - change bytes/record to 1000. MSFI00 - change # of records to 512. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB012 Pg005 This was also documented in Field Bulletin #457 on page 6. o Do not use tty32 for MAI OFFICE. The terminal ID is interpreted as a null value. o LETTER GENERATION-SINGLE FORM PAGE PROMPT - program WPDP20 EDIT: 0505 ...))+5,6; ELSE GOTO... TO: 0505 ...))+5,6; IF D5$="N" THEN GOSUB 6000;GOTO 1000 ELSE GOTO... o MAI OFFICE 3.2B LASER PRINTER DRIVER CHANGE With the new printer drivers, the laser printer will always default to the bottom bin and the user cannot override. If the user wants to use the top bin, the LSRS driver must be used. o For any error occurring in Text Maintenance. Please run "WPEE90" to reset document pointers, then run a Document System Reconstruct to repair that document. DO NOT type in "END"; run"MS" because documents could be destroyed! o TERMINAL SEQUENCE IN CASE OF FATAL ERROR IN TEXT MAINTENANCE For when a user gets fatal error in text maintenance and the terminal locks. It must be entered from another terminal and the terminal number of the hung terminal must be known. For this program to work, the error must have occurred in program WPBE20. 10 OPEN(1)"/dev/ttyx"; REM" x= the locked terminal number" 20 PRINT(1)'ES',"EO",'ES',"EI",'ES',"BE", 30 CLOSE(1) RUN o ERROR 255 Archiving or de-archiving documents after upgrade from OMS/OFFICE to MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B. CAUSE: OMS/OFFICE on OS 7.2 used the command 'tee' placed in the /oms directory. After the conversion the file 'tee' is still there. So, when archiving or de-archiving with MAI OFFICE, a 7.2 command was called under a 7.4 OS --> ERROR 255. SOLUTION: Change install instructions so the /oms/tee file is deleted. o PT-4222 - draft support only CARRIER OS CONFIG WORD DRIVER WORD FORM SPX PT-4222 3150 LETTER EXEC config. is identical to the PT-4214 config. Draft mode support only: LETTER FORM: Continuous paper. The following is NOT supported: SHEETFEEDER (SHEET FORM), HAND FED SHEET (SINGLE FORM) or SLAVE CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB012 Pg006 Addendum-4 PROBLEM: SPx - VIEW, TERMINAL HANG, PROGRAM WPCP11 FIX: Modify statement 882 as follows: OLD - 0882 ...,; INPUT (0)*; GOTO 9200 NEW - 0882 ...,; INPUT (31)*; GOTO 9200 PROBLEM: SPx & MPx - VIEW, ERROR 26, PROGRAM WPCP10 FIX: Modify statement 4014 as follows: 4014 IF L0$(Z,1)<>$00$ THEN LET L0$(Z,1)=$00$; WRITERECORD(7, IND=DEC(L0$(Z+OFCURPTR,3)))L0$(Z+OFPREPTR,L6); IF ASCREBUF$(Z+OFCURPTR,3) <>$000000$ THEN WRITERECORD (7,IND=DEC(ASCREBUF$(Z+OFCURPTR,3)))ASCREBUF$(Z+ OFPREPTR,L6) The underline indicates the change. NOTE: Do not wait for an error 26 to occur before modifying this statement, because this error will cause text file corruption. PROBLEM: SPx - MAI OFFICE 3.2B - ERROR=30 on any protected program in OFFICE after downgrading the Operating System from 7.5B to 7.4B. SOLUTION: Restore all the program files from MAI OFFICE 3.2B for 7.4B. PAGE 2 OF 2 FIELD BULLETIN #563 Addendum-4 PROBLEM: SPx - MAI GRAPH 3.2B - Message "Suspended memory management error", BASIC error 255, after upgrading Operating System from 7.4B to 7.5B or after installing MAI GRAPH 3.2B for 7.4B on the SPx system with 7.5B Operating System. SOLUTION: Install MAI GRAPH 3.2B for 7.5B. ORIGINATOR: Elaine Titus SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB012 Pg007 FIB 00013 10/27/89 *** P. S. Forms Management 3.3A Software Announcement [ WPSS 164 ] *** MAI Basic Four, Inc. is pleased to announce the availability of Presentation Services Forms Management 3.3A (PS3.3A), the latest addition to the Presentation Services family of tools. This tool, used in conjunction with Business BASIC ("BB90"), will provide the developer with a new way to display data entry screens. The new display, or windows, will dress up the application and set it apart from others found on multi-user systems. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 OVERVIEW 2.0 REQUIREMENTS 2.1 BOSS/VS 2.2 BOSS/IX 3.0 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 3.1 BOSS/VS 3.2 EXECUTING PS FORMS MANAGEMENT ON BOSS/VS 3.3 INTERNATIONAL INSTALLATION/REINSTALLATION 3.4 BOSS/IX 3.5 EXECUTING PS FORMS MANAGEMENT ON BOSS/IX 4.0 FEATURES 4.1 FORMS BUILDER 4.2 FORMS RUNTIME 4.3 BUSINESS BASIC INTERFACE 5.0 BOSS/VS TO BOSS/IX CONVERSION 6.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION 7.0 HELPFUL HINTS 7.1 BOSS/VS SPECIFIC HELPFUL HINTS 7.2 BOSS/IX SPECIFIC HELPFUL HINTS 1.0 OVERVIEW Presentation Services Forms Management is a set of tools designed to help create and maintain data entry and display forms for application software. It follows the earlier version of Presentation Services which designed and maintained easy-to-use menus. Existing applications will have to be modified to take advantage of Forms Management. Forms Management is composed of three major components: The Form Builder, Form Runtime, and Business Basic Extensions (Please Refer to the Features Section for explanation). 2.0 REQUIREMENTS SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB013 Pg001 2.1 BOSS/VS The minimum O/S level required to run PS Forms Management is 8/9/10.6E. Approximate Disk Requirements: PS 3.3A Installed with PSDEMO files retained 4.60 MB PS 3.3A Installed without PSDEMO files 4.10 MB Each Form Set requires 0.08 MB 2.2 BOSS/IX The minimum O/S level required to run PS Forms Management is 7.4B. Approximate Disk Requirements: PS 3.3A Installed with PSDEMO files retained 2.02 MB PS 3.3A Installed without PSDEMO files 1.72 MB Each Form Set requires 0.04 MB 3.0 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 3.1 INSTALLATION/REINSTALLATIONS ON BOSS/VS To install/reinstall Presentation Services 3.3A onto an MPx system, perform the following steps: _ NOTE _ * * * PS 3.3A includes all the data files and programs that PS 3.1A * * contains, therefore, only PS 3.3A is needed on a system. * * Please condense all copies of PS 3.1A to one family before * * installing PS 3.3A onto your system, if multiple copies exist. * * * * If a new Operating System is installed, or an OFFICE 3.2B or * * an ORIGIN 2.1A release is put onto the system at some point * * after PS 3.3A is installed, then PS 3.3A must be reinstalled. * * This is due to the existence of the PS 3.1A product on the * * releases mentioned or because the new OS overwrites some * * needed programs on the system family. Install PS 3.3A and * * execute the .PS.INSTALL program to correct any possible * * problems. * * * 1) Set the correct prefix so that the PS 3.3A files will be restored to the proper family. Unlike PS 3.1A, this family does not have to be the default family. If PS 3.1A already exists on a family then PS 3.3A should be installed onto that family. !PREFIX (FAMILY).PS. 2) Using the SAVERESTORE utility, restore all files from the tape to the system. Verify that the files are being restored to the correct family. 3) Exit the SAVERESTORE utility and run the PS INSTALL program to complete the installation. o From Command mode enter the following: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB013 Pg002 !BASIC INSTALL o From BASIC or enter the following: >RUN "INSTALL" This INSTALL program will copy certain files to the default family and to the system node. It can be executed any number of times without fear of losing data or functionality. 3.2 EXECUTING PS FORMS MANAGEMENT ON BOSS/VS The following explanation shows how to access the Form Builder or Menu Builder menus. 1) Set the correct prefix so that the PS 3.3A files can be accessed from BASIC. Make your user prefix the primary node if you don't want programs to be stored under the PS node. NOTE: For PS runtime, no special prefix is necessary. !PREFIX (FAMILY).USERNODE.,.PS.,.PS.TOOLS. 2) Enter the Form Builder program by executing the FBMAIN program. o From Command mode enter the following: !BASIC FBMAIN o From BASIC or enter the following: >RUN "FBMAIN" 3) Enter the Menu Builder program by executing the MBMAIN program. o From Command mode enter the following: !BASIC MBMAIN o From BASIC or enter the following: >RUN "MBMAIN" 3.3 INTERNATIONAL INSTALLATION/REINSTALLATION For the initial installation of PS Forms Management at international sites, please follow the installation instructions on the previous pages. Reinstallation If an upgrade to a new level of PS Forms Management or reinstallation of a current level is taking place and PS messages have been translated into another language, the PS message runtime file will need to be rebuilt. The runtime file '().PS.MSGFILE.PS' will be overwritten during an upgrade or reinstallation. The file containing all the translated messages,' MSGA.PS', will not be affected. In order to rebuild the message file, the steps below need to be followed: o Verify that the prefix is set to (FAMILY).USERNODE.,.PS.,.PS.TOOLS. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB013 Pg003 o RUN "MSGMAIN" o Select the Build runtime file option from the menu. o Specify 'PS' as the message set file. o All the available languages will be listed. Select those that will be placed in the runtime file. o When is pressed, the new PS runtime file will be created. Now PS applications can access the correct translated PS runtime message file. **** NOTE **** If upgrading from PS 3.1A to 3.3A, only the messages from the 3.1A level will be placed in the runtime file. All additional new messages will need to be translated first before building the runtime file. 3.4 INSTALLATION/REINSTALLATION ON BOSS/IX Install the PS Forms Management files using the EPS saveset. o ADMIN> install cs EPS 3.5 EXECUTING PS FORMS MANAGEMENT ON BOSS/IX Create an operator to access the Form Builder directly. First, make a user directory to store all PS form programs. 1) ADMIN> makedir /PS/username Where /username is the name of the PS user. Next, go into BASIC and write the following program that will be executed by operator: ADMIN> basic s=300 READY> 10 REM "PROGRAM TO RUN FORMS" 20 PREFIX "/PS/username /PS /PS/tools" 30 RUN "FBMAIN" 40 END > SAVE "/PS/username/PGMNAME" 2) From BASIC return to ADMIN to make the program executable by all users. Then access the operator info utilities. READY> quit ADMIN> filemodes +x +x /PS/username/PGMNAME ADMIN> oprinfo o The operator info menu will be displayed. Select the option to add an operator. o Enter an operator name o Change the home directory to /PS/username o Modify the initial program. Select Other and type in the following: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB013 Pg004 /bin/basic,s=300,-nr,pgm=/PS/username/PGMNAME _ IMPORTANT INFORMATION _ * * * If PS 3.3A is being installed on a BOSS/IX system with 7.4B * * operating system, the special instructions below must be * * followed. * * * INSTALLATION/REINSTALLATION ON BOSS/IX WITH 7.4B O/S Install the PS Forms Management files using the EPS saveset. o ADMIN> install cs EPS After the EPS saveset has been installed, the Business BASIC runtime must also be installed using the trestore command. If you are installing on a 2500/3000/4000 machine, use the following command: o ADMIN> trestore dev=cs name=EB2 -v If you are installing on a 2000 machine, use the following command: o ADMIN> trestore dev=cs name=EB1 -v *NOTE: dev should equal the tape device ID that you are working with. 4.0 FEATURES 4.1 FORMS BUILDER The forms builder is where it all starts. The data entry screen is built using a full screen text editor. A text editor is similar to a word processing product, except you work with one screen (or page) at a time. Some of the features include the following: o Global Data Dictionary to define commonly used fields. o On-Line Help. Presentation Services Help facilities are used throughout the builder. PS Help is similar to the help options found in the popular PC products. o Function Keys. Each form may have a default set of function keys defined. These keys are displayed on the screen at runtime. o Data Validation can be applied to input fields. This helps reduce the coding requirements for an application program. o Test Drive. Often times, the developer wants to try the form before writing any code. Test Drive enables the developer to create a skeleton/working model of an application program. o Multi-Lingual. PS Forms was designed to reduce the tedious and time consuming effort involved with translating software into SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB013 Pg005 the native language of another country. o Border and Titles. A Form can have an optional border (single, double, or thick line), with an optional title. 4.2 FORMS RUNTIME The runtime module is what makes it all work. It is a highly sophisticated software program that recognizes the type of terminal you are using and adjusts to accommodate its features, automatically. This means you no longer need to program to the lowest common terminal functionality. For example, if the application is designed to use our Intelligent DT-4314, but the runtime determines that a non-MBF terminal is there, the windows, visual attributes, and function keys are all changed, as necessary, and without any code changes. The application program displays and inputs all data through the runtime module. This enables the runtime to keep track of screens, data, and active forms. This removes the burden from the programmer and adds substantial flexibility to the application package. The runtime benefits the developer by eliminating the need to write any common data entry logic, screen display logic, and some data validation. In a typical application program, this could reduce the program size by over 50 percent. Some other benefits you would experience using a PS Forms application include the following items: o Screen refresh. By pressing CTRL-R, all forms and data are redisplayed. This is particularly useful if your screen has ever been garbled, or your terminal turned off. o Edit mode. By pressing the TAB key, your data entry field is placed into Edit mode. This enables you to quickly change the information on a line without having to re-key the entire line. o Function keys. These can be used to quickly skip to other areas of the application software, display help, pop up new windows, etc. Function keys help make data entry quicker and easier. o Arrow keys. Data entry is facilitated through the use of the left, right, up, and down arrow keys. Instead of having to backup through ten or fifteen inputs, you can press the up arrow . key and go directly to the input above. o Windows. The application developer can display additional information on the screen simply by issuing a command. To remove the information, the programmer tells runtime to hide it. The window disappears and the data behind it is recovered. o And runtime can help improve overall system performance by reducing Input/Output operations. That is, it only displays data that has been changed, including static text. 4.3 BUSINESS BASIC INTERFACE Extensions to Business BASIC 90 ("BB90") SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB013 Pg006 Applications written using the BB90 standard will be supported on all future hardware platforms and operating systems releases provided by MAI Basic Four, Inc. This helps you to create application programs that execute across different hardware systems. The extensions made to BB90 for support of PS Forms make it easy for a person familiar with Business BASIC to quickly utilize PS forms. As a natural extension to BB90, you don't have to learn another complicated language. This enables you to quickly integrate PS Forms into your current software and develop new applications with reduced coding requirements. 5.0 BOSS/VS TO BOSS/IX CONVERSION A program has been added to the PS Forms Management tape to allow the conversion of forms and Multi-Key data files from the BOSS/VS System to the BOSS/IX System or vice versa. Detailed instructions for BOSS/VS to BOSS/IX conversion can be found in the Presentation Services Forms Management User Guide. 6.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION M0144A Presentation Services Forms Management User Guide (Level 3.3A) M7561D Presentation Service Menu and Help Management User Guide 7.0 HELPFUL HINTS 1. Full functionality of the DT-4314 is limited by an application's use of the terminal memory. When the memory of the DT-4314 becomes saturated with forms, PS will then handle forms processing itself and will not use the quick screen display mode of the DT-4314 any longer. Forms display on the DT-4314 will then act like a DT-4313 and will not be reset until the user exits from BASIC. It is very important that applications be designed assuming that end users will be using the new DT-4314 functionality. Failing to allow for this may cause end users to think that they are having problems with their applications or terminals. 2. Form Builder current user statistics are logged in a status file (FBSTAT) on the PS node (/PS or ().PS.). If this file becomes corrupt, strange terminal problems may appear. To clear problems, log other users out of the Form Builder and delete this file. 3. The top left corner ((0,0) to (7,0)) of a form will be cleared when setting function keys on a DT-4312 terminal. This can be corrected with a form refresh. 4. When running BUILDHELP, verify the set name that help will be generated to. The old help set will be deleted. 5. Text in Create/modify can be deleted if using visual underline with blanks over the last 10 or more characters of a line. Work-around: Use underscore when extending an underline past the last alpha-numeric character of a line of text. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB013 Pg007 6. The fractional part of a numeric is rounded to fit the numeric mask, but is returned as it was entered. 7. The min length requirement for a numeric can be longer than the mask, if the field length is longer than the mask. 7.1 BOSS/VS SPECIFIC HELPFUL HINTS 1. Using the FORMFILE task variable returns an empty string when no SETFORMFILE function has been executed, but an Error=14 is generated. This is corrected in a future version of BASIC. 7.2 BOSS/IX SPECIFIC HELPFUL HINTS 1. If appropriate vconf parameters and start sizes are not used when executing the Form Builder and PS runtime, error 31's and performance problems can appear. 2. BASIC inconsistency with error numbers between BOSS/VS and BOSS/IX systems. (For example, insufficient privilege on BOSS/VS causes error=13, while causing an error=18 on BOSS/IX). Workaround: Special error handling should be checked when porting programs from BOSS/VS to BOSS/IX and vice versa. 3. Errors occur on 7.4B when concatenating strings for PS mnemonic parameters. (Ex. PRINT (FORMUNT) 'MESSAGE'(A$+B$)) Workaround: Concatenate strings before using them as a parameter for a PS mnemonic. ORIGINATOR: Jackie Shea SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB013 Pg008 FIB 00014 01/17/90 *** Installation of OFFICE on an Alternate Disk on SPx Sys [ WPSF 578R *** Installation of OFFICE on an Alternate Disk on SPx Systems Moniereh Anvari 12-20-89 578 Revised * On MAI Office 3.2B Only! | MO-INSTALL is a tool designed to allow the installation of MAI OFFICE on an alternate disk. The program works for new installations or will re-install Office to an alternate disk on existing systems. Upgrades of MAI OFFICE systems cannot be performed with MO-INSTALL. If you would like a copy of this program, please contact me, (Moniereh Anvari), and I will send it to you. NOTE: The alternate disk must be mounted prior to the install- ation of MAI OFFICE. PROCEDURE 1. From root directory restore program "MO-INSTALL" from tape. 2. Place MAI OFFICE release tape into tape drive. 3. Use a START size of 200 and RUN the program /tmp/MO-INSTALL. 4. Enter the alternate disk name when requested. 5. Enter whether this is a reinstallation or a new installation. 6. Enter the MAI OFFICE package names to be installed or re-installed. 7. Enter the public keys when requested and where required. 8. After completion of a 're-install' any data files the user wishes to retain can now be moved to the alternate disk. 9. There are several programs and files that must be modified by the user to access the alternate disk. These changes are listed below. 10. Create a new user using oprinfo: User id: OMS Home directory: /alternate disk/oms Initial program: /bin/basic,-nr,trans=/alternate disk/oms/ omstrans,pgm=MS,'prefix "/alternate disk/ oms/PS /PS/tools"' PROGRAM: EMAC20 LINE 120 PREFIX "/alternate disk/oms /ftf" PAGE 2 OF 2 FIELD BULLETIN #578 PROGRAM: EMPM11 LINE 120 PREFIX "/alternate disk/oms /ftf" PROGRAM: EMRR31 LINE 120 PREFIX "/alternate disk/oms /ftf" PROGRAM: EMRR32 LINE 130 PREFIX "/alternate disk/oms /ftf" SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB014 Pg001 NOTE: The four programs above are located in /ftf directory on disk 0. PROGRAM: EMUT10 LINE 1030 LET S7$=$01$; CALL "/alternate disk/oms/*NSFSY",5,S7$,D$ LINE 6905 PREFIX "/alternate disk/oms /PS /PS/tools" PROGRAM: MS (Add this line) LINE 35 SETTRANS "/alternate disk/oms/omstrans" FILE: startmo cd /alternate disk/oms /bin/basic -q s=64 pgm=MS -nr 'prefix "/alternate disk/oms /PS /PS/tools"' FILE: emstartmo (For remote mail) cd /alternate disk/oms /bin/basic lib=/lib/bftf.lib -q s=64 pgm=MS -nr 'prefix "/alternate disk/oms /PS /PS/tools"' NOTE: The four files above are located in /alternate disk/oms directory. IMPORTANT NOTES 1. PS may not be installed or re-installed on an alternate disk. 2. If upgrading an existing MAI OFFICE level, the upgrade MUST be performed first. 3. DO NOT install new packages to an existing OFFICE system with this program. For example, if you do not currently have Remote Mail installed but plan to install it as well as re- install to an alternate disk, you must perform a regular install of MOM first. 4. During the install process, an error 5 may be generated be- cause some files have not yet been moved to their required directories. The program continues past these error messages and moves the files. 5. If Graphics or Origin are to be used, startmo or emstartmo should be modified to include these in the prefix. NOTE: This program "MO-INSTALL", will install or re-install all the files in the OMS and Graphics directory to an alternate disk and the rest of the files will be installed or will remain on disk 0. ORIGINATOR: Moniereh Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB014 Pg002 FIB 00015 02/05/90 *** OFFICE 3.2A for 1800 System - Software Announcement [ WPSS 165 ] *** 1.0 INTRODUCTION MAI Basic Four, Inc. is pleased to announce the availability of MAI OFFICE 3.2A. MAI OFFICE is a complete integrated Office Automation package for the 1800 computer system. MAI OFFICE is composed of the following modules: o MAI Business WORD - Word Processor o MAI Business MATH - Spreadsheet o MAI Business EXEC - Desktop Functions o MAI Business DATA - Data Management o Presentation Services/Printer System This release contains many enhancements and problem fixes. Please see each individual section for the list of enhancements. NOTE: ORIGIN 2.0 or above is required for Letter Generation capability on MAI OFFICE 3.2A. *********************************************************** * Please read the installation instructions (Section 3) * * before attempting to install MAI OFFICE or any of its * * modules. * * * * MAI OFFICE will only work on operating system 7.2R*03. * *********************************************************** *********************************************************** * MAI OFFICE 3.2A requires certain peripheral hardware * * revision levels. * * Please see Section 2. * *********************************************************** Copyright 1989 by MAI Basic Four, Inc. All rights reserved. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cover 2.0 DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.1 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS. . . 1 3.0 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3.1 BOSS/IX 1800 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4.0 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4.1 SET ONE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 4.2 SET TWO OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 5.0 MAI BUSINESS MATH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 5.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MATH. 7 6.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7.0 MENU SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg001 8.0 MAI BUSINESS WORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8.1 IMPROVED ATTRIBUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8.1.1 UNDERLINING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8.1.2 BOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 8.1.3 SUPERSCRIPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 8.1.4 SUBSCRIPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 8.1.5 ATTRIBUTE QUERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 8.1.6 CLEAR ATTRIBUTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 8.2 PAGINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 8.2.1 MAINTENANCE OF THE NUMBER OF LINES PER PAGE. . . . . 13 8.2.1.1 OPERATOR ID CREATE/MAINTAIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 8.2.1.2 DOCUMENT CREATE AND MAINTAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 8.2.2 REPAGINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 8.3 SINGLE KEY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 8.4 FULL-ATTRIBUTE LQP PRINTERS AS SLAVES. . . . . . . . 21 8.5 CUT AND PASTE BETWEEN DOCUMENTS (VIEW) . . . . . . . 21 8.5.1 USAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 8.5.1.1 FROM THE PRIMARY DOCUMENT: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 8.5.1.2 FROM THE SECONDARY DOCUMENT: . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 8.5.2 PROCESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 8.6 INTERFACE WITH PERSONAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 8.6.1 MAIL LIST MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 8.6.1.1 DEFINING A DATA FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 8.6.1.2 MAINTAINING A DATA FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 8.6.2 MAIL MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 8.6.2.1 CREATING A STANDARD LETTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 8.6.2.2 MERGING DATA INTO A STANDARD LETTER. . . . . . . . . 30 8.7 IMPROVED IMPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 8.8 IMPROVED REPAIR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 8.8.1 TEXT FILE REBUILD INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 35 9.0 MAI BUSINESS GRAPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 10.0 MAI BUSINESS DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 10.1 QUEUED LETTER GENERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 10.2 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA. 42 11.0 MAI BUSINESS MAIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 F I G U R E S Figure 3-1 MAI Office Module names. . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Figure 8-1 Operator ID Create/Maintain . . . . . . . . . 13 Figure 8-2 Setting the default number of lines per page . 14 Figure 8-3 Security option from Document Create/Maintain 15 Figure 8-4 Pagination display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Figure 8-5 Mail List Maintenance Screen . . . . . . . . . 24 Figure 8-6 Record Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Figure 8-7 Mail Example Letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Figure 8-8 QUICK File Merge Display . . . . . . . . . . . 34 2.0 DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS Listed below are the minimal disk requirements for MAI OFFICE: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg002 BOSS/IX MODULE SIZE (in Mb) Business WORD 13.7 Business MATH 1.1 Business EXEC 3.7 Business DATA 8.5 Presentation Services/Menu System __8.0__ 35.0 ======= 2.1 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS For MAI OFFICE 3.2A, certain minimum hardware revision levels are required: TERMINALS DT-4309 Rev. E DT-4310 Rev. D DT-4312 Rev. K DT-4313 Rev. E DT-4314 Rev. C 3.0 INSTALLATION FOR BOSS/IX SYSTEMS 1800 Please read the installation instructions carefully before attempting installation. MAI OFFICE cartridge tape for the 1800 will be distributed containing MOW, MOC, MOD, MOE, MOP, MOS and EPS modules. Floppy diskette media is not available. The tape containing MAI OFFICE will be accompanied by a release memo listing a 'Public Key' for each MAI OFFICE module purchased by the user: MOC, MOD, MOW, MOE. The modules MOP, EPS and MOS do not require a public key. The public key is a number in hexadecimal notation which uniquely applies to that particular module of MAI OFFICE and that particular system WITHOUT THE PROPER KEYS, MAI OFFICE WILL NOT RUN. After installation of the modules and keys, please see the instructions for specific module information. 3.1 BOSS/IX 1800 INSTALLATION Before MAI OFFICE can be used, it must be installed on the fixed disk. The installation procedure should be run in single user mode--it is assumed that the system has been booted and is rooted on the root partition. The MAI OFFICE programs and data files will reside on a single MCS cartridge or 1/2 inch tape. Figure 3-1 shows the list of MAI OFFICE module names. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg003 _________________________________________________________________ | | | FIGURE 3-1 MAI OFFICE MODULE NAMES | | | | MOW - Business WORD | | MOC - Business MATH | | MOD - Business DATA | | MOE - Business EXEC | | *MOP - Printer System | | *MOS - Menu System | | *EPS - Presentation Services | | **DSS - Decision Support Software | | | | * = Must be installed | | ** = Included on second tape of MAI OFFICE | |_______________________________________________________________| The public key should be entered during the installation procedure after the corresponding program files have been installed (i.e., the public key for EXEC should be entered after the MOE program files have been installed). WITHOUT THE PROPER KEYS, MAI OFFICE WILL NOT RUN. STEP 1: Insert the cartridge containing MAI OFFICE into the MCS drive and turn the lock lever. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: install dd EPS MOS MOP xxx ... press the key. Where dd stands for 'cs' installing from 1/4 inch MCS. The xxx is the three character name of each module that has been ordered (see Figure 3-1). NOTE: Three modules must be installed: EPS, MOP, and MOS. The program searches for each module on the MCS cartridge; displays its label, and begins copying files. The program displays the name of each file as it is copied. Enter the public key for that particular module. When all modules have been installed, the program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> STEP 2: Only program files have been installed. The data files must be restored to disk. WARNING: DO NOT ENTER MULTI-USER MODE BEFORE PROCEEDING, OR THE '/tmp/modata' FILE WILL BE ERASED. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: /tmp/modata SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg004 Then press the key. The '/tmp/modata' is an executable file containing a list of data files needed for first time installations of MAI OFFICE. On some data files you will be asked if the data file should be restored. This does not happen on all data files, only on some since this is an initial install. When it does occur the user will encounter a message: File '/oms/xxxxxx/ exists Replace (y/n/off)? If off is chosen the query for each file is turned off and the defaults set to yes. Data files are copied. The program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> STEP 3: To start MAI OFFICE, a procedure called 'startmo' located in the '/oms' directory can be used. Simply type '/oms/startmo' at the ADMIN prompt on the initial install '/oms/startmo' gets the message: "INTERNATIONAL PARAMETERS ARE NOT SET-UP (CR)" Refer to Section 4. If the DSS module has been installed and you want to use MAI Business DATA, you must ved the file '/oms/startmo' to look like this: cd /oms /bin/basic -q s=64 pgm=MS -nr 'prefix "/oms /usr/origin /origin/r20b/data /origin/r20b/pgm /PS /PS/tools"' STEP 4: After the International Parameters are set-up, a CR displays the proprietary message. For further instructions see the module specific instructions in this Software Announcement or in the MAI Business WORD User and Reference Guides. 4.0 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE The international ID parameter maintenance program (MSMM40) will automatically be run the first time a user executes /oms/startmo after an international or domestic installation. The prompt: "INTERNATIONAL PARAMETERS ARE NOT SET-UP (CR)" will appear. This program allows the MAI OFFICE product to be modified in certain areas to conform to a customer's special needs. There are two distinct sets of parameters that a customer may change: SET ONE: Amount Format Insert Code Characters Overprint Character Hyphenation Character Phone Format Sign Symbol Spaces at the end of a sentence SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg005 SET TWO: Date Format Date Separator Time Format Time Separator Currency Code Position of Currency Code SET ONE contains options which are global for the MAI OFFICE product. For example, if the telephone format is set to international, then all MAI OFFICE users will have their telephone users unformatted (see below for more detail). CAUTION: Once this set of parameters has been modified the system will not allow them to be changed. SET TWO contains options which are user independent. As an example, two different users on the same MAI OFFICE system may use different date and/or time formats. A complete description of each option and use is given below. 4.1 SET ONE OPTIONS Amount Format options - 1. #,###,##0.00 2. #.###.##0,00 3. #B###B##0,00 B=blank These format masks will allow a user to present numeric data in a form acceptable for his or her country. Option '1' is most commonly used in the United States while options '2' and '3' are used in Europe. Insert Code Characters options: "<>", "[]", " " The braces ("[]") used to indicate insert codes are not available in all ISO character sets. Therefore, the user has the ability to select characters that are in the character set they use. Overprint Character options: any character Like the insert code, the backslash (" ") used as an overprint character is not available in all character sets. This option lets the user specify a different character to be used as the overprint character. NOTE: Overprint character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Hyphenation Character options: any character Same as the Overprint Character. This is the character used to separate the word by syllables for hyphenation in the document. NOTE: DO NOT USE the character used during the printing process to hyphenate a word. (Usually a '-'). The hyphenation character should not be one of the Insert Code characerts SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg006 Telephone Format options: D=Domestic, I=International The domestic option will format all entered telephone numbers in the form, (AA)PPP-NNNN where: AAA= area code (option field), PPP= prefix, and NNNN=number. European telephone numbers are not formatted the same way and may require entry of more than ten digits so if the "I" option is chosen, no special formatting or input validation will be done. This field will allow up to 15 characters in any form when using the "I" option. Sign Symbol options: 1. "CR/DR" 2. "+/-" 3. "()" In the United States the CR or DR is used to denote positive or negative amounts. In Europe it is more common to use a "+" or "_" instead. With this option, the user may select the notation desired. Spaces ending a sentence options: 1 or 2 In the United States a punctuation symbol and two spaces are used to denote the end of a sentence. In most other countries a punctuation symbol and one space is used to denote the end of a sentence. This option allows the user to select their preference. 4.2 SET TWO OPTIONS Date Format options: 1. MMDDYY 2. DDMMYY 3. YYMMDD In addition to the (MMDDYY) format, two other formats are available for the user to choose from. Date Separator options: any character The user may choose to see the date displayed in a format other than MM/DD/YY. With this option the user may have dates presented like MM.DD.YY or MM-DD-YY. Time Format options: D=Domestic, I=International The user may choose to have the time displayed using a twelve-hour clock (U.S.) or a twenty-four hour clock (International). Time Separator options: ".", ":", "N"=Null With this option the user may see the hours and minutes separated with different options. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg007 Currency Code options: any four alpha characters The user may select the characters that will be used as the currency symbol. In the United States, the dollar symbol ($) is normally used. Position of Currency Code options: L=LEFT, R=RIGHT United States dollars are displayed with the currency symbol to the left of the actual amount (i.e. $1.98). This is not always true in other countries where the currency symbol may appear on the left or the right of the actual amount. With this option the user may select their preference. 5.0 MAI BUSINESS MATH MAI Business MATH transforms your video display into a grid resembling an accountant's columnar pad. o An easy-to-use, yet flexible electronic spreadsheet. o For developing projections, budgets, pro formas, cash flows, or other tabular reports requiring mathematical calculations. o Will improve accuracy while saving significant time. 5.1 SPECIAL INSTRUCTION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MATH None. 6.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION The following is a list of documentation for MAI OFFICE 3.2A. Manual Number Title M0120A MAI Business WORD Reference Manuals and MAI Business DATA User Guide M7550A MAI Business WORD User Guide M7552A MAI Business MATH User Manual M7553A MAI Business EXEC User Guide M7559A MAI Business Exec Reference Manual M0063A Menu and System Services Reference Manual and Presentation Services User Guide M7511 Decision Support System User Reference Guide M7566 MAI OFFICE Quick Reference Guide 7.0 MENU SYSTEM MAI OFFICE 3.2A uses a new menu system with the aid of another system, esentation Services. Presentation Services provides menu functions. Also the function keys can be programmed through Presentation Services and are used in MAI OFFICE to directly access certain functions of MAI OFFICE from any menu in the system. For information regarding menu maintenance, see the Presentation Service Users Guide M7561. The main menu for MAI OFFICE is: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg008 |___________MAIN MENU___________| | | | Business WORD | | | | Business MATH | | | | Business GRAPH | | | | Business EXEC | | | | Business MAIL | | | | Business DATA | | | | Menu and System Services | | | |_______________________________| BUSINESS MAIL and BUSINESS GRAPH options are displayed but are not available on the MAI 1800 system. There are two basic ways to select an option from a menu. You can use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option or you can type in the designated selection characters. You can substitute the following key sequences in place of the arrow keys: CTRL+K for up arrow, CTRL+J or space bar for down arrow, CTRL+L for right arrow, and CTRL+N or BACKSPACE key for the left arrow. By using the up and down arrow keys, you can move the cursor to the option you want to select. The current option appears highlighted on your screen. Press to complete your selection. The selections wrap from top to bottom and vice-versa. You can also use selection characters to select options from the menu. As you look at the menu on your screen, notice that one or two characters from each option is highlighted. These are the selection characters and indicate what you need to type in order to move the cursor directly to the desired option. Then press to make your selection. There will always be at least one selection character. A second selection character is used only when the first selection character is not unique. The function keys provide quick access to frequently used options. If you want to use one of the function keys, press the key that matches the label at the bottom of the screen. Below is the function key usage within MAI OFFICE. The notation of F1 through F10 indicates function keys 1 through 10 with the description of that function key's use within MAI OFFICE. The function keys described below will be available from all menus described on the following pages and will appear on the bottom two lines of the display: F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP STATUS IN-TRAY MSGSLIP CALC CALENDR PHONE#S LOGOFF DATE CONSOLE F1 (HELP) will give a brief description of the menu system. F2 (STATUS) will show the user a list of users currently logged on to MAI OFFICE. This is the same function as entering "S" on the previous OMS menu system. F3 (IN-TRAY) will take the user directly to the In-Tray option without having to move through several menu levels. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg009 F4 (MSGSLIP) will take the user directly to the Out-Tray option to send a message. F5 (CALC) will take the user directly to the Calculator Function. F6 (CALENDR) will take the user directly to a personal calendar. F7 (PHONE#S) will take the user to a personal telephone directory. F8 (LOGOFF) will log the user off the MAI OFFICE system. This is the same as "L" in the previous OMS menu system. F9 (DATE) will allow the user to change the system data and time if allowed this privilege. This is the same as "D" in the previous OMS menu system. However, if the date is changed from the WP.MAIN MENU, it is only changed for wordprocessing and not on the rest of the system. F10 (CONSOLE) will take the user out of the MAI OFFICE system into console mode. This is the same as "C" in the previous OMS menu system. The user will be allowed CONSOLE only if they are configured or authorized for this privilege. 8.0 MAI BUSINESS WORD MAI BUSINESS WORD is a full-featured wordprocessing system. With this release comes the following enhancements: o Easy-to-use attributing such as underline, bold, subscript, and superscript. o Automatic page formation o Cut and paste between documents (VIEW) o New personal data database o Queued Letter Generation (BOSS/VS version only) o Improved repair facilities o Faster import facilities 8.1 IMPROVED ATTRIBUTING Attributes supported in this release of MAI OFFICE are: underlining, bold, superscript, and subscript. Each attribute is applied to the character after the character has been entered. Attributes are set on a character by character basis and are toggled on or off by the editing key for that attribute. If an attribute is already set, it is toggled. Otherwise the attribute is set for that character. Characters may have multiple attributes except that superscript and subscript cannot both be applied to the same character. Because the editor normally is in overtype mode, any character that is overtyped with a new character will retain the attribute(s) that existed for the character at that cursor position, if there are any. If these attributes are no longer valid they will have to be toggled off by moving to the character and entering the editing sequence for SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg010 that attribute as described below. 8.1.1 UNDERLINING Move to the character you wish to underline. Press the CONTROL-u keys. The character will appear on the screen as an underlined character. That is, the character will appear on the screen with the underline character beneath it. The underscore will have the same display attributes as the character indicating that there may be other attributes set for that character as described below. 8.1.2 BOLD Move to the character that you wish bold press CONTROL-b. If the character is non blank then the character will appear in reverse video. If the current cursor position is a space then no attribute will be applied. If any other attributes are currently set the screen display will reflect those attributes as well. For example: if a character is already underlined and we now set the character to bold, it will be represented on the screen in reverse video with an underscore character beneath it. You may toggle bold off by moving to the character with the bold attribute and entering CONTROL-b. 8.1.3 SUPERSCRIPT Move to the character that you want superscripted. Press CONTROL-a. If the character is a space no attribute will be applied; otherwise, the character will be shown on the screen in background mode (half intensity). The character may also have other attributes in which case the display may show the character in reverse video or underlined as well as in background. The attribute may be toggled off by entering the same keystrokes again. If the character already has the subscript attribute set and you attempt to set superscript you will be so informed the following error message will appear: "SUBSCRIPTED--TOGGLE OFF FIRST (CR)". Enter a 'CR' and then toggle subscript off. You may then set the superscript attribute. Because superscript and subscript are visually represented the same on the screen you may determine which attribute is set by using the attribute query sequence described in Section 8.1.5. 8.1.4 SUBSCRIPT Place the cursor at the character you wish to subscript. Enter CONTROL-d. If the character is a space no attribute will be set. If the attribute has been set it will be displayed in background mode (half intensity). If the character already has the superscript attribute set the following error message: "SUPERSCRIPTED--TOGGLE OFF FIRST (CR)" SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg011 Enter a 'CR' and then toggle superscript off. You may then set the subscript attribute. Because superscript and subscript are visually represented the same on the screen, determine which attribute is set by using the attribute query sequence described in the next section. 8.1.5 ATTRIBUTE QUERY If the terminal used does not support on screen underlining or reverse video, the attributes will be visually represented on the screen in background mode (half intensity). Superscript and subscript are both shown in background on all terminals. The attribute query keystroke is provided so the user may determine the attributes for a character. Move the cursor to the character you wish to query and enter CONTROL-l, lower case 'L'. A message will be displayed in the status area listing those attributes currently set for the character. If underline, bold and superscript are set, the following prompt will be displayed: "Attr: Underline Bold Superscript (CR)" A 'CR' will take you back to edit mode and place you at the character you were on before. 8.1.6 CLEAR ATTRIBUTES If the user wishes to remove all of the entered attributes on a line they may simply enter CONTROL-c. This will clear all attributes on all characters on the line of text on which the cursor is positioned. 8.2 PAGINATION New pagination features have been added. Pagination is defined as the maximum number of user defined lines per document page. When creating a document, a new page will automatically appear as soon as the maximum number of lines have been used thus eliminating the need for the user to create a new page. The page length is determined by the user. The range can be from 1 to 9999 lines. At print time the user will always have the option to repaginate the document to a new page length via the form option. However, subsequent pages will still reflect the default parameter, that is, the maximum number of lines per page. Only by changing this option can the user change the number of lines per page. The implementation of this will be through an option parameter in the "Security parameters" of a document. The user may maintain this option from two areas. The first being from the Operator ID Create/Maintain selection and the second from the Document Create and Maintain selection. See figure 8-1. (continued on next page) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg012 __________________________________________________________________________ . | |. | Figure 8-1 Operator ID Create/Maintain | | |. | OPERATOR FUNCTIONS | | OPERATOR ID CREATE/MAINTAIN | | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | | ID: INITIALS: |. | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | | DEFAULT OWNER: | | ACCESS SECURITY: DEFAULT RESTRICTION: | | MODIFY SECURITY: DEFAULT RESTRICTION: | | INFORMATION STORAGE/RETRIEVAL? # OF LINES PER PAGE: | | |. | -------------------------------------------------------------------- |. |__________________________________________________________________________|. NOTE: The Document Create/Maintain screen resembles this format 8.2.1 MAINTENANCE OF THE NUMBER OF LINES PER PAGE The user of Business WORD will be required to enter and, if needed, modify the number of lines a page will contain. In. order to do this the user can enter the option from two places: 1) Operator ID Create/Maintain and 2) Document Create and Maintain. 8.2.1.1 OPERATOR ID CREATE/MAINTAIN The following are step by step instructions a user must follow to maintain the "# of lines per page" prompt. 1. From the System Services menu select OPERATOR ID CREATE/MAINTAIN. 2. Enter ID. Refer to MAIBF manual M0063 for creating a new ID. 3. Select the Word Processing ID Parameters option. 4. Next select Document Security Parameters (see figure 8-2 for screen layout) 5. Carriage return to "# of lines per page" prompt. 6. Enter the number of lines per page. The range is 1-9999. The default value will be 9999. 7. Next depress (CR) if the data is okay or N if not and begin again. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg013 _________________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 8-2 Setting the default number of lines per page | | |. | OPERATOR FUNCTIONS | | OPERATOR ID CREATE/MAINTAIN | | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |. | ID: INITIALS: |. | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | | DEFAULT OWNER: | | ACCESS SECURITY: DEFAULT RESTRICTION: | | MODIFY SECURITY: DEFAULT RESTRICTION: | | INFORMATION STORAGE/RETRIEVAL? # OF LINES PER PAGE: | | |. | ------------------------------------------------------------------- | |_________________________________________________________________________| The values defined here are the default values for new documents. When creating a new document these values (including the new # OF LINES PER PAGE) will be used unless the user specifies otherwise. 8.2.1.2 DOCUMENT CREATE AND MAINTAIN The following are step by step instructions a user must follow to maintain the "# of lines per page" prompt. 1. From the Business WORD menu select Document Create and Maintain. 2. Enter document name. Refer to MAIBF manual M0043 for creating a new document. 3. Select the Parameters option. 4. Next select Security Parameters (see figure 8-3 for screen layout). 5. Carriage return to "# of lines per page" prompt. 6. Enter the number of lines per page. The range is 1-9999. The default value will be the existing entry. 7. Next depress (CR) if the data is okay or N if not and begin again. (continued on next page) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg014 _______________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 8-3 Security option from Document Create/Maintain | | |. | |. | DOCUMENT MAINTENANCE | | DATE: XX/XX/XX | | --------------------------------------------------------------- | | DOCUMENT NAME: PAGES: | | --------------------------------------------------------------- | | OWNER: | | ACCESS SECURITY: ACCESS RESTRICTION: | | MODIFY SECURITY: MODIFY RESTRICTION: | | # OF LINES PER PAGE: | | |. | --------------------------------------------------------------- | |_______________________________________________________________________| 8.2.2 REPAGINATION Repagination will occur automatically if the user modifies the number of lines per page prompt to be less then what was originally defined. This automatic repagination will only take place if the user modifies the number of lines per page prompt in the Document Maintenance security parameters. See figure 8-4 for screen layout. When using special functions such as Text Select, Block Select, etc. to form a document and the page length is exceeded, Business WORD will add/insert a new page for the remaining text. However, no maintenance of widow/orphan lines will . take place if text is inserted or deleted - this will occur only at the time of repagination. The user can repaginate a document via the repagination option from the Document Maintenance menu. However, the repagination page length must be lower then what was defined in the Document Maintenance security parameters. If the need arises that the page length needs to be increased then the user needs to modify the "# of lines per page" in the Document Maintenance security parameters to reflect the new value and then repaginate the document via the repagination option. The value defined here will stay with the document even if the default parameters are changed. ______________________________________________________________________ . | |. | Figure 8-4 Pagination display | | |. | DOCUMENT MAINTENANCE | | DATE: XX/XX/XX | | --------------------------------------------------------------- | | DOCUMENT NAME: PAGES: | | --------------------------------------------------------------- | | OWNER: | | ACCESS SECURITY: ACCESS RESTRICTION: | | MODIFY SECURITY: MODIFY RESTRICTION: | | # OF LINES PER PAGE: | | |. | REPAGINATING DOCUMENT. PLEASE WAIT ... | | --------------------------------------------------------------- | |______________________________________________________________________|. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg015 8.3 SINGLE KEY FUNCTIONS Single key movement permits cursor movement by paragraph, sentence or word in a forward or reverse direction. When editing text a user will be able to jump from word to word, sentence to sentence or paragraph to paragraph with a single function key. The shifted values will move the cursor in the opposite direction. Note that the paragraph forward key when used on the last paragraph of a page will position the cursor on the first character of the next page. Also, when the paragraph backward key is used on the first paragraph of a page the cursor will be placed on the first character of the last paragraph of the previous page except when there is no previous page. In this case the cursor will be placed on the first character of the current page. The function key layout for the first fourteen function keys are consistent across MAI Basic Four serial terminals. Listed below are function keys for the various types of terminals: NOTE: All other terminals will emulate a DT-7270. DT-4312 Terminal NORMAL MODE SHIFTED MODE F F1 PAGE CENTER U N F2 LINE VIEW C T F3 RULER RECOVER I O F4 SPELL VERIFY WORD LOOKUP N F5 PARAGRAPH CALL GLOSSARY CALL K F6 TEXT SELECT BLOCK SELECT E Y F7 CUT MERGE S F8 WORD (forward --> ) WORD (reverse <-- ) F9 SENTENCE (forward --> ) SENTENCE (reverse <-- ) F10 PARAGRAPH (forward -> ) PARAGRAPH (reverse <-- ) F11 DEL WORD DEL SENT F12 INSERT CHAR INSERT LINE F13 DEL CHAR DEL LINE F14 MENU HELP (continued on next page) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg016 DT-4310 NORMAL MODE SHIFTED MODE F F1 PAGE CENTER U N F2 LINE VIEW C T F3 RULER RECOVER I O F4 SPELL VERIFY WORD LOOKUP N F5 PARAGRAPH CALL GLOSSARY CALL K E F6 TEXT SELECT BLOCK SELECT Y S F7 CUT MERGE F8 WORD (forward --> ) WORD (reverse <-- ) F9 SENTENCE (forward --> ) SENTENCE (reverse <-- ) F10 PARAGRAPH (forward -> ) PARAGRAPH (reverse <-- ) F11 DEL WORD DEL SENT F12 INSERT CHAR INSERT LINE F13 DEL CHAR DEL LINE F14 MENU HELP F15 FILL CALC F16 FORMULA DEFINE HELP HELP OPERATOR OPTIONS MENU MENU AUX1 SEARCH SEARCH DEFINE AUX2 FIND FIND DEFINE A P U A AUX3 GLOSSARY DEFINE X D AUX4 PARAGRAPH DEFINE DT-4313 AND DT-4314 TERMINALS In addition to the base line function keys, this terminal type emulates the 4310 by using the numeric pad as additional function keys. Upon entering Business WORD the numeric pad will be shifted into pad mode to take advantage of the additional functionality. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg017 NORMAL MODE SHIFTED MODE F F1 PAGE CENTER U N F2 LINE VIEW C T F3 RULER RECOVER I O F4 SPELL VERIFY WORD LOOKUP N F5 PARAGRAPH CALL GLOSSARY CALL K E F6 TEXT SELECT BLOCK SELECT Y S F7 CUT MERGE F8 WORD (forward --> ) WORD (reverse <-- ) F9 SENTENCE (forward --> ) SENTENCE (reverse <-- ) F10 PARAGRAPH (forward -> ) PARAGRAPH (reverse <-- ) F11 DEL WORD DEL SENT F12 INSERT CHAR INSERT LINE F13 DEL CHAR DEL LINE F14 MENU HELP NORMAL MODE SHIFTED MODE N "7" SEARCH SEARCH DEFINE U M "8" CURSOR UP ( ^ ) EXPRESS UP E R "9" FIND FIND DEFINE I C "-" OPERATOR OPTIONS P "4" CURSOR LEFT (<-) EXPRESS LEFT A D "5" NOT USED "6" CURSOR RIGHT EXPRESS RIGHT "," FORMULA FORMULA DEFINE "1" GLOSSARY DEFINE "2" CURSOR DOWN ( v ) EXPRESS DOWN "3" PARAGRAPH DEFINE "0" INSERT FILL "." BACK TAB CALCULATOR SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg018 DT-7270 The DT-7270 terminal type is exempt from the single key movement and will use a control sequence to jump from paragraph to paragraph, sentence to sentence or word to word. The control sequence is as follows: CTL R + C PARAGRAPH DOWN "v" CTL R + f WORD RIGHT "-->" CTL R + E PARAGRAPH UP "^" CTL R + s WORD LEFT "<--" CTL R + F SENTENCE RIGHT "-->" CTL R + S SENTENCE LEFT "<--" 8.4 FULL-ATTRIBUTE LQP PRINTERS AS SLAVES The printers must be setup in PRINTER MAINTENANCE from the WORD menu. These printers are set to operate only from the terminal that initiates the printing. The slave LQP CANNOT be used from any other terminal other than the one it is connected to. To setup in PRINTER MAINTENANCE, enter the device name as "T*". The type is SLVD (normal) or SLVS (with sheetfeeder). A list will be displayed for a choice of: D-4206 I-4211 F=4215 J=4216 The options for the D (4206) and I (4211) will display but are not valid printer setups on the 1800 system. The recommended configuration for slave printers is one entry per TYPE of printer connected to Business WORD. 8.5 CUT AND PASTE BETWEEN DOCUMENTS (VIEW) The foreign file cut and paste (VIEW) will allow movement from the primary document (that document that the operator is currently editing) to a secondary document to select text to be inserted in the primary document. The keystrokes for the VIEW are similar to the simple cut and paste. 8.5.1 USAGE 8.5.1.1 FROM THE PRIMARY DOCUMENT To initiate the VIEW feature, position the cursor where the text is to be pasted in the primary file and press: VIEW The user is then asked to enter the name of the secondary document by the prompt: DOCUMENT NAME: If no document name is entered a CR will cancel the VIEW and return to edit mode in the primary document. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg019 Once a valid document name is entered, security is checked. If the user does not have security to access the document, the user is informed and asked to enter another document name. The line width of the secondary document must be the same or less than that of the primary document, if it is not the user will be informed and prompted for another document name. The busy flag on the secondary document is checked. If the document is currently being modified, an error message will be issued, and the document name prompt will appear. If the busy flag is blank (not in use) or "C" (another user is performing a cut and paste operation on the same document) then access to the file is granted. More than one user can access a file in VIEW mode because no updates to the file are allowed. 8.5.1.2 FROM THE SECONDARY DOCUMENT VIEW This key is used to exit the secondary document when the user has completed the cut. This will exit the VIEW and return to the primary document. or Use one of these keys to select the text segment(s) that will be 'pasted' (inserted) into the primary file. 8.5.2 PROCESS Once the secondary file is entered, no changes can be made to the text. Cursor positioning functions allow the user to locate the portion of the document to be cut. A list of the valid functions follows: K express right next character J express left previous character CR right arrow go to a page CTL-II left arrow find a line/column CTL-II tab find string up down New single key functions and each of their reverse movements can also be used to position the cursor: word forward sentence forward paragraph forward There are two types of cutting allowed, text select and block select. They work in the same manner as a simple SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg020 cut and paste in the primary document. Once the user has selected the portion of text they are interested in via text or block select they may press the VIEW key to exit back to the primary document. The text that has been selected is automatically inserted into this document beginning at the position where the user last placed their cursor. Use the ESC key to exit the VIEW mode without cutting and pasting the text. 8.6 INTERFACE WITH PERSONAL DATA A new feature of Business WORD 3.2A is to allow an operator to maintain a small database of information and to merge this database with a simple letter created through Business WORD. 8.6.1 MAIL LIST MAINTENANCE Mail List Maintenance lets you enter data into a data file which could be used for the purpose of Document Merge. It will allow the user to select a data record by a record number assigned to it. It will also allow the user to add, modify, delete or inspect a record in the data file. A record in a data file created by Mail List Maintenance will have twelve distinct items (fields) which will be numbered one through twelve. The first item of each record is the record number which uniquely defines that particular record in the data file. 8.6.1.1 DEFINING A DATA FILE The user will define a data file for the purpose of Mail List Maintenance and Document Merge by choosing the Mail List Maintenance option on the Business DATA Menu. The following steps should be used by the operator to maintain records within the data file: 1. At the Business DATA Menu, select Mail List Maintenance and press CR. The blank Mail List Maintenance screen displays as in figure 8-5. The cursor appears next to the Data File Name field. Press CTL-IV to return to the Business DATA Menu. ______________________________________________________________________ | | . | Figure 8-5 Mail List Maintenance Screen | | | . | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | . | DATA FILE NAME : ------ | | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | . | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | . |______________________________________________________________________| . 2. To create a new data file, enter the name of data file here and the system will automatically create the data file. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg021 If a file does not exist with the name just entered, the system will go to STEP 3. If a file already exists with the name just entered that is a valid data file (one acceptable to Document Merge) then the system displays the following prompt : FILE ALREADY EXISTS. CONTINUE? (Y/N) Enter "N" to define a new data file. The system will prompt for the data file name again. Enter "Y" to update an old data file. If a file already exists with the name entered in response to the prompt "DATA FILE NAME: ", and it is not in the format which is acceptable to Document Merge then the system displays the following message and prompts for data file name again: FILE CAN'T BE CREATED. 3. The system will prompt the following: FILE DOESN'T EXIST DO YOU WANT TO CREATE IT? (Y/N) Type "Y" and CR to create this file. Go to STEP 4. Type "N" if you do not want to create this file. The system will prompt for the file name again. Go to STEP 1. 4. The system will prompt for the number of records you want in the new data file: ENTER NUMBER OF RECORDS (MAX 10000) : Type the number of records for the new data file here. 8.6.1.2 MAINTAINING A DATA FILE o Add a record. o Delete a record. o Modify a record. o Inquire about a record. The following steps should be used to maintain data in a user's personal data file: 1. At the Business DATA Menu, select Mail List Maintenance and press CR. The blank Mail List Maintenance screen displays. Here a new data file can be created as described in the DEFINING A DATA FILE section. The cursor is placed next to the DATA FILE NAME prompt. Enter the file name to which SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg022 you want to make modifications. 2. If the file doesn't already exist, the system will let you create one. The system will then go to STEP 4. 3. If the file already exists, the system will display the following: FILE ALREADY EXISTS. CONTINUE? (Y/N) Type "Y" AND CR to maintain the file. The system will go to STEP 4. Type "N" if this is not the file you want to maintain. The system will go to STEP 1. 4. The system displays the screen as in figure 8-6. NOTE: The number following the input dashes in parentheses is the maximum number of characters accepted for that field. This number will not appear on the terminal screen. The cursor remains at item 1 just next to RECORD #. When finished with this file, type CTL-IV to go back to STEP 1. Type the record number which you want to add, modify, delete or query. ____________________________________________________________________________ . | |. | Figure 8-6 Record Display | | |. | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |. | DATA FILE NAME : RECORDS USED : #### TOTAL RECORDS : #### | | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |. | 1. RECORD # : ----- (5) | | 2. NAME : ---------------------------------------- (40) | | 3. ADDRESS 1 : ----------------------------------- (35) | | 4. ADDRESS 2 : ----------------------------------- (35) | | 5. ADDRESS 3 : ----------------------------------- (35) | | 6. CITY & STATE : ----------------------------------- (35) | | 7. ZIP CODE : ---------- (10) | | 8. SALUTATION : -------------------- (20) | | 9. MISC. : --------------------------------------------(50)-- | | 10. MISC. : ---------------------------------------- (40) | | 11. MISC. : ------------------------------- (30) | | 12. CATEGORY : -- (2) | | ENTER THE RECORD # TO BE SELECTED | | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |. |____________________________________________________________________________|. 5. Once the record number has been accepted, the system will display the prompt: (ADD/MODIFY/INQUIRE/DELETE/HELP) ? (A/M/I/D/?) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg023 Type A and CR to add the record. Go to STEP 6. Type M and CR to modify the record. Go to STEP 7. Type I and CR to inquire about the record. Go to STEP 8. Type D and CR to delete the record. Go to STEP 9. Type ? and CR to display the help to move around the screen. This will put the CTL keys at the bottom of the screen to show the user what action will be taken when they are depressed. Go to STEP 10. 6. Adding A Record If the record number entered already exists in the file the system will display the following prompt: RECORD ALREADY ON FILE (CR) Type CR. Go to STEP 4. If the record doesn't already exist the cursor will be placed just next to item 2 (NAME). You can keep entering all the items for the record just by typing the item description and CR. TO GO BACK TO PREVIOUS ITEM PRESS CTL-II. TO UPDATE RECORD AT ANY TIME AT ANY ITEM PRESS CTL-III Once all the items have been entered or CTL- III pressed the system displays the following prompt: UPDATE RECORD(Y/CR) Type "Y" and CR to update the record. The system displays: RECORD IS BEING ADDED Type only CR if you do not want to add the record. Go to STEP 4. 7. Modifying A Record If the record number entered doesn't already exist the system displays the following message: RECORD NOT ON FILE (CR) Type CR to continue. Go to STEP 4. If the record exists, the system will fill all the items of the record on the screen and display the prompt: ITEM NUMBER TO BE MODIFIED: Enter the item reference number here. The cursor will be positioned next to the item number typed in. Move up and down the items by pressing CTL-II and CTL-I respectively. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg024 Press CTL-III to update a record. The system displays the following prompt: UPDATE RECORD? (Y/CR) Type Y and CR to update the record. The system displays the following message and goes to STEP 4: RECORD IS BEING MODIFIED Type only CR if you do not want to update the record. Go to STEP 4. 8. Inquire About the Record If the record number entered doesn't already exist the system displays the following message: RECORD NOT ON FILE (CR) Type CR to continue. Go to STEP 4. If the record exists, the system will fill all the items of the record on the screen. The system now displays the following prompt: HARD COPY? (Y/CR) Type "Y" and CR for a hard copy of the record items. Go to STEP 4. Type CR if you do not want a hard copy. 9. Deleting A Record If the record number entered doesn't exist, the system will display the following message: RECORD NOT ON FILE (CR) Type CR to continue. Go to STEP 4. If the record exists, the system will fill all the items of the record on the screen and display the following prompt: DELETE RECORD (Y/CR) Type "Y" and CR to delete record. The system displays the following message and returns to STEP 4: RECORD IS BEING DELETED Type only CR if you do not want to delete the record. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg025 10. Help to Move on Screen Once you enter '?' and CR as response to any of the prompts for the record information or for (A/M/I/D/?) prompt the system displays the help at the bottom of the screen: CR,CTL-I=DOWN CTL-II=UP CTL-III=UPDATE CTL-IV=EXIT After displaying help the cursor returns to the prompt where you typed in '?' . 8.6.2 MAIL MERGE Mail Merge lets you merge a data file, created with the Mail List Maintenance option of the Business DATA Menu, into a standard letter created by Document Create and Maintain option of the Business WORD Menu. Mail Merge will first validate the standard letter for the item reference codes used in the letter. Item reference codes are the numbers embedded within '<' and '>' (or [] depending on what insert code characters were selected when entering the international parameters) in the standard letter. These item reference codes along with '<' and '>' are replaced with the data in the data file record's corresponding item reference number. 8.6.2.1 CREATING A STANDARD LETTER A standard letter is the letter which contains the text and embedded codes which will be replaced by the data from one of the fields of a data file record. These codes are called item reference numbers or codes and will uniquely refer to one of the fields of a data file record. The range of these item reference numbers is from TWO through TWELVE. The item reference numbers in the standard letter should be enclosed within '<' and '>' (or []). NOTE: No other printer insert codes can be used. Only the bracketed item reference numbers. 1. Choose the Document Create and Maintain option on the Business WORD Menu. 2. Create a Standard letter. An example of which is shown in figure 8-7 (continued on next page) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg026 _____________________________________________________________________ | | . | Figure 8-7 Mail Example Letter | | | . | ----------------------------------------------------------- | | Oct 1,1986 | | <2> | | <3> | | <4> | | | . | Dear <8>, | | | . | We are pleased to offer you a post of <9> in the | | <10> division of our company. Please make it convenient to | | join us latest by <11>. | | | . | Your remunerations would be <12> per annum. | . | | . | Sincerely, | | | . | J.P. Hires | | Personnel Officer. | | ------------------------------------------------------------ | . |_____________________________________________________________________| 8.6.2.2 MERGING DATA INTO A STANDARD LETTER Data file record information is merged into the standard letter and a new document is created. The document output will have individual letters on separate pages of the document. The document thus created could be printed out by choosing the Print option of the Document Create and Maintain menu. The following steps should be used to perform the merging of data into the standard letter created above: 1. Choose Mail Merge option on the Business DATA Menu. 2. A blank screen is displayed and a prompt for Document Name appears on the screen: DOCUMENT NAME : ______ Hit CTL-IV to go back to the Business DATA Menu. Enter the standard letter (Document) name here. If the document doesn't exist, the system will display the following message on the screen and will prompt the user for the document name again: DOCUMENT NOT FOUND If the system finds the document, the following prompt will appear on the screen: IS THIS THE CORRECT DOCUMENT (Y/N)? SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg027 Enter "Y" AND CR if the document is the correct standard letter. Go to STEP 3. Enter "N" AND CR if for another standard letter. Go to STEP 2. 3. If the standard letter is busy, the system displays the following message: DOCUMENT IS BUSY. PLEASE TRY LATER. The cursor will then go to STEP 2 otherwise the user will be taken to STEP 4. 4. The system now displays the following message: CREATING WORK FILE 5. If the Work File is busy, the system displays the following message: THE DOCUMENT MERGE FILE IS BUSY. PLEASE RUN LATER. 6. The system now displays the following message: VALIDATING AND COPYING DOCUMENT... The system validates the standard letter for proper item reference codes here. If it finds an improper item reference code, the following prompt is displayed: ITEM # REFERENCE NOT DEFINED. ENTER VALID FIELD IN THE RANGE OF 1 TO 12: Enter the proper item reference number here. The standard letter is also updated for any illegal item references. 7. DATA FILE NAME: PRESS CTL-II to go to STEP 2. Enter data file name here. If a data file name is entered for a file which exists but does not have a proper format for Mail Merge, the system displays the following message: FILE IS NOT A PROPER DATA FILE If the file does not exist the following message is displayed: FILE NOT FOUND 8. ENTER THE STARTING KEY: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg028 PRESS CTL-II TO GO BACK TO STEP 7 Enter the record number in the data file where the merge should start. The user may: 1. Enter ALL to select all records. Go to STEP 10 2. Enter CR to begin with first record. Go to STEP 9 3. Enter record number for the first record to be merged. Go to STEP 9. 9. ENTER THE ENDING KEY: PRESS CTL-II TO GO BACK TO STEP 8. The user may : 1. Enter CR to select records till the end of file. 2. Enter last record number to be merged. 10. OUTPUT DOCUMENT NAME : CTL-II will return to STEP 8 if 'ALL' was entered in STEP 8 otherwise it will go to STEP 9. Enter the name of the document where the merged letters are to be stored. If a document with that name already exists the system will display the following message and prompt: THIS DOCUMENT ALREADY EXISTS. (CR) 11. DO YOU WANT TO CONTINUE (Y/N)? 1. Enter Y and CR to continue. Go to STEP 12. 2. Enter N and CR to stop. Go to STEP 2. 12. The system now attempts to get one Ghost task. If it finds a ghost task, the following message and prompt are displayed: GHOST TASK IS AVAILABLE. DO YOU WANT TO USE IT (Y/N)? Enter Y and CR to use this ghost. The system displays the following message for a while and then goes back to the Business DATA menu. The terminal can now be used for other jobs while Mail Merge is in process. MERGING IN GHOST TASK SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg029 Enter N and CR if you do not want to use the ghost task. Go to STEP 13. 13. The system now displays: MAIL MERGE IN PROGRESS... NOW ON <#####> 14. Once all the data records have been merged the system displays: MAIL MERGE COMPLETED (CR) Enter CR to go to the Business DATA Menu. 8.7 IMPROVED IMPORT This new option will move data quickly from a serial data file into a Business WORD document. This transfer will be record by record instead of character by character like used with the menu function key, 'MERGE' option. The user simply selects the QUICK File To Document Merge option from the Business WORD Menu. The program will then ask the user to fill out the information on the following screen: ___________________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 8-8 QUICK File Merge Display | | |. | REV 3.2A MAI OFFICE USER | | TIME: 12:00 A.M. QUICK File To Document Merge DATE: 12/25/86 | | |. | LIBRARY NAME: | | DOCUMENT TO CREATE: | | DESCRIPTION: | | SOURCE SERIAL FILE: | | LINES PER PAGE: | | ENTRIES CORRECT? (Y/N): | |___________________________________________________________________________| LIBRARY NAME is the six character name the user has assigned to their Business WORD library. After entry of this name, the system will display the library code (the single character that associates the LIBRARY NAME with the file WPTF0n, where 'n' is the library code) just to the right of the LIBRARY NAME just entered. To exit this program the user may press CTL-IV or enter "END" at this prompt. The user must next enter the DOCUMENT TO CREATE. This must be a new document. If the document entered already exists the system will display: DOCUMENT ALREADY EXISTS. CR TO CONTINUE. The DESCRIPTION is the same description that the user enters when they create a new document through Document Create/Maintain. The SOURCE SERIAL FILE is the name of the serial data file the user wishes to IMPORT. If only the file name is entered without SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg030 a directory specified then the system will default to the first directory in the users prefix. Next the user must enter the LINES PER PAGE. This will allow the user to specify the maximum lines of data on a page after which a new page will automatically be created. After all entries are verified to be correct, the system will display the document name at the bottom of the screen along with a progress indicator that will show the user the page and line number that is currently being imported. Create document: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Page: m Line: n Once all data has been copied from the serial data file into the document the system will return to the LIBRARY NAME prompt for the user to IMPORT the next serial file. 8.8 IMPROVED REPAIR The Text File Rebuild utility can be used to expand or contract selected text file(s) or to rebuild a text file that has pointer problems. When the screen displays that a text file is being rebuilt in MAI OFFICE, all the documents in that text file cannot be accessed by any other functions, including a rebuild running on other terminals. However, documents in text files other than the one which is being rebuilt can be accessed as usual. Once a text file has been completely rebuilt, all the documents within it are accessible to all other MAI OFFICE functions. NOTE: No escape traps are provided in Text File Rebuild. If the user presses the ESCAPE key when a Text File Rebuild is being done they may damage the text file. 8.8.1 TEXT FILE REBUILD INSTRUCTIONS To execute a Text File Rebuild: 1. At the Business WORD Menu select Supervisory Utilities. The Text File Rebuild utility menu displays. 2. Select Text File Rebuild to contract, expand, or to rebuild the text file(s). Go to STEP 6. 3. Select Print Rebuild Error Report to print an already existing error file which was created during a previous Text File Rebuild. 4. ENTER FILE NAME OR CR TO END: Options (choose one) a. To print the error report, type the name of the error file which the user wants to print or the error file which Rebuild created and asked the user to note. Go to STEP 5. b. CR returns to the Text File Rebuild Utility Menu. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg031 5. After printing the error report, the following prompt will appear: SAVE THIS FILE (Y/N): Options (choose one) a. Type 'N' if you want to delete the error file. b. Type 'Y' if you want to retain the error file. After completion the Rebuild utility will return to the Text File Rebuild Menu. NOTE: If the default printer is busy when the system prints the error report, the following message appears: LINE PRINTER IS BUSY. KEEP TRYING? (Y/N) Options (choose one) a. Type 'Y'. The system keeps trying to access the printer. When the printer is available, the report will print. b. Type 'N' to exit the procedure. You return to the last menu you accessed before running the Text File Rebuild option. 6. BEGIN REBUILD NOW OR START LATER?(N/L/CR): Options (choose one) a. Type 'N' and CR to begin rebuild immediately after all the parameters have been entered and validated. Go to STEP 7. b. Type 'L' and CR to start rebuild at a later date and time. Go to STEP 8. c. Type CR to return to Text File Rebuild Menu. 7. DO YOU WANT TO BUILD AN ERROR REPORT? (Y/N) Options (choose one) a. Type 'Y' and CR to build an error report. Write down the name of the error file the system displays here. Go to STEP 9. b. Type 'N' and CR if you don't want an error report. Go to STEP 9. 8. Enter the answers to the following prompts to have rebuild started at a later date and time: ENTER TIME TO REBUILD (HH:MM AM/PM) OR CR: ENTER DATE TO BEGIN REBUILD (MMDDYY) OR CR: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg032 The current date and time are displayed next to these prompts. To change date and time, overtype on the date and time displayed by the system. Once date and time have been validated, the screen displays the name of the error file which is created for logging the errors: PLEASE NOTE - ERROR FILE NAME IS RBxxxx (CR) RB stands for rebuild and the characters following RB are the terminal ID. Write down the name of this file displayed for use when printing the error file report. After you CR the system creates the error file. 9. DOCUMENT OR PARAGRAPH FILE(S) (D/P/CR): Options (choose one) a. Type 'D' and CR to rebuild a document text file(s). Go to STEP 10 b. Type 'P' and CR to rebuild a paragraph text file. Go to STEP 11 10. LIBRARY FILE CHARACTER Enter the library file character for the text file to rebuild and CR. When file characters for all the text file(s) to be rebuilt have been entered, CR to end the selection of text files. 11. The screen now displays (one at a time for document text file rebuild) the number of lines already used in the text file and the space available. If you wish to re-size the text file, enter the new number of lines for the text file: THERE ARE <#> LINES USED IN LEAVING <#> AVAILABLE ENTER NEW NUMBER OF LINES OR CR: Options (choose one) a. Enter the new number of lines you wish the new text file to have and CR. Go to STEP 12. b. Type CR to retain the same size for text file. Go to STEP 12. 12. The following message appears on the screen: NOW DEFINING TEMPORARY FILES The system looks at the records in the temporary files to see if there is enough room to copy the text files. NOTE: Do not leave your terminal until the temporary files have been defined. On the successful completion of allocation of temporary files the above message will disappear. If there is not enough space to define the temporary files the SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg033 procedure stops. The user must delete any unused files on the disk at this point to make room for the completion of the program. The system now scans the text file(s) and documents within it. As it scans, the following messages appear on the screen: TEXT FILE NOW REBUILDING: The system first makes sure that the text file it is about to rebuild is not being used. If it finds that a library or document in the text file which it is about to rebuild is being used then it will not rebuild that text file and will display the following message: DOCUMENT BUSY. TEXT FILE CANNOT BE REBUILT. If the system encounters any kind of corruption in the chains, it reports such a corruption and attempts to recover the maximum text which is affected by that corruption. Corruptions usually occur in a text file and in the document header record which is linked to documents. The system responds to such corruptions as described below: a. Document Header Record Corruption: If the document header record doesn't point to a proper first or last page of the document, or if these pointers have values outside the range of the text file into which they point, the system displays the following message: POINTERS IN DOCUMENT RECORD FOR CORRUPTED. WILL FIX. The system attempts to correct these pointers. If it is not able to salvage even one page of the document, it proceeds to delete the document and displays the following message: DELETING b. Page Record Corruption: If any of the page records of a document/ paragraph do not point to a proper first line of that page then the following message appears on the screen: PAGE RECORD NOT PROPER FOR PAGE <#> The system attempts to restore the proper value of the pointer. If it is unable to restore the pointers then it deletes all the lines for that page. The following message appears: ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> DELETED. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg034 If it gets all the lines then the following message appears: RESTORED ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> If it gets only the partial page then the following message is displayed: RESTORED <#> LINES FOR PAGE <#> c. Page Link Corruption: If the system encounters a corruption in page record chains then it displays the following message: PAGE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING PAGE POINTERS... If it is able to restore the complete chain then the following message is displayed: PAGE LINE REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete chain then it displays the following message: PAGE REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST AFTER PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text preceding the lost page: **PAGE POINTER ERRORS. NEXT <#> PAGES LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION. d. Line Link Corruption: If the system encounters any corruption in the line link chain, it displays the following message: LINE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING POINTERS... If it is able to restore the complete line link chain, it issues the following message: LINE LINK REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete line link chain then the following message appears: LINE LINK REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST ON PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text where the failure occurred: **LINE POINTER ERRORS. SOME TEXT ON THIS PAGE LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION 13. On the completion of rebuild for each text file, the system renames the temporary text file. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg035 14. Go to STEP 4 if you keyed in 'Y' for STEP 7 in response to the prompt: DO YOU WANT TO BUILD AN ERROR REPORT (Y/N)? If you answered 'N', the system displays the Text File Rebuild Menu. NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT A TEXT FILE REBUILD BE RUN ONCE A WEEK TO ENSURE POINTER INTEGRITY. 9. MAI BUSINESS GRAPH MAI Business GRAPH is not available on the 1800 system. 10.0 MAI BUSINESS DATA MAI Business DATA has instant access to all the data in your system and gives it to you in any form you desire. You now have instant access to any information in your application files! MAI Business DATA provides a common facility to extract information from files on your system and pass it to MAI Business WORD, and MAI Business MATH. The Decision Support System of MAI Business DATA, which includes Executive Query Manager and Report Writer, lets you take data from your files and sort them in any fashion prior to printing the information in a letter. The Integrated Data Dictionary of MAI Business DATA allows your systems personnel to describe the data to be used by MAI OFFICE once, in one place, thus reducing data redundancy in simplifying maintenance requirements. You can also Mail-merge information using MAI Business DATA and Letter Generator feature of MAI Business WORD. 10.1 QUEUED LETTER GENERATION In order to provide the user with a way of generating mass mailings using the Letter Generation feature without tying up the terminal on which the mass mailing is being done, a new option has been added to Letter Generation. A ghost task can now process the mailing in background which will allow the terminal to be used for other purposes. This background processing is done as follows: If the Business WORD queue is started, immediately after the initial query has been done and all records have been selected for this mailing, the system will display the following prompt: ENTER 'CTL-I' TO QUEUE THE PRINTING OF THESE DOCUMENTS, OR 'CR' A CR will process the letter merge function on the screen and will tie up the terminal as in the past. Entry of 'CTL-I' will prompt the user: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg036 ENTER THE QUEUE PRIORITY (1-9): This is the priority of the documents that are to be printed by the MAI OFFICE printing system. These documents will be prioritized along with all other Business WORD documents that have been queued. The default priority will be five (5). 10.2 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA The Business DATA module is restored on the 1800 using the name DSS for the module name. Please see Business DATA User Guide (MBF #7557). ******************************************************** * * * BUSINESS DATA 3.2A REQUIRES DSS LEVEL 2.0 OR ABOVE * * * ******************************************************** 11.0 MAI BUSINESS MAIL Business MAIL is not available on the 1800 system. 8. RELATED DOCUMENTATION The following is a list of documentation for MAI OFFICE: Manual_Number Title M0043 MAI Business WORD User and Reference Manuals M7552A MAI Business MATH User Manual M0078 MAI Business GRAPH User and Reference Manuals M0044 MAI Business EXEC User and Reference Manuals M0063 Menu and System Services Reference Manual and Presentation Services User Guide M0042 MAI Business DATA User Guide and MAI ORIGIN DSS User Reference Manual M7566 MAI OFFICE Quick Reference Guide M7567 Translation Utilities Reference Guide 9. PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS For MAI OFFICE 3.2A, certain hardware revision levels are required: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg037 Terminals DT-4309 Rev. E DT-4310 Rev. D DT-4312 Rev. K DT-4313 Rev. E DT-4314 Rev. C *08 10. INSTALLATION FOR BOSS/VS AND BOSS/IX SYSTEMS Please read the installation instructions carefully before attempting installation. MAI OFFICE tapes will be distributed containing all modules of MAI OFFICE. All MAI OFFICE modules require a public key (except the printer system and Presentation Services). The public key is a number in hexadecimal notation which uniquely applies to that particular module of MAI OFFICE and that particular system. WITHOUT THE PROPER KEYS, MAI OFFICE WILL NOT RUN. The tape containing MAI OFFICE will be accompanied by a release memo listing a 'Public Key' for each MAI OFFICE module purchased by the user: MOC, MOD, MOW, MOE, MOP, MOS and MOG The modules MOP, EPS and MOS do not require a public key. After installation of files and keys, please see instructions for each module elsewhere in this announcement for module specific installation instructions. 10.1 BOSS/IX MAI 1800 INSTALLATION 10.1.1 New Installation Before MAI OFFICE can be used, it must be installed on the fixed disk. The installation procedure should be run in single user mode--it is assumed that the system has been booted and is rooted on the. root partition. The MAI OFFICE programs and data files will reside on a single MCS cartridge. Figure 10-5 shows the list of MAI OFFICE module names. _______________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 10-5 MAI OFFICE Module Names | | |. | MOW - Business WORD | | MOC - Business MATH | | MOD - Business DATA | | MOE - Business EXEC | | *MOP - Printer System | | *MOS - Menu System | | *EPS - Presentation Services | | DSS - Decision Support Software (Delivered with the O.S.) | | |. | * = Must Be Installed | |_______________________________________________________________________| The public key should be entered during the installation procedure after the corresponding program files have been installed (i.e., the public key for EXEC should be entered after the MOE program SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg038 files have been installed). WITHOUT THE PROPER KEYS, MAI OFFICE WILL NOT RUN. STEP 1: Insert the cartridge containing MAI OFFICE into the MCS drive and turn the lock lever. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: install dd MOP EPS MOS xxx ... press the RETURN key. Where dd stands for 'cs' installing from 1/4 inch MCS. The xxx is the three character name of each module that has been ordered (see figure 10-5). PLEASE NOTE: The following three modules must be installed: EPS, MOP, and MOS. The program searches for each module on the MCS cartridge tape; displays its label, and begins copying files. The program displays the name of each file as it is copied. At the prompt Enter the public key for that particular module. When all modules have been installed, the program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> STEP 2: Only program files have been installed. The data files must be restored to disk. WARNING: DO NOT ENTER MULTI-USER MODE BEFORE PROCEEDING, OR THE '/tmp/modata' FILE WILL BE ERASED. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: /tmp/modata Then press the RETURN key. The '/tmp/modata' is an executable file containing a list of data files needed for first time installations of MAI OFFICE. You will be asked whether each data file should be restored unless you select on the first file, the "off" option -- which means install all files in the filelist. Data files are copied. The program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg039 STEP 3: To start MAI OFFICE, run the oprinfo utility. and set up an account with the home directory=/oms and the initial program as:. /bin/basic,-q,s=64,pgm=MS,-nr,'prefix"/oms. /PS /PS/tools"' The /PS/tools is only required when the user wants to modify menus. STEP 4: When the prompt, "PLEASE HAVE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR SET DATE FORMAT (CR)" appears, the user should go into the OS utilities and set the Date and Time, then RUN "MS". The first time the user RUNs "MS" they will automatically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. Refer to Section 10.4 for further instructions. 10.2 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE The international ID parameter maintenance program (MSMM40) will automatically be run the first time a user runs "MS" after an international or domestic installation. After the user runs "MS", the prompt: "INTERNATIONAL PARAMETERS ARE NOT SET UP (CR)" will appear. This program allows the MAI OFFICE product to be modified in certain areas to conform to a customer's special needs. There are two distinct sets of parameters that a customer may change: SET ONE: Amount Format Insert Code Characters Overprint Character Hyphenation Character Telephone Format Sign Symbol Spaces ending a sentence SET TWO: Date Format Date Separator Time Format Time Separator Currency Code Position of Currency Code SET ONE contains options which are global for the MAI OFFICE product. For example, if the telephone format is set to international, then all MAI OFFICE users will have their telephone users unformatted (see below for more detail). CAUTION: Once this set of parameters has been modified the system will not allow them to be changed. SET TWO contains options which are user independent. As an example, two different users on the same MAI OFFICE system may use different date and/or time formats. A complete description of each option and use is given below. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg040 10.2.1 SET ONE OPTIONS Amount Format options - 1. #,###,##0.00 2. #.###.##0,00 3. #B###B##0,00 B=blank These format masks will allow a user to present numeric data in the form that is acceptable for his or her country. Option '1' is most commonly used in the United States while options '2' and '3' are used in Europe. Insert Code Characters options: "<>", "[]", " " The braces ("[]") currently used in MAI OFFICE to indicate insert codes are not available in all ISO character sets. Therefore, the user will now have the ability to select characters that are in the character set that they would like to use. Overprint Character options: any character Like the insert code, the backslash ("\") used as an overprint character in the present MAI OFFICE is not available in all character sets. This option lets the user specify a different character to be used as the overprint character. NOTE: Overprint character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Hyphenation Character options: any character Same as the Overprint Character. NOTE: This is the character used to separate the word by syllables for hyphenation in the document, IT IS NOT the character used during the printing process to hyphenate a word (usually a '-'). Also the hyphenation character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Telephone Format options: D=Domestic, I=International The domestic option will format all entered telephone numbers in the form, (AAA)PPP-NNNN where: AAA= area code (option field), PPP= prefix, and NNNN=number. European telephone numbers are not formatted the same way and may require entry of more than ten digits so if the "I" option is chosen, no special formatting or input validation will be done. This field will allow up to 15 characters in any form when using the "I" option. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg041 Sign Symbol options: 1. "CR/DR" 2. "+/-" 3. "()" In the United States the CR or DR is used to denote positive or negative amounts. In Europe it is more common to use a "+" or "-" instead. With this option, the user may select the notation desired. Spaces ending a sentence options: 1 or 2 In the United States a punctuation symbol and two spaces are used to denote the end of a sentence. In. most other countries the punctuation is followed by only one space at the end of the sentence. This option allows the user to select their preference. 10.2.2 SET TWO OPTIONS Date Format options: 1. MMDDYY 2. DDMMYY 3. YYMMDD In addition to the (MMDDYY) format, two new formats have been added for the user to choose from. Date Separator options: any character The user may choose to see the date displayed in a format other than MM/DD/YY. With this option the user may now have dates presented like MM.DD.YY or MM-DD-YY. Time Format options: D=Domestic, I=International The user may now select to have the time displayed using a twelve-hour clock (U.S.) or a twenty-four hour clock (International). Time Separator options: ".", ":", "N"=Null With this option the user may see the hours and minutes separated with different options. Currency Code options: any four alpha characters Previously, certain amounts assumed dollar values and displayed the dollar symbol ($) in front of them. The user may now select the characters that will be used as the currency symbol. Position of Currency Code options: L=LEFT, R=RIGHT SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg042 United States dollars are displayed with the currency symbol to the left of the actual amount (i.e. $1.98). This is not always true in other countries where the currency symbol may appear on the left or the right of the actual amount. With this option the user may select their preference. A. DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS Listed below are the minimal disk requirements for MAI OFFICE: Module Size_(in_MB) MAI OFFICE 3.2A 17.5 including: Business WORD Business MATH Business EXEC Business DATA Presentation Services/Menu System _ 4.5 _ Total 22.0 ORIGINATOR: Elaine Titus SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB015 Pg043 FIB 00016 02/05/90 *** OFFICE 3.2B for GPx Systems - Software Announcement [ WPSS 169 ] *** INTRODUCTION MAI Basic Four, Inc. is pleased to announce the availability of MAI OFFICE 3.2B. MAI OFFICE is a completely integrated Office Automation package for the GPx System. MAI OFFICE is composed of the following modules: o MAI Business WORDTM - Word Processor o MAI Business MATHTM - Spreadsheet o MAI Business GRAPHTM - Graphics o MAI Business EXECTM - Desktop Functions o MAI Business MAILTM - Electronic Mail (Local only) o MAI Business DATATM - Data Management o Presentation ServicesTM/Printer System *********************************************************** * Please read the installation instructions (Section 2) * * before attempting to install MAI OFFICE or any of its * * modules. * * * *********************************************************** *********************************************************** * MAI OFFICE 3.2B requires certain peripheral hardware * * revision levels. * * Please see Section 1.2. * *********************************************************** Copyright 1990 by MAI Basic Four, Inc. All rights reserved. C O N T E N T S 1.0 PRODUCT DEFINITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.1 INSTALLATION AND DISK REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.2 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS. . . . . 3 2.0 NEW INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.1 CREATING AN OFFICE ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.0 BUSINESS GRAPH ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 4.0 INTERNATIONAL INSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4.1 IMPLANT OF INTERNATIONAL PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4.2 CUSTOMER TAPE BUILD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 5.0 SPx CONVERSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 5.1 MPx CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 5.2 WPDU70 - BIT CONVERSION PROGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 5.3 OMS 2.1 CONVERSION FROM 13XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg001 6.0 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . 9 6.1 SET ONE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 6.2 SET TWO OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 7.0 MAI BUSINESS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 7.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA. . .12 7.2 MAI OFFICE 3.2B WITH MAI ORIGIN 2.1B. . . . . . . . . .12 8.0 MAI BUSINESS MATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 9.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 10.0 CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 10.1 MENU SYSTEM FOR MAI OFFICE 3.2B . . . . . . . . . . . .14 10.2 TEXT FILE REBUILD CHANGES FOR 3.2B. . . . . . . . . . .16 10.2.1 TEXT FILE REBUILD INSTRUCTIONS. . . . . . . . .16 10.3 HELPFUL HINTS AND WORKAROUNDS 1.0 PRODUCT DEFINITION MAI OFFICE consists of 16 products. The following list will describe each product: MOW - BUSINESS WORD PROGRAMS MOWDAT - BUSINESS WORD DATA MOE - BUSINESS EXEC PROGRAMS MOEDAT - BUSINESS EXEC DATA MOM - BUSINESS MAIL PROGRAMS MOMDAT - BUSINESS MAIL DATA MOC - BUSINESS MATH PROGRAMS MOCDAT - BUSINESS MATH DATA MOS - SYSTEM SERVICES PROGRAMS MOSDAT - SYSTEM SERVICES DATA MOP - PRINTER SYSTEM PROGRAMS MOPDAT - PRINTER SYSTEM DATA MOD - BUSINESS DATA PROGRAMS MODDAT - BUSINESS DATA DATA MOG - BUSINESS GRAPH MOWORLD - INTERNATIONAL 1.1 INSTALLATION AND DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS Installation requirements: - Public keys for: MOW, MOE, MOG, MOC - Presentation Services - Current OS release (1.0A or greater) Disk space requirements: MOW -- 5.5 MEG MOE -- 1.5 MEG MOS -- 2.0 MEG MOP -- .11 MEG MOG -- .70 MEG MOC -- .35 MEG 10.16 1.2 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS For MAI OFFICE 3.2B, certain minimum hardware revision levels are required: Terminals DT-4312 Rev. K DT-4313 Rev. E DT-4314 Rev. C SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg002 Laser Printer PT-4223 X6 Firmware (or above) 2.0 NEW INSTALLATION MAI OFFICE is shipped on 1/4 inch tape. Installation should be done in single user mode only, so if you are not in single user mode at the OS prompt enter: shutdown -i1 To install OFFICE use the "mbfinstall" command at the OS prompt. This command will install OFFICE on the root directory if no directory is specified along with the command. The following will illustrate the uses of this command: mbfinstall <-- this format will install on the root directory. mbfinstall /usr2 <-- this format will install under the directory named "/usr2". This format is used to install OFFICE on an alternate disk. Once the command is executed, a menu screen will appear with the first 15 products. The user then selects the products they wish to install. When selecting the products, if the user is installing more than one product they can enter all products on the same line separated by a space. For example: Enter products: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 The example above displays a full domestic install. The user should not use the 'all' command when installing OFFICE. The 'all' option will install the domestic product as well as the international product on the system. NOTE: Both MAIL and EXEC must be installed for local messages. The data files are defined as separate products. The end user must request the datafiles to be installed along with the program files. As the product is installing the user will be prompted for public key installation for the appropriate products. NOTE: The public keys will be installed in /usr/mbf/etc/level. 2.1 CREATING AN OFFICE ID The following illustrates an OFFICE id created through 'oprinfo'. This id uses the command file 'startmo' to envoke OFFICE. 1. Login name: office 2. User ID: (or input of your choice) 3. Group ID: (or input of your choice) 4. Home directory: /usr/oms or the alternate directory 5. Login shell: /bin/execsh 6. Program /usr/oms/startmo or the alternate directory/usr/oms/startmo 7. Menu permissions: (or input of your choice) 8. Additional groups: (or input of your choice) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg003 See oprinfo documentation for definitions of the different fields. If OFFICE is installed on an alternate disk/directory the user will need to modify the prefix list within the command file "startmo", which will be located in the same alternate disk/directory as OFFICE. Example: before cd /usr/oms ..... prefix "/usr/oms /usr/mbf/PS /usr/mbf/PS/tools" after cd /alt dir/usr/oms ..... prefix "/alt dir/usr/oms /usr/mbf/PS /usr/mbf/PS/tools" 3.0 BUSINESS GRAPH ENVIRONMENT This section describes how to set the user path to use BUSINESS GRAPH. In order to use BUSINESS GRAPH, the users path, found in the .profile file, will need to be modified. When the user creates an id such as the one located in Section 2.1 of this document, a .profile is also created. This file is located under the home directory for the id created. Normally this .profile file contains a standard set-up. To change the path for the id: Use the screen editor "vi" to edit the file called .profile. Be sure you are in the home directory for that id. Change the original example below to one of the modified examples. ORIGINAL - #PATH=$PATH:"your_path" MODIFIED - Examples: PATH=.:/usr/graphics:$PATH or PATH=.:/alternate directory/usr/graphics:$PATH NOTE: Remove the # sign. Once the .profile file has been modified the user then needs to modify the "startmo" command file to include graphics in the prefix list. Using the screen editor, "vi", edit startmo. Cursor down and over to "/usr/oms" and inset "/usr/graphics" or "/alternate directory/usr/graphics". Example: ... prefix "/usr/oms /usr/graphics /usr/mbf/PS /usr/mbf/PS/tools" or ... prefix "/alt dir/usr/oms /alt dir/usr/graphics /usr/mbf/PS... 4.0 INTERNATIONAL INSTALL The international install is similar to the domestic install. The international site uses the same command "mbfinstall". With a domestic install, the user is able to redirect OFFICE to an alternate disk; however, this is not the case with the international version. It must reside on the root partition. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg004 The menu screen will appear with the domestic products. At that time the user enters a and the international product (MOWORLD) will appear. Select the product and then and then enter "s" for start of installation. 4.1 IMPLANT OF INTERNATIONAL PRODUCT Once the international product has been installed, the user needs to perform an implant of the product to the native language. The user cd's to the directory /usr/omsutl and invokes "/usr/omsutl/mplant". A menu screen appears with options and the user then selects the appropriate responses. A new prompt appears on the implant screen giving the user the option for screen display. The old implant process would always display line changes with the line display enabled, and took up to eight hours to implant the complete product. With line display disabled the complete product can now be implanted in one hour. 4.2 CUSTOMER TAPE BUILD To create a customer tape, the international site should log-on as root and execute the rel procedure followed by product name. Example: rel MOW MOWDAT MOP MOPDAT MOM MOMDAT MOS MOSDAT MOD MODDAT MOG MOC MOCDAT MOE MOEDAT or: rel NOTE: These examples are a full product release. 5.0 SPx CONVERSION If an existing SPx customer is converting to a GPx system they need to create a BQR filelist and transfer the data with the intersystem transfer. The schema can either be text or binary. The utility program WPDU70 does not need to be run on an SPx to GPx conversion. 5.1 MPx CONVERSION If an existing MPx customer is converting to a GPx product, they will need to convert the document files. The user first needs to create a BQR file list of the WP files. When creating this list the following files should have a binary schema: WPDM00, WPDM04, WPPS00, WPPS01, WPTF0a- WPTF0z, WPTF0A-WPTF0Z and WPTF01. The library file, WPDL00, should be transferred as a text type file. Once these files are transferred to the GPx system over the already installed OFFICE product, the utility program WPDU70 should be executed. To reverse the bit order on the above mentioned files. 5.2 WPDU70 - BIT CONVERSION PROGRAM WPDU70 is a 'bit coversion' program used when moving documents between MPx and 2000/2500/3000/4000 systems. The program may be run only once, it cannot be aborted (using ESCAPE) and there is no user input required. If WPDU70 is interrupted before completion, the affected files MUST BE RESTORED FROM BACKUPS before restarting. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg005 WPDU70 creates a log file (BITLOG) which lists each file that has been converted. Text files that are not on-line will not be converted. Files are opened and converted using fully qualified file names based on the location of the file WPDM00. Files in other nodes or directories will not be converted. FILES THAT WILL BE CONVERTED: WPDM00, WPDM04, WPPS00, WPPS01, WPTF0A-WPTF0Z, WPTF01, WPTF0a-WPTF0z PROCEDURE: STEP 1. Complete all other upgrade or conversion procedures. EXAMPLE: Conversion from WP 3.1 to 3.2 if needed. Put new WP program files on the new system. STEP 2. Use Intersystem Transfer or BQR to move all WP data files to the new system. BE SURE TO SPECIFY THAT THE ABOVE FILES BE TRANSPORTED AS BINARY. ALL OTHER WP DATA FILES ARE TRANSPORTED AS TEXT. STEP 3. Backup all of the WP data files. STEP 4. Run the CONVERT option of BQR or Intersystem Transfer on the WP data files that were transported as TEXT. EXAMPLE: WPDL00 STEP 5. Run WPDU70 to convert the WP data files transported as BINARY. NOTE: WPDU70 functions on WP data files only and only those data files that contain binary information. Menu, Operator and Executive Function files are not included. 5.3 OMS 2.1 CONVERSION FROM 13xx Since the conversion of 13xx OMS 2.1 to MPx to GPx MAI OFFICE 3.2B will only include WPDL00, WPDM00 and the WPTF0& files, the program will bypass the files not found. A prompt will ask if this is a 13xx conversion. If it is, answer 'Y' and the program will continue. 6.0 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE The international ID parameter maintenance program (MSMM40) will automatically be run the first time a user runs "MS" after an initial installation. After the user runs "MS", the prompt: "INTERNATIONAL PARAMETERS ARE NOT SET UP (CR)" will appear. This program allows the MAI OFFICE product to be modified in certain areas to conform to a customer's special needs. There are two distinct sets of parameters that a customer may change: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg006 SET ONE: Amount Format Insert Code Characters Overprint Character Hyphenation Character Telephone Format Sign Symbol Spaces ending a sentence SET TWO: Date Format Date Separator Time Format Time Separator Currency Code Position of Currency Code SET ONE contains options which are global for MAI OFFICE. For example, if the telephone format is set to international, then all MAI OFFICE users will have their telephone numbers unformatted (see below for more detail). CAUTION: Once this set of parameters has been modified the system will not allow them to be changed. SET TWO contains options which are user independent. As an example, two different users on the same MAI OFFICE system may use different date and/or time formats. A complete description of each option and use is given below. 6.1 SET ONE OPTIONS Amount Format options - 1. #,###,##0.00 2. #.###.##0,00 3. #B###B##0,00 B=blank These format masks will allow a user to present numeric data in the form that is acceptable for his or her country. Option '1' is most commonly used in the United States while options '2' and '3' are used in Europe. Insert Code Characters options: "<>", "[]", "{}" The braces ("[]") currently used in MAI OFFICE to indicate insert codes are not available in all ISO character sets so the user has the ability to select characters that are in the character . set they would like to use. Overprint Character options: any character Like the insert code, the backslash (" ") used as an overprint character in MAI OFFICE is not available in all character sets. This option lets the user specify a different character as the overprint character. NOTE: Overprint character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Hyphenation Character options: any character SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg007 Same as the Overprint Character. NOTE: This is the character used to separate the word by syllables for hyphenation in the document, IT IS NOT the character used during the printing process to hyphenate a word (usually a '-'). Also the hyphenation character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Telephone Format options: D=Domestic, I=International D=Domestic option - formats all telephone numbers in a (AAA)PPP-NNNN format where: AAA=area code (option field) + PPP=prefix + NNNN=number I=International option - no special formatting or input validation will be done. This field will allow up to 15 characters in any form. Sign Symbol options: 1. "CR/DR" 2. "+/-" 3. "()" In the United States the CR or DR is used to denote positive or negative amounts. In Europe it is more common to use a "+" or "-". This option allows the user to select either. Spaces ending a sentence options: 1 or 2 In the United States, two spaces follow the sentence punctuation. In most other countries, one space follows the sentence punctuation. This option allows the user to select either. 6.2 SET TWO OPTIONS Date Format options: 1. MMDDYY 2. DDMMYY 3. YYMMDD In addition to the (MMDDYY) format, two other formats are available to the user. Date Separator options: any character The user may have the date displayed in a format other than MM/DD/YY such as MM.DD.YY or MM-DD-YY. Time Format options: D=Domestic, I=International D=Domestic - twelve-hour clock or I=International - twenty-four hour clock. Time Separator options: ".", ":", "N"=Null SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg008 With this option the user may see the hours and minutes separated with different options. Currency Code options: any four alpha characters The user may select the characters that will be used as the currency symbol. Position of Currency Code options: L=LEFT, R=RIGHT United States dollars are displayed with the currency symbol to the left of the actual amount (i.e. $1.98). This is not always true in other countries where the currency symbol may appear on the left or the right of the actual amount. With this option the user may select either. 7.0 MAI BUSINESS DATA 7.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA The Business DATA module is delivered with the operating system. SEE GPx Software Announcement #168 for installation instructions. 7.2 MAI OFFICE 3.2B WITH MAI ORIGIN 2.1B The following illustrates an OFFICE id created through 'oprinfo'. This id uses the command file 'startmo' to envoke OFFICE. 1. Login name: office 2. User ID: (or input of your choice) 3. Group ID: (or input of your choice) 4. Home directory: /usr/oms or the alternate directory 5. Login shell: /bin/execsh 6. Program /usr/oms/startmo or the alternate directory/usr/oms/startmo 7. Menu permissions: (or input of your choice) 8. Additional groups: (or input of your choice) See oprinfo documentation for definitions of the different fields. Modify the prefix list within the command file "startmo" for OFFICE/ORIGIN users as follows: Example: ... prefix /usr/oms /usr/origin/r21b /usr/mbf/PS /usr/mbf/PS/tools 8.0 MAI BUSINESS MATH MAI Business MATH transforms your video display into a grid resembling an accountant's columnar pad. o An easy-to-use, yet flexible electronic spreadsheet. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg009 o For developing projections, budgets, pro formas, cash flows, or other tabular reports requiring mathematical calculations. o Will improve accuracy while saving significant time. 9.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B introduces many new features which were not part of MAI OFFICE 3.1A. New manuals are included in all new orders but must be ordered separately for update orders. The following is a list of documentation for MAI OFFICE 3.2B. Manual Number Title M7554E MAI MENUTM and Systems Services Reference Manual and MAI Business DATA User Guide M7555B MAI Business GRAPHTM Reference Manual M7559D MAI Business EXECTM Reference Manual M7560C MAI Business WORDTM Reference Manual M7550F MAI Business WORDTM User Manual M7551B MAI Business GRAPHTM User Manual M7552D MAI Business MATHTM User Guide M7553F MAI Business EXECTM User Guide M7557G MAI Business DATATM User Guide M7561E Presentation Services Menu and Help Management User Guide M0144B Presentation Services Forms Management User Guide M7558E MAI Business MAILTM Reference Manual M7566 MAI OFFICE Quick Reference Guide 10.0 CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS The following sections briefly describe improvements made with MAI OFFICE 3.2B. Also included with this new release are improved printer drivers. New dictionary files with additional plurals can be restored over existing WPWF00 and WPWF01 if needed. 10.1 MENU SYSTEM FOR MAI OFFICE 3.2B MAI OFFICE 3.2B uses a new menu system with the aid of another system, called Presentation Services. Presentation Services provides menu functions. Also the function keys can be programmed through Presentation Services and are used in MAI OFFICE to directly access certain functions of MAI OFFICE from any menu in the system. For information regarding menu SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg010 maintenance, see the Presentation Services Users Guide M7561. The main menu for MAI OFFICE is: |-----------MAIN MENU------------| | | | Business WORD | | | | Business MATH | | | | Business GRAPH | | | | Business EXEC | | | | Business DATA | | | | Menu and System Services | | | |________________________________| There are two basic ways to select an option from a menu. You can use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option or you can type in the designated selection characters. You can substitute the following key sequences in place of the arrow keys: CTRL+K for up arrow, CTRL+J or space bar for down . arrow, CTRL+L for right arrow, and CTRL+N or BACKSPACE key for the left arrow. By using the up and down arrow keys, you can move the cursor to the option you want to select. The current option appears highlighted on your screen. Press RETURN to complete your selection. The selections wrap from top to bottom and vice- versa. You can also use selection characters to select options from the menu. As you look at the menu on your screen, notice that one or two characters from each option is highlighted. These are the selection characters and indicate what you need to type in order to move the cursor directly to the desired option. Then press RETURN to make your selection. There will always be at least one selection character. A second selection character is used only when the set of first selection characters is not unique. The function keys provide quick access to frequently used options. If you want to use one of the function keys, press the key that matches the label at the bottom of the screen. Below is the function key usage within MAI OFFICE. The notation of F1 through F10 indicates function keys 1 through 10 with the description of that function key's use within MAI OFFICE. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP STATUS IN-TRAY MSGSLIP CALC CALENDR PHONE#S LOGOFF DATE CONSOLE F1 (HELP) will give a brief description of the menu system. F2 (STATUS) will show the user a list of users currently logged on to MAI OFFICE. F3 (IN-TRAY) will take the user directly to the In-Tray option without having to move through several menu levels. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg011 F4 (MSGSLIP) will take the user directly to the Out-Tray option to send a local message. F5 (CALC) will take the user directly to the Calculator Function. F6 (CALENDR) will take the user directly to a personal calendar. F7 (PHONE#S) will take the user to a personal telephone directory. F8 (LOGOFF) will log the user off the MAI OFFICE system. F9 (DATE) will allow the user to change the system date and time if allowed this privilege. However, if the date is changed from the WP.MAIN MENU, it is only changed for internal word processing screens and not on the rest of the system. F10 (CONSOLE) will take the user out of the MAI OFFICE system into console mode. The user will be allowed CONSOLE only if they are configured or authorized for this privilege. 10.2 TEXT FILE REBUILD CHANGES FOR 3.2B The Text File Rebuild utility has been changed to use full path names when creating a temporary file name and also when it is renamed. The process was also changed so pointers were not rewritten into the original header file during the rebuild. Prior to 3.2B, a temporary file was created to correct pointers in the text file but the header file was fixed in place. If the process was interrupted for any reason, the pointers would not match between the header and text files and when the text file rebuild was restarted, all documents were deleted. With MAI OFFICE 3.2B, this will no longer happen since a temporary file is created for both the header file and the text file. If the process is interrupted, the user can safely restart the text file rebuild at the beginning. With MAI OFFICE 3.2B, text file rebuild tries recovering from loops within existing pointers for a single page. 10.2.1 TEXT FILE REBUILD INSTRUCTIONS To execute a Text File Rebuild: STEP 1: At the Business WORD Menu select Supervisory Utilities. The Text File Rebuild utility menu displays. STEP 2: Select Text File Rebuild to contract, expand, or to rebuild the text file(s). STEP 3: BEGIN REBUILD NOW OR START LATER?(N/L/CR): Options (choose one) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg012 a. Type 'N' and CR to begin rebuild immediately after all the parameters have been entered and validated. Go to STEP 4. b. Type 'L' and CR to start rebuild at a later date and time. Go to STEP 5. c. Type CR to return to Text File Rebuild Menu. STEP 4: DO YOU WANT TO BUILD AN ERROR REPORT? (Y/N) Options (choose one) a. Type 'Y' and CR to build an error report. Write down the name of the error file the system displays here. Go to STEP 6. b. Type 'N' and CR if you don't want an error report. Go to STEP 6. STEP 5: Enter the answers to the following prompts to have rebuild started at a later date and time: ENTER TIME TO REBUILD (HH:MM AM/PM) OR CR: ENTER DATE TO BEGIN REBUILD (MMDDYY) OR CR: The current date and time are displayed next to these prompts. To change date and time, overtype on the date and time displayed by the system. Once date and time have been validated, the screen displays the name of the error file which is created for logging the errors: PLEASE NOTE - ERROR FILE NAME IS RBxxxx (CR) RB stands for rebuild and the characters following RB are the terminal ID. Write down the name of this file displayed for use when printing the error file report. After you CR the system creates the error file with the message being displayed: NOW CREATING FILE... STEP 6: DOCUMENT OR PARAGRAPH FILE(S) (D/P/CR): Options (choose one) a. Type 'D' and CR to rebuild a document text file(s). Go to STEP 7. b. Type 'P' and CR to rebuild a paragraph text file. Go to STEP 8. STEP 7: LIBRARY FILE CHARACTER Enter the library file character for the text file to rebuild and CR. When file characters for all the text file(s) to be rebuilt have been entered, CR to end the selection of text files. STEP 8: The screen now displays the number of lines already used in the text file and the space available for SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg013 each text file specified. If you wish to re-size the text file, enter the new number of lines for the text file: THERE ARE <#> LINES USED IN LEAVING <#> AVAILABLE ENTER NEW NUMBER OF LINES OR CR: Options (choose one) a. Enter the new number of lines you wish the new text file to have and CR. Go to STEP 9. b. Type CR to retain the same size for text file. Go to STEP 9. STEP 9: The following message appears on the screen: NOW DEFINING TEMPORARY FILES The system looks at the records in the text files to see if there is enough room to create temporary files. NOTE: Do not leave your terminal until the temporary files have been defined. On the successful completion of allocation of temporary files the above message will disappear. If there is not enough space to define the temporary files the procedure stops. The user must delete any unused files on the disk at this point to make room for the completion of the program. The system now scans the header file first and then. scans the text file(s) and documents within it. As it scans, the following messages appear on the screen: TEXT FILE NOW SCANNING: NOW REBUILDING: The system first makes sure that the text file it is about to rebuild is not being used. If it finds that a library or document in the text file which it is about to rebuild is being used then it will not rebuild that text file and will display the following message: DOCUMENT BUSY. TEXT FILE CANNOT BE REBUILT. If the system encounters any kind of corruption in the chains, it reports such a corruption and attempts to recover the maximum text which is affected by that corruption. Corruptions usually occur in a text file and in the document header record which is linked to documents. The system responds to such corruptions as described below: a. Document Header Record Corruption: If the document header record doesn't point to SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg014 a proper first and last page of the document, or if these pointers have values outside the range of the text file into which they point, the system displays the following message: POINTERS IN DOCUMENT RECORD FOR CORRUPTED. WILL FIX. The system attempts to correct these pointers. If it is not able to salvage even one page of the document then it proceeds to delete the document and displays the following message: DELETING b. Page Record Corruption: If any of the page records of a document/ paragraph do not point to a proper first line of that page then the following message appears on the screen: PAGE RECORD NOT PROPER FOR PAGE <#> The system attempts to restore the proper value of the pointer. If it is unable to restore the pointers then it deletes all the lines for that page. The following message appears: ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> DELETED. If it gets all the lines then the following message appears: RESTORED ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> If it gets only the partial page then the following message is displayed: RESTORED <#> LINES FOR PAGE <#> c. Page Link Corruption: If the system encounters a corruption in page record chains then it displays the following message: PAGE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING PAGE POINTERS... If it is able to restore the complete chain then the following message is displayed: PAGE LINE REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete chain then it displays the following message: PAGE REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST AFTER PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text preceeding the lost page: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg015 **PAGE POINTER ERRORS. NEXT <#> PAGES LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION. d. Line Link Corruption: If the system encounters any corruption in the line link chain, it displays the following message: LINE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING POINTERS... If it is able to restore the complete line link chain, it issues the following message: LINE LINK REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete line link chain then the following message appears: LINE LINK REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST ON PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text where the failure occurred: **LINE POINTER ERRORS. SOME TEXT ON THIS PAGE LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION STEP 10: On the completion of rebuild for each text file, the system renames the temporary text file. STEP 11: If you keyed in 'Y' for STEP 4 the following prompt appears: DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE ERROR REPORT (Y/N)? If you answered 'N', the system displays the Text File Rebuild Menu. NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT A TEXT FILE REBUILD BE RUN ONCE A WEEK TO ENSURE POINTER INTEGRITY. (continued on next page) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg016 A. PRINTER CONFIGURATION INFORMATION 4215 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/VX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 __________________________________________________________________________ |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer (*2) | | Printer type | PT-4215 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) | . | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 5000 (*3) | | Write timeout | 5000 (*3) | |__________________________________________________________________________| . |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | yes (*2) | | Device type | Slave printer | | Slave printer type | PT-4215 | | Basic Four interface | no | | Read/status timeout | 5000 (*3) | | Write timeout | 5000 (*3) | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Prt length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 (*1) | | Printer throttle | none | | Main port throttle | Unidirectional Xon/Xoff | . |__________________________________________________________________________| . |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |__________________________________________________________________________| . SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF | . | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |__________________________________________________________________________| . | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | SLVS SLVD 15SF 15TF | | Slave type | F F - - | | Translation Table | sup sup sup sup | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Initial program | - PSPD71 - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - PSPD70 - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - PSPD72 - | |__________________________________________________________________________| . COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the printer set-up on the front panel of the printer. (*2) - Change/save the printer set-up, use the SETUP MODE on printer front panel Printer as F. Style (DC3-CDE) F. Interface (PROTOCOL) SLAVE DISABLE ETX/ACK NO SLAVE ENABLE XON/XOFF (*3) - Seconds are expressed in 1/10 of a second SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg017 4222 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/VX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 __________________________________________________________________________ |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer | . | Printer type | PT-4222 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 | . | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 550 (*2) | | Write timeout | 550 (*2) | |__________________________________________________________________________| . |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | no | | Device type | - | | Slave printer type | - | | Basic Four interface | - | | Read/status timeout | - | | Write timeout | - | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | - | | Prt length/parity/stop | - | | Printer throttle | - | | Main port throttle | - | |__________________________________________________________________________| . |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | not supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |__________________________________________________________________________| . SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF | . | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |__________________________________________________________________________| . | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - 3150|3510| | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - | | Initial program | - - - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - - - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - - | |__________________________________________________________________________| . COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the dip switch settings on the printer. (*2) - Time outs are expressed in 1/10 of a second. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg018 4223 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/VX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 __________________________________________________________________________ |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer | . | Printer type | PT-4223 (*1) | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*2) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*2) | | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | on | | Read/status timeout | 550 (*5) | | Write timeout | 550 (*5) | |__________________________________________________________________________| . |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | - | | Device type | - | | Slave printer type | - | | Basic Four interface | - | | Read/status timeout | - | | Write timeout | - | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | - | | Prt length/parity/stop | - | | Printer throttle | - | | Main port throttle | - | |__________________________________________________________________________| . |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | not supported | |__________________________________________________________________________| . SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF | . | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |__________________________________________________________________________| . | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - LSRS/LSR (*3) - | | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - sup - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | (*4) - | | Initial program | - - PSPD11 - | | Driver program | - - PSPD10 - | | Termination program | - - - | |__________________________________________________________________________| . COMMENTS (*1) - Rev. Level X6 (*2) - These parameters must match the printer set-up on the front panel of the printer. (*3) - LSRS selects first page from top bin; LSR selects all pages from bottom. (*4) - You must add feature code "L". (*5) - Seconds are expressed in 1/10 of a second. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg019 4224 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/VX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 __________________________________________________________________________ |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer | . | Printer type | PT-4224 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 | . | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 550 (*2) | | Write timeout | 550 (*2) | |__________________________________________________________________________| . |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | no | | Device type | - | | Slave printer type | - | | Basic Four interface | - | | Read/status timeout | - | | Write timeout | - | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | - | | Prt length/parity/stop | - | | Printer throttle | - | | Main port throttle | - | |__________________________________________________________________________| . |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | not supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |__________________________________________________________________________| . SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF | . | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |__________________________________________________________________________| . | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - 3150|3510| | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - | | Initial program | - - - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - - - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - - | |__________________________________________________________________________| . COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the dip switch settings on the printer. (*2) - Time outs are expressed in 1/10 of a second. 10.3. WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND WORKAROUNDS 1. Document Archive - the program displays 'tar' command information on the screen during the Archive/De-Archive tape process. Only 1/4" tapes supported. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg020 2. BUSINESS MAIL option removed from the MAIN MENU. 3. On installation of MAI OFFICE, the MOM module, Business Mail, must be installed. This is needed to support sending messages and telephone slips local only. 4. To use Business GRAPH through MAI OFFICE. The .profile for the 'office' user must include: /usr/graphics. E.g., PATH=.:/usr/graphics:$PATH 5. Slave printing is supported for the PT-4215 on these terminals: DT-4314, DT-4314I, DT-4314II. 6. Origin 2.1B is now used with BUSINESS DATA. 7. If using a printer for both WORD and GRAPH, configure the device as a plotter. Change read status timeout and write timeout to 550. 8. When configuring the HPPlotter device (plotter) on the system, change the read status timeout and the write timeout to 1000, and 'yes' to spooling. 9. Using the F9 key from the MAI OFFICE main menu issues a message "NEED OPERATOR STATUS TO SET OPERATING SYSTEM DATE AND TIME (CR)". Only root can change the date and time. 10. Printers 4224 and 4215 configured as plotters will not print Workaround is to edit the /etc/printers file. Example: WRONG: p6:/usr/mbf/etc/_qtemps:/dev/tty004:2:PT-4215:n:y:550:550:y:0 RIGHT: p6:/usr/mbf/etc/_qtemps:/dev/tty004:2:4215:n:y:550:550:y:0 11. If using terminal DT-4314 for MAI Graph, configure the device on the system as a graphic terminal. ORIGINATOR: Moniereh Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB016 Pg021 FIB 00017 02/22/90 *** Problems with Presentation Services 3.3A [ WPSF 594 ] *** PROBLEM: 'bmerge' will not work after installing PS 3.3A. The message 'malformed libraries' will appear. SOLOUTION: Upgrade to 7.5B. PROBLEM: Erroneous error 0's and 26's while executing the Forms Builder on an SPx system with 7.4B O/S. SOLUTION: The BASIC patch has not been installed. On SPx series systems with 7.4B O/S, an additional saveset must be restored from the PS 3.3A software tape. Please refer to the specific SPx/7.4B installation instructions for details. PROBLEM: Error 18's trying to run FBMAIN on the MPx. SOLUTION: PS 3.3A has not been completely installed. After the tape is restored, the program ".PS.INSTALL" must be run to copy the PS runtime files into the system node. If an O/S upgrade has occurred after a PS installation has already been done, the PS runtime files have been wiped out. The .PS.INSTALL program must be run again. ORIGINATOR: Jackie Shea SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB017 Pg001 FIB 00018 03/05/90 *** MAI OFFICE GPx Helpful Hints & Workarounds [ WPSF 593 ] *** HELPFUL HINTS AND WORKAROUNDS 1. Document Archive - the program displays 'tar' command information on the screen during the Archive/De-Archive tape process. Only 1/4" tapes supported. 2. BUSINESS MAIL option removed from the MAIN MENU. 3. On installation of MAI OFFICE, the MOM module, Business Mail, must be installed. This is needed to support sending messages and telephone slips local only. 4. To use Business GRAPH through MAI OFFICE. The .profile for the 'office' user must include: /usr/graphics. E.g., PATH=.:/usr/graphics:$PATH 5. Slave printing is supported for the PT-4215 on these terminals: DT-4314, DT-4314I, DT-4314II. 6. Origin 2.1B is now used with BUSINESS DATA. 7. If using a printer for both WORD and GRAPH, configure the device as a plotter. Change read status timeout and write timeout to 550. 8. When configuring the HP Plotter device (plotter) on the system, change the read status timeout and the write timeout to 1000, and 'yes' to spooling. 9. Using the F9 key from the MAI OFFICE main menu issues a message "NEED OPERATOR STATUS TO SET OPERATING SYSTEM DATE AND TIME (CR)". Only root can change the date and time. 10. Printers 4224 and 4215 configured as plotters will not print Workaround is to edit the /etc/printers file. Example: WRONG: p6:/usr/mbf/etc/_qtemps:/dev/tty004:2:PT-4215:n:y:550:550:y:0 RIGHT: p6:/usr/mbf/etc/_qtemps:/dev/tty004:2:4215:n:y:550:550:y:0 11. If using terminal DT-4314 for MAI Graph, configure the device on the system as a graphic terminal. ORIGINATOR: Moniereh Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB018 Pg001 FIB 00019 11/30/90 *** Conversions to OFFICE 3.2B [ WPSF 621 & A1 & A2 ] *** ............................................................................... OFFICE 3.2B Conversion DATAWORD II to MAI OFFICE 3.2B TYPE: Informational There are two methods that can be used to convert DataWord II to MAI OFFICE 3.2B: Conversion Method 1 - Serial file (all attributes lost) Conversion Method 2 - Conversion program (attributes saved) ********************************************************************** o CONVERSION METHOD 1 - SERIAL FILES The conversion can be done by exporting DataWord documents to serial files (use FORMATTED type export) on 13xx and then using intersystem transport to move them to the SPx or MPx. The intersystem transport would convert the files. After installing MAI OFFICE 3.2B on the SPx or MPx, use the merge procedure to create documents from the serial files. Do have WORD WRAP = Y. NOTE: When exporting DW documents to serial files, all attributing will be lost. o CONVERSION METHOD 2 - CONVERSION PROGRAM The DataWord must be at level 3.0/3.1 so if it is not, convert DataWord to level 3.0/3.1 before beginning this conversion. Next move the files from the 13xx to the MPx: Using InterSystem Transport - $$FILE - Binary &+FILE - Binary ON MPx: Install MAI OFFICE 3.2B following the instructions which come with the tape or in Software Announcement #163. Run the DW2BW conversion program following the instructions in Software Announcement #163. If the user is going to use OFFICE on the MPx, the conversion is complete. Run a text file rebuild before using WORD. If the user will be using OFFICE on an SPx, continue: After running a text file rebuild on all text files, use intersystem transport to move the WPDL00, WPDM00 and WPTF0& files to the SPx. IMPORTANT: WPDL00 - Text format WPDM00 - Binary format WPTF0& - Binary format After the files are restored to the SPx, run BQR Converter on the filelist. Make a tape backup of the same files before proceeding. This is necesary because these files will be over-written during the new installation of MAI OFFICE 3.2B. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB019 Pg001 ON SPx: Install MAI OFFICE 3.2B, using the Software Announcement or tape installation instructions. Restore the backup of WPD00, WPDM00, and all WPTF)& data files into the /oms directory. Use the program WPDU70 to do the bit conversion using Software Announcement #163, Section 5, instructions. Because you are only transferring the files above, answer 'Y' to 13xx prompt to bypass all files not being transferred from prior system (section 5.1). Run a text file rebuild on all text files before using WORD. ............................................................................... OMS 2.1 (13XX) TO MAI OFFICE 3.2B (MPX) Elaine Titus 7-23-90 621 Addendum-1 TYPE: Informational There are two methods for converting OMS 2.1 on 13xx to MAI OFFICE 3.2B on MPx or AS Systems. 1) OMS 2.1 (13xx) - Send documents to serial files, losing all attributes. Using Intersystem Transport, make tape backup of serial files and restore onto MPx/AS System. MAI OFFICE 3.2B (MPx/AS) - Install MAI OFFICE 3.2B using Software Announcement #163. Use Merge to convert the serial files into WORD documents. 2) OMS 2.1 (13xx) - Use *EXMT to make a backup of WPTF0&, WPDL00 and WPDM00. OMS 8.2.3 (MPx) - Use EXTTAPE to restore the WPTF0&, WPDL00 and WPDM00 onto the MPx or AS system. MAI OFFICE 3.2B - OMS 8.2.3 can now be converted to MAI OFFICE 3.2B following the instructions in Software Announcement #163. After OMS2BW is run, restore the following files from the MAI OFFICE 3.2B Tape: MS0P00 WPID00 WPPS01 The reason you must restore these files from the MAI OFFICE 3.2B tape a second time is to prevent future problems occurring with files converted twice. Even though you do not run the program twice, the files were already in 3.2 format before the program was run so when the program is run on them, that equals two times. Run a text file rebuild on all text files before using WORD. The installation instructions which come with the tape can be used instead of Software Announcement #163 mentioned above. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB019 Pg002 ............................................................................... MAI OFFICE 3.2B CONVERSION OMS 2.1 (13XX) TO MAI OFFICE 3.2B (SPx) Elaine Titus 7-23-90 621 Addendum-2 TYPE: Informational There are two methods for converting OMS 2.1 on 13xx to MAI OFFICE 3.2B on SPx systems: 1) OMS 2.1 (13xx) - Send documents to serial files, losing all attributes. Using Intersystem Transport, make tape backup of serial files and restore onto 2000/2500/3000/4000 systems. MAI OFFICE 3.2B 2000/3000/4000 - Install MAI OFFICE 3.2B using Software Announcement #163. Use Merge to convert the serial files into WORD documents. 2) OMS 2.1 (13xx) - Use *EXMT to make a backup of WPDL00, WPDM00 and WPTF0&. OMS 8.2.3 (MPx) - Use EXTTAPE to restore the WPDL00, WPDM00 and WPTF0&. MAI OFFICE 3.2B - OMS 8.2.3 can now be converted to MAI OFFICE 3.2B following the instructions in Software Announcement #163. Run a text file rebuild on all text files before proceeding. Use Intersystem Transport to make a tape backup of WPDL00, WPDM00 and WPTF0&. WPDL00 - Text format WPDM00 - Binary format WPTF0& - Binary format After the files are restored to the SPx, run BQR converter on the filelist. Make a tape backup of the same files before proceeding. This is necessary because these files will be overwritten during the new installation of MAI OFFICE 3.2B. MAI OFFICE 3.2B 2000/2500/3000/4000 or GPx40 series: Install MAI OFFICE 3.2B following the instructions for a new installation. Restore the backup of WPDL00, WPDM00 and WPTF0& data files into the the /oms directory. Use the program WPDU70 to do the bit conversion using Software Announcement #163, section 5 instructions. Because you are only transferring the files above, answer 'Y' to 13xx prompt to bypass ALL FILES NOT BEING TRANSFERRED. (SECTION 5.1). Before running the WPDU70 bit-flip program on the GPx or SPx, make the following change. DO NOT RUN THIS PROGRAM UNLESS THIS CHANGE HAS BEEN MADE! PROGRAM: WPDU70 (SPx and GPx only) CHANGE: 3105 WTEX$=TREC$,PTR1=POS($FF$=TREC$); 3105:IF PTR1>1 THEN PTR1=2 TO: 3105 WTEX$=TREC$;IF TREC$(1,6)=$FFFFFFFFFFFF$ SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB019 Pg003 THEN PTR1=1 ELSE PTR1=POS($FF$=TREC$(28)) This change will be included in the next release of MAI OFFICE 3.2B (*33 or above) for the SPx and the GPx systems. The MPx version already has this correction. Run a text file rebuild on all text files before using WORD. The installation instructions which come with the tape can be used instead of Software Announcement #163 mentioned above. ORIGINATOR: Elaine Titus SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB019 Pg004 FIB 00020 08/27/90 *** OFFICE 3.2B*37 Software Announcement for MPx & ASx Sys [ WPSS 174 ] *** INTRODUCTION MAI Basic Four, Inc. is pleased to announce the availability of MAI OFFICE 3.2B*33. MAI OFFICE 3.2B*33 supports five new printers. The new printers are included in the following list. o PT-4225/4226 - 80/132 column/dot matrix o PT-4227/4228 - 80/132 column/dot matrix o PT-4229 - Page Printer MAI OFFICE is a complete integrated Office Automation package for the MPx and Advanced Series computers. MAI OFFICE is composed of the following modules: o MAI Business WORDTM - Word Processor o MAI Business MATHTM - Spreadsheet o MAI Business GRAPHTM - Graphics o MAI Business EXECTM - Desktop Functions o MAI Business MAILTM - Electronic Mail o MAI Business DATATM - Data Management o Presentation ServicesTM/Printer System NOTE: ORIGIN 2.1B is recommended for Letter Generation capability on MAI OFFICE 3.2B*33. ************************************************************ * Please read the installation instructions (section 2) * * before attempting to install MAI OFFICE or any of its * * modules. * * * * MAI OFFICE will only work on operating systems * * 8.6/9.6/10.6C and above for the MPx and Advanced Series. * * * * MAI GRAPH 3.2B*33 will only work on Operating System * * 8.6/9.6/10.6H for MPx and Advanced Series. * ************************************************************ ************************************************************ * MAI OFFICE 3.2B*33 requires certain peripheral hardware * * revision levels. Please see Section 1. * ************************************************************ Copyright 1990 by MAI Basic Four, Inc. All rights reserved. T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S 1.0 PRODUCT DEFINITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 INSTALLATION AND DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS. . . . . 1 2.0 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 NEW INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg001 2.2 UPGRADE INSTALLATION - MAI OFFICE 3.2A TO 3.2B . . . . 4 2.3 UPGRADE INSTALLATION - OMS AND MAI OFFICE 3.1A . . . . 4 3.0 CONVERSION TO MAI OFFICE 3.2B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.1 CONVERSION FROM PREVIOUS LEVELS OF OFFICE/OMS. . . . . . 8 3.2 CONVERSION OF DATAWORD TO BUSINESS WORD. . . . . . . . . 9 4.0 BIT CONVERSION PROGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 4.1 OMS 2.1 CONVERSION FROM 13XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 5.0 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . 14 5.1 SET ONE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 5.2 SET TWO OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 6.0 MAI BUSINESS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 6.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA. . 17 6.2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 6.2.1 MAI OFFICE 3.2B WITH MAI ORIGIN 2.1B . . . . . . . . . 18 7.0 MAI BUSINESS GRAPH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 7.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS GRAPH . 19 7.2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 7.3 PT-4229 AND GRAPH DRIVERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 7.4 DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 7.5 CURSOR CONTROL IN GRAPHMAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 7.6 HELPFUL HINTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 8.0 MAI BUSINESS MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 8.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MAIL. . 24 9.0 MAI BUSINESS MATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 9.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MATH . . 25 10.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 11.0 CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 11.1 MENU SYSTEM FOR MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B. . . . . . . . . . . 27 11.2 TEXT FILE REBUILD CHANGES FOR 3.2B . . . . . . . . . . 29 11.2.1 TEXT FILE REBUILD INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 12.0 INTERNATIONAL TRANSLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 12.1 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 12.2 MESSAGE EDITOR GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 12.3 MAI OFFICE MESSAGE IMPLANTER GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . 37 12.3.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 12.3.2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 12.3.3 IMPLANTING SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 12.4 TRANSLATION OF BUSINESS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 12.5 TRANSLATION OF MAI BUSINESS GRAPH. . . . . . . . . . . 41 12.5.1 TRANSLATION OF PROMPTS AND ERROR MESSAGES. . . . . . . 41 12.5.2 TRANSLATING HELP MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 12.6 TRANSLATION TABLE MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 13.0 PRINTER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 F I G U R E S Figure 2-1 Tape Options-New Installation. . . . . . . . . 3 Figure 2-2 Tape Options - Step #1 Upgrade . . . . . . . . 5 Figure 2-3 Tape Options - Step #2 Upgrade . . . . . . . . 6 Figure 2-4 Tape Options - Step #3 Upgrade . . . . . . . . 6 Figure 3-1 DataWord Conversion Screen . . . . . . . . . . 10 Figure 7-1 Supported Devices With Their Types . . . . . . 21 Figure 7-2 Sample '.GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS' file . . . . . . . 21 MAI OFFICE 3.2B*33 ON MPx 1.0 PRODUCT DEFINITION MAI OFFICE consists of the following modules: MAI Business WORD SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg002 MAI Business MATH MAI Business GRAPH MAI Business MAIL MAI Business DATA Presentation Services/Printer System 1.1 INSTALLATION AND DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS Installation requirements: - Public Keys for: MOW, MOE, GRF, MOC, MOM - Presentation Services - Current OS release (8.6/9.6/10/6H*36) and OFFICE release (3.2B*33) for supporting PT-4225/PT-4226, PT-4227/PT-4228, and PT-4229 printers. Disk space requirements: Module (Size (in MB) --------------------------------- ----------- Business WORD 13.7 Business GRAPH 0.6 Business MATH 1.1 Business EXEC 3.7 Business DATA 8.5 Business MAIL 0.5 Presentation Services/Menu System 2.2 ----------- 30.3 =========== 1.2 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS For MAI OFFICE 3.2B, certain minimum hardware revision levels are required: Terminals DT-4309 Rev. E DT-4310 Rev. D DT-4312 Rev. K DT-4313 Rev. E DT-4314 Rev. C or above NOTE: DT-4314 needs Rev. L for PT-4225/PT-4226, PT-4227 and PT-4228. Printers PT-4223 Firmware Rev X6 or above PT-4225 Firmware Rev 4.02 or above PT-4226 Firmware Rev 4.02 or above PT-4227 Firmware Rev 1.21/Res. 1.11 or above PT-4228 Firmware Rev 1.21/Res. 1.11 or above PT-4229 Firmware Rev 16 or above 2.0 INSTALLATION Please read the installation instructions carefully before attempting installation. MAI OFFICE tapes will be distributed containing all modules of MAI OFFICE. All MAI OFFICE modules require a public key (except the printer system and SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg003 Presentation Services). The public key is a number in hexadecimal notation which uniquely applies to that particular module of MAI OFFICE and that particular system. WITHOUT THE PROPER KEYS, MAI OFFICE WILL NOT RUN. The tape containing MAI OFFICE will be accompanied by a release memo listing a 'Public Key' for each MAI OFFICE module purchased by the user: MOC, MOD, MOW, MOE, MOM, MOP, MOS and MOG (MOG and GRF are equivalent). The modules MOP and MOS do not require a public key. After installation of files and keys, please see instructions for each module elsewhere in this announcement for module specific installation instructions. The installation instructions are broken into three divisions: A) New Installation B) Upgrade 3.2A to 3.2B C) Upgrade MAI OFFICE 3.1A and OMS Please see the appropriate section for installation instructions. 2.1 NEW INSTALLATION . The MAI OFFICE tape contains all the data and program files necessary to begin using MAI OFFICE as soon as they are restored to disk via the SAVERESTORE utility. Most files will reside in the .OMS. node. Once all files are restored to disk, set the prefix to: (family).OMS. If DSS has also been installed, see Section 6. STEP 1: The initial installation consists of restoring all files to the disk using SAVERESTORE. Mount the tape and enter the utility by entering SAVERESTORE, at the "!" prompt. Choose the proper tape drive and when the menu appears, choose option 2-"RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE". The options screen will appear. Use the options in figure 2-1 to answer the prompts. _____________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 2-1 Tape Options-New Installation | | |. | FILE TYPE (D/P/CR=ALL) : | | COMPARE (CR=Y/N) : | | DATE (MM/DD/YY) : | | TIME (HH:MM) : | | OUTPUT DEVICE (CR=VDT) : | | DELETE EXISTING FILES (CR=Y) : | | VERIFY (Y/CR=N) : | | |. | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N) : | | |. |_____________________________________________________________________| The next prompt displayed will be for the file specifier. Enter '.,(familyname).' where 'familyname' is the name of the family on which MAI OFFICE will reside. The files will begin restoring. Once the files have been restored, proceed to step 2. STEP 2: To install the keys, the procedure 'INSTALLMO' must be executed. At the command language prompt '!', enter 'INSTALLMO' as follows: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg004 !INSTALLMO This procedure will copy all the security files to the default family disk. It will not delete existing security files if they already exist on the system disk. Now the keys can be installed using the INSTALLKEY procedure. This procedure and the security files will be under .ETC.LEVEL. node on the system disk. To install a key, type: INSTALLKEY xxx The module name is typed in place of the xxx. Enter the key and you will be asked to verify the key. A key must be installed for every module ordered. NOTE: Refer to Section 7 for GRAPH Module Installation Instructions. STEP 3: The Presentation Services module must be installed. To install, execute the program .PS.INSTALL (i.e. !BASIC .PS.INSTALL). This program copies files from the user disk to the system family and system node. NOTE: During Operating System upgrades, this step will need to be repeated. . If the user has O.S. levels 8.6A, B or C, they must copy the correct version of OMSREAD, OMSREAD86, to the system disk and replace the existing one. Example: (SYSDISK).R6B54.SYS.OMSREAD This will not be necessary on 8.6E. STEP 4: Installation is complete. To use MAI OFFICE, the user prefix must be set to "(familyname).OMS.". To access the Menu Builder, the prefix must also include "(system default family).PS,.PS.TOOLS.". The first time the user runs "MS" they will automatically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. Refer to section 6 for further instructions. There are a few steps that must be taken to set up the word processing libraries and the operator ID's. For full details, please refer to Business WORD User Guide, manual number (MBF #M7550A). Also refer to MENU System Services Reference Guide (MBF #M0063) for logon and security information. 2.2 UPGRADE INSTALLATION 3.2A TO 3.2B When upgrading MAI OFFICE 3.2A to MAI OFFICE 3.2B, only the programs should be restored from the new release tape. No conversion is necessary. To use the newly released dictionary with the added plurals, restore: WPWF00 and WPWF01. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg005 2.3 UPGRADE INSTALLATION - OMS AND MAI OFFICE 3.1A ***************************************************************** * PLEASE MAKE BACKUPS OF ALL CURRENT OMS OR OFFICE DATA FILES ! * * IF THE CONVERSION IS INTERRUPTED, BACKUPS WILL BE NEEDED TO * * RECOVER THE SYSTEM !!!!! * ***************************************************************** ***************************************************************** * MAKE SURE ALL DOCUMENTS IN WORD PROCESSING ARE FREE OF * * PROBLEMS. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TEXT FILE REBUILD BE USED * * TO REBUILD ALL TEXT FILES BEFORE CONVERSION !!!! * ***************************************************************** Verify what level of OMS or OFFICE the user is currently on before starting the upgrade and conversion. Please use the following steps to upgrade a current installation: STEP 1: Make a current backup of the entire MAI OFFICE (or OMS) on tape or disk, including (familyname).ETC.LEVEL. files. STEP 2: First the new program files must be restored. Mount the tape and enter the utility by entering SAVERESTORE, at the "!" prompt. Choose the proper tape drive and when the menu appears, choose option 2-"RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE". The options screen will appear. Use the options in figure 2-2 to answer the prompts. ____________________________________________________________________ . | |. | Figure 2-2 Tape Options | | |. | FILE TYPE (D/P/CR=ALL) :

<== PLEASE NOTE "P" | | COMPARE (CR=Y/N) : | | DATE (MM/DD/YY) : | | TIME (HH:MM) : | | OUTPUT DEVICE (CR=VDT) : | | DELETE EXISTING FILES (CR=Y) : | | VERIFY (Y/CR=N) : | | |. | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N) : | |____________________________________________________________________|. The next prompt displayed will be for the file specifier. Enter ".,(familyname)." where "familyname" is the name of the family on which MAI OFFICE will reside. The files will begin restoring. Once the files have been restored, proceed to step 3. STEP 3: All the new data files must be restored. Rewind the tape using option 7-"REWIND TAPE". When the menu appears, choose option 2-"RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE". The options screen will appear. Use the options in figure 2-3 to answer the prompts. . If the user has O.S. levels 8.6A, B or C, they must copy the correct version of OMSREAD86, to the system disk and replace the existing one. Example: (SYSDISK).R6B54.SYS.OMSREAD This will not be necessary on 8.6E. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg006 _____________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 2-3 Tape Options | | |. | FILE TYPE (D/P/CR=ALL) : <== PLEASE NOTE "D" | | COMPARE (CR=Y/N) : | | DATE (MM/DD/YY) : | | TIME (HH:MM) : | | OUTPUT DEVICE (CR=VDT) : (or system printer) | | DELETE EXISTING FILES (CR=Y) : <== PLEASE NOTE "N" | | VERIFY (Y/CR=N) : | | |. | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N) : | | |. |_____________________________________________________________________| The next prompt to be displayed will be for the file specifier. Enter ".,(familyname)." where "familyname" is the family on which MAI OFFICE will reside. The files will begin restoring. Once the files have been restored, proceed to step 4. STEP 4: Next, certain data files must be restored from the tape that also existed from the previous release. These are data files that have changed from the last release. Rewind the tape using option 7-"REWIND TAPE". When the menu appears, choose option 2-"RESTORE FILES FROM TAPE". The options screen will appear. Use the options in figure 2-4 to answer the prompts. ______________________________________________________________________ . | |. | Figure 2-4 Tape Options | | |. | FILE TYPE (D/P/CR=ALL) : <== PLEASE NOTE "D" | | COMPARE (CR=Y/N) : | | DATE (MM/DD/YY) : | | TIME (HH:MM) : | | OUTPUT DEVICE (CR=VDT) : | | DELETE EXISTING FILES (CR=Y) : <== PLEASE NOTE "Y" | | VERIFY (Y/CR=N) : | | |. | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N) : | | |. |______________________________________________________________________|. The next prompt displayed will be for the file specifier. Enter the following: >.OMS.INSTALLMO,(familyname).OMS.INSTALLMO >.OMS.MSFI0&,(familyname).OMS.MSFI0& >.OMS.WPDM02,(familyname).OMS.WPDM02 >.OMS.WPPU00,(familyname).OMS.WPPU00 >.OMS.WPHF&,(familyname).OMS.WPHF& The data files will be restored. STEP 5: To install the keys, the procedure 'INSTALLMO' must be executed. Set the prefix as follows at the command prompt '!': !PREFIX (familyname).OMS. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg007 At the command language prompt '!', enter 'INSTALLMO' as follows: !INSTALLMO. This procedure will copy all the security files to the default family disk. It will not delete existing security files if they already exist on the system disk. The 'INSTALLMO' procedure also copies the .OMS.PS. files to .PS. Now the keys can be installed using the 'INSTALLKEY' procedure. The 'INSTALLKEY' program and the security files will be under .ETC.LEVEL. node on the default family disk. To install the key, type: !INSTALLKEY xxx The module name replaces the xxx. Enter the key and you will be asked to verify the key. A key must be installed for every module ordered. NOTE: Refer to Section 7 for GRAPH module installation instructions. STEP 6: The Presentation Services module must be installed. Execute the program .PS.INSTALL (i.e. !BASIC .PS.INSTALL). This program copies files from the user disk to the default family system node. NOTE: During Operating System upgrades, this step will need to be repeated. STEP 7: If MAI Business WORD has been installed and the customer was using an earlier version of either OMS WP or MAI Business WORD, a conversion must be done. Please see Section 3 for the conversion instructions. STEP 8: Installation is complete. To use MAI OFFICE, the user prefix must be set to "(familyname).OMS.". To access the Menu Builder, the prefix must include "(system default family).PS.,.PS.TOOLS." . STEP 9: Before using MAI Business WORD, a Text File Rebuild must be run on all text files. The first time the user runs "MS" they will automatically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. For further instructions refer to Section 5. Please refer to Business WORD User Guide, manual number (MBF #7550). Also refer to MENU System Services Reference Guide (MBF #7554) for logon and security information. 3.0 CONVERSION TO MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B There are two conversions possible. The first conversion is from DataWord and the second conversion is from MAI OFFICE 3.1A or OMS levels 8.3.1 and level 8.2.3. The following sections describe the conversion procedures. The first section describes the MAI OFFICE/OMS conversion (Section 3.1). The second section describes the conversion from DataWord to MAI Business WORD 3.2A/B (Section 3.2). 3.1 CONVERSION FROM PREVIOUS LEVELS OF OFFICE/OMS SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg008 In order to use MAI Business WORD, previous data files need to be converted to MAI OFFICE 3.2A Business WORD. NOTE: For OMS 8.2.3 ONLY, the conversion program, EFSY20, must be run because it creates a new format for EXECUTIVE Functions files: EFOD00 EFSO00 EFTS00 EFTD00 NOTE: The OMS2BW conversion will be performed on all text files that follow the OFFICE naming scheme, (i.e. WPTF0x, where x= alpha numeric code 1,A-Z,a-z.) so be careful the directory path will not include any new files that may have been created with MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B. ******************************************************************. * *. * PLEASE MAKE BACKUPS OF ALL CURRENT OMS OR OFFICE DATA FILES! * * IF THE CONVERSION IS INTERRUPTED, BACKUPS WILL BE NEEDED TO * * RECOVER THE SYSTEM!!!!! * * *. * IF AN ERROR OCCURS DURING THIS PROGRAM, IT CANNOT BE RESTARTED * * BUT MUST BE RUN FROM THE BEGINNING WITH THE FILES FROM THE * * ORIGINAL LEVEL. * ******************************************************************. NOTE: All files should be converted before use. If not, MAI Business WORD will fail to operate properly. Enter BASIC by typing BASIC at the '!' prompt At the '>' prompt, enter: 'RUN "OMS2BW"' The title line will be displayed and the following prompt will appear: CONVERT OPERATOR ID PARAMETERS MASTER FILE (MSOP00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' to convert, 'N' to not convert or 'END' to stop all conversion. The next prompt will be displayed: CONVERT DOCUMENT HEADER FILE (WPDM00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' to convert. The next prompt will be displayed: CONVERT WP ID PARAMETER FILE (WPID00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' to convert. The next prompt will be displayed: CONVERT MENU SYSTEM STATUS FILE (MSFI00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'N' NOTE: THIS FILE SHOULD NOT BE CONVERTED! The next prompt will be displayed: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg009 CONVERT TEXT FILES (WPPS01 & WPTF0x)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' to convert. The next prompt will be: SPECIFY CURRENT OMS VERSION (1 -- 8.2.3, 2 -- 8.3.1 or 3.1A, END) If the prior release was OMS 8.2.3 or 8.2.1, enter a '1'. If the prior release was OMS 8.3.1 MAI OFFICE 3.1A, then enter a '2'. The conversion of text files will begin. The name of each text file will be displayed as it is converted. After conversion, you must execute Text File Rebuild in MAI Business WORD to verify and insure integrity of the converted documents. Conversion to MAI Business WORD is now complete. Please see the appropriate section to continue your installation. 3.2 CONVERSION OF DATAWORD 3.0/3.1 TO BUSINESS WORD 3.2A/B This conversion will transfer text stored in DataWord II format to the new MAI OFFICE 3.2A Business WORD product. *********************************************************** * * * ALL DATAWORD DOCUMENTS MUST BE FREE OF ANY PROBLEMS FOR * * CONVERSION. IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT DOCUMENT * * REPAIR BE USED ON ALL LIBRARIES PRIOR TO CONVERSION!! * * * *********************************************************** NOTE: In addition to OFFICE programs, DataWord programs must be installed: !WPS.CL !WPS.LN !WPS.OD !WPS.RP These are on the OFFICE release tape, if you are converting a system without DataWord installed. To run this conversion the user must have DataWord level 3.0/3.1. If the DataWord software is on any level before 3.0, then a conversion to 3.0/3.1 must be done prior to running this conversion from DataWord to Business WORD. To initiate the conversion program the user types the command RUN "DW2BW" from BASIC mode. The screen in figure 4-1 will be displayed to the user who will then supply the necessary information. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg010 _____________________________________________________________________________ | |. | Figure 3-1 Conversion Screen | | |. | MAI BASIC FOUR, INC. | | (TIME) CONVERT DATAWORD FILES TO BUSINESS WORD (DATE) | | |. | |. | SOURCE NODE: | | |. | Business WORD LIBRARY NODE: | | |. | DOCUMENT FILE NAMES (S=SELECTIVE): | | |. | TEXT FILE CODE: | | |. | PRINT LOG NOW OR LATER (N/L): | | |. | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N)?: | | |. | CTL-I=CR=Default/CTL-II=back up one prompt/CTL-III=All defaults/CTL-IV=Exit | |_____________________________________________________________________________| SOURCE NODE - node name under which the DataWord document files reside. The default is ().DWDOC. Business WORD LIBRARY NODE - name of the node under which the user wants to convert Business WORD files. The default is ().OMS. DW DOCUMENT FILE NAMES (S=SELECTIVE) - Enter either one of the control keys - or - S (SELECTIVE) - will cause a separate query to be displayed after the user has responded to all of the prompts on this screen. This query asks for each individual DataWord document file names that the user wishes to convert. The default is all DataWord document files under the SOURCE NODE. TEXT FILE CODE - Business WORD library character (e.g. by entering 'n' all the documents converted will be kept in the library WPTF0n). Possible replies are characters A-Z/a-z with no default. NOTE: If a library already exists for the given TEXT FILE CODE, an error message will be shown and the user will be asked to enter another code. The user has an option to print the log file during the conversion or after the conversion is complete. PRINT LOG NOW OR LATER. 'N' means to print the status of the converted document on the printer as that document is converted. 'L' will cause the program to create a serial file with the name. 'CONVTn' (where 'n' is the TEXT FILE CODE) and the status of each converted document will be written into this file so the user can get the printout later. The default to this prompt is N (NOW). SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg011 After the user answers the replies to the queries and if the user wants to convert only selected DataWord files ('S' was entered for DW DOCUMENT FILE NAMES), the screen will be cleared and the user will be asked to enter the names of the DataWord files to convert with the following prompt: ENTER DataWord FILE NAMES. RETURN FOR END The user will key in the DataWord file names. If an entered DataWord file does not exist, the user will be informed with a message and that entry will not be accepted. If an entered DataWord file has already been entered a message will be displayed and the duplicate entry will not be accepted. Once the user has entered all document files to be converted they will be given an option to add or delete file names from the list entered. After the user confirms the list is correct the question will appear: DO YOU WANT TO DELETE DATAWORD DOCUMENT FILE(S) AFTER THEY ARE SUCCESSFULLY CONVERTED? (Y/N) 'Y' will erase each DataWord document file from the disk once it has been successfully converted to Business WORD. 'N' all DataWord document files will remain on the disk through the conversion until the user removes them on their own. After responding to this question the conversion begins. HELPFUL HINTS: o DataWord documents are allowed twenty-character names while Business WORD allows only six-character document names so the converted documents will be named FLxxxx, where xxxx is a sequential number. The DataWord document name is converted to the document description field in Business WORD so that the user has a mapping of DataWord document name to the FLxxxx document name within Business WORD. The description field in the DataWord document will not be converted. o Conversion of DataWord documents to MAI Business WORD documents will keep the document format intact so the overall appearance of the Business WORD document converted from DataWord will be the same as the DataWord product. In addition, all attributes (bold, underline, superscript and subscript) will be converted from DataWord to Business WORD although the attributes will have a different visual appearance in Business WORD. o During the conversion, the header and footer text in the DataWord documents will be converted as text, becoming part of the body of the document in Business WORD. This text will appear within brackets ("[]") to distinguish it from other text. Headers will be placed before the text of the paragraph it was associated with in DataWord and footers will be placed after the text of a paragraph it was associated with. This header/footer will appear only on the one page where the header/footer began and not on every page as it would have been printed by DataWord. After the conversion has completed, the user will need to manipulate the header/footer text in Business WORD by either deleting it or placing it in a header or footer with the Business WORD functions. This may be done by SELECTing the appropriate header/footer text and using the option SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg012 to create a header or a footer. o Footnotes will be converted as part of the text of the document and will be placed at the end of the footer. o The Summary and Table of Contents information entered in a DataWord document will not be converted since Business WORD does not support these functions. o The default tab settings in the document format (those a user will see using COMMAND + FORMAT in the DataWord editor) of the DataWord document will be converted as tab settings in the Business WORD document. The other tab settings associated with individual paragraphs in the DataWord document will not be converted. o If the right margin of a DataWord paragraph is beyond 132, the text will be reformatted with a right margin of 132. No text will be lost but tabular information may need to be rearranged once converted to Business WORD. o During the conversion of DataWord II document files, the conversion program will calculate the space required to move the DataWord text from the entire document file to the Business WORD library file. If the entire document file contents cannot be converted to the Business WORD library due to lack of available space in the file, the program will log this fact in the log file, abort the conversion of this document file and continue the conversion process with the next document file. o The text file library will be defined with 200000 records, 10000 initial records and 1000 growth. It is estimated that this is enough to convert around 170 normal documents that are five pages in length and sixty lines per page. If the user has more than 170 documents to convert in their DataWord document files, they should plan to convert these document files in groups that do not exceed . the 170 document limit. o Status messages which may appear on the conversion log report with an explanation of each: SUCCESSFUL The document has been converted DOC OPN ERR There was an error in opening a document while testing for availability of file space for this particular DataWord document file. The conversion of this DataWord document file is not undertaken and conversion of the next document file begins. NO SPACE There is not enough file space for this DataWord document file to be converted. Conversion of this document file is not done. In this case, the 'DWDOC' column on the log report will contain the DataWord document file name rather than a document name. Both cases of DOC OPN ERR and NO SPACE must be handled by the operator performing the conversion. In the case of NO SPACE another MAI OFFICE library must be used to convert the remaining DataWord document files. 4.0 WPDU70 - BIT CONVERSION PROGRAM WPDU70 is a 'bit coversion' program. The program may be run only once, it SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg013 cannot be aborted (using ESCAPE) and there is no user input required. If WPDU70 is interrupted before completion, the affected files MUST BE RESTORED FROM BACKUPS before restarting. WPDU70 creates a log file (BITLOG) which lists each file that has been converted. Text files that are not on-line will not be converted. Files are opened and converted using fully qualified file names based on the location of the file WPDM00. Files in other nodes or directories will not be converted. FILES THAT WILL BE CONVERTED: WPDM00, WPDM04, WPPS00, WPPS01, WPTF0A-WPTF0Z, WPTF01, WPTF0a-WPTF0z PROCEDURE: 1. Complete all other upgrade or conversion procedures. EXAMPLES: Conversion from WP 3.1 to 3.2 if needed. Put new WP program files on the new system. 2. Use Intersystem Transfer or BQR to move all WP datafiles to the new system. BE SURE TO SPECIFY THAT THE ABOVE FILES BE TRANSPORTED AS BINARY. ALL OTHER WP DATA FILES ARE TRANSPORTED AS TEXT. 3. Backup all of the WP data files. 4. Run the CONVERT option of BQR or Intersystem Transfer on the WP data files that were transported as TEXT. EXAMPLE: WPDL00 5. Run WPDU70 to convert the WP data files transported as BINARY. NOTE: WPDU70 functions on WP data files only and only those data files that contain binary information. Menu, Operator and Executive Function files are not included. 4.1 OMS 2.1 CONVERSION FROM 13xx . Since the conversion of 13xx OMS 2.1 to MPx MAI OFFICE 3.2B will only include WPDL00, WPDM00 and the WPTF0& files, the program will bypass. files not found with a prompt asking if this is a 13xx conversion. 5.0 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE The international ID parameter maintenance program (MSMM40) will automatically be run the first time a user runs "MS" after an international or domestic installation. After the user runs "MS", the prompt: "INTERNATIONAL PARAMETERS ARE NOT SET UP (CR)" will appear. This program allows the MAI OFFICE product to be modified in certain areas to conform to a customer's special needs. There are two distinct sets of parameters that a customer may change: SET ONE: Amount Format Insert Code Characters Overprint Character Hyphenation Character Telephone Format Sign Symbol SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg014 Spaces ending a sentence SET TWO: Date Format Date Separator Time Format Time Separator Currency Code Position of Currency Code SET ONE contains options which are global for MAI OFFICE. For example, if the telephone format is set to international, then all MAI OFFICE users will have their telephone numbers unformatted (see below for more detail). CAUTION: Once this set of parameters has been modified the system will not allow them to be changed without causing some problems for all MAI OFFICE users. SET TWO contains options which are user independent. As an example, two different users on the same MAI OFFICE system may use different date and/or time formats. A complete description of each option and use is given below. 5.1 SET ONE OPTIONS Amount Format options - 1. #,###,##0.00 2. #.###.##0,00 3. #B###B##0,00 B=blank These format masks will allow a user to present numeric data in the form that is acceptable for his or her country. Option '1' is most commonly used in the United States while options '2' and '3' are used in Europe. Insert Code Characters options: "<>", "[]", " \" The braces ("[]") currently used in MAI OFFICE to indicate insert codes are not available in all ISO character sets so the user has the ability to select characters that are in the character set they would like to use. Overprint Character options: any character Like the insert code, the backslash ("\") used as an overprint character in MAI OFFICE is not available in all character sets. This option lets the user specify a different character as the overprint character. NOTE: Overprint character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Hyphenation Character options: any character Same as the Overprint Character. NOTE: This is the character used to separate the word by syllables for hyphenation in the document, IT IS NOT the character used during the printing process to hyphenate a word (usually a '-'). Also SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg015 the hyphenation character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Telephone Format options: D=Domestic, I=International D=Domestic option - formats all telephone numbers in a (AAA)PPP-NNNN format where: AAA=area code (option field) + PPP=prefix + NNNN=number I=International option - no special formatting or input validation will be done. This field will allow up to 15 characters in any form. Sign Symbol options: 1. "CR/DR" 2. "+/-" 3. "()" In the United States the CR or DR is used to denote positive or negative amounts. In Europe it is more common to use a "+" or "-". This option allows the user to select either. Spaces ending a sentence options: 1 or 2 In the United States, two spaces follow the sentence punctuation. In most other countries, one space follows the sentence punctuation. This option allows the user to select either. 5.2 SET TWO OPTIONS Date Format options: 1. MMDDYY 2. DDMMYY 3. YYMMDD In addition to the (MMDDYY) format, two other formats are available to the user. Date Separator options: any character The user may have the date displayed in a format other than MM/DD/YY such as MM.DD.YY or MM-DD-YY. Time Format options: D=Domestic, I=International D=Domestic - twelve-hour clock or I=International - twenty-four hour clock. Time Separator options: ".", ":", "N"=Null With this option the user may see the hours and minutes separated with different options. Currency Code options: any four alpha characters The user may select the characters that will be used as the currency. symbol. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg016 Position of Currency Code options: L=LEFT, R=RIGHT United States dollars are displayed with the currency symbol to the left of the actual amount (i.e. $1.98). This is not always true in other countries where the currency symbol may appear on the left or the right of the actual amount. With this option the user may select either. 6.0 MAI BUSINESS DATA 6.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA The Business DATA files will reside after the Business WORD files and will be restored with rest of the tape. Please see Business DATA User Guide (MBF #7557). ******************************************************** * * * BUSINESS DATA 3.2B RECOMMANDS DSS LEVEL 2.1B * * * ******************************************************** The MAI OFFICE 3.2B system must be set up properly for the use of MAI Business DATA. Since there are two versions of MAI Business DATA now being used and both versions differ from each other, MAI OFFICE must be set up to correctly recognize and use MAI Business DATA. The following steps must be followed to run Business DATA from OFFICE. 6.2 INSTALLATION The MPx OFFICE release has no standard command files for setting up the proper prefix and running OFFICE. There are two common ways in which OFFICE is accessed. The first is to create a user system logon that sets the proper prefix and runs MS. The other method is to create a command file or program that sets the prefix then runs MS. The following two sections shows what must be added to the OFFICE prefix for accessing ORIGIN 2.1B. 6.2.1 MAI OFFICE 3.2B WITH MAI ORIGIN 2.1B To access ORIGIN 2.1B from OFFICE 3.2B, the following must be added to the prefix: (familyname).ORIGIN.R21B. This should be inserted after the .OMS. node and before the .PS. and .PS.TOOLS. nodes. EX. (familyname).OMS.,(familyname).ORIGIN.R21B., (familyname).PS.,.PS.TOOLS. The ORIGIN family name only needs to be included if it is not the same as the OFFICE family. It is best to have all .PS. files located on the default system family. STEP 1: Change .OMS.LGQM File The .OMS.LGQM file is not needed for ORIGIN 2.1B so it needs to be deleted or moved. If the user intends to use ORIGIN 2.0A with OFFICE in the future, SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg017 then the .OMS.LGQM file needs to be copied to the .ORIGIN.R20A.PGM. node before being deleted. STEP 2: Change 'Executive Query Manager' Jobstep Select 'Presentation Services' from SS.MAIN menu. Create/modify set, at prompt specify 'DP'. Create/modify menu, at prompt specify 'MAIN'. Move cursor to Executive Query Manager option. Move cursor to Jobstep option. Change Jobstep from LGQM to RT.EQM . EXIT and save changes. STEP 3: Change 'ORIGIN Data Management System' Jobstep Select 'Presentation Services' from SS.MAIN menu. Create/modify set, at prompt specify 'DP'. Create/modify menu, at prompt specify 'MAIN'. Move cursor to ORIGIN Data Management System option. Move cursor to Jobsteps option. Change ORIGIN,256 to OFFICE2ORIGIN,256 EXIT and save changes. For more detailed instructions on menu modification steps, see 'MENU and System Services Reference Manual and Presentation Services User Guide', M0063. STEP 4: Change ORIGIN User Maintenance In the User Maintenance section of ORIGIN, user accounts need to be setup to run ORIGIN2OFFICE when logging off, so they will be returned to the OFFICE menu system. 7.0 MAI BUSINESS GRAPH MAI Business GRAPH is a product that allows you to produce quality graphics on a graphics-equipped terminal and/or graphics-supported printers. The module consists of two programs: GRAPHMAKER and GRAPH. GRAPHMAKER is an interactive window-driven graphics editor. It allows the user to create, maintain and display your own graphs. GRAPH allows you the convenience of displaying your graphs once they have been designed and gives you advanced graphics capability using an editor. The following devices are the only supported plotting devices on the MPx and Advanced Series: o PT-4201 150/300 LPM printer o PT-4214 Dual Mode Printer o PT-4215 Dot Matrix Printer o PT-4224 Dual Mode Printer o PT-4229 Page Printer o DT-4310 EDT with Graphics Interface Board o DT-4314 Dual Port Terminal SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg018 o HP 7475A 6-Pen Color Plotter 7.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS GRAPH When installing GRAPH on the system, install all data and program files. With an update installation, the original user specific files will not be overwritten during the file restore since both the PLOTTERS and key file end with a .T . 7.2 INSTALLATION The graphics module consists of the files: .GRAF.GRAPH .GRAF.GRAPHMAKER .GRAF.PGM.& .GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS.T .GRAF.ETC.GKS.FONT& .GRAF.ETC.GKS.DEVICES .GRAF.ETC.GRF.PROMPTS .GRAPHICS.& .ETC.LEVEL.GRF.T STEP 1: For a new installation, rename: .GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS.T file to .GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS and .ETC.LEVEL.GRF.T file to .ETC.LEVEL.GRF STEP 2: Copy files: .GRAF.GRAPH and .GRAF.GRAPHMAKER to the system prefix: .Rxxxx.SYS. Where xxxx is the current release level. STEP 3: Add your graphic output devices to the plotters file using the EDIT command: !EDIT ().GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS The following is the format for this file: User defined name:device:type:parameter::::: Comments SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg019 __________________________________________________________________ . | Figure 7-1 Supported Devices With Their Types | | |. | TYPE DEVICE |. | 4310 edt terminal | | hpplot HP plotter | | PT-4214 dmp printer | | PT-4215 Dot Matrix Printer | | 4314 DT-4314 low resolution terminal | | 4229H8 high resolution PT-4229 HP LaserJet 8-bit | | 4229M8 medium resolution PT-4229 HP LaserJet 8-bit | | 4229L8 low resolution PT-4229 HP LaserJet 8-bit | | 4229H7 high resolution PT-4229 HP LaserJet 7-bit | | 4229M7 medium resolution PT-4229 HP LaserJet 7-bit | | 4229L7 low resolution PT-4229 HP LaserJet 7-bit | |__________________________________________________________________|. ___________________________________________________________________________ | Figure 7-2 Sample '.GRAF.ETC.PLOTTERS' file | | |. | DEFAULT:T21:edt:::::: | | PRINT:LP:PT-4214:SUBMIT PRINTER=LP, CLASS=G, DELETE=TRUE ::::: | | LP:LP:PT-4214:SUBMIT PRINTER=LP, CLASS=G, DELETE=TRUE ::::: | | 4215:P1:PT-4215:SUBMIT PRINTER=P1, CLASS=G, RAWMODE=Y, DELETE=TRUE ::::: | | T5:T5:edt:::::: | | T6:T6:4310:::::: | | 4314:T1:4314:::::: | | PLOT:T16:HPPLOT:::::: | |___________________________________________________________________________| NOTE: You must have a space before the fourth colon, ":", if you are passing a parameter. STEP 4: Create CLASS "G" using all defaults with RAWMODE = Y or insert RAWMODE=Y in the plotters file for drawing Graph to any supported printers. 7.3 PT-4229 AND GRAPH DRIVERS The BUSINESS GRAPH module now supports the PT-4229 printer as a graphic device. To access the PT-4229 as a graphic device the user needs to modify the plotters file with the correct device driver. There are six (6) new drivers. They are: 4229H8, 4229M8, 4229L8, 4229H7, 4229M7 and 4229L7. These drives determine the resolution the graph will be drawn in. The 4229L8 and 4229L7 will draw a graph in 75 dots per inch resolution in 8 or 7 bit respectively. The 4229M8 and 4229M7 will draw a graph in 150 dots per inch resolution in 8 or 7 bit respectively. The following example is what an entry in the plotters file will look like when using these new drivers: LLASER:P1:4229L8:SUBMIT PRINTER=P1, CLASS=G, DELETE=TRUE :::::: low resolution By using the editor the user can modify this entry to meet their requirements. To print in 8-bit mode from BUSINESS WORD user will need to create a 7-bit translation table for WORD documents. Attach this translation SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg020 table to the printer through the BUSINESS WORD Printer Maintenance. Each time a document is printed it will pass through the translation table. NOTE: Using the translation table will decrease performance during print time. To print in 8-bit mode from the In-Tray does not require a translation table. The following chart details printer memory requirements when using PT-4229 device drivers. MEMORY _____________________________________________ R | .64 MB | 1.64 MB | 2.64 MB | 4.64 MB | E |-----------|-----------|----------|----------| S | 7-bit | | | | O 75 dpi | & | | | | L | 8-bit | | | | U |-----------|-----------|----------|----------| T | | 7-bit | | | I 150 dpi | | & | | | O | | 8-bit | | | N |-----------|-----------|----------|----------| | | | 7-bit | | 300 dpi | | | & | | | | | 8-bit | | |___________|___________|__________|__________| The following chart illustrates timings when using BUSINESS GRAPH device drivers with the PT-4229. The timings may vary depending on system load at time of graph. _____________________________________________________ | 4229 | 19200 BAUD | 9600 BAUD | |---------|---------------------|---------------------| | | GRAPH | SPOOLER | GRAPH | SPOOLER | | 7-bit | | | | | | 75dpi | 32" | 2' | 31" | 3'25" | |---------|--------|------------|----------|----------| | 7-bit | | | | | | 150dpi | 1'16" | 5'49" | 1'17" | 11'06" | |---------|--------|------------|----------|----------| | 7-bit | | | | | | 300dpi | 3'38" | 20'13" | 3'38" | 39'32" | |---------|--------|------------|----------|----------| | 8-bit | | | | | | 75dpi | 13" | 48" | 19" | 1'28" | |---------|--------|------------|----------|----------| | 8-bit | | | | | | 150dpi | 34" | 2'43" | 34" | 4'55" | |---------|--------|------------|----------|----------| | 8-bit | | | | | | 300dpi | 1'39" | 10'28" | 1'39" | 18'47" | |_________|________|____________|__________|__________| 7.4 DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS o PT-4201 (150/300 LPM Printer) The PT-4201 is configured as it normally would be for standard data processing. Its graph output requires 132 column paper. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg021 o PT-4214 (DMP) Configure the PT-4214 as it would be for standard data processing except that address 20 and 50 must be set to '.1' (20.1 and 50.1). The graphs will fit onto 8 1/2 x 11 inch paper. o PT-4224 (DMP) Configured same as 4214. o PT-4215 Configure the PT-4215 as an LQP (Diablo). o PT-4229 Configured as LQP and required firmware 16 or above. o DT-4310 - EDT with graphics interface board No special requirements. o DT-4314 REV. C or above firmware o HP 7475A 6-Pen Color Plotter The HP Plotter must be configured on the ISDC as a TERMINAL, SPE/VDT, 7-BIT, ODD PARITY, 1 STOP BIT, 9600 BAUD, LINE LENGTH 80, X-ON/X-OFF and BANNER NO. The plotter uses a standard VDT cable (907116). The dip switches on the plotter should be set as follows: S2 - ON, S1 - ON, Y - OFF, US - ON, A3 - OFF, B4 - ON, B3 - OFF, B2 - ON, B1 - OFF 7.5 CURSOR CONTROL IN GRAPHMAKER The cursor control keys can be viewed by pressing the HELP key on your EDT or by pressing CTL - Z. The following are the cursor control keys for GRAPHMAKER: CTL - L Next cell to the right. CTL - H Backspace and next cell to the left. CTL - K Kick UP one cell. CTL - J Jump down one cell. CTL - W Return to the Menu Window. CTL - D Delete character. CTL - F Forward 1 character. CTL - Z Help screen. Backspace Non-destructive Backspace. 7.6 HELPFUL HINTS o The titles across the top of your data screen in GRAPHMAKER should be looked upon as sets of like data. The titles going down the left column of the data screen should be view upon as parts of a set. o Data for individual pie graphs should be entered in one column. o Data for individual line graphs should be entered in one row. o The following will clear a 4310-EDT graphics screen from BASIC: PRINT 'BO',$1B5A471B0C1B5A67$,'EO' o Pressing the ESC key and then DEL key on the EDT will clear a SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg022 graphics screen. o To clear a 4314 graphics screen from the Keyboard use Function + CLEAR (located under the number 4 key). o To clear a 4314 graphics screen from BASIC use: PRINT 'ES","Zr", 8.0 MAI BUSINESS MAIL Business MAIL is the part of MAI OFFICE that allows electronic mail to be sent between two or more local or remote systems. Business MAIL, through the use of X.25 and public networks, or LAN's allows MAI to exchange messages using the mail feature of MAI Business EXEC. Sending mail to remote locations requires connection to a public or LAN network and the purchase of the proper communications software and hardware. 8.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MAIL To configure Business MAIL on the MPx systems, with OS level of 8/9.6, see the BOSS/VS MAGNET User Reference Guide (M6363). STEP 1: The following ID must be set up within MAI OFFICE. The information below assumes that you are familiar with MAI Business EXEC and menu system. If you are not, please refer to the procedures given in the Business EXEC Users Guide (MBF #M0044) and MAI OFFICE MENU System Services Reference (MBF #M0063). Create an ID called MAIL with these parameters: On the General ID Information screen: NOTE: This ID is supplied by MAI OFFICE 3.2B. _______________________________________________________________________ | |. | DESCRIPTION: ELECTRONIC MAIL SYSTEM ID INITIALS: MAIL | | PASSWORD: (defined by security manager) DEFAULT MENU SET: EP | | LOG: N MENU NAME: MAIN | | CONSOLE MODE? N PROGRAM: | |_______________________________________________________________________| Use the default parameters for the other fields on this screen. On the EXEC--Office Directory Parameters screen: PHONE NUMBER: EXTENSION: LOCATION: INTERACTIVE: I DEPARTMENT: ELECT. MAIL USAGE: Y ELECT. MAIL PRIORITY: N The fields which are left blank do not need to be defined but may be if you wish. They are not needed for the functioning of Business MAIL. The MAIL ID is a "bin" in which any in-tray messages are placed for which there is not SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg023 a local ID. STEP 2: You will have to set up MAI OFFICE ID's for all users who are going to be using MAI OFFICE. Follow the instructions found in the manuals for Business EXEC and Business MAIL. If you are upgrading your MAI OFFICE and already have ID's you will need to go into ID Create/Maintain for EXEC and give each user remote mail security (the last two fields shown above). Please note that you cannot do this if the public key has not been properly installed for MAIL. STEP 3: After you have installed all of MAI OFFICE, Business MAIL and the communications software you will need to request the directories for all remote sites in the network. You do this by selecting Remote Request--Office Dir. from the MP.MAIN menu in MAI OFFICE. Enter the name of each location and a request for their directory will be sent to . that site. When the directory is received you will be informed by an acknowledgement in your in-tray. 9.0 MAI BUSINESS MATH MAI Business MATH transforms your video display into a grid resembling an accountant's columnar pad. o An easy-to-use, yet flexible electronic spreadsheet. o For developing projections, budgets, pro formas, cash flows, or other tabular reports requiring mathematical calculations. o Will improve accuracy while saving significant time. 9.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MATH When converting to MAI Business MATH from Rows & Columns, move all spreadsheet files to the OMS node. 10.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B introduces many new features which were not part of MAI OFFICE 3.1A. New manuals are included in all new orders but must be ordered seperately for update orders. The following is a list of documentation for MAI OFFICE 3.2B. Manual_Number Title M0120 MAI Business WORD Reference Manuals and MAI Business DATA User Guide M7550 MAI Business WORD User Guide M7552 MAI Business MATH User Manual M0078 MAI Business GRAPH User and Reference Manuals M0044 MAI Business EXEC User and Reference Manuals and MAI Business MAIL Reference Manual M0063 Menu and System Services Reference Manual and Presentation Services User Guide M7511 Decision Support System User Reference Guide SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg024 M7566 MAI OFFICE Quick Reference Guide 11.0 CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS The following sections briefly describe improvements made with MAI OFFICE 3.2B. Also included with this new release are improved printer drivers. New dictionary files with additional plurals can be restored over existing WPWF00 and WPWF01 if needed. 11.1 MENU SYSTEM FOR MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B uses a new menu system with the aid of another system, called Presentation Services. Presentation Services provides menu functions. Also the function keys can be programmed through Presentation Services and are used in MAI OFFICE to directly access certain functions of MAI OFFICE from any menu in the system. For information regarding menu maintenance, see the Presentation Services Users Guide M7561. The main menu for MAI OFFICE is: |-----------MAIN MENU------------| | | | Business WORD | | | | Business MATH | | | | Business GRAPH | | | | Business EXEC | | | | Business MAIL | | | | Business DATA | | | | Menu and System Services | | | |________________________________| There are two basic ways to select an option from a menu. You can use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option or you can type in the designated selection characters. You can substitute the following key sequences in place of the arrow keys: CTRL+K for up arrow, CTRL+J or space bar for down arrow, CTRL+L for right arrow, and CTRL+N or BACKSPACE key for the left arrow. By using the up and down arrow keys, you can move the cursor to the option you want to select. The current option appears highlighted on your screen. Press RETURN to complete your selection. The selections wrap from top to bottom and vice-versa. You can also use selection characters to select options from the menu. As you look at the menu on your screen, notice that one or two characters from each option is highlighted. These are the selection characters and indicate what you need to type in order to move the cursor directly to the desired option. Then press RETURN to make your selection. There will always be at least one selection character. A second selection character is used only when the set of first selection characters is not unique. The function keys provide quick access to frequently used options. If you want to use one of the function keys, press the key that SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg025 matches the label at the bottom of the screen. Below is the function key usage within MAI OFFICE. The notation of F1 through F10 indicates function keys 1 through 10 with the description of that function key's use within MAI OFFICE. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP STATUS IN-TRAY MSGSLIP CALC CALENDR PHONE#S LOGOFF DATE CONSOLE F1 (HELP) will give a brief description of the menu system. F2 (STATUS) will show the user a list of users currently logged on to MAI OFFICE. This is the same function as entering "S" on the previous OMS menu system. F3 (IN-TRAY) will take the user directly to the In-Tray option without having to move through several menu levels. F4 (MSGSLIP) will take the user directly to the Out-Tray option to send a message. F5 (CALC) will take the user directly to the Calculator Function. F6 (CALENDR) will take the user directly to a personal calendar. F7 (PHONE#S) will take the user to a personal telephone directory. F8 (LOGOFF) will log the user off the MAI OFFICE system. This is the same as "L" in the previous OMS menu system. F9 (DATE) will allow the user to change the system date and time if allowed this privilege. This is the same as "D" in the previous OMS menu system. However, if the date is changed from the WP.MAIN MENU, it is only changed for wordprocessing and not on the rest of the system. F10 (CONSOLE) will take the user out of the MAI OFFICE system into console mode. This is the same as "C" in the previous OMS menu system. The user will be allowed CONSOLE only if they are configured or authorized for this privilege. 11.2 TEXT FILE REBUILD CHANGES FOR 3.2B The Text File Rebuild utility has been changed to use full path name when creating temporary file name and then renaming. The process was also changed so pointers were not rewritten into the original header file during the rebuild. Prior to 3.2B, since a temporary file existed for the text file and the header file was fixed within the original file, if the process was interrupted for any reason, the pointers would not match and when the process was restarted, all documents were deleted. With MAI OFFICE 3.2B, this will no longer happen since a temporary file is created for both the header file and the text file. If the process is interrupted, the user can safely restart the text file rebuild at the beginning. With MAI OFFICE 3.2B, text file rebuild tries recovering from loops within existing pointers for a single page. 11.2.1 TEXT FILE REBUILD INSTRUCTIONS SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg026 To execute a Text File Rebuild: 1. At the Business WORD Menu select Supervisory Utilities. The Text File Rebuild utility menu displays. 2. Select Text File Rebuild to contract, expand, or to rebuild the text file(s). 3. BEGIN REBUILD NOW OR START LATER?(N/L/CR): Options (choose one) a. Type 'N' and CR to begin rebuild immediately after all the parameters have been entered and validated. Go to STEP 4. b. Type 'L' and CR to start rebuild at a later date and time. Go to STEP 5. c. Type CR to return to Text File Rebuild Menu. 4. DO YOU WANT TO BUILD AN ERROR REPORT? (Y/N) Options (choose one) a. Type 'Y' and CR to build an error report. Write down the name of the error file the system displays here. Go to STEP 6. b. Type 'N' and CR if you don't want an error report. Go to STEP 6. 5. Enter the answers to the following prompts to have rebuild started at a later date and time: ENTER TIME TO REBUILD (HH:MM AM/PM) OR CR: ENTER DATE TO BEGIN REBUILD (MMDDYY) OR CR: The current date and time are displayed next to these prompts. To change date and time, overtype on the date and time displayed by the system. Once date and time have been validated, the screen displays the name of the error file which is created for logging the errors: PLEASE NOTE - ERROR FILE NAME IS RBxxxx (CR) . RB stands for rebuild and the characters following RB are the terminal ID. Write down the name of this file displayed for use when printing the error file report. After you CR the system creates the error file with the message being displayed: NOW CREATING FILE... 6. DOCUMENT OR PARAGRAPH FILE(S) (D/P/CR): Options (choose one) a. Type 'D' and CR to rebuild a document text file(s). Go to STEP 7. b. Type 'P' and CR to rebuild a paragraph text file. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg027 Go to STEP 8. 7. LIBRARY FILE CHARACTER Enter the library file character for the text file to rebuild and CR. When file characters for all the text file(s) to be rebuilt have been entered, CR to end the selection of text files. 8. The screen now displays the number of lines already used in the text file and the space available for each text file specified. If you wish to re-size the text file, enter the new number of lines for the text file: THERE ARE <#> LINES USED IN LEAVING <#> AVAILABLE ENTER NEW NUMBER OF LINES OR CR: Options (choose one) a. Enter the new number of lines you wish the new text file to have and CR. Go to STEP 9. b. Type CR to retain the same size for text file. Go to STEP 9. 9. The following message appears on the screen: NOW DEFINING TEMPORARY FILES The system looks at the records in the text files to see if there is enough room to create temporary files. NOTE: Do not leave your terminal until the temporary files have been defined. On the successful completion of allocation of temporary files the above message will disappear. If there is not enough space to define the temporary files the procedure stops. The user must delete any unused files on the disk at this point to make room for the completion of the program. The system now scans the header file first and then scans the text file(s) and documents within it. As it scans, the following messages appear on the screen: TEXT FILE NOW SCANNING: NOW REBUILDING: The system first makes sure that the text file it is about to rebuild is not being used. If it finds that a . library or document in the text file which it is about to rebuild is being used, then it will not rebuild that text file and will display the following message: DOCUMENT BUSY. TEXT FILE CANNOT BE REBUILT. If the system encounters any kind of corruption in the chains, it reports such a corruption and attempts to recover the maximum text which is affected by that corruption. Corruptions usually occur in a text file and in the document header record which is linked to SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg028 documents. The system responds to such corruptions as described below: a. Document Header Record Corruption: If the document header record doesn't point to a proper first and last page of the document, or if these pointers have values outside the range of the text file into which they point, the system displays the following message: POINTERS IN DOCUMENT RECORD FOR CORRUPTED. WILL FIX. The system attempts to correct these pointers. If it is not able to salvage even one page of the document, then it proceeds to delete the document and displays the following message: DELETING b. Page Record Corruption: If any of the page records of a document/paragraph do not point to a proper first line of that page, then the following message appears on the screen: PAGE RECORD NOT PROPER FOR PAGE <#> The system attempts to restore the proper value of the pointer. If it is unable to restore the pointers, then it deletes all the lines for that page. The following message appears: ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> DELETED. If it gets all the lines, then the following message appears: RESTORED ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> If it gets only the partial page, then the following message is displayed: RESTORED <#> LINES FOR PAGE <#> c. Page Link Corruption: If the system encounters a corruption in page record chains, then it displays the following message: PAGE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING PAGE POINTERS... If it is able to restore the complete chain then the following message is displayed: PAGE LINE REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete chain, then it displays the following message: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg029 PAGE REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST AFTER PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text preceding the last page: **PAGE POINTER ERRORS. NEXT <#> PAGES LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION. d. Line Link Corruption: If the system encounters any corruption in the line link chain, it displays the following message: LINE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING POINTERS... If it is able to restore the complete line link chain, it issues the following message: LINE LINK REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete line link chain, then the following message appears: LINE LINK REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST ON PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text where the failure occurred: **LINE POINTER ERRORS. SOME TEXT ON THIS PAGE LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION 10. On the completion of rebuild for each text file, the system renames the temporary text file. 11. If you keyed in 'Y' for STEP 4 the following prompt appears: DO YOU WANT TO BUILD AN ERROR REPORT (Y/N)? If you answered 'N', the system displays the Text File Rebuild Menu. NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT A TEXT FILE REBUILD BE RUN ONCE A WEEK TO ENSURE POINTER INTEGRITY. 12.0 INTERNATIONAL TRANSLATION Once you have received a tape containing your international version of MAI OFFICE 3.2B for the MPx, there are several steps that you should follow to prepare the product for customer usage. The product must be translated to your native language. MAI Business MATH cannot be translated. For translation of MAI ORIGIN see Section A.6 and for translation of MAI Business GRAPH see Section A.7. 12.1 INSTALLATION STEP 1: Use SAVERESTORE to move the MAI OFFICE system from the tape to one of your disks. The programs are saved on the tape in the node '.OMSBASE.' and user files are saved in the node '.OMS.'. STEP 2: Translate all of the messages used in MAI OFFICE via the SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg030 program OMS.IE which is in the '.OMSBASE.' node (see Section 12.2). STEP 3: Implant all programs following the instructions given in the Section 12.3. The destination node should be '.OMS.' as that you will end up with a complete MAI OFFICE system in the '.OMS.' node upon completion of implanting. STEP 4: Use SAVERESTORE to move the MAI OFFICE system from the disk to a tape. You should have to backup only the '.OMS.' node. When the customer receives the tape, they will find the whole product located in the '.OMS.' node on the tape. 12.2 MESSAGE EDITOR GUIDE The international editor edits the message files to create a particular language file. The messages are referenced by text, not by number. The English version is the key and is displayed along with the translated version when the LIST command is used. To access the message editor on the MPx series, the editor must be copied from ".OMSBASE.OMS.IE" to ".OMSBASE.IE" using the COPY utility. To execute the editor, type "IE" and the command prompt "I". An initial message along with the list of possible commands are displayed. The prompt "ENTER COMMAND:" will be displayed. Commands may be specified by entering enough of the command to distinguish it from other commands. Commands may be entered in either upper or lower case. The following sections describe the syntax and functional operation of each command. Parameters enclosed in brackets ([,]) are optional and commas or spaces may be used interchangeably to separate parameters or command. Command processing may be aborted using the escape key. Any errors result in termination of the command being processed. A. COMPARE COMMAND COMPARE (STARTING MESSAGE) This command compares a key with its record. If they are the . same (i.e., the record is in English, then key and the record will be displayed to both the terminal and the line printer). B. COPY COMMAND COPY LANGUAGE [,MESSAGE] This command is used to move messages from another language into the previously selected message file. Only those messages having the keys which do not exist in the previously selected file will be copied. This feature facilitates the bringing in of new messages from the "US" file so they can be added to an existing file. Only the new messages would then need translating. If the message option is selected, only the entered message will be copied from the other language file. C. DELETE COMMAND DELETE [MESSAGE] This command is used to delete messages from the selected message file. Only those messages which do not have a corresponding entry in the "$omsus" message will qualify to be. deleted. If a single message is specified, only that message (if qualified) will be deleted. If no message is specified, all messages (that qualify) will be deleted. The DELETE command, as well as COPY, facilitates updating a message file SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg031 to correspond to a new version of the "US" message file. D. EDIT COMMAND EDIT MESSAGE This command is used to modify the specified message. Upon entering EDIT mode, the translated version of the message will be displayed along with any comment. The maximum size is also displayed. The English version (the key) is not displayed. The comment field is not edited via EDIT. Modification of the message is aided by the use of control characters to position the cursor .within the message. The ESCAPE key can be used to exit the EDIT command without replacing the original contents of the message. The following control characters are supported within the edit command. Control N - Move cursor one to the left Control L - Move cursor one to the right Control F - Move cursor to the next word Control B - Move cursor to the previous word Control I - Insert a space at the cursor position Control D - Delete the character at the cursor CR/RETURN - Update the message on disk ESCAPE - Abort The EDIT command can also be entered by a carriage return at enter command. The message edited will then be the next sequential message. E. END COMMAND END This command is used to exit the editor. All changes are saved. F. FIND COMMAND FIND MESSAGE The FIND command will result in the listing of all programs that contain the message. This list will also include programs which have messages that contain the entered message as their beginning part. The messages are listed along with the programs. G. HELP COMMAND HELP [,COMMAND] This command is used to display information regarding commands and their arguments. The help command without arguments displays a list of all commands with their parameters syntax. The HELP command with a command parameter displays a brief functional description of that command. H. LIST COMMAND LIST [,STARTING MESSAGE] The STARTING MESSAGE could be the first part of the message. The messages will be displayed starting with STARTING MESSAGE or the beginning of the file (if no message is specified). The display may be stopped by entering the control key plus Q. The entire message file will be displayed unless the ESCAPE key is used to exit the listing routine. The display includes both the English version (the key) and translated version. Comments are also displayed. I. PRINT COMMAND PRINT [,STARTING MESSAGE] SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg032 This command prints the messages on the line printer, "LP". It is similar to LIST but the control keys can't be used to start and stop the listing. J. SELECT COMMAND This command is used to select the message file which the operator desires to edit. The first two characters of the specified language will be used to select the message file "%6$omsxx" where xx are the two characters. The selected message file remains selected until another SELECT command is entered. 12.3 MAI OFFICE MESSAGE IMPLANTER GUIDE 12.3.1 OVERVIEW The following steps are to guide you to implant your native language into MAI OFFICE 3.2B. The implanting process goes into BASIC application programs with English messages and physically replaces them with messages in the desired language. The implanter finds the translated message by reading the record in the language file, $omsxx (where xx represents the language code), whose key is the message in English. This procedure is similar to the Search and Replace utility on the MPx. Please refer to the MPx Users Guide for more detailed information. Once this procedure is completed, run "MS" to install the International system parameters. 12.3.2 INSTALLATION STEP 1: The implanter for 8.6 will be found with the 8.6 system software. The implanter programs IMI and PMI) reside under the .R6xxx.INTL.TOOL. node. Before these programs are run, you will need to copy both implanter programs (IMI and PMI) to the names '.OMSBASE.XXX' where XXX is either IMI or PMI and then execute IMI. STEP 2: Set prefix: (Family).OMSBASE. STEP 3: From command language, enter: !IMI The screen appears as in Figure 12-1. Prompts: LANGUAGE CODE: Enter a two character language code i.e., US for English, GE for German, SP for Spanish. Enter a language code corresponding to the language of the message file that you wish. If the length of the input does not equal two, the following message will appear at the bottom of the screen: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg033 FIGURE 12-1 IMPLANTER SCREEN -------------------------------------------- MAI OFFICE MESSAGE IMPLANTER PRIMARY PREFIX : (FAMILY).OMSBASE. LANGUAGE CODE : MESSAGE SPECIFIER : MESSAGE : DESTINATION NODE : PAUSE ON MATCH : YES VERIFY FILE : YES OUTPUT DEVICE : VDT ENTIRES CORRECT (Y/N): INPUT MUST BE TWO CHARACTERS, 'CR' TO CONTINUE If the message file corresponding to the language code cannot be found, the following message will appear at the bottom of the screen: (XXX).OMSBASE.%6$omsxx NOT FOUND, 'CR' TO CONTINUE NOTE: The message file created by each country should be named as follows: (FAMILY) .OMSBASE. %6$omsxx where 'xx' stands for the language represented. i.e., .OMSBASE. %6$omsus for English. MESSAGE SPECIFIER: The message specifier allows you to specify what programs should be implanted. When the cursor is at the MESSAGE SPECIFIER input, the following message will appear at the bottom of the screen: ENTER A MESSAGE, CTL-I, '$' + FILE, NODE, MASK OR '' + FILELIST If a message (or part of a message) is entered, then that message will appear next to the MESSAGE prompt. If a CTL-I is entered, then the next message in the language file will appear next to the MESSAGE prompt. This will specify that only programs that contain the message will be implanted. However, the above will not occur if the file ($sfoms) that contains the information of what programs a message appears in cannot be found. Instead, the following message is displayed at the bottom of the screen: UNABLE TO OPEN MESSAGE-PROGRAM FILE, (XXX).OMSBASE.%6$sfoms 'CR' TO CONTINUE When the file pointer is at the end of the language file, the following message appears at the bottom of the screen: AT END OF FILE 'CR' TO CONTINUE. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg034 If a pound sign (#) is entered followed by a file, node, or mask, then programs from that file, node, or masks will be implanted. An invalid entry will result in the following message appearing at the bottom of the screen: FILE DOES NOT EXIST, 'CR' TO CONTINUE or NODE DOES NOT EXIST, 'CR' TO CONTINUE or MASK ENTRIES DO NOT EXIST, 'CR' TO CONTINUE. If an "0" symbol is entered by a filelist, then programs in that filelist will be implanted. An invalid entry will result in one of the following error messages appearing at the bottom of the screen. FILE NOT FOUND, 'CR' TO CONTINUE or INVALID FILENAME, 'CR' TO CONTINUE or INVALID FILE TYPE. FILELIST FILE MUST BE A . SERIAL FILE, 'CR' TO CONTINUE or CODE FILE MAY NOT BE ACCESSED WITH THIS ACCESS INTENT, 'CR' TO CONTINUE. See examples below: i.e., #.OMSBASE. - this will convert all files under this node. #.OMSBASE.WP& - masks just for the Business WORD module. #.FILELIST - allows for a filelist to be used. DESTINATION NODE: This allows you to direct what node you would like your program files to be placed. It is recommended that programs be placed along with the data files in the .OMS. node. You will be able to retain the .OMSBASE. node for future conversions. i.e.: (FAMILY).OMS. - will place all files in the MAI OFFICE node. PAUSE ON MATCH: 'Y'=Pause on Match, 'N' = Do Not Pause on Match, 'CR'='YES'. This allows you to specify whether the program should stop and ask how to proceed when a message is found during implanting. VERIFY FILE: 'Y'=Verify file to search/replace, 'N'=no verification, 'CR'='YES'. This allows you to specify whether the program should stop at the beginning of each program to be implanted and ask how to proceed. OUTPUT DEVICE: Enter a device or filename, 'CR'='VDT'. This allows you to specify where the output of this program should go. Output will always go to the terminal screen. If a filename is entered, a serial file will be created and the output will also go to that file. ENTRIES CORRECT: This input prompts you to verify whether the information that has just been entered is correct. 12.3.3 IMPLANTING SCREEN Once it is selected how the implanter should be used, the program creates a new screen to do the implanting (see Figure 12-2). It displays the current source and destination files. If it has been specified that the program verify each file, the following input will appear at the bottom of the screen: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg035 CTL-I=USE FILE, CTL-II=VERIFY OFF, CT-III=SKIP FILE, CTL-IV=EXIT Once the program begins the implanting process, it will display the lines of the BASIC program where there are messages. The implanter goes through an English "base line" program and looks for all messages. When a message is found, the corresponding translation is retrieved from the language file. Both the English and the translation messages will appear highlighted. If it has been specified that the program pause on match, the following input will appear at the bottom of the screen when a message is found and before the translation is implanted: CTL-I=REPLACE, =ENTER, CTL-II=VERIFY=OFF, CTL-III=NO REPLACE, CTL-IV=EXIT Choose the option accordingly. FIGURE 12-2 IMPLANTING SCREEN ---------------------------------------------------------------------- MAI OFFICE MESSAGE IMPLANTER SEARCH PATTERN : ERROR <---- This is displayed when verify option is turned REPLACE PATTERN : ERROR on. These messages are highlighted throughout the code on the screen. CURRENT SOURCE FILE : (OMS).OMSBASE.%6+QKRP7 It is being translated into the chosen language. CURRENT DESTINATION FILE : (OMS).OMS.%6+QKRP7 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- CODE IS DISPLAYED HERE. CTL-I=REPLACE,=ENTER,CTL-II=VERIFY OFF,CTL-III=NO REPLACE,CTL-IV=EXIT ------------------------------------------------------------------------- MAI OFFICE 3.2B*33 ON MPx 12.4 TRANSLATION OF BUSINESS DATA See the MAI Business Data System Support Manual, M7510 for translation procedures. 12.5 TRANSLATION OF MAI BUSINESS GRAPH All of the prompts and error messages are kept in a single file. Table A-1 shows the names of the prompt and help file names. The following two sections describe how to translate the prompts and the help messages for the SPx and MPx. FIGURE 12-3 PROMPT, ERROR, AND HELP MESSAGE FILENAMES Prompt and error: .GRAF.ETC.GRF.PROMPTS Help : .GRAF.ETC.FGR.HELP 12.5.1 TRANSLATION OF PROMPTS AND ERROR MESSAGES Each prompt is identified by a number terminated by a colon (":"). The text for the prompt must follow the colon and SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg036 must be less then a certain number of characters. Prompts are put into groups, each group has an unique number and a maximum length. The first two digits of the prompt number represents the group number in which the prompt belongs to. The last one or two digits represent the prompt number. figure 12-4 shows the group numbers, the number of prompts, and The maximum length of the prompt for that group. To translate the prompts, the system editors (EDIT on MPx and ved on SPx) are used to edit the messages in the file. Each message is translated using the editor commands. Care must be taken to preserve the format of the prompt file and the maximum lengths must be observed. Some messages end in a colon (":"). This colon is part of the prompt and it also represents the maximum length of the prompts for that group. Once all the messages have been translated, save the changes and translation is complete. 12.5.2 TRANSLATING HELP MESSAGES There are three types of help messages; the first type lists the control keys used in moving the cursor and in editing entries. These are the three lines displayed in the top portion of the help screen. The second type of message describes the window you are currently in. The third type of messages gives some information about the current cell. FIGURE 12-4 PROMPT SIZE TABLE GROUP GROUP SIZE MAX LENGTH NAME 00 2 8 Grid types 01 4 8 Line styles 02 - - -- not used -- 03 2 8 On/Off flags 04 6 8 Vert. alignments 05 4 8 Horz. alignments 06 4 8 Text paths 07 12 20 chart types 08 3 8 Interior styles 09 8 15 Font styles 10 5 10 Prompts for styles window 11 10 10 Top prompts for Text_atr window 12 16 10 Left prompts for Text_atr window 13 60 16 Prompts for Plot_atr window 14 6 11 Prompts for Port_dim window 15 7 11 Prompts for Titles window 16 3 10 Prompts for Device window 17 19 15 Menu titles 18 19 10 Menu abbreviations 19 - - -- not used -- 20 1 15 Ask name 21 47 70 Error messages All lines of text for messages are numbered with a six digit number followed by one spacer character, such as a space character or a colon (":"), which separates the message number from the text. The text follows immediately SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg037 after the spacer character. To enter another line for the same help message, type the same message number followed by a spacer character (a space or colon), followed by the text. To have a blank line displayed, type in the message number followed by the spacer character. The messages must be in numberical order, with the lowest number at the beginning of the file. To translate the prompts, the system editors (EDIT on MPx and ved on SPx) are used to edit the messages in the file. The message is translated using the editor commands. Care must be taken to preserve the format of the help file. Once all the messages have been translated, save the changes and translation is completed. 12.6 TRANSLATION TABLE MAINTENANCE The 'pted' program delivered with the SPx should be used to modify the printer translation tables. On the MPx, the Translation Table Maintenance option allows a way of viewing and changing the printer translation tables. These tables are stored in the file WPTT00. Table names consist of two alphanumeric characters, a-z, A-Z, 0-9. Upon selection of this option from either the 'PS' or 'WP' menus the following options will be displayed: Table Description Maintenance: This selection allows the user to modify the description of the table. The length of the description may be up fifteen characters. Display a Table: This function displays the contents of a specified table. The table is arranged as a matrix with the character positions given in hexadecimal notation. The numbers running across the top are the high order bits and the numbers running down the left are the low order bits. The characters are displayed as ASCII characters. The modifier characters may also be displayed. Edit a Table: This function displays the contents of a specified file and then allows you to modify it. To change the character code at any position, move the cursor to that position and write over the current code. The control sequences used to move the cursor are shown in the following table. ------------------------------------------------------------- SEQUENCE ACTION ------------------------------------------------------------- CTRL + N Moves cursor down one line. or CR ------------------------------------------------------------- CTRL + P Moves cursor up one line. ----------- ------------------------------------------------ CTRL + F Moves cursor one character to the right. ----------- ------------------------------------------------ CTRL + H Moves cursor one character to the left. ----------- ------------------------------------------------ Characters can be entered in any of these four ways: 1. To enter a printable character, type the character in the desired position. Do not press RETURN. 2. To enter any character in hexadecimal notation, press SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg038 CTL-II and then type the two character hexadecimal code for the character. 3. To enter a vertical displacement code and a character, press CTL-III. Type the vertical displacement code, and then type this character code. When you have entered these codes, press RETURN to end the entry. 4. To enter a modifier code and a character, press CTL-IV, type the modifier code, and then the character code. When you have entered these codes, press RETURN to end the entry. Dump A Table: This function displays a specified table in hexadecimal notation. The modifier characters may also be displayed. Delete a Table: This function deletes a specified table. You are asked to verify that you want the table deleted before the program deletes it. Update Modifier Characters: This function allows you to edit the modifier characters in a particular table or is the default table. If you are editing the default table, you may only add modifier characters. If you are editing any other characters, only the first character may be changed. When you have changed a character, you are asked if you want the change saved. When you have answered, the program either saves or abandons the change and redisplays the menu. Print: This function prints the table to a printer in both hexadecimal and ASCII form along with the modifier table. To create a new table with this program, simply type in the two character name of the table. If this name is now currently the name of an existing table, the user will be prompted: IS THIS A NEW TABLE (Y/N)? By responding with "Y" a new table will be created and the user will be asked for a description of the table. To obtain a list of the currently defined tables, the user may enter "?" in response for "Table Name". 13.0 PRINTER CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg039 PT-4206 PRINTER INFORMATION CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP53 |----------------------------------------------------------------------| . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | SLAVE T-DEV PRINTER | | | | | Line device | Terminal Terminal - | | Line type | (*1) SPE/VDT - | | Line speed (baud rate) | 1200 (*1) 1200 (*2) - | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) 7/O/1 (*2) - | | (see extended options) | yes yes - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |EXTENDED CONFIGURATION | | | Slave printer | YES (*2) NO - | | Printer type | Basic Four None - | | Character delay | NO NO - | | Delay length | 0 0 - | | Supress echo | NO NO - | | Xon/Xoff | YES YES - | | Mux Device | NO NO - | | I/O Translate | NO NO - | | Print Messages | YES NO - | | Input Transparency | NO NO - | | Output Transparency | NO NO - | | Release Detach | NO NO - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |TERMINAL SETUP | | | Printer baud rate | 1200 (*2) - - | | Pntr Length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 (*2) - - | | Printer Throttle | none - - | . | Main port throttle | Uni Xon/Xoff - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | Spooler | - - - | | Sheet Feeder (SF) | supported supported - | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported supported - | . |____________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER____________________________________________________ | | SLAVE PRINTER T-DEVICE | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF | . | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | SLVS SLVD DIAS DIA | . | Slave type | D D - - | | Translation Table | sup sup sup sup | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - - | | Initial program | - PSPD71 - PSPD61 | | Driver program | - PSPD70 - PSPD60 | | Termination program | - PSPD72 - PSPD62 | |____________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - You must choose according to your terminal type and setup. (*2) - These parameters must match your printer setup. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg040 PT-4211 PRINTER INFORMATION CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP53 |----------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | SLAVE T-DEV PRINTER | | | | | Line device | Terminal Terminal - | | Line type | (*1) SPE/VDT - | | Line speed (baud rate) | 1200 (*1) 1200 (*3) - | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) 7/O/1 (*3) - | | (see extended options) | yes yes - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |EXTENDED CONFIGURATION | | | Slave printer | YES NO - | | Printer type | Basic Four None - | | Character delay | NO NO - | | Delay length | 0 0 - | | Supress echo | NO NO - | | Xon/Xoff | YES NO - | | Mux Device | NO NO - | | I/O Translate | NO NO - | | Print Messages | YES NO - | | Input Transparency | NO NO - | | Output transparency | NO NO - | | Release Detach | NO NO - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |TERMINAL SETUP | | | Printer baud rate | 1200 (*3) - - | | Pntr Length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 (*3) - - | | Printer Throttle | none - - | . | Main port throttle | Uni Xon/Xoff - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | Spooler | - - - | | Sheet Feeder (SF) | supported supported - | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported supported - | . |____________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER____________________________________________________ | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF | . | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | SLVS SLVD DIAS DIA | . | Slave type | I I - - | | Translation Table | sup sup sup sup | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - - | | Initial program | - PSPD71 - PSPD61 | | Driver program | - PSPD70 - PSPD60 | | Termination program | - PSPD72 - PSPD62 | |____________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - You must choose according to your terminal type and setup. (*2) - Set the printer interface switch to BFINTFC (down position). This switch is located on the back of the printer, close to the RS-232 connector. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg041 PT-4213 PRINTER INFORMATION CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 _ |----------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | SLAVE T-DEV PRINTER | | | | | Line device | Terminal - Printer | | Line type | (*1) - (*2) Basic Four | | Line speed (baud rate) | 2400 (*1) - 2400 | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) - 7/O/1 | | (see extended options) | yes - no | . |____________________________|_________________________________________| |EXTENDED CONFIGURATION | | | Slave printer | YES - - | . | Printer type | Basic Four - - | | Character delay | NO - - | | Delay length | 0 - - | | Supress echo | NO - - | | Xon/Xoff | YES - - | | Mux Device | NO - - | | I/O Translate | NO - - | | Print Messages | YES - - | | Input Transparency | NO - - | | Output transparency | NO - - | | Release Detach | NO - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |TERMINAL SETUP | | | Printer baud rate | 2400 - - | | Pntr Length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 - - | | Printer Throttle | BFIS (*2) - - | | Main port throttle | Uni Xon/Xoff - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | Spooler | - - supported | | Sheet Feeder (SF) | - - - | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported - supported | . |____________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER____________________________________________________ | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF | . | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - SLV - 3210|3220| | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - - | | Initial program | - PSPD81 - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - PSPD80 - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - You must choose according to your terminal type and setup. (*2) - Set the printer interface switch to B$INTFC (down position). This switch is located on the back of the printer, close to the RS-232 connector. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg042 PT-4214 PRINTER INFORMATION CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 |----------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | SLAVE T-DEV PRINTER | | | | | Line device | - - Printer | . | Line type | - - Serial DMP | | Line speed (baud rate) | - - 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | - - 7/O/1 (*1) | . | (see extended options) | - - NO | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |EXTENDED CONFIGURATION | | | Slave printer | NO - - | | Printer type | - - - | | Character delay | - - - | | Delay length | - - - | | Supress echo | - - - | | Xon/Xoff | - - - | | Mux Device | - - - | | I/O Translate | - - - | | Print Messages | - - - | . | Input Transparency | - - - | | Output transparency | - - - | | Release Detach | - - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |TERMINAL SETUP | | | Printer baud rate | - - - | | Pntr Length/parity/stop | - - - | | Printer Throttle | - - - | | Main port throttle | - - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | Spooler | - - supported | | Sheet Feeder (SF) | - - - | | Tractor feeder (TF) | - - supported | |____________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER____________________________________________________ | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF | . | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - - 3150|3510| | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - - | | Initial program | - - - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - - - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the dip switch settings on the printer. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg043 PT-4215 PRINTER INFORMATION CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 |----------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | SLAVE T-DEV PRINTER | | | | | Line device | Terminal Terminal Printer | . | Line type | (*1) SPE/VDT LQP | | Line speed (baud rate) | 9600 (*1) 9600 (*2) 9600 (*2) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) 7/O/1 (*2) 7/O/1 (*2) | . | (see extended options) | yes yes no | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |EXTENDED CONFIGURATION | | | Slave printer | YES (*5) NO - | | Printer type | Basic Four None - | | Character delay | NO NO - | | Delay length | 0 0 - | | Supress echo | NO NO - | | Xon/Xoff | YES YES - | | Mux Device | NO NO - | | I/O Translate | YES NO - | | Print Messages | YES NO - | | Input Transparency | NO NO - | | Output transparency | NO NO - | | Release Detach | NO NO - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |TERMINAL SETUP | | | Printer baud rate | 9600 (*2) - - | | Pntr Length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 (*2) - - | | Printer Throttle | none - - | . | Main port throttle | Uni Xon/Xoff - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | Spooler | - - supported | | Sheet Feeder (SF) | supported supported supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported supported supported | |____________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER________________________________________________________ | | S L A V E S Y S T E M | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | PRINTER T-DEVICE PRINTER | | | SF TF SF TF SF TF | |----------------------------|----------------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | (*4) | | Type | SLVS SLVD 15SF 15SF LSRS LSR |. | Slave type | F F - - - - | | Translation Table | sup sup sup sup sup sup | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | (*3) |. | Initial program | - PSPD71 PSPD61 PSPD61 PSPD61 PSPD61| | Driver program | - PSPD70 PSPD60 PSPD60 PSPD60 PSPD60| | Termination program | - PSPD72 PSPD62 PSPD62 PSPD62 PSPD62| |____________________________|______________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - You must choose according to your terminal type and setup. (*2) - These parameters must match your printer setup on the front panel. (*3) - Add feature code L if using LSR/LSRS in WORD. (*4) - The first page will be pulled from bin 2 and all other come from bin 1. (*5) - Change/save the printer setup, use the SETUP MODE on printer front panel. Printer as F. Style (DC3-CDE) F. Interface (PROTOCOL) SLAVE DISABLE ETX/ACK SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg044 NO SLAVE ENABLE XON/XOFF PT-4216 PRINTER INFORMATION CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 |----------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | SLAVE T-DEV PRINTER | | | | | Line device | Terminal Terminal Printer | . | Line type | (*1) SPE/VDT LQP (*2) | | Line speed (baud rate) | 1200 (*1) 1200 (*3) 1200 (*3) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) 7/O/1 (*3) 7/O/1 (*3) | . | (see extended options) | yes yes no | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |EXTENDED CONFIGURATION | | | Slave printer | YES NO - | | Printer type | Basic Four None - | | Character delay | NO NO - | | Delay length | 0 0 - | | Supress echo | NO NO - | | Xon/Xoff | YES NO - | | Mux Device | NO NO - | | I/O Translate | YES YES - | | Print Messages | YES NO - | | Input Transparency | NO NO - | | Output transparency | NO NO - | | Release Detach | NO NO - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |TERMINAL SETUP | | | Printer baud rate | 1200 (*3) - - | | Pntr Length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 (*3) - - | | Printer Throttle | none - - | . | Main port throttle | Uni Xon/Xoff - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | Spooler | - - supported | | Sheet Feeder (SF) (*5) | supported supported supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) (*5) | supported supported supported | |____________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER________________________________________________________ | | S L A V E S Y S T E M | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | PRINTER T-DEVICE PRINTER | | | SF TF SF TF SF TF | |----------------------------|----------------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | SLVS SLVD 16SF 16TF LSRS LSR | | Slave type | J J - - - - | | Translation Table | sup sup sup sup sup sup | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | (*4) | | Initial program | - PSPD71 PSPD61 PSPD61 PSPD61 PSPD61| | Driver program | - PSPD70 PSPD60 PSPD60 PSPD60 PSPD60| | Termination program | - PSPD72 PSPD62 PSPD62 PSPD62 PSPD62| |____________________________|______________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - You must choose according to your terminal type and setup. (*2) - Printer revision level X4. (*3) - These parameters must match the dip switch settings on the printer. (*4) - Add feature code L if using LSR/LSRS in WORD. (*5) - Printer dip switch setup, (located on the back of the printer). SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg045 SW01: SW41: 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 |on | x x x * * |on | x * x x x x x |off| * x * |off| x x * x SW01/4: ON sheet SW01/6: ON for Exec, SW41/4: ON no slave use OFF tractor OFF WORD OFF slave use PT-4223 PRINTER INFORMATION CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 |----------------------------------------------------------------------| . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | SLAVE T-DEV PRINTER | | | | | Line device | - - Printer | . | Line type | - - LQP (*1) | . | Line speed (baud rate) | - - 9600 (*2) | | Length/parity/stop bits | - - 7/O/1 (*2) | | (see extended options) | - - no | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |EXTENDED CONFIGURATION | | | Slave printer | - - - | | Printer type | - - - | | Character delay | - - - | | Delay length | - - - | | Supress echo | - - - | | Xon/Xoff | - - - | | Mux Device | - - - | | I/O Translate | - - - | | Print Messages | - - - | . | Input Transparency | - - - | | Output transparency | - - - | | Release Detach | - - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |TERMINAL SETUP | | | Printer baud rate | - - - | | Pntr Length/parity/stop | - - - | | Printer Throttle | - - - | | Main port throttle | - - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | Spooler | - - supported | | Sheet Feeder | - - supported | | Tractor feeder | - - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER_____________________________________________________ | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |----------------------------|-------------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - LSRS/LSR (*3) - | | Translation Table | - - sup - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Initial program | - - PSPD11 - | | Driver program | - - PSPD10 - | | Termination program | - - - - | |____________________________|___________________________________________| COMMENTS SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg046 (*1) - Firmware Rev. Level X6. (*2) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel . of the printer. (*3) - LSRS selects first page from top bin; LSR selects all pages from bottom. PT-4225/4226 PRINTER INFORMATION CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 |----------------------------------------------------------------------| . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | SLAVE T-DEV PRINTER | | | | | Line device | Terminal - Printer | | Line type | (*1) - UPD (*2) | | Line speed (baud rate) | 9600 (*3) - 9600 (*3) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*3) - 7/O/1 (*3) | | (see extended options) | Yes - No | . |____________________________|_________________________________________| |EXTENDED CONFIGURATION | | | Slave printer | YES (*2) - - | | Printer type | UPD Printer - - | | Character delay | NO - - | | Delay length | 0 - - | | Supress echo | NO - - | | Xon/Xoff | YES - - | | Mux Device | NO - - | | I/O Translate | YES - - | | Print Messages | YES - - | | Input Transparency | NO - - | | Output transparency | NO - - | | Release Detach | NO - - | | CTS Flow Control | NO - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |TERMINAL SETUP | | | Printer baud rate | 9600 (*3) - - | | Pntr Length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 (*3) - - | | Printer Throttle | Xon/Xoff - - | | Main port throttle | Uni Xon/Xoff - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | Spooler | - - supported | | Sheet Feeder | - - - | | Tractor feeder | supported - supported | |____________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER____________________________________________________ _ | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |----------------------------|-------------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - SLV - 3210/3220 | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - - - - | | Initial program | - PSPD81 - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - PSPD80 - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - - - | |____________________________|___________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - You must choose according to your terminal type and setup. (*2) - Run PRCONFIG and configure PDF as "P4225" and TRANSLATION as SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg047 "X4225". (*3) - These parameters must match your printer setup. PRINTER SETUP PT-4225/PT-4226 ------------------------------------------------------------------- Font Print Mode NLQ Sans Serif Font Pitch 10 CPI Font Style Normal Font Size Single General Control Emulation Mode IBM PPR General Control Graphics Bi-directional General Control Paper Out Override No General Control Print Registration 0 General Control Operator Panel Functions Full Operation General Control Print Suppress Effective Yes Vertical Control Line Spacing 6 LPI Vertical Control Form Tear-Off Off Vertical Control Skip Over Perforation No Vertical Control Auto LF No Vertical Control Auto CR No Vertical Control Auto Feed XT Invalid Vertical Control Page Length 11" Symbol Sets Character Set MBF International Symbol Sets Language Set USASCII Symbol Sets Zero Character Unslashed Serial I/F Option Bit 8 Inverted No Serial I/F Option Parity Odd Serial I/F Option Serial Data 7 or 8 Bits 7 Serial I/F Option Protocol X-ON/X-OFF Serial I/F Option Diagnostic Test No Serial I/F Option busy Line DTR Serial I/F Option Baud Rate 9600 BPS Serial I/F Option DSR Signal Invalid Serial I/F Option DTR Signal Ready on Power Up Serial I/F Option Busy Time 1 Second Font Print Mode NLQ Sans Serif SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg048 PT-4227/4228 PRINTER INFORMATION CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP58 |----------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | SLAVE T-DEV PRINTER | | | | | Line device | Terminal - Printer | | Line type | (*1) - UPD (*2) | | Line speed (baud rate) | 9600 (*3) - 9600 (*3) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*3) - 7/O/1 (*3) | | (see extended options) | Yes - No | . |____________________________|_________________________________________| |EXTENDED CONFIGURATION | | | Slave printer | YES - - | . | Printer type | UPD Printer - - | | Character delay | NO - - | | Delay length | 0 - - | | Supress echo | NO - - | | Xon/Xoff | YES - - | | Mux Device | NO - - | | I/O Translate | YES - - | | Print Messages | YES - - | | Input Transparency | NO - - | | Output transparency | NO - - | | Release Detach | NO - - | | CTS Flow Control | NO - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |TERMINAL SETUP | | | Printer baud rate | 9600 (*3) - - | | Pntr Length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 (*3) - - | | Printer Throttle | Xon/Xoff - - | | Main port throttle | Uni Xon/Xoff - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | Spooler | - - supported | | Sheet Feeder | supported - supported | | Tractor feeder | supported - supported | |____________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER_____________________________________________________ | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |----------------------------|-------------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | SLVS SLVD 28SF 28TF | | Translation Table | O O - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - - - - | | Initial program | - PSPD81 PSPD11 PSPD11 | | Driver program | - PSPD80 PSPD10 PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - - - | |____________________________|___________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - You must choose according to your terminal type and setup. (*2) - Run PRCONFIG and configure PDF as "P4227" and TRANSLATION as "X4227". (*3) - These parameters must match your printer setup. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg049 PRINTER SETUP PT-4227/PT-4228 --------------------------------------------------------------- Font Print Mode LQ Courier Font Pitch 10 CPI Font Style Normal Font Size Single General Control Emulation Mode IBM PPR General Control Graphics Bi-directional General Control Paper Out Override No General Control Print Registration 0 General Control Operator Panel Functions Full Operation Vertical Control Line Spacing 6 LPI Vertical Control Form Tear-Off Off Vertical Control Skip Over Perforation No Vertical Control Auto LF No Vertical Control Auto CR No Vertical Control Auto Feed XT Invalid Vertical Control Page Length 11" Symbol Sets Character Set MBF International Symbol Sets Language Set US ASCII Symbol Sets Zero Character Unslashed Serial I/F Option Parity Odd Serial I/F Option Serial Data 7 or 8 Bits 7 Serial I/F Option Protocol X-ON/X-OFF Serial I/F Option Diagnostic Test No Serial I/F Option Busy Line DTR Serial I/F Option Baud Rate 9600 BPS Serial I/F Option DSR Signal Invalid Serial I/F Option DTR Signal Ready on Power Up Serial I/F Option Busy Time 1 Second Font Print Mode LQ Courier (continued on next page) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg050 PT-4229 PRINTER INFORMATION CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 |----------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | SLAVE T-DEV PRINTER | | | | | Line device | - - Printer | . | Line type | - - LQP | | Line speed (baud rate) | - - 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | - - 7/O/1 (*1) | . | (see extended options) | - - No | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |EXTENDED CONFIGURATION | | | Slave printer | - - - | | Printer type | - - - | | Character delay | - - - | | Delay length | - - - | | Supress echo | - - - | | Xon/Xoff | - - - | | Mux Device | - - - | | I/O Translate | - - - | | Print Messages | - - - | . | Input Transparency | - - - | | Output transparency | - - - | | Release Detach | - - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |TERMINAL SETUP | | | Printer baud rate | - - - | | Pntr Length/parity/stop | - - - | | Printer Throttle | - - - | | Main port throttle | - - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | Spooler | - - supported | | Sheet Feeder | - - supported | | Tractor feeder | - - - | |____________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER_____________________________________________________ | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |----------------------------|-------------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - LSRS/LSR (*2) - | | Translation Table | - - sup - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - - - (*3) - |. | Initial program | - - PSPD11 - | | Driver program | - - PSPD10 - | | Termination program | - - - - | |____________________________|___________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel of the printer. (*2) - LSRS selects first page from back bin; LSR selects all pages from front bin. (*3) - You must add feature code "L". SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg051 PRINTER SETUP REPORT FOR PT-4229 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Centronics I/F Setup Timing :1 RS-232C I/F Setup Baud Rate :9600 Baud Data Format :7ODD1 Data Flow Control :MBF XON/XOFF Number of Copies :1 Miscellaneous Language Selection :USA Character Pitch :10CPI Line Pitch :6LPI Top Margin :0 Bottom Margin :0 New Line :OFF Auto LF :OFF Auto CR :OFF Buzzer :BUZZER ON Bit-8 Inversion :OFF FC RM8/MBF CONV :OFF Vertical Compress :ON Horizontal Compress :ON Selected Font Slot No. :RESIDENT Font No. :1 Selected Bin :BIN1 Selected Emulation Slot No. :RESIDENT Emulation Name :DIABLO ECS Revision :16 Memory (RAM) :4.64MB Available Emulations Resident :HP LJ2 :DIABLO ECS :PROPRINTER XL :FX-85 IC Card : ORIGINATOR: Moniereh Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB020 Pg052 FIB 00021 08/28/90 *** OFFICE 3.2B*37 for GPx Systems Software Announcement [ WPSS 171 ] *** INTRODUCTION MAI Basic Four, Inc. is pleased to announce the availability of MAI OFFICE 3.2B*36 with six graph drivers for PT-4229. MAI OFFICE is a completely integrated Office Automation package for the GPx System. MAI OFFICE is composed of the following modules: o MAI Business WORDTM - Word Processor o MAI Business MATHTM - Spreadsheet o MAI Business GRAPHTM - Graphics o MAI Business EXECTM - Desktop Functions o MAI Business MAILTM - Electronic Mail (Local only) o MAI Business DATATM - Data Management o Presentation ServicesTM Printer System *********************************************************** * * * Please read the installation instructions (Section 2) * * before attempting to install MAI OFFICE or any of its * * modules. * * * * MAI OFFICE will work on Operating System 1.0B or above * * for GPx Series 40 and 1.0A or above for GPx Series 70 * * * * MAI GRAPH is no longer O.S. dependent. * *********************************************************** *********************************************************** * * * MAI OFFICE 3.2B requires certain peripheral hardware * * revision levels. Please see Section 1.2. * * * *********************************************************** Copyright 1990 by MAI Basic Four, Inc. All rights reserved. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 PRODUCT DEFINITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 INSTALLATION AND DISK REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS. . . . . 1 2.0 NEW INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 CREATING AN OFFICE ID FOR GPx SERIES 40 WITH OS LEVEL 1.0A OR 1.0B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2.2 CREATING AN OFFICE ID FOR GPx SERIES 40 WITH OS LEVEL 1.0C AND GPx SERIES 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3.0 UPGRADE INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg001 4.0 BUSINESS GRAPH ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 4.1 GRAPHIC DEVICES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4.2 PLOTTERS FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4.3 PT-4229 AND GRAPH DRIVERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 5.0 INTERNATIONAL INSTALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5.1 IMPLANT OF INTERNATIONAL PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5.2 CUSTOMER TAPE BUILD ON GPx SERIES 40 . . . . . . . . . . 8 5.3 CUSTOMER TAPE BUILD ON GPx SERIES 70 . . . . . . . . . . 8 6.0 SPx CONVERSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 6.1 MPx CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 6.2 WPDU70 - BIT CONVERSION PROGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 6.3 OMS 2.1 CONVERSION FROM 13XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 7.0 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . .10 7.1 SET ONE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 7.2 SET TWO OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 8.0 MAI BUSINESS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 8.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA. . .13 8.2 MAI OFFICE 3.2B WITH MAI ORIGIN 2.1B . . . . . . . . . .13 9.0 MAI BUSINESS MATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 10.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 11.0 CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 11.1 MENU SYSTEM FOR MAI OFFICE 3.2B. . . . . . . . . . . . .15 11.2 TEXT FILE REBUILD CHANGES FOR 3.2B . . . . . . . . . . .17 11.2.1 TEXT FILE REBUILD INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . .17 12.0 PRINTER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 12.1 PRINTER SUPPORT CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 1.0 PRODUCT DEFINITION MAI OFFICE consists of 16 products. The following list will describe each product: MOW - BUSINESS WORD PROGRAMS MOWDAT - BUSINESS WORD DATA MOE - BUSINESS EXEC MOEDAT - BUSINESS EXEC DATA MOM - BUSINESS MAIL PROGRAMS MOMDAT - BUSINESS MAIL DATA MOC - BUSINESS MATH PROGRAMS MOCDAT - BUSINESS MATH DATA MOS - SYSTEM SERVICES PROGRAMS MOSDAT - SYSTEM SERVICES DATA MOP - PRINTER SYSTEM PROGRAMS MOPDAT - PRINTER SYSTEM DATA MOD - BUSINESS DATA PROGRAMS MODDAT - BUSINESS DATA DATA MOG - BUSINESS GRAPH MOWORLD - INTERNATIONAL RELEASE 1.1 INSTALLATION AND DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS Installation requirements: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg002 - Public keys for: MOW, MOE, MOG, MOC - Presentation Services - Current OS release (1.0B or greater) for 40 Series - Current OS release (1.0A or greater) for 70 Series Disk space requirements: MOW -- 5.5 MB MOE -- 1.5 MB MOS -- 2.0 MB MOP -- .11 MB MOG -- .70 MB MOC -- .35 MB 10.16 1.2 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS For MAI OFFICE 3.2B, certain minimum hardware revision levels are required: Terminals DT-4312 Rev K DT-4313 Rev E DT-4314 Rev L or above Printer PT-4223 Firmware Rev X6 or above PT-4225 Firmware Rev 4.02 or above PT-4226 Firmware Rev 4.02 or above PT-4227 Firmware Rev 1.21/Res. 1.11 or above PT-4228 Firmware Rev 1.21/Res. 1.11 or above PT-4229 Firmware Rev 16 or above 2.0 NEW INSTALLATION MAI OFFICE is shipped on 1/4 inch installation should be done in single user mode only, so if you are not in single user mode at the Operating System prompt enter: shutdown -i1 To install OFFICE use the 'mbfinstall' command at the Operating System prompt. This command will install OFFICE on the root directory if no directory is specified along with the command. The following will illustrate the uses of this command: mbfinstall <--- this format will install on the /usr directory mbfinstall /usr2 <--- this format will install under the directory named "/usr2". This format is used to install OFFICE on an alternate disk. Once the command is executed, a menu screen will appear with the first 15 products. Figure 2.1 - MBF PRODUCT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1. MOC : MAI Business MATH 2. MOCDAT : MAI Business MATH Files 3. MOD : MAI Business DATA 4. MODDAT : MAI Business DATA Files 5. MOE : MAI Business EXEC SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg003 6. MOEDAT : MAI Business EXEC Files 7. MOG : MAI Business GRAPH 8. MOM : MAI Business MAIL 9. MOMDAT : MAI MAIL Files * 10. MOP : MAI OFFICE Printer System * 11. MOPDAT : MAI Printer System Files * 12. MOS : MAI OFFICE Menu System * 13. MOSDATA : MAI Menu System Files 14. MOW : MAI Business WORD 15. MOWDAT : MAI WORD Files (n)ext, (p)revious, product (#), (all), (s)tart (ab)ort (h)elp (n,p,#,all,s,ab,h): Current products selected: NOTE: * must be installed The user then selects the products they wish to install. When selecting the products, if the user is installing more than one product they can enter all products on the same line separated by a space. For example: Enter products: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 The example above displays a full domestic install. The user should not use the 'all' command when installing OFFICE. The 'all' option will install the domestic product as well as the international product on the system. NOTE: Both MAIL and EXEC must be installed for local messages. The data files are defined as separate products. The end user must request the data files to be installed along with the program files. As the product is installing, the user will be prompted for public key installation for the appropriate products. NOTE: The public keys will be installed in /usr/mbf/etc/level. 2.1 CREATING AN OFFICE ID FOR GPx SERIES 40 WITH OS LEVEL 1.0A OR 1.0B The following illustrates an OFFICE id created through 'oprinfo'. This id uses the command file 'startmo' to invoke OFFICE. 1. Login name: office 2. User ID: (or input of your choice) 3. Group ID: (or input of your choice) 4. Home directory: /usr/oms or the alternate directory 5. Login shell: /bin/execsh 6. Program /usr/oms/startmo or the alternate directory/usr/oms/startmo 7. Menu permissions: (or input of your choice) 8. Additional groups: (or input of your choice) See oprinfo documentation for definitions of the different fields. If OFFICE is installed on an alternate disk/directory, the user will need to modify the prefix list within the command file "startmo". Example: before cd /usr/oms SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg004 ... prefix "/usr/oms /usr/mbf/PS /usr/mbf/PS/tools" after cd /alt dir/usr/oms ... prefix "/alt dir/usr/oms /usr/mbf/PS/tools" 2.2 CREATING AN OFFICE ID FOR GPx SERIES 40 WITH OS LEVEL 1.0C AND GPx SERIES 70 The following illustrates an OFFICE id created through 'oprinfo'. The Home directory is automatically defined. 1. Login name: office 2. User ID: (or input of your choice) 3. Group ID: (or input of your choice) 4. Home directory: (usr/office) will appear 5. Login shell: (/bin/sh) 6. Program 7. Menu permissions: (or input of your choice) 8. Additional groups: (or input of your choice) At prompt 'Do you want to give this ID a .profile.' - answer Yes. Edit .profile to automatically start up office using the 'startmo' command. At bottom of .profile enter: cd /usr/oms exec startmo If OFFICE is installed on an alternate disk/directory the user will need to specify that alternate disk/directory instead of the '/usr/oms' above and modify the prefix list within the command file "startmo". Example: before ... prefix "/usr/oms /usr/mbf/PS /usr/mbf/PS/tools" after ... prefix "/alt dir/usr/oms /usr/mbf/PS /usr/mbf/PS/tools" See oprinfo documentation for definitions of the different fields. 3.0 UPGRADE INSTALLATION Make a current backup of all MAI OFFICE files to tape, including /urs/oms, /usr/mbf/PS and /usr/mbf/etc/level files. Upgrade should be done in single user mode, so if you are not in single user mode at the Operating System prompt enter: shutdown -i1 To upgrade MAI OFFICE use the "mbfinstall" command at the Operating System prompt. If you are upgrading MAI OFFICE that is not located on the root directory you need to specify that directory. The following will illustrate the uses of this command: mbfinstall <--- this will upgrade OFFICE located in the /usr directory mbfinstall /usr2 <--- this will upgrade OFFICE located in the "/usr2" directory SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg005 Once the command is executed, a menu screen will appear with the first 15 products. Figure 2.1 shows the MAI OFFICE options. The user then selects the products they wish to upgrade. NOTE: Do not upgrade the DATA Files products. When selecting the products, if the users is upgrading more than one product they can enter all products on the same line separated by a space. For example: Enter Products: 1 3 5 7 8 10 12 14 The example above displays a full domestic upgrade. 4.0 BUSINESS GRAPH ENVIRONMENT This section describes how to set the user path to use BUSINESS GRAPH. In order to use BUSINESS GRAPH, the user's path, found in the .profile file, will need to be modified. When the user creates an id such as the one located in Section 2.1 of this document, a .profile is also created. This file is located under the home directory for the id created. Normally this .profile file contains a standard set-up. To change the path for the id: Use the screen editor "vi" to edit the file called .profile. Be sure you are in the home directory for that id. Change the original example below to one of the modified examples. ORIGINAL - #PATH=$PATH:"your_path" MODIFIED - Examples: PATH=.:/usr/graphics:$PATH or PATH=.:/alternate directory/usr/graphics:$PATH NOTE: Make sure to remove the # sign. Once the .profile file has been modified the user then needs to modify the "startmo" command file to include graphics in the prefix list. Using the screen editor, "vi", edit startmo. Cursor down and over to "/usr/oms" and inset "/usr/graphics" or "/alternate directory/usr/graphics". Example: ... prefix "/usr/oms /usr/graphics /usr/mbf/PS /usr/mbf/PS/tools" or ... prefix "/alt dir/usr/oms /alt dir/usr/graphics /usr/mbf/PS... NOTE: If there are no graphic terminals or plotters configured on the system the etc/plotters file would be empty and you will get error "bad /etc/plotters" message when trying to run MAI GRAPH. 4.1 GRAPHIC DEVICES MAI GRAPH supports DT-4314 terminal and PT-4215, PT-4224, PT-4229 printers and HP plotter. NOTE: DT-4314 should be configured as a graphic terminal and the SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg006 printers (PT-4215, PT-4224 and PT-4229) should be configured as plotters for drawing MAI GRAPH. 4.2 PLOTTERS FILE The following is the format for /etc/plotters file: User defined name:device:type:print parameters::::: (comments) ___________________________________________________________________ | EXAMPLE OF /etc/plotters file | | |. | Default:T21:4314:::::: graphic terminal | | Plot:T12:hpplot:::::: hpplotter | | PT-4224:P2:PT-4214: /usr/mbf/bin/lpr list=p2 -raw -delete ::::: | | PT-4215:P1:PT-4215: /usr/mbf/bin/lpr list=p1 -raw -delete ::::: | | T5:T5:4314:::::: graphic terminal | |___________________________________________________________________| NOTE: You must have a space before the fourth colon ":", if you are passing print parameters. 4.3 PT-4229 AND GRAPH DRIVERS The BUSINESS GRAPH module now supports the PT-4229 printer as a graphic device. To access the PT-4229 as a graphic device the user needs to modify the plotters file with the correct device driver. There are six new drivers. They are: 4229H8, 4229M8, 4229L8, 4229H7, 4229M7 and 4229L7. These drivers determine the resolution the graph will be drawn in. The 4229L8 and 4229L7 will draw a graph in 75 dots per inch resolution in 8 or 7-bit respectively. The 4229M8 and 4229M7 will draw a graph in 150 dots per inch resolution in 8 or 7-bit respectively. The 4229H8 and 4229H7 will draw a graph in 300 dots per inch resolution in 8 or 7-bit respectively. The following example is what an entry in the plotters file will look like when using these new drivers: LLASER:P1:4229L8:/usr/mbf/bin/lpr list=p1 -raw -delete :::::low resolution By using the editor the user can modify this entry to meets their requirements. To print in 8-bit mode from BUSINESS WORD In-tray or data processing the form for this printer (standrd form) under operating system (pparams) should have a 7-bit (S7) translation table. (continued on next page) MEMORY SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg007 _____________________________________________ R | .64 MB | 1.64 MB | 2.64 MB | 4.64 MB | E |-----------|-----------|----------|----------| S | 7-bit | | | | O 75 dpi | & | | | | L | 8-bit | | | | U |___________|___________|__________|__________| T | | 7-bit | | | I 150 dpi | | & | | | O | | 8-bit | | | N |___________|___________|__________|__________| | | | 7-bit | | 300 dpi | | | & | | | | | 8-bit | | |___________|___________|__________|__________| The following chart illustrates timings when using BUSINESS GRAPH device drivers with the PT-4229. The timings may vary depending on system load at time of graph. _____________________________________________________ | 4229 | 19200 BAUD | 9600 BAUD | |---------|---------------------|---------------------| | | GRAPH | SPOOLER | GRAPH | SPOOLER | | 7-bit | | | | | | 75dpi | 16" | 3'25" | 17" | 3'12" | |_________|________|____________|__________|__________| | 7-bit | | | | | | 150dpi | 37" | 9'58" | 45" | 10'49" | |_________|________|____________|__________|__________| | 7-bit | | | | | | 300dpi | 2'25" | 37'05" | 2"03" | 39'07" | |_________|________|____________|__________|__________| | 8-bit | | | | | | 75dpi | 12" | 1"21" | 13" | 1'29" | |_________|________|____________|__________|__________| | 8-bit | | | | | | 150dpi | 29" | 4'59" | 29" | 5'20" | |_________|________|____________|__________|__________| | 8-bit | | | | | | 300dpi | 1'15" | 19'27" | 58" | 19'50" | |_________|________|____________|__________|__________| NOTE: Plotting with 7-bit high resolution does require 1.9MB of disk space and 1.0MB for 8-bit high resolution under /tmp directory on disk 0. 5.0 INTERNATIONAL INSTALL The international install is similar to the domestic install. The international site uses the same command "mbfinstall". With a domestic install, the user is able to redirect OFFICE to an alternate disk; however, this is not the case with the international version. It must reside on the root partition. The menu screen will appear with the domestic products. At that time, the user enters a and the international product (MOWORLD) will appear. Select the product and then and then enter "s" for start of installation. 5.1 IMPLANT OF INTERNATIONAL PRODUCT SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg008 Once the international product has been installed, the user needs to perform an implant of the product to the native language. The user cd's to the directory /usr/omsutl and invokes "/usr/omsutl/mplant". A menu screen appears with options and the user then selects the appropriate responses. A new prompt appears on the implant screen giving the user the option for screen display. The old implant process would always display line changes with the line display enabled, and took up to eight hours to implant the complete product. With line display disabled, the complete product can now be implanted in one hour. 5.2 CUSTOMER TAPE BUILD ON GPx SERIES 40 To create a customer tape, the international site should log-on as root and execute the rel procedure followed by product name. Example: rel MOW MOWDAT MOP MOPDAT MOM MOMDAT MOS MOSDAT MOD MODDAT MOG MOC MOCDAT MOE MOEDAT or: rel NOTE: These examples are a full product release. 5.3 CUSTOMER TAPE BUILD ON GPx SERIES 70 To create a customer tape for GPx 70, the international site should log-on as root and execute the rel procedure followed by host=x target=x, the example below shown a full product release: rel host=x target=x where x=s for senior or j for junior system 6.0 SPx CONVERSION If an existing SPx customer is converting to a GPx system, they need to create a BQR filelist and transfer the data with the intersystem transfer. utility. The schema can either be text or binary. The utility program WPDU70 does not need to be run on an SPx to GPx conversion. 6.1 MPx CONVERSION If an existing MPx customer is converting to a GPx system, they will need to convert the document files. The user first needs to create a BQR file list of the WP files. When creating this list, the following files should have a binary schema: WPDM00, WPDM04, WPPS00, WPPS01, WPPS01, WPTF0a- WPTF0z WPTF0A-WPTF0Z and WPTF01. The library file, WPDL00, should be transferred as a text type file. Once these files are transferred to the GPx system on top of the OFFICE product, the utility program WPDU70 should be executed. This utility will reverse the bit order on the above mentioned files. 6.2 WPDU70 - BIT CONVERSION PROGRAM WPDU70 is a 'bit conversion' program used when moving documents between MPx and GPx systems. The program may be run only once, it cannot be aborted (using ESCAPE) and there is no user input required. If WPDU70 is interrupted before completion, the affected files MUST BE RESTORED FROM BACKUPS before restarting. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg009 WPDU70 creates a log file (BITLOG) which lists each file that has been converted. Text files that are not on-line will not be converted. Files are opened and converted using fully qualified file names based on the location of the file WPDM00. Files in other nodes or directories will not be converted. FILES THAT WILL BE CONVERTED: WPDM00, WPDM04, WPPS00, WPPS01, WPTF0A-WPTF0Z, WPTF01, WPTF0a-WPTF0z Procedure: STEP 1: Complete all other upgrade or conversion procedures. EXAMPLE: Conversion from WP 3.1 to 3.2 if needed. Put new WP program files on the new system. STEP 2: Use Intersystem Transfer or BQR to move all WP data files to the new system. BE SURE TO SPECIFY THAT THE ABOVE FILES BE TRANSPORTED AS BINARY. ALL OTHER WP DATA FILES ARE TRANSPORTED AS TEXT. STEP 3: Backup all of the WP data files. STEP 4: Run the CONVERT option of BQR to Intersystem Transfer on the WP data files that were transported as TEXT. STEP 5: Run WPDU70 to convert the WP data files transported as BINARY. NOTE: WPDU70 functions on WP data files only and only those data files that contain binary information. Menu, Operator and Executive Function Files are not included. 6.3 OMS 2.1 CONVERSION FROM 13XX Since the conversion of 13XX OMS 2.1 to MPx to GPx MAI OFFICE 3.2B will only include WPDL00, WPDM00 and the WPTF0& files, the program will bypass the files not found. A prompt will ask if this is a 13XX conversion. If it is, answer 'Y' and the program will continue. 7.0 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE The international ID Parameter maintenance program (MSMM40) will automatically run the first time a user runs "MS" after an international or domestic installation. After the user runs "MS", the prompt: "INTERNATIONAL PARAMETERS ARE NOT SET UP (CR)" will appear. This program allows the MAI OFFICE product to be modified in certain areas to conform to a customer's special needs. There are two distinct sets of parameters that a customer may change: SET ONE: Amount Format Insert Code Characters Overprint Character Hyphenation Character Telephone Format Sign Symbol Spaces ending a sentence SET TWO: Date Format SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg010 Date Separator Time Format Time Separator Currency Code Position of Currency Code SET ONE contains options which are global for MAI OFFICE. For example, if the telephone format is set to international, then all MAI OFFICE users will have their telephone numbers unformatted (see below for more detail). CAUTION: Once this set of parameters has been modified the system will not allow them to be changed. SET TWO contains options which are user independent. As an example, two . different users on the same MAI OFFICE system may use a different date and/or time format. A complete description of each option and use is given below. 7.1 SET ONE OPTIONS Amount Format options - 1. #,###,##0.00 2. #.###.##0,00 3. #B###B##0,00 B=blank These format masks will allow a user to present numeric data in the form that is acceptable for his or her country. Option '1' is most commonly used in the United States while option '2' and '3' are used in Europe. Insert Code Characters options: "<>", "[]", " " The braces ("[]"), currently used in MAI OFFICE, indicate insert codes are not available in all ISO character sets so the user has the ability to select characters that are in the character set they would like to use. Overprint Character options: any character Like the insert code, the backslash (" ") used as an overprint character in MAI OFFICE is not available in all character sets. This option lets the user specify a different character as the overprint character. NOTE: Overprint characters should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Hyphenation Character options: any character Same as the Overprint Character. NOTE: This is the character used to separate the word by syllables for hyphenation in the document, IT IS NOT the character used. during the printing process to hyphenate a word (usually a'-'). Also the hyphenation character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Telephone Format options: D=Domestic, I=International SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg011 D=Domestic option - formats all telephone numbers in a (AAA)PPP-NNNN format where: AAA=area code (option field) + PPP=prefix + NNNN=number I=International option - no special formatting or input validation will be done. This field will allow up to 15 characters in any form. Sign Symbol options: 1. "CR/DR" 2. "+/-" 3. "()" In the United States, the CR or DR is used to denote positive or negative amounts. In Europe it is more common to use a "+" or "-". This option allows the user to select either. Spaces ending a sentence options: 1 or 2 In the United States, two spaces follow the sentence punctuation. In most other countries, one space follows the sentence punctuation. This option allows the user to select either. 7.2 SET TWO OPTIONS Date Format options: 1. MMDDYY 2. DDMMYY 3. YYMMDD In addition to the (MMDDYY) format, two other formats are available to the user. Date Separator options: any character The user may have the date displayed in a format other than MM/DD/YY each as MM.DD.YY or MM-DD-YY. Time Format options: D=Domestic, I=International D=Domestic - twelve-hour clock or I=International - twenty-four hour clock. Time Separator options: ".", ":", "N"=Null With this option, the user may see the hours and minutes separated with different options. Currency Code options: any four alpha characters The user may select the characters that will be used as the currency. symbol. Position of Currency Code options: L=LEFT, R=RIGHT United States dollars are displayed with the currency symbol to the SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg012 left of the actual amount (i.e. $1.98). This is not always true in other countries where the currency symbol may appear on the left or right of the actual amount. With this option, the user may select either. 8.0 MAI BUSINESS DATA 8.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA The Business DATA module is delivered with the operating system. See GPx Software Announcement #168 for installation instructions. 8.2 MAI OFFICE 3.2B WITH MAI ORIGIN 2.1B Modify the prefix list within the command file "startmo" for OFFICE/ORIGIN users as follows: Example: ...prefix /usr/oms /usr/origin/r2lb /usr/mbf/PS /usr/mbf/PS/tools 9.0 MAI BUSINESS MATH MAI Business MATH transforms your video display into a grid resembling an accountant's columnar pad. o An easy-to-use, yet flexible electronic spreadsheet. o For developing projections, budgets, pro formas, cash flows, or other tabular reports requiring mathematical calculations. o Will improve accuracy while saving significant time. 10.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B introduces many new features which were not part of MAI OFFICE 3.1A. New manuals are included in all new orders, but must be ordered separately for update orders. The following is a list of documentation for MAI OFFICE 3.2B. Manual Number Title M7554 MAI Menu~ and Systems Services Reference Manual and MAI Business DATA User Guide M7555 MAI Business GRAPH~ Reference Manual M7559 MAI Business EXEC~ Reference Manual M7560 MAI Business WORD~ Reference Manual M7550 MAI Business WORD~ User Manual M7551 MAI Business GRAPH~ User Manual M7552 MAI Business MATH~ User Guide M7553 MAI Business EXEC~ User Guide M7557 MAI Business DATA~ User Guide M7561 Presentation Services~ Menu and Help Management SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg013 User Guide M0144 Presentation Services~ Forms Management User Guide M7558 MAI Business MAIL~ Reference Manual M7566 MAI OFFICE Quick Reference Guide 11.0 CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS The following sections briefly describe improvements made with MAI OFFICE 3.2B. Also included with this new release are improved printer drivers. New dictionary files with additional plurals can be restored over existing WPWF00 and WPWF01, if needed. 11.1 MENU SYSTEM FOR MAI OFFICE 3.2B MAI OFFICE 3.2B uses a new menu system with the aid of another system, called Presentation Services. Presentation Services provides menu functions. Also, the function keys can be programmed through Presentation Services and are used in MAI OFFICE to directly access certain functions of MAI OFFICE from any menu in the system. For information regarding menu maintenance, see the Presentation Services Users Guide M7561. The main menu for MAI OFFICE is: |--------MAIN MENU-------------| | | | Business WORD | | | | Business MATH | | | | Business GRAPH | | | | Business EXEC | | | | Business DATA | | | | Menu and System Services | | | |______________________________| There are two basic ways to select an option from a menu. You can use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option or you can type in the designated selection characters. You can substitute the following key sequences in place of the arrow keys: CTRL+k for up arrow, CTRL+J or space bar for down arrow, CTRL+L for right arrow, and CTRL+N or BACKSPACE key for the left arrow. By using the up and down arrow keys, you can move the cursor to the option you want to select. The current option appears highlighted on your screen. Press RETURN to complete your selection. The selections wrap from top to bottom and vice-versa. You can also use selection characters to select options from the menu. As you look at the menu on your screen, notice that on or two characters from each option is highlighted. These are the selection characters and indicate what you need to type in order to move the cursor directly to the desired option. Then press RETURN to make your selection. There will always be at least one selection character. A second selection character is used only SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg014 when the set of first selection characters is not unique. The function keys provide quick access to frequently used options. If you want to use one of the function keys, press the key that matches the label at the bottom of the screen. Below is the function key usage within MAI OFFICE. The notation of F1 through F10 indicates function keys 1 through 10 with the description of that function key's use within MAI OFFICE. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP STATUS IN-TRAY MSGSLIP CALC CALENDR PHONE#S LOGOFF DATA CONSOLE F1 (HELP) will give a brief description of the menu system. F2 (STATUS) will show the user a list of users currently logged on to MAI OFFICE. F3 (IN-TRAY) will take the user directly to the In-Tray option without having to move through several menu levels. F4 (MSGSLIP) will take the user directly to the Out-Tray option to send a local message. F5 (CALC) will take the user directly to the Calculator Function. F6 (CALENDR) will take the user directly to a personal calendar. F7 (PHONE#S) will take the user to a personal telephone directory. F8 (LOGOFF) will log the user off the MAI OFFICE system. F9 (DATE) will allow the user to change the system date and time if allowed this privilege. However, if the date is changed from the WP.MAIN MENU, it is only changed for internal word processing screens and not on the rest of the system. F10 (CONSOLE) will take the user out of the MAI OFFICE system into console mode. The user will be allowed CONSOLE only if they are configured or authorized for this privilege. 11.2 TEXT FILE REBUILD CHANGES FOR 3.2B The Text File Rebuild Utility has been changed to use full path names when creating a temporary file name and also when it is renamed. The process was also changed so pointers were not rewritten into the original header file during the rebuild. Prior to 3.2B, a temporary file was created to correct pointers in the text file but the header file was fixed in place. If the process was interrupted for any reason, the pointers would not match between the header and text files and when the text file rebuild was restarted, all documents were deleted. With MAI OFFICE 3.2B, this will no longer happen since a temporary file is created for both the header file and the text file. If the process is interrupted, the user can safely restart the text file rebuild at the beginning. With MAI OFFICE 3.2B, text file rebuild tries recovering from SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg015 loops within existing pointers for a single page. 11.2.1 TEXT FILE REBUILD INSTRUCTIONS To execute a Text File Rebuild: STEP 1: At the Business WORD Menu select Supervisory Utilities. The Text File Rebuild utility menu displays. STEP 2: Select Text File Rebuild to contract, expand, or to rebuild the text file(s). STEP 3: BEGIN REBUILD NOW OR START LATER (N/L/CR):? Options (choose one) a. Type 'N' and to begin rebuild immediatley after all the parameters have been entered and validated. Go to STEP 4. b. Type 'L' and to start rebuild at a later date and time. Go to STEP 5. c. Type to return to Text File Rebuild Menu. STEP 4: DO YOU WANT TO REBUILD AN ERROR REPORT (Y/N)? Options (choose one) a. Type 'Y' and to build an error report. Write down the name of the error file the system displays here. Go to STEP 6. b. Type 'N' and if you don't want an error report. Go to STEP 6. STEP 5: Enter the answers to the following prompts to have rebuild started at a later date and time: ENTER TIME TO REBUILD (HH:MM AM/PM) OR CR: ENTER DATA TO BEGIN REBUILD (MMDDYY) OR CR: The current date and time are displayed next to these prompts. To change date and time, overtype on the date and time displayed by the system. Once date and time have been validated, the screen displays the name of the error file which is created for logging the errors: PLEASE NOTE - ERROR FILE NAME IS RBxxxx (CR) RB stands for rebuild and the characters following RB are the terminal ID. Write down the name of this file displayed for use when printing the error file report. After you the system creates the error file with the message being displayed: NOW CREATING FILE.... SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg016 STEP 6: DOCUMENT OR PARAGRAPH FILE(S) (D/P/CR): Options (choose one) a. Type 'D' and to rebuild a document text file(s). Go to STEP 7. b. Type 'P6' and to rebuild a paragraph text file. Go to STEP 8. STEP 7: LIBRARY FILE CHARACTER Enter the library file character for the text file to rebuild and . When file characters for all the text file(s) to be rebuild have been entered, to end the selection of text files. STEP 8: The screen now displays the number of lines already used in the text file and the space available for each text file specified. If you wish to re-size the text file, enter the new number of lines for the text file: THERE ARE <#> LINES USED IN LEAVING <#> AVAILABLE ENTER NEW NUMBER OF LINES OR CR: Options (choose one) a. Enter the new number of lines you wish the new text file to have and . Go to STEP 9. b. Type to retain the same size for text file. Go to STEP 9. STEP 9: The following message appears on the screen: NOW DEFINING TEMPORARY FILES The system looks at the records in the text files to see if there is enough room to create ' temporary files. NOTE: Do not leave your terminal until the temporary files have been defined. On the successful completion of allocation of temporary files, the above message will disappear. If there is not enough space to define the temporary files the procedure stops. The user must delete any unused files on the disk at this point to make room for. the completion of the program. The system now scans the header file first and then scans the text file(s) and documents within it. As it scans, the following messages appear on the screen: TEXT FILE NOW SCANNING: NOW REBUILDING: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg017 The system first makes sure that the text file it is about to rebuild is not being used. If it finds that a library or document in the text file which it is about to rebuild is being used, then it will not rebuild that text file and will display the following message: DOCUMENT BUSY. TEXT FILE CANNOT BE REBUILT. If the system encounters any kind of corruption in the chains, it reports such a corruption and attempts to recover the maximum text which is affected by that corruption. Corruptions usually occur in a text file and in the document header record which is linked to documents. The system responds to such corruptions as described below: a. Document Header Record Corruption: If the document header record doesn't point to a proper first and last page of the document, or if these pointers have values outside the range of the text file into which . they point, the system displays the following message: POINTERS IN DOCUMENT RECORD FOR CORRUPTED. WILL FIX. The system attempts to correct these pointers. If it is not able to salvage even . one page of the document, then it proceeds to delete the document and displays the following message: DELETING b. Page Record Corruption: If any of the page records of a document/paragraph do not point to a proper . first line of that page, then the following message appears on the screen: PAGE RECORD NOT PROPER FOR PAGE <#> The system attempts to restore the proper value of the pointer. If it is unable to restore the pointers, then it deletes all the lines for that page. The following message appears: ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> DELETED. If it gets all the lines, then the following message appears: RESTORED ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg018 If it gets only the partial page, then the following message is displayed: RESTORED <#> LINES FOR PAGE <#> c. Page Link Corruption: If the system encounters a corruption in page record chains, then it displays the following message: PAGE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING PAGE POINTERS. If it is able to restore the complete chain, then the following message is displayed: PAGE LINE REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete chain, then it displays the following message: PAGE REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST AFTER PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text preceeding the lost page: **PAGE POINTER ERRORS. NEXT <#> PAGES LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION. d. Line Link Corruption: If the system encounters any corruption in the line link chain, it displays the following message: LINE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING POINTERS.. If it is able to restore the complete line link chain, it issues the following message: LINE LINK REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete line link chain, then the following message appears: LINE LINK REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST ON PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text where the failure occurred: **LINE POINTER ERRORS. SOME TEXT ON THIS PAGE LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION STEP 10: On the completion of rebuild for each text file, the system renames the temporary text file. STEP 11: If you keyed in 'Y' for STEP 4 the following SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg019 prompt appears: DO YOU WANT TO PRINT THE ERROR REPORT (Y/N)? If you answered 'N', the system displays the Text File Rebuild Menu. NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT A TEXT FILE REBUILD BE RUN ONCE A WEEK TO ENSURE POINTER INTEGRITY. 12.0 PRINTER CONFIGURATION INFORMATION 4215 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/VX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer (*2) | | Printer type | PT-4215 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) |. | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 550 (*3) | | Write timeout | 550 (*3) | |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | yes (*2) | | Device type | Slave printer | | Slave printer type | PT-4215 | | Basic Four interface | no | | Read/status timeout | 550 (*3) | | Write timeout | 550 (*3) | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Prt length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 (*1) | | Printer throttle | none |. | Main port throttle | Unidirectional Xon/Xoff (*4) | |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | SLVS SLVD 15SF 15TF | | Slave type | F F - - | | Translation Table | sup sup sup sup | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Initial program | - PSPD71 - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - PSPD70 - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - PSPD72 - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg020 (*1) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel of the printer. (*2) - Change/save the printer setup, use the SETUP MODE on printer front panel Printer as F. Style (DC3-CDE) F. Interface (PROTOCOL) SLAVE DISABLE ETX/ACK NO SLAVE ENABLE XON/XOFF (*3) - Seconds are expressed in 1/10 of a second (*4) - For DT-4313 terminal Main Port Throttle should be set to XOFF ->HOST. 4222 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/VX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4222 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 |. | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 550 (*2) | | Write timeout | 550 (*2) | |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | no | | Device type | - | | Slave printer type | - | | Basic Four interface | - | | Read/status timeout | - | | Write timeout | - | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | - | | Prt length/parity/stop | - | | Printer throttle | - | | Main port throttle | - | |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | not supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - 3210|3220| | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - | | Initial program | - - - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - - - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the dip switch settings on the printer. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg021 (*2) - Time outs are expressed in 1/10 of a second. 4223 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/VX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4223 (*1) | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*2) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*2) | | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | on | | Read/status timeout | 550 (*5) |. | Write timeout | 550 (*5) | |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | - | | Device type | - | | Slave printer type | - | | Basic Four interface | - | | Read/status timeout | - | | Write timeout | - | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | - | | Prt length/parity/stop | - | | Printer throttle | - | | Main port throttle | - | |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | not supported |. |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - LSRS/LSR (*3) - | | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - sup - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - | | Initial program | - - PSPD11 - | | Driver program | - - PSPD10 - | | Termination program | - - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - Rev. Level X6 (*2) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel. of the printer. (*3) - LSRS selects first page from top bin; LSR selects all pages from bottom. (*4) - You must add feature code "L". (*5) - Seconds are expressed in 1/10 of a second. 4224 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/VX SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg022 CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4224 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) |. | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | on | | Read/status timeout | 550 | | Write timeout | 550 | |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | no | | Device type | - | | Slave printer type | - | | Basic Four interface | - | | Read/status timeout | - | | Write timeout | - | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | - | | Prt length/parity/stop | - | | Printer throttle | - | | Main port throttle | - | |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | not supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | support | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - - 3150|3510| | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - | | Initial program | - - - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - - - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - The parameters must match the dip switch settings on the printer. (continued on next page) 4225/4226 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/VX SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg023 CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4225/PT-4226 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 |. | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 550 | | Write timeout | 550 | |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | yes | | Device type | Slave printer | | Slave printer type | PT-4225/PT-4226 | | Basic Four interface | no | | Read/status timeout | 550 | | Write timeout | 550 | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Prt length/parity/stop | 7/0/1 (*1) | | Printer throttle | Xon/Xoff | | Main port throttle | Unidirectional Xon/Xoff (*4) | |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | not supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - SLV 3210|3220| | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - | | Initial program | - PSPD81 - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - PSPD80 - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel of the printer. (*4) - For DT-4313 terminal the Main Port Throttle should be set to XOFF ->HOST PRINTER SETUP PT-4225/PT-4226 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg024 ------------------------------------------------------------------- Font Print Mode NLQ Sans Serif Font Pitch 10 CPI Font Style Normal Font Size Single General Control Emulation Mode IBM PPR General Control Graphics Bi-directional General Control Paper Out Override No General Control Print Registration 0 General Control Operator Panel Functions Full Operation General Control Print Suppress Effective Yes Vertical Control Line Spacing 6 LPI Vertical Control Form Tear-Off Off Vertical Control Skip Over Perforation No Vertical Control Auto LF No Vertical Control Auto CR No Vertical Control Auto Feed XT Invalid Vertical Control Page Length 11" Symbol Sets Character Set MBF International Symbol Sets Language Set USASCII Symbol Sets Zero Character Unslashed Serial I/F Option Bit 8 Inverted No Serial I/F Option Parity Odd Serial I/F Option Serial Data 7 or 8 Bits 7 Serial I/F Option Protocol X-ON/X-OFF Serial I/F Option Diagnostic Test No Serial I/F Option busy Line DTR Serial I/F Option Baud Rate 9600 BPS Serial I/F Option DSR Signal Invalid Serial I/F Option DTR Signal Ready on Power Up Serial I/F Option Busy Time 1 Second Font Print Mode NLQ Sans Serif (continued on next page) 4227/4228 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/VX SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg025 CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP58 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4227/PT-4228 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) |. | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 550 | | Write timeout | 550 | |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | yes | | Device type | Slave printer | | Slave printer type | PT-4227/PT-4228 | | Basic Four interface | no | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Prt length/parity/stop | 7/0/1 (*1) | | Printer throttle | Xon/Xoff | | Main port throttle | Unidirectional Xon/Xoff (*4) | |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | SLVS SLVD 28SF 28TF | | Slave type | O O - - | | Translation Table | sup sup sup sup | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - | | Initial program | PSPD81 PSPD81 PSPD11 PSPD11 | | Driver program | PSPD80 PSPD80 PSPD10 PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel of the printer. (*4) - For DT-4313 terminal the Main Port Throttle should be set to XOFF ->HOST PRINTER SETUP PT-4227/PT-4228 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg026 ------------------------------------------------------------------ Font Print Mode LQ Courier Font Pitch 10 CPI Font Style Normal Font Size Single General Control Emulation Mode IBM PPR General Control Graphics Bi-directional General Control Paper Out Override No General Control Print Registration 0 General Control Operator Panel Functions Full Operation Vertical Control Line Spacing 6 LPI Vertical Control Form Tear-Off Off Vertical Control Skip Over Perforation No Vertical Control Auto LF No Vertical Control Auto CR No Vertical Control Auto Feed XT Invalid Vertical Control Page Length 11" Symbol Sets Character Set MBF International Symbol Sets Language Set US ASCII Symbol Sets Zero Character Unslashed Serial I/F Option Parity Odd Serial I/F Option Serial Data 7 or 8 Bits 7 Serial I/F Option Protocol X-ON/X-OFF Serial I/F Option Diagnostic Test No Serial I/F Option Busy Line DTR Serial I/F Option Baud Rate 9600 BPS Serial I/F Option DSR Signal Invalid Serial I/F Option DTR Signal Ready on Power Up Serial I/F Option Busy Time 1 Second Font Print Mode LQ Courier (continued on next page) 4229 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/VX SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg027 CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4229 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 |. | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 550 | | Write timeout | 550 | |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | - | | Device type | - | | Slave printer type | - | | Basic Four interface | - | | Read/status timeout | - | | Write timeout | - | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | - | | Prt length/parity/stop | - | | Printer throttle | - | | Main port throttle | - | |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | not supported |. |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER |--------------------------------------------------------------------------|. | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - LSRS/LSR (*2) - | | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - sup - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - - | | Initial program | - - PSPD11 - | | Driver program | - - PSPD10 - | | Termination program | - - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel of the printer. (*2) - LSRS selects first page from back bin; LSR selects all pages from front bin. (*3) - You must add feature code "L". (*4) - If PT-4229 is not available, use PT-4223. PRINTER SETUP REPORT FOR PT-4229 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Centronics I/F Setup Timing :1 RS-232C I/F Setup SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg028 Baud Rate :9600 Baud Data Format :7ODD1 Data Flow Control :MBF XON/XOFF Number of Copies :1 Miscellaneous Language Selection :USA Character Pitch :10CPI Line Pitch :6LPI Top Margin :0 Bottom Margin :0 New Line :OFF Auto LF :OFF Auto CR :OFF Buzzer :BUZZER ON Bit-8 Inversion :OFF FC RM8/MBF CONV :OFF Vertical Compress :ON Horizontal Compress :ON Selected Font Slot No. :RESIDENT Font No. :1 Selected Bin :BIN1 Selected Emulation Slot No. :RESIDENT Emulation Name :DIABLO ECS Revision :16 Memory (RAM) :4.64MB Available Emulations Resident :HP LJ2 :DIABLO ECS :PROPRINTER XL :FX-85 IC Card : (continued on next page) 12.1 PRINTER SUPPORT CHART SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg029 _______________________________________________ | PRINTER | SYSTEM | SLAVE | |------------|-------------------|--------------| | PT-4215 | S - G | S | | | | | | PT-4222 | D | N | | | | | | PT-4223 | S | N | | | | | | PT-4224 | D - G | N | | | | | | PT-4225 | D | D | | | | | | PT-4226 | D | D | | | | | | PT-4227 | S | S | | | | | | PT-4228 | S | S | | | | | | PT-4229 | S - G | N | |____________|___________________|______________| D = supported as draft mode only G = supported for MAI GRAPH N = not supported S = supported with attributes ORIGINATOR: Moniereh Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB021 Pg030 FIB 00022 09/28/90 *** Presentation Services 3.3B Software Announcement [ WPSS 177 ] *** MAI Basic Four, Inc. is pleased to announce the availability of Presentation Services 3.3B, an enhanced version of its predecessor PS 3.3A. Some of the highlights of PS 3.3B are: o Allow Gradual Conversion of Applications to Forms o Modified REFRESH Mnemonic o 'START' at Last Field in IOLIST o 'RB' on Message Mnemonic o Multiple Configuration Files o Modified Required Field Validation o Addition of Color o Increased Performance in Menus and Repeating Groups o More than 999 Help ID's Detailed descriptions of the enhancements can be found in the New Features Section of this announcement. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.0 REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.1 BOSS/VS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.2 BOSS/IX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2.3 BOSS/VX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3.0 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES BOSS/VS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3.1 EXECUTING PS ON BOSS/VS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4.0 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES BOSS/IX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4.1 EXECUTING PS ON BOSS/IX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5.0 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES BOSS/VX FOR U.S. AND CANADA . . . . . . . 4 5.1 EXECUTING PS ON BOSS/VX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.0 INTERNATIONAL INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1 REINSTALLATION ON BOSS/VS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.2 REINSTALLATION ON BOSS/IX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.3 REINSTALLATION ON BOSS/VX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7.0 PORTING PS FORM AND MENU FILES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7.1 PS MENU SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7.2 PS FORM BUILDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8.0 NEW FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 8.1 ROOTWINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 8.2 MODIFIED 'REFRESH' MNEMONIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg001 8.3 'START' AT LAST FIELD IN IOLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 8.4 'RB' ON MESSAGE MNEMONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 8.5 MULTIPLE CONFIGURATION FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 8.6 MODIFIED REQUIRED FIELD VALIDATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 8.7 ADDITION OF COLOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 8.7.1 STYLE SHEETS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 8.7.2 LOCAL FIELD DEFINITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 8.7.3 BASICINTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 8.8 ALPHANUMERIC HELP ID'S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 8.9 INCREASED PERFORMANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 9.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 10.0 PROBLEMS CORRECTED FROM PREVIOUS RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 11.0 NOTES AND CAUTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 1.0 OVERVIEW Presentation Services 3.3B is a set of tools designed to help create and maintain data entry and display forms for application development and is composed of two major components: The Form Builder and the Form Runtime. PS Forms Management is one member of the Presentation Services family of tools. The others are the PS Menu System and the PS Help System. PS 3.3B, an enhanced version of its predecessor, PS 3.3A, adds flexibility and creativity to designing user-friendly applications. Existing BASIC applications can easily incorporate PS functionality with the aid of one . new feature, ROOTWINDOW. 2.0 REQUIREMENTS 2.1 BOSS/VS The minimum O/S level required to run PS 3.3B is 8.6/9.6/10.6H. PC's with color monitors require MAI PC/TERM to support the new color feature. Approximate Disk Requirements: PS 3.3B Installed with PSDEMO files retained 5.05 MB PS 3.3B Installed without PSDEMO files 4.67 MB Each Form Set Requires (Initially) 0.07 MB 2.2 BOSS/IX The minimum O/S level required to run PS 3.3B is 7.5B *20. PC's with color monitors require MAI PC/TERM to support the new color feature. Approximate Disk Requirements: PS 3.3B Installed with PSDEMO files retained 2.56 MB PS 3.3B Installed without PSDEMO files 2.41 MB. Each Form Set Requires (Initially) 0.05 MB 2.3 BOSS/VX ON GPx SERIES SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg002 The minimum O/S level required to run PS 3.3B is 1.0D *03. PC's with color monitors require MAI PC/TERM to support the new color feature. Approximate Disk Requirements: PS 3.3B Installed with PSDEMO files retained 2.91 MB PS 3.3B Installed without PSDEMO files 2.72 MB. Each Form Set Requires (Initially) 0.05 MB INSTALLATION/PROCEDURES ON BOSS/VS To install/reinstall Presentation Services 3.3B onto a BOSS/VS system, perform the following steps: _________________________________NOTE______________________________ * Currently, ORIGIN and OFFICE Products ship with the menu system, * * PS 3.1A. PS 3.3B includes the same data files and programs that * * PS 3.1A and PS 3.3A contain, therefore, only PS 3.3B is needed * * on the system. If multiple copies of PS exist, condense all * * copies of PS (3.1A and 3.3A) to one family before installing * * PS 3.3B. * *___________________________________________________________________* 1. Set the correct prefix so that the PS 3.3B files will be restored to the proper family. Unlike PS 3.1A, this family does not have to be the default family. If PS 3.1A already exists on a family then PS 3.3B should be installed onto that family. !PREFIX (FAMILY).PS. 2. Using the SAVERESTORE utility, restore all files from the tape to the system. Verify that the files are being restored to the correct family. 3. Exit the SAVERESTORE utility and run the PS INSTALL program. to complete the installation. o From Command mode enter the following: !BASIC INSTALL OR !INSTALL o From BASIC enter the following: >RUN "INSTALL" This INSTALL program will copy certain files to the default family and to the system node. It can be executed any number of times without fear of losing data or functionality. 3.1 EXECUTING PS ON BOSS/VS The following explanation shows how to access the Form Builder or Menu Builder menus. 1. Set the correct prefix so that the PS 3.3B files can be accessed from BASIC. Make your user prefix the primary node if you don't want programs to be stored on the PS node. NOTE: For PS Runtime, no special prefix is necessary. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg003 !PREFIX (family).USERNODE.,.PS.,.PS.TOOLS. 2. Enter the Form Builder menu by executing the FBMAIN program. o From Command mode enter the following: !BASIC FBMAIN o From BASIC enter the following: >RUN "FBMAIN" 3. Enter the Menu Builder menu by executing the MBMAIN program. o From Command mode enter the following: !BASIC MBMAIN o From BASIC enter the following: >RUN "MBMAIN" INSTALLATION/PROCEDURES ON BOSS/IX To install/reinstall Presentation Services 3.3B onto a BOSS/IX system, perform the following steps: Install the PS 3.3B files using the EPS saveset. o ADMIN> install cs EPS NOTE: Device name, 'cs', should be changed to 'ts' if installing from 1/2" tape. 4.1 EXECUTING PS ON BOSS/IX The following explanation shows how to access the Form Builder or Menu Builder menus. 1. Create a user directory to store user programs. ADMIN> makedir /PS/username Where /username is the name of the PS user. Next go into BASIC and write the following program that will be executed by the operator: ADMIN> basic s=325 READY> 10 REM "PROGRAM TO RUN FORMS" 20 PREFIX "/PS/username /PS /PS/tools" 30 RUN "FBMAIN" 40 END > SAVE "/PS/username/PGMNAME" NOTE: Statement 30 should be '30 RUN "MBMAIN"' if executing the menu system instead of the form builder. 2. From BASIC, return to ADMIN to make the program executable by all users. Then access the operator info utilities. READY> quit ADMIN> filemodes +x +x /PS/username/PGMNAME ADMIN> oprinfo o The operator information menu will be displayed. Select the SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg004 option to add an operator. o Enter an operator name. o Change the home directory to /PS/username. o Modify the initial program. Select 'other' and type in the following: /bin/basic,s=325,-nr,pgm=/PS/username/PGMNAME INSTALLATION/PROCEDURES ON BOSS/VX FOR U.S. AND CANADA PS 3.3B resides on the BOSS/VX operating system tape as the product code PS. To install/reinstall Presentation Services 3.3B, perform the following steps. 1) If the system is powered down, power it up and login as root/super-user in command mode. If the system is booted login as root/super-user in command mode. 2) Shut the system down to single user mode by using the command 'shutdown -i1 -gx' (where x= the number of seconds to wait). After the number seconds you gave the command have passed, you will be prompted with: Do you want to continue (y/n)? Enter 'y' You will be prompted with: Type Ctrl-d to proceed with normal startup, (or give root password for system maintenance): Enter the 'root' password. Next you will be prompted with: Enter terminal type (default is TERM=dt4313) TERM= Enter your terminal type or . 3) At the command mode prompt enter the command mbfinstall . The following messages will be displayed: Installing products on / Insert tape and press when ready ... 4) Insert the tape containing the package(s) you wish to install in the tape drive and enter . A message telling you that the tape is an operating system tape, followed by a prompt to continue is displayed. Enter . Messages will be displayed telling you the procedure is skipping to the part of the tape containing the package(s). Next, the MBF Product Installation Procedure menu is displayed. Each page of the display will contain up to 15 packages for installation. The display will have the package name and a short description of the package. The bottom of the display gives the SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg005 installation procedure options. 5) Enter the number 15 followed by a to install Presentation Services. After entering a , the following message will display: Install Product(s) # Are you sure (y/n)? If you answer 'y', , to this question, the number will be added to the list and you will be returned to the menu. If you answer 'n', , the number will not be added and you will be returned to the menu. 6) After you have entered the number for Presentation Services 3.3B to install, enter 's', . The procedure will display the number and name of the package being installed. It will next install the package, displaying the files as they are being written to disk. You are now done with the installation of PS 3.3B. 9) Enter '^d and 2' to return to multi-user mode or '^d and 0' to shut the system down. 5.1 EXECUTING PS ON BOSS/VX The following explanation shows how to access the Form Builder or Menu Builder menus. 1. Log on as root and access the operator information utilities. # oprinfo o The operator information menu will be displayed. Select the option to add an operator. o Enter an operator name. o Change the home directory to /usr2/PS/username. o Set the program to the following: /usr/mbf/bin/basic s=325 -nr pgm=/usr2/PS/username/PGMNAME 2. Go into BASIC and write the following program that will be executed by the operator: # basic s=325 READY> 10 REM "PROGRAM TO RUN FORMS" 20 PREFIX "/usr2/PS/username /usr/mbf/PS /usr/mbf/PS/tools" 30 RUN "FBMAIN" 40 END > SAVE "/usr2/PS/username/PGMNAME" NOTE: Statement 30 should be '30 RUN "MBMAIN"' if executing the menu system instead of the form builder. 6.0 INTERNATIONAL INSTALLATION For the initial installation of PS at international sites, please follow the installation instructions on the previous pages and above. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg006 NOTE: GPx ONLY: Presentation Services 3.3B will not be included on the operating system tape, but will be delivered on a separate tape. 6.1 REINSTALLATION ON BOSS/VS If an upgrade to a new level of PS or reinstallation of a current level is taking place and PS messages have been translated into another language, the PS message runtime file will need to be rebuilt. The runtime file '().PS.MSGFILE.PS' will be overwritten during an upgrade or re-installation. The file containing all the translated messages, 'MSGA.PS', will not be affected. In order to rebuild the message file, the steps below need to be followed: o Verify that the prefix is set to '(FAMILY).USERNODE.,.PS., .PS.TOOLS.' o RUN "MSGMAIN" o Select the Build runtime file option from the menu. o Specify 'PS' as the message set file. o All the available languages will be listed. Select those that will be placed in the runtime file. o When is pressed, the new PS runtime file will be created. Now PS applications can access the correct translated PS runtime message file. 6.2 REINSTALLATION ON BOSS/IX If an upgrade to a new level of PS or reinstallation of a current level is taking place and PS messages have been translated into another language, the PS message runtime file will need to be rebuilt. The runtime file '/PS/MSGFILE.PS' will be overwritten during an upgrade or re-installation. The file containing all the translated messages, 'MSGA.PS', will not be affected. In order to rebuild the message file, the steps below need to be followed: o Verify that the prefix is set to '/usernode /PS /PS/tools'. o RUN "MSGMAIN" o Select the Build runtime file option from the menu. o Specify 'PS' as the message set file. o All the available languages will be listed. Select those that will be placed in the runtime file. o When is pressed, the new PS runtime file will be created. Now PS applications can access the correct translated PS runtime message file. 6.3 REINSTALLATION ON BOSS/VX If an upgrade to a new level of PS or reinstallation of a current level is taking place and PS messages have been translated into another language, the PS message runtime file will need to be rebuilt. The runtime file '/usr/mbf/PS/MSGFILE.PS' will be overwritten during an upgrade or reinstallation. The file containing all the translated messages, 'MSGA.PS', will not be affected. In order to rebuild the message file, the steps below need to be followed: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg007 o Verify that the prefix is set to '/usernode /usr/mbf/PS /usr/mbf/PS/tools' o RUN "MSGMAIN" o Select the Build runtime file option from the menu. o Specify 'PS' as the message set file. o All the available languages will be listed. Select those that will be placed in the runtime file. o When is pressed, the new PS runtime file will be created. Now PS applications can access the correct translated PS runtime message file. PORTING PS FORM AND MENU FILES Presentation Services Form and Menu files can be ported from a BOSS/VS or a BOSS/IX machine to the BOSS/VX machine using the intersystem transport. 7.1 PS MENU SYSTEM The following files need to be ported for the Menu System: SPx: names would be: /PS/MSMF /PS/MSH1 and /PS/MSH2-->HELP FILES MPx names would be: .PS.MSMF and .PS.MSSF .PS.MSH1 and .PS.MSH2 7.2 PS FORM BUILDER When transferring forms to the GPx system, port only the source form files. DO NOT PORT THE COMPILED FORM FILE. You will need to recompile your forms once you get them on the destination system. The following lists example form source files: SPx: /PS/FS1.ENG /PS/FS2.ENG /PS/FS3.ENG /PS/FS4.ENG MPx: .PS.FS1.ENG .PS.FS2.ENG .PS.FS3.ENG .PS.FS4.ENG ALL programs created and associated files must also be transferred. Programs will need to be modified to use only BB90 directives. Bring the files over using cread but do not perform doing the conversion during porting. Then run BQR to convert the files. NEW FEATURES 8.1 ROOTWINDOW With the addition of ROOTWINDOW, developers will be able to gradually integrate PS forms with existing applications. Developers will not have SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg008 to worry about saving BASIC screens before popping up a form and then redisplaying the initial screen after the form is removed. PS 3.3B will save the current screen, called the "root window", as a form when an application initially displays a form. Only the background and foreground characteristics will be saved. If there are reverse video or graphic characters on the screen, they will not be saved. When the 'pop up' form is hidden, PS will repaint only the portion of the screen that was covered by the form. How to use ROOTWINDOW: o The use of root window is optional. o A successful SETFORMFILE must have previously taken place. o SYNTAX - OPENFORM(LU) "ROOTWINDOW" Example: 0010 SETFORMFILE "FSTEST.ENG" 0020 OPENFORM(1)"ROOTWINDOW"; REM Activate root window feature 0030 REM Print non-PS application screen and do input PRINT (0) (0,20), "BASIC SCREEN", ... 0100 REM User requested a file lookup. Use a PS Form. 0110 OPENFORM(2) "LOOKUP" 0115 REM PS will transmit screen before displaying PS Form" 0120 PRINT(2)'DISPLAY' 140 PRINT(2)'HIDE' REM Lookup Form is removed from the screen and the portion of the BASIC screen that was covered is redisplayed. 150 REM Back to non-PS application screen for I/O. NOTE: The BASIC screen is only transmitted on the initial forms I/O from the application screen. Subsequent forms I/O will not transmit the screen. 8.2 MODIFIED 'REFRESH' MNEMONIC The 'REFRESH' mnemonic now clears the screen and redisplays all open and currently displayed forms. In the previous level, the 'REFRESH' mnemonic would clear the screen and display ALL open forms, whether they were previously displayed or not. 8.3 'START' AT LAST FIELD A new parameter, "LAST", has been added as an option to the 'START' mnemonic. Now input can start at the last field. The parameters available including those in the previous level of PS are: o CURR - start input at the current field o NEXT - start input at the next field in input order o FIRST - start input at the first field in input order o LAST - start input at last field in input order 8.4 'RB' ON MESSAGE MNEMONIC Now a 'RB' mnemonic can be used in conjunction with the 'MESSAGE' mnemonic in PS. The bell will sound prior to waiting for input, after the message displays. The 'RB' will only work with the 'MESSAGE' SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg009 mnemonic. All other occurrences of 'RB' in PS form statements will be ignored. In the previous level of PS, if a 'RB' mnemonic was used with the 'MESSAGE' mnemonic, an error 29 (invalid mnemonic) was returned. 8.5 MULTIPLE CONFIGURATION FILES Now PS forms allows multiple configuration files. PS will search the user's prefix list and the PS node/directory for the configuration file, CONFIG.PS. The Build Configuration File utility, BUILDCONF, will prompt for the path name for the configuration file. The default will be the PS node/directory. 8.6 MODIFIED REQUIRED FIELD VALIDATION A CTL III (accept all) key will not stop at a field that requires a minimum length, if valid data exists in the field. Input and acceptance (ie, ) is not required to fulfill the minimum length when a default value has been specified in the Formbuilder. 8.7 ADDITION OF COLOR The arrival of PS 3.3B brings about color support for forms, borders, text within a form, fields, titles and function keys. The colors of fields, messages, and function keys may be modified at runtime. Forms and form programs designed to use color will also run on non-color terminals. The color attributes are displayed only on devices that support color. On devices that do not support color, the color attributes are ignored and no error occurs. 8.7.1 STYLE SHEETS Color attributes can be defined globally for a set or locally within a form by creating a 'style' sheet. To create a style at the set level, select the option 'Style sheet maintenance' from the Modify Set menu. Once a style is defined at the set level, it can be retrieved for any or all forms in the set. A style can also be created locally within a form by specifying 'custom' as the style name in the form parameter screen. Below is an example of the style definition at the set level followed by a description of a style sheet. (continued on next page) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg010 Set Level _____________________________________________________________________ | MAI Basic Four, Inc | | Presentation Services Form Builder | | |. | Style name: SAMPLE | |Description: Style for partial forms | | |. |Border type: T --------------Border Attributes---------------------| | Title type: D Background N Reverse N Blinking N | |---------------------------Color Forms-------------------------------| |---- Text------- ----Screen------ | | Form: 15 Background Y on 1 0 Black 4 Red | | Title: 4 Background Y on 1 1 Blue 5 Magenta | |Border: 1 Background Y on 4 2 Green 6 Brown | |Fields: 1 Background Y on 7 3 Cyan 7 Lt gray | | |. | F1:1 F2:1 F3:1 F4:1 F5:1 F6:1 F7:1 F8:1 F9:5 F10:2 | | |. | Entries correct? | | |. | F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 | | NEXT DELETE RENAME TRY ON ACCEPT HELP EXIT | |_____________________________________________________________________| Local Level At the Form Parameters screen, specify 'CUSTOM' or for the Style name prompt. A will default the style name to 'CUSTOM'. Once 'CUSTOM' has been specified for the style name, the function key for VISUALS can be used to modify the color attributes for the form. If a name is given for the style that was created in style maintenance, then it is global to the set and the color attributes cannot be modified using the VISUALS function key. The function key STYLES can be used to access the Style Sheet Maintenance program without exiting to the Modify Set menu. 8.7.2 LOCAL FIELD DEFINITION At the local field definition screen within a form, the two color attribute fields have been added. The first color (0-15) defines the text color of the field. The second color (0-7) defines the screen color of the field. The default visual attributes and colors for new fields come from the form's style. 8.7.3 BASIC INTERFACE The colors of the screen, fields, messages and function keys may . be modified at runtime. The mnemonics, 'BLACK', 'BLUE', 'GREEN', 'CYAN', 'RED', 'MAGENTA', 'YELLOW', and 'WHITE' are used to control color. SCREEN/TEXT The screen color may be modified by first setting the 'BACKGR' mnemonic. A color attribute following the 'BACKGR' mnemonic will then set the screen color. The physical screen text color affects all forms, not just the one on which the 'CS' is sent. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg011 Example: PRINT (0,FORM=1)'WHITE', 'BACKGR', 'BLUE', 'CS' In the example above, the screen is cleared initially, then the screen color is set to blue and all text displayed will be white. FIELDS The color attributes are assigned to fields by inserting a color mnemonic in the IOLIST preceding the fields to be changed. Example: PRINT (0,FORM=1) #FIELD1$, 'WHITE', 'BACKGR', 'RED', #FIELD2$, #FIELD3$ In the example above, the color definition of FIELD1# is not changed, but fields FIELD2# and FIELD3# have been changed to display white text on a red background. MESSAGES Color attributes can be assigned to messages using the color mnemonics preceding the message mnemonic. Example: PRINT (0,FORM=1)'WHITE', 'BACKGR', 'RED', 'MESSAGE'("Please Re-Enter") In the example above, the message, 'Please Re-Enter', will be displayed in white on a red background. FUNCTION KEYS Color attributes can be assigned to function keys using the color numbers with the setkeys mnemonic. Syntax: PRINT (FORM UNIT)'SETKEYS'("FKEY#:TEXT:TYPE:COLOR#; ...") Example: PRINT (0,FORM=1)'SETKEYS'("1:NEXT:N:1;2:PREV:P:1;3:EDIT:E:3") In the example above, Fkey 1 will display the value 'NEXT' in blue, Fkey 2 will display the value 'PREV' in blue and Fkey 3 will display the value 'EDIT' in cyan. 8.8 ALPHANUMERIC HELP ID'S Now alphanumeric characters can be used as help text identifiers, increasing the number of help id's over 999. The help id field is a string field without character validation. Any alphanumeric character combination is valid in the form; A-Z, a-z, 0-9. Any of the following are valid help id's: A10 10Z SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg012 ap1 1ap 10A 1Ap The following examples would be invalid: A*1 E*1 8.9 INCREASED PERFORMANCE Performance enhancements have been added to the display of menus and repeating groups. 9.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION Title Manual # o Business Basic 90 TM Reference Manual M6262 o Presentation Services Forms Management User Guide MO144 o Presentation Services Help and Menu Management User Guide MO173 o PS Forms Quick Reference Card MO169 o MAI PC/TERM User Guide MO218A o MAI PC/TERM Quick Reference Card MO231A 10.0 PROBLEMS CORRECTED FROM PREVIOUS VERSIONS Listed below are problems corrected in PS 3.3B*04 that existed in previous versions of Presentation Services. o Allows backspace to left of field o Form display problem corrected on the 7270 terminals o Help text incorrectly displayed function key eight instead of ACCEPT o With no styles defined, NEXT key displays data o Error 14 in BUILDCONF if bad family name entered o Insert mode not allowed on masked fields with only ALX# o Function keys should default to same color as form o Error 43 at line 1430 in FBMKFORMAT o Incorrect path in UPGRADE program o Error 14 from demo menu o Edit mode displays extra character o Help for set default function keys displays form/menu function keys o Error 41 printing form o Error 41 in UPGRADE program o Error 39 in BLACKJACK if ESCape pressed o Workaround added to local field definition since BASIC time out not corrected in this release o Some words truncated in PS demo help text o Double borders not printing o Menu system security problems o Increased number of pages in list forms, list menus, list form sets, and list menu sets from 10 to 50 11.0 NOTES AND CAUTIONS 1. If a switch box is used with two different types of terminals, possible error 47's and 26's may occur after switching terminals in the middle of a FORMS session. This occurs because PS polls the terminal once at the beginning of the FORMS session. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg013 2. A field defined as reverse video in the Form Builder will not display in reverse video if MAI PC/TERM is being used to access the system on a color device. The reverse video attribute is ignored so the colors selected for the field will not be reversed on display. Workaround: Modify the IOLIST containing the field which is to display in reverse video to include 'BR' before the field and 'ER' after the field. 3. Putting a password on any of the Form Builder menu options, then entering an invalid password, will result in an MS Error 58 message. Pressing after the error message will return the user to BASIC. To continue, the user should type RUN "FBMAIN". 4. ROOTWINDOW will not function properly when using a DT-4314 (rev L.) connected to port 0 or 1 (from the CMB board) on a BOSS/IX System. This situation has 2 main causes: (1) Ports 0 and 1 share a small buffer chip which can overflow due to the speed of transmission of the screen data. (2) Transmission of screen data on BOSS/IX systems was not a supported functionality until special support was added through BASIC only. PS code is in 'C'. 5. When using the PT-4229 printer in 8-bit mode to print forms, select Font 2 to access the appropriate form drawing characters to produce 'smooth' form borders. 7. PS 3.3B contains performance improvements for the menu system. Existing menu sets must be rebuilt in order to obtain the improved performance. Run the program BUILDMENU and enter your menu set name and language (or CR for all menu sets). 8. An error 4, 'DISK NOT READY' is returned attempting I/O to the channel opened for ROOTWINDOW on the SPx series only. 9. If you are accessing PS forms via MAI PC/TERM, and you experience unusual behavior (i.e., 'terminal' appears to hang when you enter edit mode and begin deleting characters from a masked string field) please check your CONFIG.SYS file for the number of FILES and BUFFERS. FILES = 26 and BUFFERS = 20 are the recommended settings. These values may be increased/decreased to fit the exact configuration of your PC device. Please refer to the MAI PC/TERM documentation for more detailed information. 10. In order to use background text colors through BASIC, you must access them in the following way: SETFORMFILE "form set name" OPENFORM (FORMUNT) "FORM NAME" PRINT (FORMUNT) 'textcolor', 'BACKGR' 'screencolor', 'CS'; PRINT 'SB' - OR - PRINT (FORMUNT) 'textcolor', 'CS'; PRINT 'SB' 11. The Test Drive program generator, when it detects a repeating block, will generate a program that requests input for all the fields above the repeating block, for the repeating block, then for all the fields after the repeating block. If the input order of the fields has been changed by the user the Test Drive program will ignore the user defined input order. This will be fixed in a future release of PS. 12. Entering CTRL-Y at various Form Builder prompts can cause errors. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg014 This is due to a problem in BASIC which exists on SPx and GPx. The value of CTRL-Y is returned by BASIC as null and therefore the keystroke is not trapped and rejected. This is expected to be fixed in a future release of BASIC. 13. When using a DT-4314 or MAI PC/TERM configured as a DT-4314 the first I/O done to a form will cause the typeahead buffer to be cleared. Subsequent I/O's to the form will not cause the buffer to be cleared. 14. MPx/SPx ONLY - Do not use an '&' in the title of a form. If an '&' is present, the title will be truncated at the point where the '&' is encountered and 'garbage' characters may be displayed in the first field of the form. 15. Attempting to use the 'Try-On' function from the Style Sheet Maintenance option of the Modify Set menu will result in a 'Form not found' error message if the language code is not 'ENG'. To correct this problem, load the program FBSTYLES. Statement 2130 reads as follows: 2130 LET TMPSET$=PATH$+"FS"+FSETNAME$+"."+LANGUAGE$ Modify it to read as follows: 2130 LET TMPSET$=PATH$+"FS"+FSETNAME$+"."+BLDLANG$ Save the program. ORIGINATOR: Jackie Shea SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB022 Pg015 FIB 00023 10/11/90 *** Notes and Cautions for OFFICE 3.2B on SPx & MPx [ WPSF 641 ] *** MPx Do not use T160 on MAI OFFICE. The terminal ID is interpreted as a null value. To use any terminal above T131 you will need to increase the number of records for index file MSSY00 to that terminal number or higher to prevent an Error 2 in program EFSO31 and EFSO30. SPx Five data files (MSOP05, PSPS00, PSPS01, WPDM01 & WPDP00) on the Office 3.2B Domestic tape for 7.4B and 7.5B have incorrect attributes (actual record number is larger than maximum number) which may cause a problem. To prevent any problem from occurring, do an "frepair" on these data files. ORIGINATOR: Moniereh Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB023 Pg001 FIB 00024 11/02/90 *** MAI OFFICE 3.2B*37 for SPx Software Announcement [ WPSS 183 ] *** INTRODUCTION MAI Basic Four, Inc. is pleased to announce the availability of MAI OFFICE 3.2B*37. MAI OFFICE 3.2B*37 supports five new printers. The new printers are included in the following list. o PT-4225/4226 - 80/132 column/dot matrix o PT-4227/4228 - 80/132 column/dot matrix o PT-4229 - Page Printer MAI OFFICE is a complete integrated Office Automation package for the 2000/2500/3000/4000 series computers. MAI OFFICE is composed of the following modules: o MAI Business WORDTM - Word Processor o MAI Business MATHTM - Spreadsheet o MAI Business GRAPHTM - Graphics o MAI Business EXECTM - Desktop Functions o MAI Business MAILTM - Electronic Mail o MAI Business DATATM - Data Management o Presentation ServicesTM/Printer System NOTE: ORIGIN 2.1B or above is recommended for Letter Generation capability on MAI OFFICE 3.2B. *********************************************************** * Please read the installation instructions (section 2) * * before attempting to install MAI OFFICE or any of its * * modules. * * * * MAI OFFICE 3.2B*37 requires operating system 7.5B*20 * * or above for supporting the five new printers. * * * * MAI GRAPH 3.2B*37 will only work on operating system * * 7.5B. * *********************************************************** *********************************************************** * MAI OFFICE 3.2B requires certain peripheral hardware * * revision levels. * * Please see section 1. * *********************************************************** Copyright 1990 by MAI Basic Four, Inc. All rights reserved. T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S 1.0 PRODUCT DEFINITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 INSTALLATION AND DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS. . . . . 1 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg001 2.0 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.1 NEW INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.2 UPGRADE INSTALLATION - MAI OFFICE 3.2A TO 3.2B . . . . . 5 2.3 UPGRADE INSTALLATION - OMS AND MAI OFFICE 3.1A . . . . . 5 3.0 CONVERSION TO MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3.1 CONVERSION FROM PREVIOUS LEVELS OF OFFICE/OMS. . . . . . 8 3.2 CONVERSION OF DATAWORD TO BUSINESS WORD. . . . . . . . . 10 4.0 WPDU70 - BIT CONVERSION PROGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 4.1 OMS 2.1 CONVERSION FROM 13XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 5.0 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . 16 5.1 SET ONE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 5.2 SET TWO OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 6.0 MAI BUSINESS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 6.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS DATA. . 19 6.2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 6.2.1 MAI OFFICE 3.2B WITH MAI ORIGIN 2.1A . . . . . . . . . 20 7.0 MAI BUSINESS GRAPH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 7.1 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 7.2 CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 7.3 PLOTTERS FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 7.4 PT-4229 AND GRAPH DRIVERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 7.5 CURSOR CONTROL IN GRAPHMAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 7.6 HELPFUL HINTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 8.0 MAI BUSINESS MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 8.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MAIL. . 26 8.1.1 CONFIGURING THE 2000/2500/3000/4000. . . . . . . . . . 26 8.1.2 STARTING MAI BUSINESS MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 9.0 MAI BUSINESS MATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 9.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MATH. . 29 10.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 11.0 CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 11.1 MENU SYSTEM FOR MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B. . . . . . . . . . . 30 11.2 TEXT FILE REBUILD CHANGES FOR 3.2B . . . . . . . . . . 32 11.2.1 TEXT FILE REBUILD INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 12.0 INTERNATIONAL TRANSLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 12.1 MESSAGE EDITOR GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 12.2 MESSAGE IMPLANTER INSTALLATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . 38 12.3 TRANSLATION OF BUSINESS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 12.4 TRANSLATION OF MAI BUSINESS GRAPH. . . . . . . . . . . 40 12.4.1 TRANSLATION OF PROMPTS AND ERROR MESSAGES. . . . . . . 40 12.4.2 TRANSLATING HELP MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 12.5 TRANSLATION TABLE MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 13.0 PRINTERS CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 13.1 NEW PRINTERS vs TERMINALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 1.0 PRODUCT DEFINITION MAI OFFICE consists of the following modules: MAI Business WORD MAI Business MATH SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg002 MAI Business GRAPH MAI Business MAIL MAI Business DATA Presentation Services/Printer System 1.1 INSTALLATION AND DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS Installation requirements: - Public Keys for: MOW, MOE, GRF, MOC, MOM - Presentation Services - Current OS release (7.5B*20 or above) and OFFICE release (3.2B*37) for supporting PT-4225/PT-4226, PT-4227/PT-4228, and PT-4229 printers. DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS: Module Size (in MB) Business WORD 13.7 Business GRAPH 0.6 Business MATH 1.1 Business EXEC 3.7 Business DATA 8.5 Business MAIL 0.5 Presentation Services/Menu System 2.2 ----------- 36.1 =========== 1.2 PERIPHERAL HARDWARE REVISION LEVEL REQUIREMENTS For MAI OFFICE 3.2B, certain minimum hardware revision levels are required: Terminals DT-4309 Rev. E DT-4310 Rev. D DT-4312 Rev. K DT-4313 Rev. E DT-4314 Rev. L or above NOTE: DT-4314 needs Rev. L for PT-4225/PT-4226, PT-4227 and PT-4228. Printers PT-4223 Firmware Rev. X6 or above PT-4225 Firmware Rev. 4.02 or above PT-4226 Firmware Rev. 4.02 or above PT-4227 Firmware Rev. 1.21/Res. 1.11 or above PT-4228 Firmware Rev. 1.21/Res. 1.11 or above PT-4229 Firmware Rev. 16 or above 2.0 INSTALLATION Please read the installation instructions carefully before attempting installation. MAI OFFICE tapes will be distributed containing all modules of MAI OFFICE. All MAI OFFICE modules require a public key (except the printer system and Presentation Services). The public key is a number in hexadecimal SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg003 notation which uniquely applies to that particular module of MAI OFFICE and that particular system. WITHOUT THE PROPER KEYS, MAI OFFICE WILL NOT RUN. The tape containing MAI OFFICE will be accompanied by a release memo listing a 'Public Key' for these MAI OFFICE module purchased by the user:. MOC, MOW, MOE, MOM, MOP, MOS and MOG (MOG and GRF are equivalent). The modules MOP, MOD and MOS do not require a public key. After installation of files and keys, please see instructions for each module elsewhere in this announcement for module specific installation instructions. The installation instructions are broken into three divisions: A) New Installation B) Upgrade 3.2A to 3.2B C) Upgrade MAI OFFICE 3.1A and OMS Please see the appropriate section for installation instructions. 2.1 NEW INSTALLATION Before MAI OFFICE can be used, it must be installed on the fixed disk, drive 0. The installation procedure should be run in single user mode--it is assumed that the system has been booted and is . rooted on the root partition. The MAI OFFICE programs and data files will reside on a single MCS cartridge or 1/2 inch tape. Figure 2-1 shows the list of MAI OFFICE module names. __________________________________________________________________________ . | |. | Figure 2-1 MAI OFFICE Module Names | | |. | MOW - Business WORD | | MOC - Business MATH | | MOD - Business DATA | | MOE - Business EXEC | | MOM - Business MAIL | | MOG - Business GRAPH | | **MOP - Printer System | | **MOS - Menu System | | **EPS - Presentation Services | | DSS - Decision Support Software (Delivered with the O.S.) | | |. | ** = Must Be Installed | |__________________________________________________________________________|. The public key should be entered during the installation procedure after the corresponding program files have been installed (i.e., the public key for EXEC should be entered after the MOE program files have been installed). WITHOUT THE PROPER KEYS, MAI OFFICE WILL NOT RUN. NOTE: Refer to section 8 for GRAPH module installation. STEP 1: You should be in single user mode so if you are not, at the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: shutdown -- -1 -s SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg004 STEP 2: Insert the cartridge containing MAI OFFICE into the MCS drive and turn the lock lever or insert 1/2 inch tape into the streamer. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: install dd MOP MOW xxx xxx ... press the RETURN key. Where dd stands for 'ts' if you are in stalling from 1/2 inch MTS, or 'cs' if you are installing from 1/4 inch MCS. The xxx is the three character name of each module that has been ordered (see figure 3-1). The program searches for each module on the MCS cartridge, or 1/2 inch tape; displays its label, and begins copying files. The program displays the name of each file as it is copied. Enter the public key for that particular module. When all modules have been installed, the program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> STEP 3: Only program files have been installed. The data files must be restored to disk. WARNING: DO NOT ENTER MULTI-USER MODE BEFORE PROCEEDING, OR THE '/tmp/modata' FILE WILL BE ERASED. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: /tmp/modata Then press the RETURN key. The '/tmp/modata' is an executable file containing a list of data . files needed for first time installations of MAI OFFICE. You will be asked whether each data file should be restored unless you select the "off" option - meaning to install all files in the filelist - on the first file. Data files are copied. The program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> STEP 4: From Basic, do a start of 256. Load /PS/MSDISPLAY, change the following statements as follows: 3429 IF DBPORT > 0 THEN CLOSE(DBPORT) 3430 IF STATPORT > 0 THEN CLOSE(STATPORT) STEP 5: To start MAI OFFICE, run the oprinfo utility and set up an account with the home directory= /oms and the initial program as: /bin/basic,-q,s=64,pgm=MS,-nr,'prefix "/oms /PS /PS/tools"' SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg005 The /PS/tools is only required when the user wants to modify menus. STEP 6: When the prompt, "PLEASE HAVE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR SET DATE FORMAT (CR)" appears, the user should go into the OS utilities and set the Date and Time, then RUN "MS". The first time the user RUNs "MS" they will automatically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. Refer to Section 6 for further instructions. 2.2 UPGRADE INSTALLATION - MAI OFFICE 3.2A TO 3.2B Make a current backup of all MAI OFFICE files to tape, including /oms, /PS and /etc/level files. When upgrading MAI OFFICE 3.2A to MAI OFFICE 3.2B, only the programs should be restored from the new release tape. It is not neccessary to reinstall the /PS programs, the EPS module. No conversion is necessary. To use the newly released dictionary with the added plurals, restore: WPWF00 and WPWF01. 2.3 UPGRADE INSTALLATION - OMS AND MAI OFFICE 3.1A **************************************************************** * * * PLEASE MAKE BACKUPS OF ALL CURRENT OMS OR OFFICE DATA FILES !* * IF THE CONVERSION IS INTERRUPTED, BACKUPS WILL BE NEEDED TO * * RECOVER THE SYSTEM !!!!! * * * **************************************************************** **************************************************************** * * * MAKE SURE ALL DOCUMENTS IN WORD PROCESSING ARE FREE OF * * PROBLEMS. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TEXT FILE REBUILD BE USED * * TO REBUILD ALL TEXT FILES BEFORE CONVERSION !!!! * * * **************************************************************** The installation procedure should be run in single user mode--it is assumed that the system has been booted and is rooted on the root partition. Figure 2-2 shows the list of MAI OFFICE module names. __________________________________________________________________________ . | |. | Figure 2-2 MAI OFFICE Module Names | | |. | MOW - Business WORD | | MOC - Business MATH | | MOD - Business DATA | | MOE - Business EXEC | | MOM - Business MAIL | | MOG - Business GRAPH | | **MOP - Printer System | | **MOS - Menu System | | **EPS - Presentation Services | | DSS - Decision Support Software (Delivered with the O.S.) | | |. | ** = Must Be Installed | |__________________________________________________________________________|. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg006 STEP 1: You should be in single user mode so if you are not, at the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: shutdown -- -1 -s STEP 2: Insert the cartridge containing MAI OFFICE into the MCS drive and turn the lock lever, or if 1/2 inch tape insert into the streamer. At the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> enter: install dd MOP MOW xxx xxx ... Then press the RETURN key. Where dd stands for 'ts' if you are in stalling from 1/2 inch tape and 'cs' if you are installing from 1/4 inch tape. The xxx is the three-character name of each module that has been ordered (see figure 3-6). The program searches for each module on the MCS cartridge, or 1/2 inch tape; displays its label, and begins copying files. The program displays the name of each file as it is copied. Enter the public key for that particular module. When all modules have been installed, the program ends and the system returns to the system administrator prompt: ADMIN> ****************************************************** * * * WARNING: DO NOT EXECUTE THE /tmp/modata FILE. THIS * * PROCEDURE WILL DESTROY DATA FILES !!!!!!! * * * ****************************************************** STEP 3: The NEW data files must be restored. This should be done using trestore: ADMIN>trestore dev=dd name=setname dups=skip -v Replace 'setname' in the above example with each setname being installed. For example: MOWSET, MOESET, MODSET, etc. STEP 4: Some data files which already exist must also be restored from the tape because of changes made to the file stuctures. Use trestore to restore these from the tape. ADMIN>trestore dev=cs name=MOSSET /oms/MSFI00 -v ADMIN>trestore dev=cs name=MOWSET /oms/WPHF* -v ADMIN>trestore dev=cs name=MOWSET /oms/WPDM02 -v ADMIN>trestore dev=cs name=MOWSET /oms/WPPU00 -v When restoring the WPHF* files, a message will appear stating the WPHF10 was not found due to the fact this is a program. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg007 STEP 5: If MAI Business WORD was installed and the customer had a previous version of word processing (either OMS 7.3.0 or MAI OFFICE 3.1A), a conversion must be done. Please see Section 4 for conversion instructions. STEP 6: From BASIC. do a start 256. Load /PS/MSDISPLAY, change the following statements as follows: 3429 IF DBPORT > 0 THEN CLOSE(DBPORT) 3430 IF STATPORT > 0 THEN CLOSE(STATPORT) STEP 7: To start MAI OFFICE, run the oprinfo utility and set up an . account with the home directory= /oms and the initial program as: /bin/basic,-q,s=64,pgm=MS,-nr,'prefix "/oms /PS /PS/tools"' The /PS/tools is only required when the user wants to modify menus. STEP 8: Before using MAI Business WORD, a Text File Rebuild must be run on all text files. When the prompt, "PLEASE HAVE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR SET DATE FORMAT (CR)" appears, the user should go into the OS utilities and set the Date and Time, then RUN "MS". The first time the user RUNs "MS" they will automatically be required to enter the "SYSTEM" International ID Parameters. Refer to Section 6 for further instructions. 3.0 CONVERSION TO MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B There are two conversions possible. The first conversion is from DataWord and the second conversion is from MAI OFFICE 3.1A or OMS level 7.3.0. The following sections describe the conversion procedures. The first section describes the MAI OFFICE/OMS conversion (Section 3.1). The second section describes the conversion from DataWord to MAI Business WORD 3.2A/B (Section 3.2). 3.1 CONVERSION FROM PREVIOUS LEVELS OF OFFICE/OMS In order to use MAI Business WORD, previous data files need to be converted to MAI OFFICE 3.2A Business WORD. NOTE: For OMS 8.2.3 ONLY, the conversion program, EFSY20, must be run because it creates a new format for EXECUTIVE Functions files: EFOD00 EFSO00 EFTS00 EFTD00 NOTE: The OMS2BW conversion will be performed on all text files that follow the OFFICE naming scheme, (i.e. WPTF0x, where x= alpha numeric code 1,A-Z,a-z.) so be careful the directory path will not include any new files that may have been created with MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg008 ****************************************************************** * * * PLEASE MAKE BACKUPS OF ALL CURRENT OMS OR OFFICE DATA FILES! * * IF THE CONVERSION IS INTERRUPTED, BACKUPS WILL BE NEEDED TO * * RECOVER THE SYSTEM!!!!! * * * * IF AN ERROR OCCURS DURING THIS PROGRAM, IT CANNOT BE RESTARTED * * BUT MUST BE RUN FROM THE BEGINNING WITH THE FILES FROM THE * * ORIGINAL LEVEL. * ****************************************************************** NOTE: All files should be converted before use. If not, MAI Business WORD will fail to operate properly. Enter BASIC by typing 'basic s=128' at the operating system prompt. At the '>' prompt, enter 'RUN "OMS2BW"'. The title line will be displayed and the following prompt will appear: CONVERT OPERATOR ID PARAMETERS MASTER FILE (MSOP00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' to convert, 'N' to not convert or 'END' to stop all conversion. The next prompt will be displayed: CONVERT DOCUMENT HEADER FILE (WPDM00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' to convert. The next prompt will be displayed: CONVERT WP ID PARAMETER FILE (WPID00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' to convert. The next prompt will be displayed: CONVERT MENU SYSTEM STATUS FILE (MSFI00)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'N' NOTE: THIS FILE SHOULD NOT BE CONVERTED! The next prompt will be displayed: CONVERT TEXT FILES (WPPS01 & WPTF0x)? (Y/N/END) Enter a 'Y' to convert. The next prompt will be: SPECIFY CURRENT OMS VERSION (1 -- 8.2.3, 2 -- 8.3.1 or 3.1A, END) If the prior release was OMS 7.21, enter a '1'. If the prior release was OMS 7.30 or MAI OFFICE 3.1A, then enter a '2'. The conversion of text files will begin. The name of each text file will be displayed as it is converted. After conversion, you must execute Text File Rebuild in MAI Business WORD to verify and insure integrity of the converted documents. Conversion to MAI Business WORD is now complete. Please see the SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg009 appropriate section to continue your installation. 3.2 CONVERSION OF DATAWORD 3.0/3.1 TO BUSINESS WORD 3.2A/B This conversion will transfer text stored in DataWord II format to the new MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B Business WORD product. *********************************************************** * * * ALL DATAWORD DOCUMENTS MUST BE FREE OF ANY PROBLEMS FOR * * CONVERSION. IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT DOCUMENT * * REPAIR BE USED ON ALL LIBRARIES PRIOR TO CONVERSION!! * * * *********************************************************** NOTE: In addition to OFFICE programs, DataWord programs must be installed: !WPS.CL !WPS.LN !WPS.OD !WPS.RP These are on the OFFICE release tape, if you are converting a system without DataWord installed. To run this conversion the user must have DataWord level 3.0/3.1. If the DataWord software is on any level before 3.0, then a conversion to 3.0/3.1 must be done prior to running this conversion from DataWord to Business WORD. To initiate the conversion program, the user types the command RUN "DW2BW" from BASIC mode. The screen in figure 3-1 will be displayed to the user who will then supply the necessary information. *********************************************************** * CONVERSION PROGRAM "DW2BW" MUST BE EXECUTED ON THE MPx * * SYSTEM FOR DATAWORD DOCUMENTS BEFORE PORTING THE * * DOCUMENTS TO THE SPX SYSTEM. * *********************************************************** ______________________________________________________________________________. | Figure 3-1 Conversion Screen | |. | | MAI BASIC FOUR, INC. | | (TIME) CONVERT DATAWORD FILES TO BUSINESS WORD (DATE) | |. | | SOURCE NODE: | |. | | Business WORD LIBRARY NODE: | |. | | DOCUMENT FILE NAMES (S=SELECTIVE): | |. | |. TEXT FILE CODE: | |. | | PRINT LOG NOW OR LATER (N/L): | |. | | ENTRIES CORRECT (Y/N)?: | |. | | CTL-I=CR=Default/CTL-II=back up one prompt/CTL-III=All defaults/CTL-IV=Exit | |______________________________________________________________________________ SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg010 SOURCE NODE - node name under which the DataWord document files reside. The default is ().DWDOC. BUSINESS WORD LIBRARY NODE - name of the node under which the user wants to convert Business WORD files. The default is ().OMS. DW DOCUMENT FILE NAMES (S=SELECTIVE) - Enter either one of the control keys - or - S (SELECTIVE) - will cause a separate query to be displayed after the user has responded to all of the prompts on this screen. This query asks for each individual DataWord document file names that the user wishes to convert. The default is all DataWord document files under the SOURCE NODE. TEXT FILE CODE - Business WORD library character (e.g. by entering 'n' all the documents converted will be kept in the library WPTF0n). Possible replies are characters A-Z/a-z with no default. NOTE: If a library already exists for the given TEXT FILE CODE, an error message will be shown and the user will be asked to enter another code. The user has an option to print the log file during the conversion or after the conversion is complete. PRINT LOG NOW OR LATER. 'N' means to print the status of the converted document on the printer as that document is converted. 'L' will cause the program to create a serial file with the name 'CONVTn' (where 'n' is the TEXT FILE CODE) and the status of each converted document will be written into this file so the user can get the printout later. The default to this prompt is N (NOW). After the user answers the replies to the queries and if the user wants to convert only selected DataWord files ('S' was entered for DW DOCUMENT FILE NAMES), the screen will be cleared and the user will be asked to enter the names of the DataWord files to convert with the following prompt: ENTER DataWord FILE NAMES. RETURN FOR END The user will key in the DataWord file names. If an entered DataWord file does not exist, the user will be informed with a message and that entry will not be accepted. If an entered DataWord file has already been entered, a message will be displayed and the duplicate entry will not be accepted. Once the user has entered all document files to be converted, they will be given an option to add or delete file names from the list entered. After the user confirms the list is correct, the question will appear: DO YOU WANT TO DELETE DATAWORD DOCUMENT FILE(S) AFTER THEY ARE SUCCESSFULLY CONVERTED? (Y/N) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg011 'Y' will erase each DataWord document file from the disk once it has been successfully converted to Business WORD. 'N' all DataWord document files will remain on the disk through the conversion until the user removes them on their own. After responding to this question the conversion begins. HELPFUL HINTS: o DataWord documents are allowed twenty-character names while Business WORD allows only six-character document names so the converted documents will be named FLxxxx, where xxxx is a sequential number. The DataWord document name is converted to the document description field in Business WORD so that the user has a mapping of DataWord document name to the FLxxxx document name within Business WORD. The description field in the DataWord document will not be converted. o Conversion of DataWord documents to MAI Business WORD documents will keep the document format intact so the overall appearance of the Business WORD document converted from DataWord will be the same as the DataWord product. In addition, all attributes (bold, underline, superscript and subscript) will be converted from DataWord to Business WORD although the attributes will have a different visual appearance in Business WORD. o During the conversion, the header and footer text in the DataWord documents will be converted as text, becoming part of the body of the document in Business WORD. This text will appear within brackets ("[]") to distinguish it from other text. Headers will be placed before the text of the paragraph it was associated with in DataWord and footers will be placed after the text of a paragraph it was associated with. This header/footer will appear only on the one page where the header/footer began and not on every page as it would have been printed by DataWord. After the conversion has completed, the user will need to manipulate the header/footer text in Business WORD by either deleting it or placing it in a header or footer with the Business WORD functions. This may be done by SELECTing the appropriate header/footer text and using the option to create a header or a footer. o Footnotes will be converted as part of the text of the document and will be placed at the end of the footer. o The Summary and Table of Contents information entered in a DataWord document will not be converted since Business WORD does not support these functions. o The default tab settings in the document format (those a user will see using COMMAND + FORMAT in the DataWord editor) of the DataWord document will be converted as tab settings in the Business WORD document. The other tab settings associated with individual paragraphs in the DataWord document will not be converted. o If the right margin of a DataWord paragraph is beyond 132, the text will be reformatted with a right margin of 132. No text will be lost but tabular information may need to be rearranged once converted to Business WORD. o During the conversion of DataWord II document files, the conversion program will calculate the space required to move the DataWord text SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg012 from the entire document file to the Business WORD library file. If the entire document file contents cannot be converted to the Business WORD library due to lack of available space in the file, the program will log this fact in the log file, abort the conversion of this document file and continue the conversion process with the next document file. o The text file library will be defined with 200000 records, 10000 initial records and 1000 growth. It is estimated that this is enough to convert around 170 normal documents that are five pages in length and sixty lines per page. If the user has more than 170 documents to convert in their DataWord document files, they should plan to convert these document files in groups that do not exceed . the 170 document limit. o Status messages which may appear on the conversion log report with an explanation of each: SUCCESSFUL The document has been converted DOC OPN ERR There was an error in opening a document while testing for availability of file space for this particular DataWord document file. The conversion of this DataWord document file is not undertaken and conversion of the next document file begins. NO SPACE There is not enough file space for this DataWord document file to be converted. Conversion of this document file is not done. In this case, the 'DWDOC' column on the log report will contain the DataWord document file name rather than a document name. Both cases of DOC OPN ERR and NO SPACE must be handled by the operator performing the conversion. In the case of NO SPACE another MAI OFFICE library must be used to convert the remaining DataWord document files. 4.0 WPDU70 - BIT CONVERSION PROGRAM WPDU70 is a 'bit coversion' program. The program may be run only once, it cannot be aborted (using ESCAPE) and there is no user input required. If WPDU70 is interrupted before completion, the affected files MUST BE RESTORED FROM BACKUPS before restarting. WPDU70 creates a log file (BITLOG) which lists each file that has been converted. Text files that are not on-line will not be converted. Files are opened and converted using fully qualified file names based on the location of the file WPDM00. Files in other nodes or directories will not be converted. FILES THAT WILL BE CONVERTED: WPDM00, WPDM04, WPPS00, WPPS01, WPTF0A-WPTF0Z, WPTF01, WPTF0a-WPTF0z PROCEDURE: 1. Complete all other upgrade or conversion procedures. EXAMPLES: Conversion from WP 3.1 to 3.2 if needed. Put new WP program files on the new system. 2. Use Intersystem Transfer or BQR to move all WP datafiles to the new SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg013 system. BE SURE TO SPECIFY THAT THE ABOVE FILES BE TRANSPORTED AS BINARY. ALL OTHER WP DATA FILES ARE TRANSPORTED AS TEXT. 3. Backup all of the WP data files. 4. Run the CONVERT option of BQR or Intersystem Transfer on the WP data files that were transported as TEXT. EXAMPLE: WPDL00 5. Run WPDU70 to convert the WP data files transported as BINARY. NOTE: WPDU70 functions on WP data files only and only those data files that contain binary information. Menu, Operator and Executive Function files are not included. 4.1 OMS 2.1 CONVERSION FROM 13xx Since the conversion of 13xx OMS 2.1 to MPx to 2000/2500/3000/4000 MAI OFFICE 3.2B will only include WPDL00, WPDM00 and the WPTF0& files, the program will bypass files not found with a prompt asking if this is a 13xx conversion. 5.0 INTERNATIONAL ID PARAMETER MAINTENANCE The international ID parameter maintenance program (MSMM40) will automatically be run the first time a user runs "MS" after an international or domestic installation. After the user runs "MS", the prompt: "INTERNATIONAL PARAMETERS ARE NOT SET UP (CR)" will appear. This program allows the MAI OFFICE product to be modified in certain areas to conform to a customer's special needs. There are two distinct sets of parameters that a customer may change: SET ONE: Amount Format Insert Code Characters Overprint Character Hyphenation Character Telephone Format Sign Symbol Spaces ending a sentence SET TWO: Date Format Date Separator Time Format Time Separator Currency Code Position of Currency Code SET ONE contains options which are global for MAI OFFICE. For example, if the telephone format is set to international, then all MAI OFFICE. users will have their telephone numbers unformatted (see below for more detail). CAUTION: Once this set of parameters has been modified, the system will . not allow them to be changed without causing some problems for all MAI OFFICE users. SET TWO contains options which are user independent. As an example, two . different users on the same MAI OFFICE system may use different date and/or time formats. A complete description of each option and use is given below. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg014 5.1 SET ONE OPTIONS Amount Format options - 1. #,###,##0.00 2. #.###.##0,00 3. #B###B##0,00 B=blank These format masks will allow a user to present numeric data in the form that is acceptable for his or her country. Option '1' is most commonly used in the United States while options '2' and '3' are used in Europe. Insert Code Characters options: "<>", "[]", " " The braces ("[]") currently used in MAI OFFICE to indicate insert codes are not available in all ISO character sets so the user has the ability to select characters that are in the character set they would like to use. Overprint Character options: any character Like the insert code, the backslash ("\ ") used as an overprint character in MAI OFFICE is not available in all character sets. This option lets the user specify a different character as the overprint character. NOTE: Overprint character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Hyphenation Character options: any character Same as the Overprint Character. NOTE: This is the character used to separate the word by syllables for hyphenation in the document, IT IS NOT the character used. during the printing process to hyphenate a word (usually a '-'). Also the hyphenation character should not be one of the Insert Code characters. Telephone Format options: D=Domestic, I=International D=Domestic option - formats all telephone numbers in a (AAA)PPP-NNNN format where: AAA=area code (option field) + PPP=prefix + NNNN=number I=International option - no special formatting or input validation will be done. This field will allow up to 15 characters in any form. Sign Symbol options: 1. "CR/DR" 2. "+/-" 3. "()" In the United States, the CR or DR is used to denote positive or negative amounts. In Europe it is more common to use a "+" or "-". This option allows the user to select either. Spaces ending a sentence options: 1 or 2 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg015 In the United States, two spaces follow the sentence punctuation. In most other countries, one space follows the sentence punctuation. This option allows the user to select either. 5.2 SET TWO OPTIONS Date Format options: 1. MMDDYY 2. DDMMYY 3. YYMMDD In addition to the (MMDDYY) format, two other formats are available to the user. Date Separator options: any character The user may have the date displayed in a format other than MM/DD/YY such as MM.DD.YY or MM-DD-YY. Time Format options: D=Domestic, I=International D=Domestic - twelve-hour clock or I=International - twenty-four hour clock. Time Separator options: ".", ":", "N"=Null With this option, the user may see the hours and minutes separated with different options. Currency Code options: any four alpha characters The user may select the characters that will be used as the currency. symbol. Position of Currency Code options: L=LEFT, R=RIGHT United States dollars are displayed with the currency symbol to the left of the actual amount (i.e. $1.98). This is not always true in other countries where the currency symbol may appear on the left or the right of the actual amount. With this option the user may select either. 6.0 MAI BUSINESS DATA 6.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION FOR BUSINESS DATA The Business DATA module is restored on the system using the name MOD for the module name. Please see Business DATA User Guide (M7557). ****************************************************** * * * BUSINESS DATA 3.2B RECOMMENDS DSS LEVEL 2.1B * * * ****************************************************** SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg016 The MAI OFFICE 3.2B system must be set up properly for the use of MAI Business DATA. Since there are two versions of MAI Business DATA now being used and both versions differ from each other, MAI OFFICE must be set up to correctly recognize and use MAI Business DATA. The following steps must be followed to run Business DATA from OFFICE. 6.2 INSTALLATION MAI OFFICE 3.2B no longer uses the command files, emstartmo and startmo. Instead, use the oprinfo utility to create user accounts for each OFFICE/ORIGIN user. The prefix may also be set from a user program. 6.2.1 MAI OFFICE 3.2B WITH MAI ORIGIN 2.1B From ADMIN access the oprinfo utility to create accounts for OFFICE/ORIGIN users as follows: ADMIN> enter: oprinfo return Home directory:/oms Initial Program:/bin/basic,-q.s=64,pgm=MS,-nr, 'prefix"/oms /origin/r21B /PS /PS/tools"' STEP 1: Change /oms/LGQM File The /oms/LGQM file is not needed for ORIGIN 2.1B so it needs to be deleted or moved. If the user intends to use ORIGIN 2.0A with OFFICE in the future, then the /oms/LGQM file should be copied to the /origin/r20a/pgm directory before being deleted. STEP 2: Change 'Executive Query Manager' Jobstep Select 'Presentation Services' from SS.MAIN menu. Create/modify set, at prompt specify 'DP'. Create/modify menu, at prompt specify 'MAIN'. Move cursor to Executive Query Manager option. Move cursor to Jobstep option. Change Jobstep from LGQM to /rt/EQM. EXIT and save changes. STEP 3: Change 'ORIGIN Data Management System' Jobstep Select 'Presentation Serives' from SS.MAIN menu. Create/modify set, at prompt specify 'DP'. Create/modify menu, at prompt specify 'MAIN'. Move cursor to ORIGIN Data Management System option. Move cursor to Jobstep option. Change ORIGIN,256 to OFFICE2ORIGIN,256. EXIT and save changes. For more detailed instructions on menu modification steps, see 'MENU and System Services Reference Manual, M7554 and Presentation Services Reference Manual M0063. STEP 4: Change ORIGIN User Maintenance In the User Maintenance section of ORIGIN, user accounts need to be setup to run ORIGIN2OFFICE when logging off, so they will be returned to the OFFICE SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg017 menu system. 7.0 MAI BUSINESS GRAPH MAI Business GRAPH is a product that allows you to produce quality graphics on a graphics-equipped terminal and/or graphics-supported printers. The module consists of two programs: GRAPHMAKER and GRAPH. GRAPHMAKER is an interactive window-driven graphics editor. It allows the user to create, maintain and display your own graphs. GRAPH allows you the convenience of displaying your graphs once they have been designed and gives you advanced graphics capability using an editor. The following devices are the only supported plotting devices on the SPx series: o PT-4214 Dual Mode Printer o PT-4215 Dot Matrix Printer o PT-4224 Dual Mode Printer o PT-4229 Page Printer o DT-4310 EDT with Graphics Interface Board o DT-4314 Dual Port Terminal o HP 7475A 6-Pen Color Plotter 7.1 INSTALLATION The graph module consists of the following files: /bin/graph /bin/graphmaker /etc/level/GRF /etc/gks/font21 to font26, font99 /etc/grf/help /etc/grf/prompts /etc/plotters /graphics/demo00.data to demo19.data /graphics/bdemo /graphics/demo /graphics/CHART /graphics/clock /graphics/loop STEP 1: If you are updating from a graphics package prior to MAI Business GRAPH 3.1A, delete your existing '/etc/plotters' file using the following command: ADMIN>delete /etc/plotters STEP 2: Configure your plotter devices using the configure utility: ADMIN>configure. The plotters file will automatically be created through this utility. Configure your plotter devices using the options in section 8.3.1. Leave all remaining options at their SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg018 defaults. One of your plotter devices names MUST be called 'default'. If you are modifying a printer device to add or remove spooling, you must remove the device and then add the device with the appropriate . answer for spooling. The option 'Plotter parameters': in the configure menu is used only as a comment field in the plotters file. If an entry is made to this field, it must have 4 colons followed by the comments. No spaces are accepted in this field when entering a comment from the configure utility: Plotter parameters: ::::this,is,a,comment 7.2 CONFIGURATIONS o DT-4310 EDT with a Graphics Interface Board Device Type :graphics terminal Terminal Type :4310 Graphics Terminal Name :default (user selected) o DT-4314 Device Type :graphics terminal Terminal Type :4314 Graphics Terminal Name :default (user selected) o HP 7475A 6-Pen Color Plotter Device Type : printer Printer Type : hpplot Read/Status Timeout : 100 Write Timeout : 100 Graphics Terminal Name : plot The plotter uses a standard VDT cable (907116). The dip switches on the plotter should be set as follows: S2 - ON, S1 - ON, Y - OFF, US - ON, A3 - OFF, B4 - ON, B3 - OFF, B2 - ON, B1 - OFF. o DT-4214 Dual Mode Printer Device Type : printer Printer Type : PT-4214 The graph output size is 8 1/2 x 11 inches. 7.3 PLOTTERS FILE The plotters file uses the following format: User defined name:device:type:print parameters::::: (comments) ___________________________________________________________________ | Fiqure 7-1 Sample '/etc/plotters' file | | |. | Default:T21:4314:::::: graphic terminal | | Plot:T12:hpplot:::::: hpplotter | | PT-4224:P2:PT-4214:/bin/lpr list=p2 -raw -delete ::::: | | PT-4215:P1:PT-4215:/bin/lpr list=p1 -raw -delete ::::: | | T5:T5:4314:::::: graphic terminal | |___________________________________________________________________| SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg019 NOTE: You must have a space before the fourth colon ":", if you are passing print parameters. 7.4 PT-4229 AND GRAPH DRIVERS The BUSINESS GRAPH module now supports the PT-4229 printer as a graphic device. To access the PT-4229 as a graphic device, the user needs to modify the plotters file with the correct device driver. There are six new drivers. They are: 4229H8, 4229M8, 4229L8, 4229H7, 4229M7 and 4229L7. These drivers determine the resolution the graph will be drawn in. The 4229L8 and 4229L7 will draw a graph in 75 dots per inch resolution in 8 or 7-bit respectively. The 4229M8 and 4229M7 will draw a graph in 150 dots per inch resolution in 8 or 7-bit respectively. The 4229H8 and 4229H7 will draw a graph in 300 dots per inch resolution in 8 or 7-bit respectively. The following example is what an entry in the plotters file will look like when using these new drivers: LLASER:P1:4229L8:/bin/lpr list=p1 -raw -delete :::::low resolution By using the editor, the user can modify this entry to meets their requirements. To print in 8-bit mode from BUSINESS WORD In-tray or data processing, the form for this printer (standrd form) under operating system (pparams) should have a 7-bit (S7) translation table. MEMORY _____________________________________________ R | .64 MB | 1.64 MB | 2.64 MB | 4.64 MB | E |-----------|-----------|----------|----------| S | 7-bit | | | | O 75 dpi | & | | | | L | 8-bit | | | | U |-----------|-----------|----------|----------| T | | 7-bit | | | I 150 dpi | | & | | | O | | 8-bit | | | N |-----------|-----------|----------|----------| | | | 7-bit | | 300 dpi | | | & | | | | | 8-bit | | |___________|___________|__________|__________| The following chart illustrates timings when using BUSINESS GRAPH device drivers with the PT-4229. The timings may vary depending on system load at time of graph. (continued on next page) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg020 _____________________________________________________ | 4229 | 19200 BAUD | 9600 BAUD | |---------|---------------------|---------------------| | | GRAPH | SPOOLER | GRAPH | SPOOLER | | 7-bit | | | | | | 75dpi | 16" | 3'25" | 17" | 3'12" | |---------|--------|------------|----------|----------| | 7-bit | | | | | | 150dpi | 37" | 9'58" | 45" | 10'49" | |---------|--------|------------|----------|----------| | 7-bit | | | | | | 300dpi | 2'25" | 37'05" | 2"03" | 39'07" | |---------|--------|------------|----------|----------| | 8-bit | | | | | | 75dpi | 12" | 1"21" | 13" | 1'29" | |---------|_-------|------------|----------|----------| | 8-bit | | | | | | 150dpi | 29" | 4'59" | 29" | 5'20" | |---------|--------|------------|----------|----------| | 8-bit | | | | | | 300dpi | 1'15" | 19'27" | 58" | 19'50" | |_________|________|____________|__________|__________| NOTE: Plotting with 7-bit high resolution does require 1.9MB of disk space and 1.0MB for 8-bit high resolution under /tmp directory on disk 0. 7.5 CURSOR CONTROL IN GRAPHMAKER The cursor control keys can be viewed by pressing the HELP key on your EDT or by pressing CTL - Z. The following are the cursor control keys for GRAPHMAKER: CTL - L Next cell to the right. CTL - H Backspace and next cell to the left. CTL - K Kick UP one cell. CTL - J Jump down one cell. CTL - W Return to the Menu Window. CTL - D Delete character. CTL - F Forward 1 character. CTL - Z Help screen. Backspace Non-destructive Backspace. 7.6 HELPFUL HINTS o The titles across the top of your data screen in GRAPHMAKER should be looked upon as sets of like data. The titles going down the left column of the data screen should be view upon as parts of a set. o Data for individual pie graphs should be entered in one column. o Data for individual line graphs should be entered in one row. o The following will clear a 4310-EDT graphics screen from BASIC: PRINT 'BO',$1B5A471B0C1B5A67$,'EO' o Pressing the ESC key and then DEL key on the EDT will clear a graphics screen. o To clear a 4314 graphics screen from the Keyboard use Function + CLEAR (located under the number 4 key). SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg021 o To clear a 4314 graphics screen from BASIC use: PRINT 'ES","Zr", 8.0 MAI BUSINESS MAIL Business MAIL is the part of MAI OFFICE that allows electronic mail to be sent between two or more local or remote systems. Business MAIL, through the use of X.25 and public networks, or LAN's allows MAI 2000/2500/3000/4000's to exchange messages using the mail feature of MAI Business EXEC. Sending mail to remote locations requires connection to a public or LAN network and the purchase of the proper communications software and hardware. MAI OFFICE 3.2B 8.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MAIL 8.1.1 CONFIGURING THE 2000/2500/3000/4000 Business MAIL is supported on the 2000/2500/3000/ 4000 through X.25 and/or LAN. Please read the File Transfer Facility (FTF) User Reference Manual (M6352) and the BOSS/IX 7.4B Software Announcement for installing X.25 and/or LAN. 8.1.2 STARTING MAI BUSINESS MAIL The SPx systems requires a special procedure for starting MAI OFFICE when using Business MAIL. The special procedure is a file called '/oms/emstartmo'. If this file doesn't exist, the following information will tell you how to create it. You will need to create the following command file for use at the command interpreter to invoke MAI OFFICE. Please note that if you bring up basic and run "MS" you will not be able to use the MAIL portion of MAI OFFICE. For that reason you should always enter the MAI OFFICE system using the command file. The command file is created using the editor VED. The following information should be contained in the file: cd/oms basic lib=/lib/bftf.lib -q pgm=MS -nr or a macro called 'mo': #b mo cd /oms;basic lib=/lib/bftf.lib -q pgm=MS -nr You also have to set up user ID's so you can log onto the system. There are several ways that you can do this. A. You can set up an ID for each person who will be using the system. B. Or you can set up one ID which everyone will use to get on to the system. If you use this method, it is recommended that you not give this ID access to the command interpreter, instead you should use the second procedure given below to get them into the MAI OFFICE system. After selecting one of the methods given above, it is SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg022 necessary to define the parameters for the ID or ID's which you are going to create. One of the parameters that must be defined is what initial program will be run when the user logs on. Below are several suggestions as to how this might be done. A. The ID can be set up to take you directly to the command interpreter. At the command prompt, the user can invoke MAI OFFICE by typing: 'emstartmo' which is the command file defined in above. B. The ID can be set to take the user directly to MAI OFFICE. You do this by entering the following as the initial program: /bin/command,/oms/emstartmo For further information see the documentation for setting up 2000/2500/3000/4000 user accounts. Using this method, the user logs on and goes directly into MAI OFFICE and will then be required to log onto MAI OFFICE. When logging off of MAI OFFICE, the user will be returned to the system log on screen (not to the command prompt). C. A menu item can be set to take them into MAI OFFICE when that option is selected. You can do that with the following procedure: 1. Add the option given below to the selected menu (this will probably be the 2000/2500/3000/4000 main menu which is 'top'). OFFICE -- MAI OFFICE 2. The action step for this menu item is: /bin/command,/oms/emstartmo You should refer to the 2000/2500/3000/4000 user documentation for defining menus if you do not know how to do this. There are 3 steps in configuring MAI OFFICE for remote mail. . STEP 1: The following ID must be set up within MAI OFFICE. The information below assumes that you are familiar with MAI Business EXEC and menu system. If you are not, please refer to the procedures given in the Business EXEC Users Guide (MBF M0044) and MAI OFFICE MENU System Presentation Reference Manual (MBF M0063). Create an ID called MAIL with these parameters: On the General ID Information screen: NOTE: This ID is supplied by MAI OFFICE 3.2B. ____________________________________________________________________ . | |. | DESCRIPTION: ELECTRONIC MAIL SYSTEM ID INITIALS: MAIL | | PASSWORD: (defined by security manager) DEFAULT MENU SET: EP | | LOG: N MENU NAME: MAIN | | CONSOLE MODE? N PROGRAM: | |____________________________________________________________________|. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg023 Use the default parameters for the other fields on this screen. On the EXEC--Office Directory Parameters screen: PHONE NUMBER: EXTENSION: LOCATION: INTERACTIVE: I DEPARTMENT: ELECT. MAIL USAGE: Y ELECT. MAIL PRIORITY: N The fields which are left blank do not need to be defined but may be if you wish. They are not needed for the functioning of Business MAIL. The MAIL ID is a "bin" in which any in-tray messages are placed for which there is not a local ID. STEP 2: You will have to set up MAI OFFICE ID's for all users who are going to be using MAI OFFICE. Follow the instructions found in the manuals for Business EXEC and Business MAIL. If you are upgrading your MAI OFFICE and already have ID's, you will need to go into ID Create/Maintain for EXEC and give each user remote mail security (the last two fields shown above). Please note that you cannot do this if the public key has not been properly installed for MAIL. STEP 3: After you have installed all of MAI OFFICE, Business MAIL and the communications software you will need to request the directories for all remote sites in the network. You do this by selecting Remote Request-- Office Dir. from the MP.MAIN menu in MAI OFFICE. Enter the name of each location and a request for their directory will be sent to that site. When the directory is received you will be informed by an acknowledgement in your in-tray. 9.0 MAI BUSINESS MATH MAI Business MATH transforms your video display into a grid resembling an accountant's columnar pad. o An easy-to-use, yet flexible electronic spreadsheet. o For developing projections, budgets, pro formas, cash flows, or other tabular reports requiring mathematical calculations. o Will improve accuracy while saving significant time. 9.1 SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BUSINESS MATH When converting to MAI Business MATH from Rows & Columns, move all spreadsheet files to the OMS node (on MPx systems) or /OMS directory. 10.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B introduces many new features which were not part of MAI OFFICE 3.1A. New manuals are included in all new orders but must be ordered seperately for update orders. The following is a list of documentation for MAI OFFICE 3.2B. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg024 Manual Number Title M7560 MAI Business WORD Reference Manual M7557 MAI Business DATA User Guide M7550 MAI Business WORD User Manual M7552 MAI Business MATH User Guide M7551 MAI Business GRAPH User Manual M7555 MAI Business GRAPH Reference Manual M7553 MAI Business EXEC User Guide M7559 MAI Business EXEC Reerence Manual M7558 MAI Business MAIL Reference Manual M7561 Menu and System Services Reference Manual M0144 Presentation Services User Guide M7511 MAI Business Data Report Program Generator User Guide M7566 MAI OFFICE Quick Reference Guide 11.0 CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS The following sections briefly describe improvements made with MAI OFFICE 3.2B. Also included with this new release are improved printer drivers. New dictionary files with additional plurals can be restored over existing WPWF00 and WPWF01 if needed. 11.1 MENU SYSTEM FOR MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B MAI OFFICE 3.2A/B uses a new menu system with the aid of another system, called Presentation Services. Presentation Services provides menu functions. Also the function keys can be programmed through Presentation Services and are used in MAI OFFICE to directly access certain functions of MAI OFFICE from any menu in the system. For information regarding menu maintenance, see the Presentation Services Users Guide M7561. The main menu for MAI OFFICE is: |-----------MAIN MENU------------| | Business WORD | | | | Business MATH | | | | Business GRAPH | | | | Business EXEC | | | | Business MAIL | | | | Business DATA | | | | Menu and System Services | |________________________________| SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg025 There are two basic ways to select an option from a menu. You can use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option or you can type in the designated selection characters. You can substitute the following key sequences in place of the arrow keys: CTRL+K for up arrow, CTRL+J or space bar for down arrow, CTRL+L for right arrow, and CTRL+N or BACKSPACE key for the left arrow. By using the up and down arrow keys, you can move the cursor to the option you want to select. The current option appears highlighted on your screen. Press RETURN to complete your selection. The selections wrap from top to bottom and vice-versa. You can also use selection characters to select options from the menu. As you look at the menu on your screen, notice that one or two characters from each option is highlighted. These are the selection characters and indicate what you need to type in order to move the cursor directly to the desired option. Then press RETURN to make your selection. There will always be at least one selection character. A second selection character is used only when the set of first selection characters is not unique. The function keys provide quick access to frequently used options. If you want to use one of the function keys, press the key that matches the label at the bottom of the screen. Below is the function key usage within MAI OFFICE. The notation of F1 through F10 indicates function keys 1 through 10 with the description of that function key's use within MAI OFFICE. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP STATUS IN-TRAY MSGSLIP CALC CALENDR PHONE#S LOGOFF DATE CONSOLE F1 (HELP) will give a brief description of the menu system. F2 (STATUS) will show the user a list of users currently logged on to MAI OFFICE. This is the same function as entering "S" on the previous OMS menu system. F3 (IN-TRAY) will take the user directly to the In-Tray option without having to move through several menu levels. F4 (MSGSLIP) will take the user directly to the Out-Tray option to send a message. F5 (CALC) will take the user directly to the Calculator Function. F6 (CALENDR) will take the user directly to a personal calendar. F7 (PHONE#S) will take the user to a personal telephone directory. F8 (LOGOFF) will log the user off the MAI OFFICE system. This is the same as "L" in the previous OMS menu system. F9 (DATE) will allow the user to change the system date and time if allowed this privilege. This is the same as "D" in the previous OMS menu system. However, if the date is changed from the WP.MAIN MENU, it is only changed for wordprocessing and not on the rest of the system. F10 (CONSOLE) will take the user out of the MAI OFFICE system into console mode. This is the same as "C" in the previous OMS menu system. The user will be allowed CONSOLE only if they are SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg026 configured or authorized for this privilege. 11.2 TEXT FILE REBUILD CHANGES FOR 3.2B The Text File Rebuild utility has been changed to use full path name when creating temporary file name and then renaming. The process was also changed so pointers were not rewritten into the original header file during the rebuild. Prior to 3.2B, since a temporary file existed for the text file and the header file was fixed within the original file, if the process was interrupted for any reason, the pointers would not match and when the process was restarted, all documents were deleted. With MAI OFFICE 3.2B, this will no longer happen since a temporary file is created for both the header file and the text file. If the process is interrupted, the user can safely restart the text file rebuild at the beginning. With MAI OFFICE 3.2B, text file rebuild tries recovering from loops within existing pointers for a single page. 11.2.1 TEXT FILE REBUILD INSTRUCTIONS To execute a Text File Rebuild: 1. At the Business WORD Menu select Supervisory Utilities. The Text File Rebuild utility menu displays. 2. Select Text File Rebuild to contract, expand, or to rebuild the text file(s). 3. BEGIN REBUILD NOW OR START LATER?(N/L/CR): Options (choose one) a. Type 'N' and CR to begin rebuild immediately after all the parameters have been entered and validated. Go to STEP 4. . b. Type 'L' and CR to start rebuild at a later date and time. Go to STEP 5. c. Type CR to return to Text File Rebuild Menu. 4. DO YOU WANT TO BUILD AN ERROR REPORT? (Y/N) Options (choose one) a. Type 'Y' and CR to build an error report. Write down the name of the error file the system displays here. Go to to STEP 6. b. Type 'N' and CR if you don't want an error report. Go to STEP 6. 5. Enter the answers to the following prompts to have rebuild started at a later date and time: ENTER TIME TO REBUILD (HH:MM AM/PM) OR CR: ENTER DATE TO BEGIN REBUILD (MMDDYY) OR CR: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg027 The current date and time are displayed next to these prompts. To change date and time, overtype on the date and time displayed by the system. Once date and time have been validated, the screen displays the name of the error file which is created for logging the errors: PLEASE NOTE - ERROR FILE NAME IS RBxxxx (CR) RB stands for rebuild and the characters following RB are the terminal ID. Write down the name of this file displayed for use when printing the error file report. After you CR,. the system creates the error file with the message being displayed: NOW CREATING FILE... 6. DOCUMENT OR PARAGRAPH FILE(S) (D/P/CR): Options (choose one) a. Type 'D' and CR to rebuild a document text file(s). Go to STEP 7. b. Type 'P' and CR to rebuild a paragraph text file. Go to STEP 8. 7. LIBRARY FILE CHARACTER Enter the library file character for the text file to rebuild and CR. When file characters for all the text file(s) to be rebuilt have been entered, CR to end the selection of text files. 8. The screen now displays the number of lines already used in the text file and the space available for each text file specified. If you wish to re-size the text file, enter the new number of lines for the text file: THERE ARE <#> LINES USED IN LEAVING <#> AVAILABLE ENTER NEW NUMBER OF LINES OR CR: Options (choose one) a. Enter the new number of lines you wish the new text file to have and CR. Go to STEP 9. b. Type CR to retain the same size for text file. Go to STEP 9. 9. The following message appears on the screen: NOW DEFINING TEMPORARY FILES The system looks at the records in the text files to see if there is enough room to create temporary files. NOTE: Do not leave your terminal until the temporary files have been defined. On the successful completion of allocation of temporary files the above message will disappear. If there is not enough space to define the temporary files the procedure stops. The user must delete any unused files on the disk at this point to SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg028 make room for the completion of the program. The system now scans the header file first and then scans the text file(s) and documents within it. As it scans, the following displays: TEXT FILE NOW SCANNING: NOW REBUILDING: The system first makes sure that the text file it is about to rebuild is not being used. If it finds that a library or document in the text file which it is about to rebuild is being used, then it will not rebuild that text file and will display the following message: DOCUMENT BUSY. TEXT FILE CANNOT BE REBUILT. If the system encounters any kind of corruption in the chains, it reports such a corruption and attempts to recover the maximum text which is affected by that corruption. Corruptions usually occur in a text file and in the document header record which is linked to documents. The system responds to such corruptions as described below: a. Document Header Record Corruption: If the document header record doesn't point to a proper first and last page of the document, or if these pointers have values outside the range of the text file into which they point, the system displays the following message: POINTERS IN DOCUMENT RECORD FOR CORRUPTED. WILL FIX. The system attempts to correct these pointers. If it is not able to salvage even one page of the document, then it proceeds to delete the document and displays the following message: DELETING b. Page Record Corruption: If any of the page records of a document/paragraph do not point to a proper first line of that page, then the following message appears on the screen: PAGE RECORD NOT PROPER FOR PAGE <#> The system attempts to restore the proper value of the pointer. If it is unable to restore the pointers, then it deletes all the lines for that page. The following message appears: ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> DELETED. If it gets all the lines, then the following message appears: RESTORED ALL LINES FOR PAGE <#> SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg029 If it gets only the partial page, then the following message is displayed: RESTORED <#> LINES FOR PAGE <#> c. Page Link Corruption: If the system encounters a corruption in page record chains,. then it displays the following message: PAGE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING PAGE POINTERS... If it is able to restore the complete chain, then the following message is displayed: PAGE LINE REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete chain, then it displays the following message: PAGE REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST AFTER PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text preceding the lost page: **PAGE POINTER ERRORS. NEXT <#> PAGES LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION. d. Line Link Corruption: If the system encounters any corruption in the line link chain, it displays the following message: LINE ERRORS FOUND. NOW REBUILDING POINTERS... If it is able to restore the complete line link chain, it issues the following message: LINE LINK REBUILD SUCCESSFUL If the system cannot restore the complete line link chain, then the following message appears: LINE LINK REBUILD FAILED. SOME TEXT LOST ON PAGE <#> In addition, the following message prints on the page of text where the failure occurred: **LINE POINTER ERRORS. SOME TEXT ON THIS PAGE LOST DURING RECONSTRUCTION 13. On the completion of rebuild for each text file, the system renames the temporary text file. 14. If you keyed in 'Y' for STEP 4, the following prompt appears: DO YOU WANT TO BUILD AN ERROR REPORT (Y/N)? If you answered 'N', the system displays the Text File Rebuild Menu. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg030 NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT A TEXT FILE REBUILD BE RUN ONCE A WEEK TO ENSURE POINTER INTEGRITY. 12.0 INTERNATIONAL TRANSLATION Once you have received a tape containing your international version of MAI OFFICE 3.2B for the SPx system, there are several steps that you should follow to prepare the product for customer usage. The product must be translated to your native language. MAI Business MATH cannot be translated. For translation of MAI ORIGIN see Section A.6 and for translation of MAI Business GRAPH see Section A.7. STEP 1: Use trestore d=cs -v "/*" to move the MAI OFFICE system from the tape to one of your disks. The programs are saved on the tape . in the directory '/omsbase' and user files are saved in the directory '/oms'. NOTE: /omsbase /oms /omsutl need to be resident on disk before installation. STEP 2: Translate all of the messages used in MAI OFFICE via the program 'meditor' located in the '/omsutl' directory (see Section 12.1). . STEP 3: Implant all programs following the instructions given in Section 13.4. The destination directory should be '/oms' so that you will end up with a complete MAI OFFICE system in the '/oms' directory upon completion of implanting. STEP 4: Use 'omsrel' to release the MAI OFFICE modules from the disk to a tape. The format of 'omsrel' is: omsrel MOX1 MOX 2 MOX 3....etc. Where X1, X2, X3 are either E (for Business EXEC), M (for Business MAIL), P (for printer system), D (for Business DATA), C (for Business MATH), S (for menu system), G (for Business GRAPH) or W (for Business WORD). STEP 5: While still in single user mode copy the /tmp/*.I files into /omsbase. Multi-user mode will delete these files. 12.1 MESSAGE EDITOR GUIDE The international editor edits the message files to create a particular language file. The messages are referenced by text, not by number. The English version is the key and is displayed along with the translated version when the LIST command is used. The editor is called "/omsutl/meditor". This editor has been designed to function similar to the SPx utilities. All commands described below are available on the SPx editor except for FIND. This command has been integrated into the LIST command. A. COMPARE COMMAND COMPARE (STARTING MESSAGE) This command compares a key with its record. If they are the same (i.e., the record is in English, then key and the record will be displayed to both the terminal and the line printer). B. COPY COMMAND COPY LANGUAGE [,MESSAGE] This command is used to move messages from another language into the previously selected message file. Only those messages SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg031 having the keys which do not exist in the previously selected file will be copied. This feature facilitates the bringing in of new messages from the "US" file so they can be added to an existing file. Only the new messages would then need translating. If the message option is selected, only the entered message will be copied from the other language file. C. DELETE COMMAND DELETE [MESSAGE] This command is used to delete messages from the selected message file. Only those messages which do not have a corresponding entry in the "$omsus" message will qualify to be . deleted. If a single message is specified, only that message (if qualified) will be deleted. If no message is specified, all messages (that qualify) will be deleted. The DELETE command, as well as COPY, facilitates updating a message file to correspond to a new version of the "US" message file. D. EDIT COMMAND EDIT MESSAGE This command is used to modify the specified message. Upon entering EDIT mode, the translated version of the message will be displayed along with any comment. The maximum size is also displayed. The English version (the key) is not displayed. The comment field is not edited via EDIT. Modification of the message is aided by the use of control characters to position the cursor within the message. The ESCAPE key can be used to exit the EDIT command without replacing the original contents of the message. The following control characters are supported within the edit command. Control A - Beginning of line (F1) Control E - End of line (F2) Control X - Move forward one word (F3) Control Z - Move backward one word (F4) Control I - Insert one space (F5) Control D - Delete on character (F6) Control F - Move forward one character (F10) Control H - Move backward one character (F9) CR/RETURN - Update the message Control C - Abort The EDIT command can also be entered by a carriage return at enter command. The message edited will then be the next sequential message. E. END COMMAND END . This command is used to exit the editor. All changes are saved. F. FIND COMMAND FIND MESSAGE The FIND command will result in the listing of all programs that contain the message. This list will also include programs which have messages that contain the entered message as their beginning part. The messages are listed along with the programs. G. HELP COMMAND HELP [,COMMAND] This command is used to display information regarding commands and their arguments. The help command without arguments SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg032 displays a list of all commands with their parameters syntax. The HELP command with a command parameter displays a brief functional description of that command. H. LIST COMMAND LIST [,STARTING MESSAGE] The STARTING MESSAGE could be the first part of the message. The messages will be displayed starting with STARTING MESSAGE or the beginning of the file (if no message is specified). The display may be stopped by entering the control key plus Q. The entire message file will be displayed unless the ESCAPE key is used to exit the listing routine. The display includes both the English version (the key) and translated version. Comments are also displayed. I. PRINT COMMAND PRINT [,STARTING MESSAGE] This command prints the messages on the line printer, "LP". It is similar to LIST but the control keys can't be used to start and stop the listing. J. SELECT COMMAND This command is used to select the message file which the operator desires to edit. The first two characters of the specified language will be used to select the message file "%6$omsxx" where xx are the two characters. The selected message file remains selected until another SELECT command is entered. 12.2 SPx MAI OFFICE MESSAGE IMPLANTER INSTALLATION GUIDE The following are the installation procedures to load the International Message Implanter on the SPx release of MAI OFFICE. The procedure is similar to the search and replace utility on the SPx system. STEP 1: While in command mode, execute 'omsutl/mplant'. The screen will appear as in Figure 12-2. . Enter the desired options and RETURN. The screen displays: TYPE WORKING DIRECTORY Enter '/oms' and RETURN The screen prompts: ENTER LANGUAGE CODE Enter a two character language code and RETURN. i.e., 'us' for English, 'ge' for German or 'sp' for Spanish. The screen prompts: TYPE NAME OF FILE TO BE SEARCHED: Enter the name of the file to be searched and RETURN. The screen will appear as in Figure 12-3. The current source program is the program being searched. The current destination program is where the program replacements are being made. = allows you to use the current program. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg033 = if you previously requested to verify each file. = allows you to skip the current program and exits the implanter for this program. = aborts procedure. Press the desired option. If you choose CTL-I, the following screen (Figure 12-1) will display: FIGURE 12-1 ___________________________________________________________________ Search pattern : xx Replace pattern : xx Current source program : xxxxx Current destination program: /oms/xxxxx 0200 IF 04=3 THEN OPEN (7)0$; LET 04=2 ELSE IF 04=2 THEN OPEN (7,ERR=0200: 1210) "LP"; REM "OPEN THE OUTPUT FILE OR LP =verify off,=no replace, - will replace the highlighted message with the replacement message. - allows you to turn verify off. The system will globally search and replace each message without stopping. - The highlighted message will not be replaced. System will proceed to the next message. - exits the implanter. Press the desired option. When the implanting procedure ends, the system returns to command mode. FIGURE 12-2 SPx IMPLANTING SCREEN ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. DIRECTORY 2. DESTINATION DIRECTORY 3. REPORT DEVICE *current * /oms *terminal line other other printer file 4. FILE SELECTION 5. PAUSE 6. VERIFY * single file *pause on match *verify each file . all files don't pause on match don't verify each selected files file files from prompt --------------------------------------------------------------------------. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg034 FIGURE 12-3 SPx IMPLANTING SCREEN --------------------------------------------------------------------------. current source program: xxxxx current destination program: /oms/xxxxx =verify off,=skip file, =exit ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12.3 TRANSLATION OF BUSINESS DATA See the MAI Business Data System Support Manual, M7510 for translation procedures. 12.4 TRANSLATION OF MAI BUSINESS GRAPH All of the prompts and error messages are kept in a single file. Table 12-1 shows the names of the prompt and help file names. The following two sections describe how to translate the prompts and the help messages for the SPx. TABLE 12-1 PROMPT, ERROR, AND HELP MESSAGE FILENAMES Prompt and error: /etc/grf/prompts Help : /etc/grf/help 12.4.1 TRANSLATION OF PROMPTS AND ERROR MESSAGES Each prompt is identified by a number terminated by a colon (":"). The text for the prompt must follow the colon and must be less then a certain number of characters. Prompts are put into groups, each group has an unique number and a maximum length. The first two digits of the prompt number represents the group number in which the prompt belongs to. The last one or two digits represent the prompt number. Table 12-2 shows the group numbers, the number of prompts, and the maximum length of the prompt for that group. To translate the prompts, the system editor(ved) is used to edit the messages in the file. Each message is translated using the editor commands. Care must be taken to preserve the format of the prompt file and the maximum lengths must be observed. Some messages end in a colon (":"). This colon is part of the prompt and it also represents the maximum length of the prompts for that group. Once all the messages have been translated, save the changes and translation is complete. 12.4.2 TRANSLATING HELP MESSAGES There are three types of help messages; the first type lists the control keys used in moving the cursor and in editing entries. These are the three lines displayed in the top portion of the help screen. The second type of message describes the window you are currently in. The third type of message gives some information about the current cell. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg035 TABLE 12-2 PROMPT SIZE TABLE GROUP GROUP SIZE MAX LENGTH NAME 00 2 8 Grid types 01 4 8 Line styles 02 - - -- not used -- 03 2 8 On/Off flags 04 6 8 Vert. alignments 05 4 8 Horz. alignments 06 4 8 Text paths 07 12 20 chart types 08 3 8 Interior styles 09 8 15 Font styles 10 5 10 Prompts for styles window 11 10 10 Top prompts for Text_atr window 12 16 10 Left prompts for Text_atr window 13 60 16 Prompts for Plot_atr window 14 6 11 Prompts for Port_dim window . 15 7 11 Prompts for Titles window 16 3 10 Prompts for Device window 17 19 15 Menu titles 18 19 10 Menu abbreviations 19 - - -- not used -- 20 1 15 Ask name 21 47 70 Error messages All lines of text for messages are numbered with a six digit number followed by one spacer character, such as a space character or a colon (":"), which separates the message number from the text. The text follows immediately after the spacer character. To enter another line for the same help message, type the same message number followed by a spacer character (a space or colon), followed by the text. To have a blank line displayed, type in the message number followed by the spacer character. The messages must be in numerical order, with the lowest number at the beginning of the file. To translate the prompts, the system editor(ved) is used to edit the messages in the file. The message is translated using the editor commands. Care must be taken to preserve the format of the help file. Once all the messages have been translated, save the changes and translation is completed. 12.5 TRANSLATION TABLE MAINTENANCE The 'pted' program delivered with the SPx should be used to modify the printer translation tables. These tables are stored in the file WPTT00. Table names consist of two alphanumeric characters, a-z, A-Z, 0-9. Upon selection of this option from either the 'PS' or 'WP' menus the following options will be displayed: Table Description Maintenance: This selection allows the user to modify the description of the table. The length of the description may be up fifteen characters. Display a Table: This function displays the contents of a specified table. The table is arranged as a matrix with the character SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg036 positions given in hexadecimal notation. The numbers running across the top are the high order bits and the numbers running down the left are the low order bits. The characters are displayed as ASCII characters. The modifier characters may also be displayed. Edit a Table: This function displays the contents of a specified file and then allows you to modify it. To change the character code at any position, move the cursor to that position and write over the current code. The control sequences used to move the cursor are shown in the following table. ------------------------------------------------------------- SEQUENCE ACTION ----------- ------------------------------------------------ CTRL + N Moves cursor down one line. or CR ----------- ------------------------------------------------ CTRL + P Moves cursor up one line. ----------- ------------------------------------------------ CTRL + F Moves cursor one character to the right. ----------- ------------------------------------------------ CTRL + H Moves cursor one character to the left. ----------- ------------------------------------------------ Characters can be entered in any of these four ways: 1. To enter a printable character, type the character in the desired position. Do not press RETURN. 2. To enter any character in hexadecimal notation, press CTL-II and then type the two character hexadecimal code for the character. 3. To enter a vertical displacement code and a character, press CTL-III. Type the vertical displacement code, and then type this character code. When you have entered these codes, press RETURN to end the entry. 4. To enter a modifier code and a character, press CTL-IV, type the modifier code, and then the character code. When you have entered these codes, press RETURN to end the entry. Dump A Table: This function displays a specified table in hexadecimal notation. The modifier characters may also be displayed. Delete a Table: This function deletes a specified table. You are asked to verify that you want the table deleted before the program deletes it. Update Modifier Characters: This function allows you to edit the modifier characters in a particular table or is the default table. If you are editing the default table, you may only add modifier characters. If you are editing any other characters, only the first character may be changed. When you have changed a character, you are asked if you want the change saved. When you have answered, the program either saves or abandons the change and redisplays the menu. Print: This function prints the table to a printer in both hexadecimal and ASCII form along with the modifier table. To create a new table with this program, simply type in the two character name of the table. If this name is now currently the name of an existing table, the user will be prompted: IS THIS A NEW SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg037 TABLE (Y/N)? By responding with "Y" a new table will be created and the user will be asked for a description of the table. To obtain a list of the currently defined tables, the user may enter "?" in response for "Table Name". 13.0 CONFIGURATION INFORMATION 4206 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/IX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP53 __________________________________________________________________________ . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | special | | Input/Output baud rate | 1200 | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 |. | Protocol | no | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | no | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | yes | | Device type | slave printer | | Slave printer type | PT-4208 | | Basic Four interface | no | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | 1200 | | Prt length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 | | Printer throttle | none |. | Main port throttle | Unidirectional Xox/Xoff | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ . | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | SLVS SLVD DIAS DIA |. | Slave type | D D - - | | Translation Table | sup sup sup sup - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Initial program | - PSPD71 - PSPD61 | | Driver program | - PSPD70 - PSPD60 | | Termination program | - PSPD72 PSPD63 | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg038 4211 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/IX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP53 __________________________________________________________________________ . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | special | | Input/Output baud rate | 1200 | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 |. | Protocol | no | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | no | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | yes | | Device type | slave printer | | Slave printer type | PT-4211 (*1) | | Basic Four interface | no | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | 1200 | | Prt length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 | | Printer throttle | none |. | Main port throttle | Unidirectional Xox/Xoff | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ . | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | SLVS SLVD DIAS DIA |. | Slave type | D D - - | | Translation Table | sup sup sup sup - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Initial program | - PSPD71 - PSPD61 | | Driver program | - PSPD70 - PSPD60 | | Termination program | - PSPD72 PSPD63 | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - SET DIP SWITCH 4 ON. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg039 4213 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/IX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 __________________________________________________________________________ . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4213B4 | | Input/Output baud rate | 2400 | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 |. | Protocol | no | | Basic Four interface | yes (*1) | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | yes | | Device type | slave printer | | Slave printer type | PT-4213B4 | | Basic Four interface | yes (*1) | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | 2400 |. | Prt length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 | | Printer throttle | BFIS (*1) | | Main port throttle | Unidirectional Xox/Xoff | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | not supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ . | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - SLV - 3210|3220| | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Initial program | - PSPD81 - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - PSPD80 - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - Set the printer interface switch to B4INTFC (down position). This switch is located on the back of the printer, close to the RS-232 connector. NOTE: Supported as Draft Mode only. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg040 4214 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/IX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 __________________________________________________________________________ . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4214 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) |. | Protocol | no | | Basic Four interface | Xon/Xoff | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | - | | Device type | - | | Slave printer type | - | | Basic Four interface | - | | Read/status timeout | - | | Write timeout | - | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | - | | Prt length/parity/stop | - | | Printer throttle | - | | Main port throttle | - | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | not supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ . | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - - 3150|3510| | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Initial program | - - - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - - - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the dip switch setting on the printer. NOTE: Supported as Draft Mode only. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg041 4215 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/IX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 __________________________________________________________________________ . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer (*2) | | Printer type | PT-4215 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) |. | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | yes (*2) | | Device type | Slave printer | | Slave printer type | PT-4215 | | Basic Four interface | no | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Prt length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 (*1) | | Printer throttle | none |. | Main port throttle | Unidirectional Xon/Xoff (*3) | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ . | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | SLVS SLVD 15SF 15TF | | Slave type | F F - - | | Translation Table | sup sup sup sup | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Initial program | - PSPD71 - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - PSPD70 - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - PSPD72 - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel of the printer. (*2) - Change/save the printer setup, use the SETUP MODE on printer front panel Printer as F. Style (DC3-CDE) F. Interface (PROTOCOL) SLAVE DISABLE ETX/ACK NO SLAVE ENABLE XON/XOFF (*3) - For DT-4313 terminal Main Port Throttle should be set to XOFF ->HOST. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg042 4216 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/IX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 __________________________________________________________________________ . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4216 (*1) | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*2) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*2) | | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | yes | | Device type | Slave printer | | Slave printer type | PT-4216 | | Basic Four interface | no | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | 9600 (*2) | | Prt length/parity/stop | 7/O/1 (*2) | | Printer throttle | none |. | Main port throttle | Unidirectional Xon/Xoff | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported (*3) | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported (*3) | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ . | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | SLVS SLVD 16SF 16TF | | Slave type | J J - - | | Translation Table | sup sup sup sup | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Initial program | - PSPD71 - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - PSPD70 - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - PSPD72 - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - Printer revision level X4. (*2) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel . of the printer. (*3) - Printer dip switch set up, (located on the back of the printer) SW01: SW41: 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 | on | x x x * * | on | x * x x x x x | | off| * x * | off| x x * x | SW01/4 ON sheet, SWo1/6: ON for Exec , SW41: ON no slave use OFF tractor, OFF for Word, OFF slave use SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg043 4222 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/IX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 __________________________________________________________________________ . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4222 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) |. | Protocol | no | | Basic Four interface | Xon/Xoff | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | - | | Device type | - | | Slave printer type | - | | Basic Four interface | - | | Read/status timeout | - | | Write timeout | - | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | - | | Prt length/parity/stop | - | | Printer throttle | - | | Main port throttle | - | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | not supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ . | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - - 3150|3510| | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Initial program | - - - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - - - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the dip switch setting on the printer. NOTE: Supported as Draft Mode only. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg044 4223 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/IX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 __________________________________________________________________________ . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4223 (*1) | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*2) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*2) | | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | on | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | - | | Device type | - | | Slave printer type | - | | Basic Four interface | - | | Read/status timeout | - | | Write timeout | - | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | - | | Prt length/parity/stop | - | | Printer throttle | - | | Main port throttle | - | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | not supported |. |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ . | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - LSRS/LSR (*3) - | | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - sup - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | (*4) - | | Initial program | - - PSPD11 - | | Driver program | - - PSPD10 - | | Termination program | - - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - Rev. Level X6 (*2) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel . of the printer. (*3) - LSRS selects first page from top bin; LSR selects all pages from bottom. (*4) - You must add feature code "L". SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg045 4224 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/IX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 __________________________________________________________________________ . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4224 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) |. | Protocol | no | | Basic Four interface | Xon/Xoff | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | - | | Device type | - | | Slave printer type | - | | Basic Four interface | - | | Read/status timeout | - | | Write timeout | - | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | - | | Prt length/parity/stop | - | | Printer throttle | - | | Main port throttle | - | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | not supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ . | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - - 3150|3510| | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Initial program | - - - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - - - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the dip switch setting on the printer. NOTE: Supported as Draft Mode only. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg046 4225/4226 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/IX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP51 __________________________________________________________________________ . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4225/PT-4226 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) |. | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | yes | | Device type | Slave printer | | Slave printer type | PT-4225/PT-4226 | | Basic Four interface | no | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Prt length/parity/stop | 7/0/1 (*1) | | Printer throttle | Xon/Xoff | | Main port throttle | Unidirectional Xon/Xoff (*2) | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | not supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ . | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - SLV 3210|3220| | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - - - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - | | Initial program | - PSPD81 - PSPD11 | | Driver program | - PSPD80 - PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel of the printer. (*2) - For DT-4313 terminal the Main Port Throttle should be set to XOFF ->HOST SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg047 PRINTER SETUP PT-4225/PT-4226 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- Font Print Mode NLQ Sans Serif Font Pitch 10 CPI Font Style Normal Font Size Single General Control Emulation Mode IBM PPR General Control Graphics Bi-directional General Control Paper Out Override No General Control Print Registration 0 General Control Operator Panel Functions Full Operation General Control Print Suppress Effective Yes Vertical Control Line Spacing 6 LPI Vertical Control Form Tear-Off Off Vertical Control Skip Over Perforation No Vertical Control Auto LF No Vertical Control Auto CR No Vertical Control Auto Feed XT Invalid Vertical Control Page Length 11" Symbol Sets Character Set MBF International Symbol Sets Language Set USASCII Symbol Sets Zero Character Unslashed Serial I/F Option Bit 8 Inverted No Serial I/F Option Parity Odd Serial I/F Option Serial Data 7 or 8 Bits 7 Serial I/F Option Protocol X-ON/X-OFF Serial I/F Option Diagnostic Test No Serial I/F Option busy Line DTR Serial I/F Option Baud Rate 9600 BPS Serial I/F Option DSR Signal Invalid Serial I/F Option DTR Signal Ready on Power Up Serial I/F Option Busy Time 1 Second (continued on next page) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg048 4227/4228 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/IX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP58 __________________________________________________________________________ . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4227/PT-4228 | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) |. | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | yes | | Device type | Slave printer | | Slave printer type | PT-4227/PT-4228 | | Basic Four interface | no | | Read/status timeout | 55 | | Write timeout | 55 | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Prt length/parity/stop | 7/0/1 (*1) | | Printer throttle | Xon/Xoff | | Main port throttle | Unidirectional Xon/Xoff (*2) | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | supported | |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ . | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | SLVS SLVD 28SF 28TF | | Slave type | O O - - | | Translation Table | sup sup sup sup | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - | | Initial program | - PSPD81 PSPD11 PSPD11 | | Driver program | - PSPD80 PSPD10 PSPD10 | | Termination program | - - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel of the printer. (*2) - For DT-4313 terminal the Main Port Throttle should be set to XOFF ->HOST SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg049 PRINTER SETUP PT-4227/PT-4228 ------------------------------------------------------------------ Font Print Mode LQ Courier Font Pitch 10 CPI Font Style Normal Font Size Single General Control Emulation Mode IBM PPR General Control Graphics Bi-directional General Control Paper Out Override No General Control Print Registration 0 General Control Operator Panel Functions Full Operation Vertical Control Line Spacing 6 LPI Vertical Control Form Tear-Off Off Vertical Control Skip Over Perforation No Vertical Control Auto LF No Vertical Control Auto CR No Vertical Control Auto Feed XT Invalid Vertical Control Page Length 11" Symbol Sets Character Set MBF International Symbol Sets Language Set US ASCII Symbol Sets Zero Character Unslashed Serial I/F Option Parity Odd Serial I/F Option Serial Data 7 or 8 Bits 7 Serial I/F Option Protocol X-ON/X-OFF Serial I/F Option Diagnostic Test No Serial I/F Option Busy Line DTR Serial I/F Option Baud Rate 9600 BPS Serial I/F Option DSR Signal Invalid Serial I/F Option DTR Signal Ready on Power Up Serial I/F Option Busy Time 1 Second Note: Paper Out Override should be set to yes, if you are using Single Sheet. (continued on next page) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg050 4229 PRINTER INFORMATION BOSS/IX CONFIGURATION INFORMATION DRIVER: WPDP55 __________________________________________________________________________ . |SYSTEMS PORT CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Device type | printer |. | Printer type | PT-4229 (*4) | | Input/Output baud rate | 9600 (*1) | | Length/parity/stop bits | 7/O/1 (*1) |. | Protocol | Xon/Xoff | | Basic Four interface | no | | Spooling | yes | | Read/status timeout | 100 | | Write timeout | 100 | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |SLAVE PRINTER CONFIGURATION | | | | | | Slave printer attached | - | | Device type | - | | Slave printer type | - | | Basic Four interface | - | | Read/status timeout | - | | Write timeout | - | | TERMINAL SET-UP | | | Printer baud rate | - | | Prt length/parity/stop | - | | Printer throttle | - | | Main port throttle | - | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| |GENERAL INFORMATION | | | | | | Sheet feeder (SF) | supported | | Tractor feeder (TF) | not supported |. |________________________________|_________________________________________| SOFTWARE PARAMETER __________________________________________________________________________ . | | SLAVE PRINTER SYSTEM PRINTER | | SOFTWARE PARAMETER | Sheet TF Sheet TF |. | | Feeder Single Feeder Single | |--------------------------------|-----------------------------------------| | WORD PRINTER DEFINITION | | | Type | - - LSRS/LSR (*2) | | Slave type | - - - - | | Translation Table | - - sup - | | EXEC PRINTER DEFINITION | - (*3) - |. | Initial program | - - PSPD11 - | | Driver program | - - PSPD10 - | | Termination program | - - - | |________________________________|_________________________________________| COMMENTS (*1) - These parameters must match the printer setup on the front panel of the printer. (*2) - LSRS selects first page from back bin; LSR selects all pages from front bin. (*3) - You must add feature code "L". (*4) - If PT-4229 is not available, use PT-4223. Note: Make sure to set the Read/status timeout and Write timeout to 100, if you are using this printer as a Graphic Device. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg051 PRINTER SETUP REPORT FOR PT-4229 ----------------------------------------------------------------- Centronics I/F Setup Timing :1 RS-232C I/F Setup Baud Rate :9600 Baud Data Format :7ODD1 Data Flow Control :MBF XON/XOFF Number of Copies :1 Miscellaneous Language Selection :USA Character Pitch :10CPI Line Pitch :6LPI Top Margin :0 Bottom Margin :0 New Line :OFF Auto LF :OFF Auto CR :OFF Buzzer :BUZZER ON Bit-8 Inversion :OFF FC RM8/MBF CONV :OFF Vertical Compress :ON Horizontal Compress :ON Selected Font Slot No. :RESIDENT Font No. :1 Selected Bin :BIN1 Selected Emulation Slot No. :RESIDENT Emulation Name :DIABLO ECS Revision :16 Memory (RAM) :4.64MB Available Emulations Resident :HP LJ2 :DIABLO ECS :PROPRINTER XL :FX-85 IC Card : (continued on next page) SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg052 13.1 PRINTER vs TERMINAL NEW PRINTER vs TERMINAL ___________________________________________________________ | | PRINTERS | |---------|-------------------------------------------------| |Terminal | PT-4225 | PT-4226 | PT-4227 | PT-4228 | PT-4229 | |---------|---------|---------|---------|---------|-------- | | 4309 | N | N | N | N | N | |---------|---------|---------|---------|---------|---------| | 4310 | D | D | N | N | N | |---------|---------|---------|---------|---------|---------| | 4312 | D | D | S | S | N | |---------|---------|---------|---------|---------|---------| | 4313 | D | D | S | S | N | |---------|---------|---------|---------|---------|---------| | 4314 | D | D | S | S | N | |_________|_________|_________|_________|_________|_________| D = SUPPORTED AS DRAFT MODE ONLY N = NOT SUPPORTED S = SUPPORTED WITH ATTRIBUTES TERMINAL REVISION CHART _____________________________________ | TERMINAL | REVISION | |----------------|--------------------| | DT-4310 | D | |----------------|--------------------| | DT-4312 | K | |----------------|--------------------| | DT-4313 | E | |----------------|--------------------| | DT-4314 | L or above | |________________|____________________| ORIGINATOR: Moniereh Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB024 Pg053 FIB 00025 11/28/90 *** 3.2B Error in VIEW Program on GPx40/70 [ WPSF 642 ] *** Problem: Typing error in VIEW Program. Symptom: May cause severe document corruption in the document the VIEW is started from. Solution: Program WPCP10, statement 4014 after the second semicolon: OLD: 4014: ......; IF ASCREBUF$(Z+OFCURPTF,3)<>$000000$ ..... ^ NEW: 4014: ......; IF ASCREBUF$(Z+OFCURPTR,3)<>$000000$ ..... ^ The ^ indicates the change. Please make this change on all systems that have MAI OFFICE installed . on the GPx 40 and 70. NOTE: This has been fixed on 3.2B*37. This is NOT a problem on MPx or SPx systems. ORIGINATOR: Moniereh Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB025 Pg001 FIB 00026 11/30/90 *** OFFICE 3.2A/B Document Recovery Tools [ WPSF 632 ] *** TYPE: Informational Use one of the following methods to recover documents lost due to pointer problems in MAI Business WORD: WARNING!!! - USE WITH CAUTION!!! -------------------------------- ****************************************************************** FOR MPX/AS SYSTEMS: ------------------- o USING SERIAL FILE PRINT, ALL ATTRIBUTES LOST: --------------------------------------------- 1) Backup existing: library file (WPDL00) header file (WPDM00) text files (%6WPTF0& and WPTF0&-the %6 name used for lower case character on MPx) 2) Remove the text file(s) with the problem using the LIBRARY CREATE/MAINTAIN option on the WP.MAIN menu. 3) Run a text file rebuild on all remaining text files. 4) Restore files from a previous backup tape: WPDL00, WPDM00 and WPTF0& (& indicates the file character). When restoring from backup: RENAME into separate node. NOTE: ALL FILES MUST BE RESTORED FROM BACKUP TAPES MADE AT THE SAME TIME. NOTE: DO NOT USE THE BACKUP TAPE FROM STEP 1. USE A BACKUP TAPE MADE BEFORE THE TEXT FILE HAD PROBLEMS. 5) Logon with an MPx ID that has the .OMS. node first. Use a !PPUSH to set the prefix with the node where the restored files were renamed into as the primary node. For example: !PPUSH .NEWNODE. 6) Get a document directory listing of the text file library which was restored from the backup tape in step 4. 7) Print all the documents from the document directory listing to serial files. 8) Delete: .NEWNODE.WPDL00 .NEWNODE.WPDM00 .NEWNODE.WPTF0& .NEWNODE.%6WPTF0& 9) Create a new library using a 132 character line length to merge the documents into. 10) Use QUICK FILE MERGE to merge the serial files into documents. If you are not sure of the number of lines per SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB026 Pg001 page use 9999 to avoid truncating pages. WARNING: Be extremely careful doing this. This procedure should not be left for a non-technical user to follow. Shortcuts will cause problems. ****************************************************************** FOR MPX/AS SYSTEMS: ------------------- o USING FILELIST ARCHIVE, ALL ATTRIBUTES RETAINED ----------------------------------------------- 1) Make a backup from the existing files, just in case something goes wrong. 2) Rebuild all the text files, if possible. 3) Restore a recent backup of WPDL00, WPDM00, WPTF0& and %6WPTF0& to to the .NEWNODE. node. 4) Log on to OFFICE and do a !PPUSH .NEWNODE. 5) Use the filelist archive function to archive all the documents which were lost. 6) Delete WPDL00, WPDM00, WPTF0& and %6WPTF0& out of .NEWNODE. 7) Create a new library using a 132 character line length. 8) Use the filelist de-archive to place the documents into the new library. 9) If necessary delete old libraries, but always run a text file rebuild on all the text files after the delete procedure has been done. If this is not possible during the day, then run the rebuild at night. With the filelist archive, the original structure will be retained, including the attributes. ***************************************************************** FOR SPX AND GPX SYSTEMS: ------------------------ o USING SERIAL FILE PRINT, ALL ATTRIBUTES LOST: --------------------------------------------- 1) Backup existing: library file (WPDL00) header file (WPDM00) text files (WPTF0*) 2) Remove the text file(s) with the problem using the LIBRARY CREATE/ MAINTAIN option on the WP.MAIN menu. 3) Run a text file rebuild on all remaining text files. 4) Restore files from a previous backup tape: WPDL00, WPDM00 and WPTF0* (* indicates the file character). When restoring from backup, rename into a separate directory using one of the following commands, depending on your system type: SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB026 Pg002 SPx: trestore d=cs /oms/WPDL00 -v to=/newdir trestore d=cs /oms/WPDM00 -v to=/newdir trestore d=cs /oms/WPTF0* -v to=/newdir GPx: trestore d=tp /oms/WPDL00 -v to=/newdir trestore d=tp /oms/WPDM00 -v to=/newdir trestore d=tp /oms/WPTF0* -v to=/newdir NOTE: ALL FILES MUST BE RESTORED FROM BACKUP TAPES MADE AT THE SAME TIME. NOTE: DO NOT USE THE BACKUP TAPE FROM STEP 1. USE A BACKUP TAPE MADE BEFORE THE TEXT FILE HAD PROBLEMS. 5) Logon and set your prefix with the /newdir directory first, followed by the /oms directory. 6) Get a document directory listing of the text file library which was restored from the backup tape in step 4. 7) Print all documents from the document directory listing to serial files. 8) Delete: /newdir/WPDL00 /newdir/WPDM00 /newdir/WPTF0* 9) Create a new library using a 132 character line length to merge the documents into. 10) Use QUICK FILE MERGE to merge serial files into documents. If you are not sure of the number of lines per page, use 9999. WARNING: Be extremely careful doing this. The procedure should not be left for a non-technical user to follow. Shortcuts will cause problems. ***************************************************************** FOR SPX AND GPX SYSTEMS: ------------------------ o USING FILELIST ARCHIVE, ALL ATTRIBUTES RETAINED ----------------------------------------------- 1) Make a backup from the existing files, just in case something goes wrong. 2) Rebuild all the text files, if possible. 3) Restore a recent backup of WPDL00, WPDM00 and WPTF0* to the /newdir directory. 4) Set your prefix so the /newdir directory is first, followed by the /oms directory. 5) Use the filelist archive function to archive all the documents which were lost. 6) Delete WPDL00, WPDM00 and WPTF0* out of the /newdir directory. 7) Create a new library using a 132 character line length. SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB026 Pg003 8) Use the filelist de-archive to place the documents into the new library. 9) If necessary delete old libraries, but always run a text file rebuild on all the text files after the delete procedure has been done. If this is not possible during the day, then run the rebuild at night. With the filelist archive, the original structure will be retained, including the attributes. ORIGINATOR: Elaine Titus SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB026 Pg004 FIB 00027 11/30/90 *** Rows & Columns to MATH Conversion Tips *** Type: Informational Purpose This field bulletin will outline the steps necessary to convert old Rows & Columns spreadsheets to the MAI MATH format from an MPx machine to an SPx/GPx machine. Procedure In order to bring the spreadsheets from MPx format to SPx/GPx format, the xxx0 file for the spreadsheet (where xxx is the name of the spreadsheet) must be converted as a BINARY file and the xxx1 and xxx2 files as TEXT. Once.these files are ported using intersystem transport, a conversion program, RCTOMATH, must be run to flip the high order bits to low order in the xxx0 file. Attached is a copy of the code listing for this program. This program is NOT part of the OFFICE tape and must be entered on the SPx/GPx system to be used after the intersystem port. Related.Documentation Attached program listing is necessary to complete conversion of Rows & Column spreadsheets to MAI MATH from the MPx to the SPx/GPx series machines. Attachment for Rows & Columns to MAI MATH Conversion Tips ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0010 REM 0020 REM "R&C => MATH Conversion 0030 REM 0040 REM "BY RSC 1/5/88 0050 REM 0060 PRINT 'CS', 0080 INPUT (0,ERR=0080)'LF',"Enter Spreadsheet Name: ",N$:(LEN=0,5) 0090 IF N$="" THEN GOTO 0370 0100 DIM N1$(6," "); LET N$=N$+N1$; LET N$=N$(1,5) 0110.OPEN (1,ERR=0120)N$+"0"; GOTO 130 0120 PRINT "Spreadsheet file '"+N$+"0' cannot be opened. (ERR=",ERR,")"; 0120:GOTO 0080 0130.REM "SET UP 0140 LET F$=FID(1); LET NR=DEC(F$(25,4)) 0150 IF (NR<13) OR F$(10,1)<>$00$ THEN PRINT 'RB',"I don't think this is a 0150:spreadsheet. Try another one."; GOTO 0080 0160 LET BPR=DEC(F$(15,2)); DIM MASK$(BPR,$7F$) 0170 REM "LET'S DO THE HEADER FIRST" 0180 PRINT "Doing the first part", 0190 FOR X=0 TO 12 0200 READ RECORD(1,IND=X)R$ 0210 LET R$=AND(R$,MASK$) 0220 WRITE RECORD(1,IND=X)R$ 0230 PRINT ".", 0240 NEXT X 0250 REM "LET'S DO THE LAST PART - THE FUN ONE " 0260 PRINT 'LF', "Doing the second part", 0270 DIM MASK$(BPR,$FF$); FOR X=3 TO BPR STEP 5; LET MASK$(X,1)=$7F$; NEXT X SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB027 Pg001 0280 FOR X=13 TO NR-1 0290 READ RECORD(1,IND=X)R$ 0300 LET R$=AND(R$,MASK$) 0310 WRITE RECORD(1,IND=X)R$ 0320 PRINT ".", 0330 NEXT X 0340 CLOSE(1) 0350 PRINT 'LF', "All done with ",N$ 0360 PRINT 'LF'; GOTO 0080 0370 END ORIGINATOR: Jackie Shea SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB027 Pg002 b FIB 00028 11/30/90 *** GPx40 Tape Error & Document De-Archive Fails to Work *** TYPE: Problem Purpose: Problem with Document De-Archive process - Only GPx 40. Symptom: A tape error occurs and Document De-Archive does not work. Cause: Read statement is reading the first record, instead of the second record, from a data file which contains the tar command. Solution: Add and Save the following statement in these two programs, WPAS20 and WPAS22 : 9853 READ (9,END=9862,ERR=9870)X9$ Note: This is the same statement as statement 9854. ORIGINATOR: Monier Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB028 Pg001 FIB 00029 11/30/90 *** Error 42 in Program ROAD72 in MATH 3.1A *** MAI MATH 3.1A or above, on SPx, GPx and MPx systems Type: Problem Purpose: To prevent an ERROR 42, AT STATMENT 2540, PROGRAM ROAD72 in a small SpreedSheet or prevent a terminal hang in a large SpreetSheet, when trying to do a Rank Sort. Cause: By setting the COLUMN CALCULATE to YES for Rows in that SpreetSheet. Workaround: Set the COLUMN CALCULATE to NO before doing a Rank Sort. Note: Default for COLUMN CALCULATE is NO for all the SpreedSheets. ORIGINATOR: Monier Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB029 Pg001 FIB 00030 12/04/90 *** Corrections to Software Announcement 174 [ WPSF 639 ] *** The listed changes should be made to Software Announcement 174, MAI OFFICE 3.2B on MPx and Advanced Series. o COVER PAGE - Change: To: From: MAI OFFICE 3.2B*37 MAI OFFICE 3.2B*33 o PAGE 2, Section 1.2 Peripheral Hardware Rev Levels Requirements changes: To: PT-4225 Firmware Rev 4.02 or above PT-4226 Firmware Rev 4.02 or above PT-4227 Firmware Rev 1.21/Res. 1.11 or above PT-4228 Firmware Rev 1.21/Res. 1.11 or above From: PT-4225 Firmware Rev C or above PT-4226 Firmware Rev C or above PT-4227 Firmware Rev C or above PT-4228 Firmware Rev C or above o PAGE 54, Section 13.0 Printer Configuration, 4227/28 Printer Info changes: To: From: Slave type O (alpha) Slave type 0(numeric) To: (*2) - Run PRCONFIG and Configure PDF as "P4227" and TRANSLATION as "X4227". From: (*2) - Run PRCONFIG and Configure PDF as "P4225" and TRANSLATION as "X4225". NOTE: FIB 20 has these changes as of 12/05/90, it's date was not changed due its length. ORIGINATOR: Moniereh Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB030 Pg001 FIB 00031 12/04/90 *** Corrections to Software Announcement 171 [ WPSF 640 ] *** Corrections to Software Announcement 171 [ WPSF 640 ] The listed changes should be made to Software Announcement 171, MAI OFFICE 3.2B on GPx Series. o COVER PAGE - Changes: To: From: MAI OFFICE 3.2B*37 MAI OFFICE 3.2B*36 Added: MAI GRAPH 3.2B*37 is no longer O.S. dependent. o PAGE 1, Section 1.2 Peripheral Hardware Rev Levels Requirements changes: To: PT-4225 Firmware Rev 4.02 or above PT-4226 Firmware Rev 4.02 or above PT-4227 Firmware Rev 1.21/Res. 1.11 or above PT-4228 Firmware Rev 1.21/Res. 1.11 or above From: PT-4225 Firmware Rev C or above PT-4226 Firmware Rev C or above PT-4227 Firmware Rev C or above PT-4228 Firmware Rev C or above o PAGE 2, Section 2.0 New Installation Changes: To: mbfinstall <-----this format will install Office on the /usr directory. From: mbfinstall <-----this format will install Office on the root directory. o PAGE 4, Section 3.0 Upgrade Installation Changes: To: mbfinstall <-----this will upgrade Office located in the /usr directory. From: mbfinstall <-----this will upgrade Office located in the root directory. o PAGE 9, Section 6.1 MPx Conversion, first paraghaph change: Delete WPTF00 from list of files with a binary schema. o PAGE 26, Section 12.0 Printer Configuration Info, 4225/26 Printer Info: To: Read/status timeout 550 write timeout 550 From: Read/status timeout 55 write timeout 55 o PAGE 28, Section 12.0 Printer Configuration, 4227/28 Printer Info changes: To: From: Slave type O Slave type 0 NOTE: FIB 21 has these changes as of 12/05/90, it's date was not changed due its length. ORIGINATOR: Moniereh Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB031 Pg001 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB031 Pg002 FIB 00032 12/06/90 *** Program to Change Date in WORD to System's Date *** MAI OFFICE 3.2B GPx 40 and 70 Series Type: Informational Purpose: To change the date in MAI WORD on GPx systems to match the Operating Sytem's date. Workaround: Create the following Basic Program under the same directory that you have installed MAI Office (the default directory is /usr/oms): 10 REM " PROGRAM TO SET MAI WORD DATE TO SYSTEM DATE" 20 CHANO=UNT,FIL$="MSIF00" 30 OPEN(CHANO)FIL$ 40 D$=DAY 50 EXTRACT RECORD(CHANO,IND=0)D0$; D0$(1,8)=D$ 60 WRITE RECORD (CHANO)D0$ 70 CLOSE(CHANO) 80 EXIT SAVE "wdate" then load the program MS, and add the following statement: 0002 CALL "wdate" and save the MS program. ORIGINATOR: M. Anvari SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB032 Pg001 FIB 00033 08/09/93 *** Line-edit Modifications for DT-4315 Terminals *** ************PRELIMINARY FIELD BULLETIN************* MAI OFFICE and 4315 Terminals C.Adkins Bulletin #____ Implement Line Edit Mode Type: Informational Purpose: DT-4315 terminals were added to the product line after the last release of MAI OFFICE, therefore DT-4315's are not fully supported for line-edit mode. Procedure: To implement 'line-edit' mode for DT-4315 terminals, make the following program changes: Program: WPBE20 Original version statement 310: 310 IF LINEDIT$>"" THEN IF POS(OVERLAY$="WPBE51-WPOS90-WPBE10",7) >0 THEN GOTO 340 ELSE GOTO 350 ELSE IF POS(CHANL$(1,4)="4314",4) >0 AND CHANL$(5,1)>="C" AND CHANL$(5,1)<"W" THEN LET LINEDIT$ ="LINE EDIT" New version statement 310: 310 IF LINEDIT$>"" THEN IF POS(OVERLAY$="WPBE51-WPOS90-WPBE10",7) >0 THEN GOTO 340 ELSE GOTO 350 ELSE IF POS(CHANL$(1,4)="4314",4) >0 AND CHANL$(5,1)>="C" AND CHANL$(5,1)<"W" OR POS(CHANL$(1,4) ="4315",4)>0 THEN LET LINEDIT$="LINE EDIT" Program: MSUT50 Original version statement 5420: 5420 ON INT((POS(CHANL$(1,4)="43104311431243134314",4)+3/4) GOTO 5500,5430,5430,5030,5450,5470 New version of statement 5420: 5420 ON INT((POS(CHANL$(1,4)="431043114312431343144315",4)+3)/4) GOTO 5500,5430,5430,5030,5450,5470,5470 ORIGINATOR: C. Adkins MODIFIED by: Marilyn Cropsey SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB033 Pg001 FIB 00034 MAI COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 02/24/92 *** Accessing Business DATA under OpenBASIC *** ************PRELIMINARY FIELD BULLETIN************* Business Data on OpenBASIC S. Watanabe Bulletin #____ Program name and Logon Type: Informational Purpose: To inform the field that Business DATA operating under the OpenBASIC environment needs to be executed as RUN "BDATA" instead of RUN "ORIGIN". Use MAI.BDATA as the Account Name and ADMIN as the password. -------------------------------------------------------------------- At the BASIC prompt type: >RUN "BDATA" After the proprietary message is displayed, enter: ACCOUNT NAME: MAI.BDATA PASSWORD: ADMIN (nondisplayed) ORIGINATOR: S. Watanabe SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB034 Pg001 FIB 00035 MAI COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 10/14/92 *** Installation Instructions BUSINESS DATA on OpenBASIC [WPSF 728] *** TYPE: Problem PURPOSE: The initial release og the OpenBASIC Business Data installation instructions were incorrect. SYMPTOM: During the installation of the OpenBASIC Business Data module, no errors would occur. Once the product was installed, however, it would not operate correctly. SOLUTION: The attached document provides the correct installation instructions. The current version of the manuals contain these updated instructions. RELATED DOCUMENTATION: Please refer to the OpenBASIC Administration Manual, M0239 or the MAI Business DATA User Guide (for OpenBASIC), M0242 for more information on the Business DATA Module. INSTALLATION OF MAI BUSINESS DATA The following paragraphs provide instructions for the initial installation of MAI Business DATA and for installation of a new release of Business DATA. The following checklist provides some important issues you must consider before doing an initial installation of the MAI Business DATA software or before doing an upgrade of existing Business DATA software. o No one can be working with Business DATA when you install it. This insures a safe product installation without conflicts with active system users. o You must be logged onto the system as 'root'. This avoids security conflicts during the product installation. o You must make a full backup of your Business DATA programs and files before installing Business DATA. o The BDT product from the OpenBASIC tape should be installed and 'ob_install' executed as described earlier in this section of the manual. INITIAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS The following are the items you must have available when installing Business DATA for the first time: o Business DATA product tape. o Presentation Services must be installed. o Disk space allocation for: - BDT (Business DATA) : 8.16 MB - BTU (Business DATA Translation Utility) : 0.45 MB - Each new user : 1.01 MB - Each new project : 0.31 MB INITIAL INSTALLATION OF BUSINESS DATA SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB035 Pg001 Once OpenBASIC has been installed on your system, 'ob_install' executed and the Business DATA installation checklist has been satisfied, perform the following steps to complete the Business DATA installation: 1. Log-on to the system as 'root'. 2. Verify that Presentation Services has already been installed on the system. 3. Go into OpenBASIC with 256 pages of memory by executing the following command: /usr/ob/bin/basic s=256 4. Set your prefix by executing the following command: prefix "/usr/ob/bdata/r21b /usr/ob/PS/tools" 5. Run "UPDATE" from BASIC. During a new installation, this program renames several of the 2.1B data files, by requesting environmental information through the display of several prompts. Respond to these prompts based on your system configuration: A. ENTER THE DISK NAME FOR BDATA 2.1B(CR IF NONE): - Press RETURN if Business DATA is to be installed in the root partition. - Enter the partition name where you want Business DATA installed. B. ENTER THE DIRECTORY OF YOUR CURRENT BDATA SYSTEM INCLUDING DISK NAME, CR IF THIS IS A NEW INSTALLATION: - Press RETURN if this is a new, or initial, installation of Business DATA. - Enter the name of the directory that contains your current Business DATA system software. C. INSTALL STANDALONE ORIGIN UTILITIES IN SYSTEM DIRECTORY /usr/ob/bin CR TO PROCEED, MB-IV TO END: This copies the files contained in the runtime directory, '/usr/ob/bdata/r21b/rt/*' into the '/usr/ob/bin/rt/*' directory. For example, the file '/usr/ob/bdata/r21b/ENGxxx' would be copied into the file '/usr/ob/bin/rt/ENGxxx'. - Press RETURN to continue with the installation process. - Press CTL-IV (MB-IV) to abort the installation process. 6. This Step is optional. If you do not plan to use the language translation utilities, delete the '/usr/ob/bdata/r21b/language' directory. These utilities are used primarily by international sites to translate Business DATA from English into different languages. To delete this node, enter the following from command mode: cd /usr/ob/bdata/r21b/language rm* SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB035 Pg002 UPGRADING FROM ORIGIN 2.1A OR 2.1B If you have either ORIGIN 2.1A or ORIGIN 2.1B, you may use the information already entered with Business DATA by copying over the DATA files that are listed below: WARNING: IF ORIGIN IS INSTALLED ON AN MPX, SPX, OR GPX MACHINE, YOU NEED TO CONVERT THESE FILES WITH THE APPROPRIATE CONVERSION ROUTINE. o All the ORIGIN data dictionary files located under: .../data/IDD* where '*' is for anything following the IDD o Any ORIGIN project documentation files: .../xxxDCO where 'xxx' is the project code o Any SPx or GPx ORIGIN generated programs can be easily converted to OpenBASIC, but some MPx programs may require regeneration with Business DATA. ORIGINATOR: Kevin Liebl SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB035 Pg003 FIB 00036 MAI COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 09/28/93 *** Err 26 creating spreadsheets in OpenBASIC version of Bus Math *** Author: Marilynn Cropsey Subject: OpenBasic version of MAI Office Business Math Type: Problem Symptom: Error 26's creating new OR editing existing spreadsheets Solution: 1) The .profile file must be modified for your MAI Office user, to include '/usr/ob/bin' in the PATH. The PATH line should look like: PATH=:$PATH:/usr/ob/bin 2) The following 4 programs in /usr/ob/oms, must be modified: ROAA10: ------ REM out the following line numbers: 1010, 1020, 1210, 1220 Add the following lines of code: 1022 LET FL4$=K0$+"0",FL1$="rxx"+FID(0)+"0",CP$="obcp -f '"+FL4$+"' "+FL1$ 1024 SYSTEM CP$ 1222 LET FL4$=K0$+"1",FL2$="rxx"+FID(0)+"1",CP$="obcp -f '"+FL4$+"' "+FL2$ 1224 SYSTEM CP$ ROAY92: ------ REM out the following line numbers: 530, 570, 580 Add the following lines of code: 0575 LET FL4$="rxx"+FID(0)+"3",FL2$="rxx"+FID(0)+"1",CP$="obcp -f "+FL2$+ " "+FL4$ 0577 SYSTEM CP$ ROAU00 ------ REM out the following line numbers: 4130, 4140, 4150, 4160 Add the following lines of code: 4165 LET FL1$=K0$+STR(Z9),FL2$="rxx"+FID(0)+STR(Z9),CP$="obcp -f '"+FL1$+ "' "+FL2$ 4166 SYSTEM CP$ ROAK10 ------ Change the following lines of code to: 0402 ...C9$="obcp -f rxx"+FID(0). ------- 0403 SYSTEM C9$ ORIGINATOR: Marilynn Cropsey SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB036 Pg001 SOFTWARE-BASIC FOUR-MAI OFFICE----------------------FIB036 Pg002